Home

User`s Manual

Contents

1. Table 15 10 Table 5 4 dB commands Commands Description Def DCV dB commands UNITs VOLTage DC lt name gt Select DCV measurements lt name gt V or V DB UNITs VOLTage DC DB REFerence lt n gt Set reference in volts lt n gt le 7 to 1000 1 ACV dB commands UNITs VOLTage AC lt name gt Select ACV measurements lt name gt V or V DB UNITs VOLTage AC DB REFerence lt n gt Set reference in volts lt n gt le 7 to 1000 1 Channel list parameter lt clist gt SCH where S Mainframe slot number 1 or 2 CH Switching module channel number must be 2 digits Examples 101 Slot 1 Channel 1 101 203 Slot 1 Channel 1 and Slot 2 Channel 3 101 110 Slot 1 Channels 1 through 10 The lt clist gt parameter is used to configure one or more channels for a scan Each channel in the lt clist gt must be set to the function specified by the rel reference command If not a conflict error 221 will occur For example UNITs VOLTage AC dB 101 is only valid if scan channel 101 is set for the ACV function Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Rel Math Ratio Channel Average dB 5 23 Programming examples dB Example 1 The following command sequence configures the Model 2700 to perform DCV dB measurements A 1V input will be measured as OdB NOTE The following example can be run from the KE2700 Instrument Driver using the example named VoltdB1 in
2. 1 8 Getting Started Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Table 1 1 Model 77xx series switching modules Model 7700 Model 7701 Model 7702 Model 7703 2 pole Operation 20 channels 32 channels 40 channels 32 channels 4 pole Operation 10 channel pairs 16 channel pairs 20 channel pairs 16 channel pairs 1 pole Operation N A N A N A N A Measure Volts 300V maximum 150V maximum 300V maximum 300V maximum Measure Amps Ch 21 amp 22 3A Max No Ch 41 amp 42 3A Max No Measure Ohms 2 4 wire 2 4 wire 2 4 wire 2 4 wire Thermocouple Yes No No No Cold Junction Relay Type Latching electro Latching electro Latching electro Non latching reed mechanical mechanical mechanical Connector type Oversized screw 1 female DB 50 Oversized screw 2 female DB 50s terminals 1 female DB 25 terminals Configuration Multiplexer Multiplexer Multiplexer Multiplexer Unique features All DMM functions All DMM functions All DMM functions All DMM functions except amps except amps Model 7705 Model 7706 Model 7707 Model 7708 2 pole Operation N A 20 channels 10 channels 40 channels 4 pole Operation N A 10 channel pairs 5 channel pairs 20 channel pairs 1 pole Operation 40 channels N A N A N A Measure Volts 300V maximum 300V maximum 300V 300V maximum Measure Amps No No No No Measure Ohms No 2 4 wire 2 4 wire 2 4 wire Thermocouple No Yes No Yes Cold Junction Relay Type Latching electro Latching electro L
3. 15 16 SCPI Reference Tables Table 15 5 continued SENSe command summary Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual lt clist gt TRANsducer lt clist gt FRTD or THERmistor Query transducer type Default Command Description parameter Ref SCPI SENSe 1 TEMPerature Path to configure temperature Sec3 Vv APERture lt n gt lt clist gt Set integration rate in seconds 60Hz Note 2 Sec 4 1 67e 4 to 1 50Hz 2e 4 to 1 APERture lt clist gt Query aperture integration rate NPLCycles lt n gt lt clist gt Set integration rate in line cycles 60Hz 5 0 Sec 4 0 01 to 60 50Hz 0 01 to 50 NPLCycles Query line cycle integration rate DIGits lt p gt lt clist gt Specify measurement resolution 4 to 7 6 Sec 4 DIGits lt clist gt Query resolution REFerence lt n gt lt clist gt Specify reference in C 328 to 3310 0 Sec 5 Jv STATe lt b gt lt clist gt Enable or disable reference OFF Jv STATe lt clist gt Query state of reference Jv ACQuire lt clist gt Use input signal as reference REFerence lt clist gt Query reference value y AVERage Path to configure and control filter Sec 4 TCONtrol lt name gt Select filter type MOVing or REPeat Note 3 TCONtrol Query filter type WINDow lt NRf gt Set filter window in of range 0 1 0 to 10 WINDow Query filter window COUNt lt n gt lt clis
4. FRESistance CONTinuity FREQuency or PERiod Note DC is optional DCV function SENSe 1 Optional root command VOLTage DC IDIVider lt b gt Enable disable DCV input divider OFF lt b gt ON or OFF Q4 function SENSe 1 Optional root command FRESistance OCOMpensated lt b gt Enable disable offset compensated ohms OFF b lt clist gt SYSTem Root command for SYSTem subsystem FRESistance TYPEx lt name gt Select 4 wire ohms mode NORM lt name gt NORMal or CSIDe x Slot number 1 or 2 3 50 Basic DMM Operation Table 3 7 continued Basic measurement commands Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Commands Description Default Ref TEMP function SENSe 1 Optional root command TEMPerature TRANsducer lt name gt Select temperature transducer lt name gt TC lt clist gt TCouple FRTD or THERmistor TEMPerature TCouple TYPE lt type gt Select T C type lt type gt J K T E K lt clist gt R S B or N TEMPerature TCouple ODETect lt b gt Enable disable open thermocouple OFF detector lt b gt ON or OFF TEMPerature TCouple RJUNction Select reference junction lt name gt Note 3 c RSELect lt name gt lt clist gt SIMulated INTernal or EXTernal TEMPerature TCouple RJUNction Set the simulated reference temperature 23 C d SIMulated lt n gt lt clist gt lt n gt 0 to 6
5. Start measure store process Initialize quarter buffer counter Wait for GPIB SRQ line to go true Clear rqs mss bit in status byte register Clear all event registers Increment buffer counter Branch when buffer full Branch when buffer full Branch when buffer full Branch when 1750th reading stored Display buffer full message Display 4 full message SINCLUDE ieeeqb bi CLS CONST addr 16 1 Init GPIB 1 CALL initialize 21 0 CALL transmit unt unl listen STRS addr CALL send addr rst status CALL send addr trac cle status CALL send addr trig coun inf status CALL send addr trac poin 2000 status CALL send addr trac not 1750 status CALL send addr trac feed cont next status CALL send addr stat pres status CALL send addr cls status CALL send addr stat meas enab 13120 status CALL send addr ese 0 status CALL send addr sre 1 status CALL send addr init status N 0 WaitSRQ WHILE srq 0 WEND CALL spoll addr poll status CALL send addr cls status N Ne 1 IF N 1 THEN GOTO QtrFull IF N 2 THEN GOTO HalfFull IF N 3 THEN GOTO ThreeQtrFull IF N 4 THEN GOTO 1750thReading PRINT BUFFER FULL END QtrFull PRINT Buffer Full GOTO WaitSRQ HalfFull PRINT Buffer Full GOTO WaitSRQ ThreeQtrFull PRINT Buffer Full GOTO WaitSRQ 1750thReading PRINT 1750th reading stored GOT
6. C 3 C 4 Status and Error Messages Table C 1 continued Status and error messages Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Number Description Event 101 Operation complete SE 121 Device calibrating SE 122 Device settling SE 123 Device ranging SE 124 Device sweeping SE 125 Device measuring SE 126 Device calculating SE 161 Program running SE 171 Waiting in trigger layer SE 174 Re entering the idle layer SE 180 Filter settled SE 301 Reading overflow SE 302 Low limit 1 event SE 303 High limit 1 event SE 304 Low limit 2 event SE 305 High limit 2 event SE 306 Reading available SE 307 Buffer user selectable event SE 308 Buffer available SE 309 Buffer half full SE 310 Buffer full SE 311 Buffer overflow SE 312 Buffer one quarter full SE 313 Buffer three quarters full SE 314 Master limit event SE Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Table C 1 continued Status and error messages Status and Error Messages Number Description Event Calibration messages 400 10vdc zero error EE 401 100vde zero error EE 402 10vdc full scale error EE 403 10vde full scale error EE 404 100vdc full scale error EE 405 100vdc full scale error EE 406 1k 2 w zero error EE 407 10k 2 w zero error EE 408 100k 2 w zero error EE 409 10M 2 w zero error EE 410 10M 2 w full scale error EE 411 10M 2 w open error EE 412 1k 4 w zero error EE 413 10k 4 w z
7. Press SHIFT and then SETUP Use the A and W keys to display TSTAMP Press the key to place the cursor on the presently selected timestamp REL or RTCL Use the A or W key to display the relative REL or real time clock RTCL and press ENTER 6 6 Buffer Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Storing readings Perform the following steps to store readings 1 Set up the Model 2700 for the desired configuration 2 Press the STORE key 3 Use the lt gt A and W keys to specify the number of readings to store in the buffer 2 to 55000 Pressing the AUTO key sets the readings count to 000000 NOTE With buffer auto clear disabled the only valid buffer size values are 55000 and 000000 which clears the buffer Any other buffer size value is ignored 4 Press ENTER The asterisk annunciator turns on to indicate the buffer is enabled It will turn off when the storage is finished 5 The buffer can be stopped at any time by pressing EXIT NOTE Stored readings are not lost when the instrument is turned off To clear the buffer set the reading value to 000000 and press ENTER For remote programming the continuous storage mode can be selected After the buffer fills operation wraps around to the beginning of the buffer location 0 and starts to overwrite old reading data see TRACe FEED CONTrol command in Table 6 1 Recalling readings Readings stored in the buffer are displayed by p
8. ROUTe SCAN lt clist gt TRIGger COUNt lt NRf gt Define scan list Specify number of scans 1 to 11000 or INFinity Specify number of channels to scan 1 to 11000 Enable INT or disable NONE scan SAMPle COUNt lt NRf gt ROUTe SCAN LSELect lt name gt Any valid switching module channel can be included in the scan list Make sure to list them from the lowest numbered channel to the highest For example to scan channels 1 through 8 of a Model 7700 installed in slot 1 send the following command to define the scan list ROUTe SCAN 101 108 Exercise 3 Simple scanning The scanning example in Table 1 8 assumes a Model 7700 installed in slot 1 of the mainframe The scan will use default settings DCV to scan eight channels and store the readings in the buffer Table 1 8 Exercise 3 Simple scanning Front panel operation Command sequence 1 For front panel operation proceed to step 2 For remote programming clear the buffer TRAC CLE 2 Restore defaults Press SHIFT gt press SETUP gt select RESTORE FACT RST 3 Configure scan Press SHIFT gt press CONFIG gt select INT SIMPLE gt set MIN ROUT SCAN 101 108 CHAN101 gt set MAX CHAN 108 gt select TIMER NO gt set SAMP COUN 8 RDG CT 000008 4 Enable and start scan ROUT SCAN LSEL INT Press STEP INIT 5 Halt disable scanner Press SHIFT gt press HALT ROUT SCAN LSEL NONE 6 Recall the eight stored readi
9. The instrument goes into the idle state measurements halted after the last scan channel is measured For front panel operation the instrument stays in idle until the next scan is started For bus operation the instrument will not stay in idle unless continuous initiation is disabled There are two commands to disable continuous initiation INITitate CONTinuous OFF Disable continuous initiation RST Restore RST defaults The instrument will remain in idle until it receives an initiate command Typical commands to initiate one scan cycle include INITiate Initiate one scan cycle READ Initiate one scan cycle and request sample readings More information on using these commands is provided by Reference c that follows Table 7 1 Control sources For bus operation there are two additional control sources Bus and Manual For the Bus control source scan operation is controlled by bus triggers i e TRG or by using the TRIG key For the Manual control source event detection is controlled solely by the TRIG key Note that the instrument has to be in local in order to use the TRIG key The LOCAL key takes the instrument out of remote Trigger and sample counters For front panel SCAN operation the number of channels in the scan list and the programmed reading count automatically sets the trigger and sample counters For remote operation these two counters are set by the TRIGGer COUNt and SAMPle COUNt commands NOTE
10. c ROUTe OPEN ALL This command functions the same as the front panel OPEN key ALL menu option It simply opens all channels including non measurement channels in the mainframe d ROUTe MULTiple CLOSe This query command returns a lt clist gt of all closed channels including non measurement channels and paired channels for 4 wire functions e ROUTe MULTiple CLOSe STATe lt clist gt This query returns a 0 open or 1 closed for every channel specified in the lt clist gt It is valid for both measurement and non measurement channels For example assume channel 125 is closed and you use this command to query channels 101 104 and 125 lt clist gt 101 104 125 The response message returns 0 0 1 to indicate that channels 101 and 104 are open and channel 125 is closed Remote programming example multiple channel operation The following example assumes a Model 7700 installed in slot 1 This command sequence connects channel 101 to channel 111 through channel 123 Note that these two closed channels will be internally isolated from the DMM since the backplane isolation channels 124 and 125 will be open NOTE The following example can be run from the KE2700 Instrument Driver using the example named CloseChannels in Table H 1 of Appendix H ROUT OPEN ALL Open all channels ROUT MULT CLOS 101 111 123 Close channels 101 111 and 123 When finished with multiple channel operation
11. 1 0 005774615 1e 4 5 774615e 7 The resistance of the RTD at 100 C R4 0 is then calculated as follows Rioo R 1 AT BT 100 1 0 003907746 100 5 774615e 7 1007 100 1 0 3907746 0 005774615 100 1 385 138 50 F 10 Temperature Equations Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Example 2 Calculate the resistance of a D100 RTD at 100 C T The following Rg Q at 0 C alpha beta and delta values are used for the D100 RTD Table F 10 T 100 C Ro Q at 0 C 100Q alpha 0 003920 beta 0 10630 delta 1 49710 Using the above alpha and delta values A and B are calculated as follows A 0 003920 1 1 49710 100 0 003920 1 014971 0 003978686 B 1 0 003920 1 49710 1e 4 1 0 005868632 1e 4 5 868632e 7 C 1 0 003920 0 10630 1e 8 1 0 000416696 1e 8 4 16696e 12 Il The resistance of the RTD at 100 C R4 is then calculated as follows Rioo R 1 AT BT CT T 100 100 1 0 003978686 100 5 868632e 7 1002 4 16696e 12 100 100 100 100 1 0 3978686 0 005868632 0 000833392 100 0 5954294 59 54294Q G IEEE 488 Bus Overview G 2 IEEE 488 Bus Overview Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Introduction The IEEE 488 bus is a communication system between two or more electronic devices A device can be either an instrument or a compu
12. 101 110 Set reference to 100 CALC STAT ON 101 110 Enable math calculation 5 16 Rel Math Ratio Channel Average dB Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Ratio and channel average With a switching module installed in the Model 2700 the ratio or average of two channels can be calculated and displayed The ratio calculation can be done on the DCV function and the channel average calculation can be done on the DCV and TEMP thermocouples only functions Ratio and channel average are calculated as follows Chan A Ratio Chan B Channel Average cerat cng where Chan A is the selected closed channel Chan B is the paired channel for the installed switching module Ratio and Channel Average is the displayed result of the respective calculation Paired channels are used for ratio and channel average For example the Model 7700 switching module has 20 channels that can use ratio and channel average The primary channels 1 through 10 are linked to the paired channels 11 through 20 Channel 1 is paired to channel 11 channel 2 is paired to channel 12 and so on When ratio or channel average is enabled the Model 2700 measures the closed primary channel It then opens the primary channel and closes and measures the paired channel Ratio or channel average is then calculated from the two readings and displayed If the Model 2700 is configured for continuous measurements the two channel scan will con
13. B Table B 1 C Table C 1 E Table E 1 F Table F 1 Table F 2 Table F 3 Table F 4 Table F 5 Table F 6 Table F 7 Table F 8 Table F 9 Table F 10 G Table G 1 Table G 2 Table G 3 Table G 4 Table G 5 Table G 6 SCPI Reference Tables CALCulate command SUMMATY sssssesseseesseeseeseessessesseessese 15 3 DISPlay command summary 2 0 0 cee eeeeseeseeereeseeeeeereeeeeees 15 6 FORMat command SUMMALY csceeesceeseeeeeeeeneeeteeeeeeesees 15 6 ROUTe command SuUMMALY cc eeeeeseeeseeseceneeeseeeeneeeeees 15 7 SENSe command summary ccceseeseceteeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeees 15 9 STATus command summary ceeeesceeseeeeseeeeeeeeseeeneeeeee 15 20 SYSTem command summMary eceecceseeeeseeeseeeeseeeeeeeee 15 21 TRACe command summary 0 ceeeeceseeeeseeeteeeeteeeeeeeeaeees 15 24 Trigger command SUMMALY eee eeeeceeseeeeeereceeeeneeeseeees 15 25 UNIT command summa ty ceceeeceeseeeeseeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeaeens 15 26 Model 7700 Connection Guide Connection log Model 7700 ceeeseesseseeseseeceeeseeeeeeees B 11 Status and Error Messages Status and error Messages sessessseseessereseersresresesrersssssesset C 2 Measurement Considerations Material thermoelectric coefficients cc cceecccsccceceeeeeeeeseeees E 2 Temperature Equations Type B inverse function polynomial ceeeeseeeeneeeseeeeeeee F 2 Type E inverse function polynomial eee
14. CH Switching module channel number must be 2 digits 101 203 Slot 1 Channel 1 and Slot 2 Channel 3 101 110 Slot 1 Channels 1 through 10 Note Only one channel can be specified in the lt clist gt for the MEASure command Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual SCPI Signal Oriented Commands 13 3 NOTES The CONFigure lt function gt and MEASure lt function gt commands can be sent without any of the optional parameters lt rang gt lt res gt lt clist gt For details see the Description for the CONFigure and MEASure commands When using the lt clist gt parameter it is interpreted as the last parameter Any parameter after lt clist gt will generate error 102 syntax error If only one parameter is used and it is not a lt clist gt it is interpreted as the range parameter lt rang gt If two parameters are used and the second one is not a lt clist gt the first parameter is the range parameter lt rang gt and the second is the resolution parameter lt res gt The CONFiguration and MEASure commands for the TEMPerature and CONTinuity functions do not use the lt rang gt and lt res gt parameters The command is ignored and causes error 108 parameter not allowed The CONFigure and MEASure commands cannot be used while scanning The command is ignored and causes error 221 settings conflict 13 4 SCPI Signal Oriented Commands Model 2700 Multimeter Switch Sy
15. Error queue The Error Queue holds error and status messages When an error or status event occurs a message that defines the error status is placed in the Error Queue When a message is placed in the Error Queue the Error Available EAV bit in the Status Byte Register is set An error status message is cleared from the Error Queue when it is read The Error Queue is considered cleared when it is empty An empty Error Queue clears the EAV bit in the Status Byte Register The Error Queue holds up to 10 error status messages The commands to read the Error Queue are listed in Table 11 6 When you read a message in the Error Queue the oldest message is read and then removed from the queue If the queue becomes full the message 350 Queue Overflow will occupy the last memory location On power up the Error Queue is empty When empty the message 0 No Error is placed in the queue Messages in the Error Queue are preceded by a code number Negative numbers are used for SCPI defined messages and positive numbers are used for Keithley defined messages The messages are listed in the appendices at the end of this manual Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Status Structure 11 23 On power up all error messages are enabled and will go into the Error Queue as they occur Status messages are not enabled and will not go into the queue As listed in Table 11 6 there are commands to enable and or disa
16. Logical AND DDE Device Dependent Error OR Logical OR Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Status Structure 11 13 Bit B1 Not used Bit B2 Query Error QYE Set bit indicates that you attempted to read data from an empty Output Queue Bit B3 Device Dependent Error DDE Set bit indicates that an instrument operation did not execute properly Some of the errors specific to the Model 2700 that will set this bit include the following e Error 516 Battery backed RAM error Data stored in RAM has been lost Replace the battery if frequent failures occur Error 517 Cannot resume scan Due to a card ID change auto scan has disabled The scan will not resume after a power interruption For details see Scan configuration Auto scan page 7 21 e Error 520 Saved setup scancard mismatch Settings for a user setup or power on setup do not match the switching module types presently installed For details see Defaults and user setups page 1 20 Error 523 Card hardware error Communication with the microprocessor on a switching module card has been lost Error 524 Unsupported card detected The Model 2700 has detected an installed Model 77XX switching module that is not supported by the current version of firmware Bit B4 Execution Error EXE Set bit indicates that the Model 2700 detected an error while trying to execute a command Bit B5 Command Err
17. NPLCycles lt clist gt Query line cycle integration rate v RANGe Path to set measurement range Sec4 Vv UPPer lt n gt lt clist gt Select range 0 to 120e6 120e6 y UPPer lt clist gt Query range y AUTO lt b gt lt clist gt Enable or disable auto range ON Jv AUTO lt clist gt Query state of auto range Jv DIGits lt p gt lt clist gt Specify measurement resolution 4 to 7 7 Sec 4 DIGits lt clist gt Query resolution REFerence lt n gt lt clist gt Specify reference 0 to 120e6 0 Sec 5 Jv STATe lt b gt lt clist gt Enable or disable reference OFF Jv STATe lt clist gt Query state of reference Jv ACQuire lt clist gt Use input signal as reference REFerence lt clist gt Query reference value y AVERage Path to configure and control filter Sec 4 TCONtrol lt name gt Select filter type MOVing or REPeat Note 3 TCONtrol Query filter type WINDow lt NRf gt Set filter window in of range 0 1 0 to 10 WINDow Query filter window COUNt lt n gt lt clist gt Specify filter count 1 to 100 10 COUNt lt clist gt Query filter count STATe lt b gt lt clist gt Enable or disable filter Note 4 STATe lt clist gt Query state of digital filter OCOMpensated lt b gt Enable or disable offset compensation OFF Sec 3 lt clist gt OCOMpensated lt clist gt Query state of offset compensation
18. RQ lasica gica Power On PON OR STB SRE SRE Master Summary Status MSS MSB Measurement Summary Bit EAV Error Available QSB Questionable Summary Bit MAV Message Available ESB Event Summary Bit zClolelulol lo 3 ly i GERGReeMesceccm als Al Z Aways cena VS OSB Operation Summary Bit Note RQS bit is in serial poll byte Measurement Measurement Measurement MSS bit is in STB response Condition Event Event Enable Operation Operation Operation Register Register Register Condition Event Event Enable Reading Overflow oe ROF Register Register Register Low Limit 1 Event r o High Limit 1 Event HL 1 Low Limit 2 Event High Limit 2 Event Reading Available Buffer Notify Buffer Available Buffer Half Full Buffer Full Buffer Overflow Hardware Limit Event Buffer Quarter Full Buffer Three Quarter Full Master Limit Always Zero Measuring Waiting for Trigger Filter Settled Idle State PePO gt R gt gt gt S OPE Always Zero Logical 11 3 RQS MSS Request for Service Master Summary Status 11 4 Status Structure Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Clearing registers and queues When the Model 2700 is turned on the bits of all registers in the status structure are cleared reset to 0 and the two queues are empty Commands to reset the event
19. lt clist gt RECiprocal FORMat lt clist gt Query math format y KMATh Path to configure math calculations MMFactor lt NRf gt Set m factor for mx b 4294967295 to 1 lt clist gt 4294967295 MA1Factor lt NRf gt Set m factor for mx b 4294967295 to 1 lt clist gt 4294967295 MMFactor Query m factor lt clist gt MA lFactor Query m factor lt clist gt MBFactor lt NRf gt Set b factor for mx b 4294967295 to 0 lt clist gt 4294967295 7 MAOFactor lt NRf gt Set b factor for mx b 4294967295 to 0 lt clist gt 4294967295 7 MBFactor lt clist gt Query b factor MAOFactor Query b factor lt clist gt MUNits lt char gt Specify units for mx b reading x MUNits Query mx b units PERCent lt NRf gt Set target value for PERCent calculation 1 lt clist gt 4294967295 to 4294967295 ACQuire Use input signal as target value PERCent lt clist gt Query percent STATe lt b gt lt clist gt Enable or disable kmath calculation Note 4 Jv STATe lt clist gt Query state of kmath function y DATA Read result of kmath calculation y CALCulate2 Subsystem to control CALC 2 Sec 6 v FORMat lt name gt Select math format MEAN SDEViation NONE J MAXimum MINimum PKPK or NONE FORMat Query math format y STATe lt b gt Enable or disable calculation Note 4 y STATe Query state
20. that immediately follows a semicolon it resets back to the root level The path pointer can only move down It cannot be moved up a level Executing a command at a higher level requires that you start over at the root command Using common and SCPI commands in the same message Both common commands and SCPI commands can be used in the same message as long as they are separated by semicolons A common command can be executed at any com mand level and will not affect the path pointer Example stat oper enab lt NRf gt ESE lt NRf gt Program message terminator PMT Each program message must be terminated with an LF line feed EOI end or identify or an LF EOI The bus will hang if your computer does not provide this termination The following example shows how a multiple command program message must be terminated outp on lt PMT gt Command execution rules e Commands execute in the order that they are presented in the program message An invalid command generates an error and of course is not executed Valid commands that precede an invalid command in a multiple command program message are executed Valid commands that follow an invalid command in a multiple command program message are ignored Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Remote Operations 10 17 Response messages A response message is the message sent by the instrument to the computer in response to a query command
21. 8 12 Triggering Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Press EX TRIG to place the Model 2700 in the external trigger mode Press STEP on the Model 7002 to take it out of idle and start the scan The scanner s output pulse triggers the Model 2700 to take a reading store it and send a trigger pulse The following explanation on operation is referenced to the operation model shown in Figure 8 8 Figure 8 8 Operation model for triggering example Model 7002 G Press STEP to start scan Model 2700 Press EX TRIG Wait for Wait for Trigger Link gt 7 Trigger Link Trigger Trigger Scan Channel Make Measurement Output Trigger Output Trigger UW Trigger Scanned 400 Channels 2 Pressing EX TRIG on the Model 2700 places it at point A in the flowchart where it is waiting for an external trigger Pressing STEP on the Model 7002 takes it out of the idle state and places operation at point B in the flow chart For the first pass through the model the scanner does not wait at point B for a trigger Instead it closes the first channel Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Triggering 8 13 D After the relay settles the Model 7002 outputs a Channel Ready pulse Since the instrument is programmed to scan 400 channels operation loops back up to point B where it waits for an input trigger E amp F Model 2700 operation is at point A waiting for a trigger Th
22. Figure 2 11 CARD menu tree SLOT1 77XX SLOT2 77XX SLOT1 77XX SLOT2 77XX 77XX Model number of installed switching module Channels Channels 2 30 Close Open Switching Module Channels Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual SLOTX 77XX Use to configure the switching module in Slot X where X 1 or 2 If configuration is not necessary the instrument will exit from the menu when ENTER is pressed NOTE For switching modules that require configuration refer to packing list that was shipped with each module CARD VIEW This menu item is used to view all analog input channels that are presently closed These include both measurement and non measurement channels The channels are built into a string that scrolls the display Four dots identify the end of the string Model 7700 example Slot 1 Assume the Q4 function is selected and system channel 101 is closed The following string will scroll across the display 101 111 123 124 125 Channels 101 and 111 are the paired channels for the 4 wire measurement Channel 123 is the 4 pole relay setting and channels 124 and 125 connect input and sense to the DMM of the Model 2700 Figure 2 2 NOTE Some switching modules have analog outputs digital inputs and or digital outputs The values for these channels are also displayed from the VIEW menu item For details on a particular switching module refer to the packing list that was shipped with each modul
23. MEAN SDEViation PKPK NONE After the selected buffer statistic is enabled IMMediate or IMMediate must be sent to calculate the statistic from the data in the buffer The CALCulate2 DATA command does not initiate a calculate operation It simply returns the result of the last calculation If new data is stored in the buffer you must again send IMMediate or IMMediate to recalculate the statistic from that new data NOTE Ifthe standard deviation calculation is being performed on a buffer that has more than 1000 readings the CALCULATING message will flash to indicate that the Model 2700 is busy While busy with the calculation remote programming commands will not execute NOTE Use OPC or OPC with CALC2 IMM and CALC2 IMM when performing the standard deviation calculation on a large buffer See Section 12 for details on OPC and OPC Programming example The following command sequence stores 20 readings in the buffer and then calculates the mean for those readings Note that after sending a query command the Model 2700 must be addressed to talk NOTE The following example can be run from the KE2700 Instrument Driver using the example named BufStats in Table H 1 of Appendix H Store readings TRAC CLE AUTO ON Enable buffer auto clear TRAC POIN 20 Set buffer size to 20 TRAC FEED SENS Select raw readings for storage TRAC FEED CONT NEXT Start storage process TRAC DATA Request all stored readi
24. Mia Moving A1 A1 A1 A2 A3 A4 Bi Bi Bi B2 B3 Window 1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A2 A3 Bi Bi B1 B1 B2 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A2 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 Rdg Rdg Rdg Rdg Rdg Rdg Rdg Rdg Rdg Rdg Rdg 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Filter configuration A1 A2 Ag A4 A5 Agl B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 _ A A1 A1 A2 A3 A4 A6 A6 Bi B2 B3 B5 Dier e peating A1 A1 A1 A2 A3 Ael Ae A6 Bi B2 B5 Window None A1 A1 A1 A1 A2 Ag Ag As Ag Bi Bs Ai A1 A1 A1 A1 A6 A6 A6 A6 A6 B5 Rdg Rdg 1 2 Filter configuration A1 A2 Ag A4 A5 Ag Bi B2 B3 B4 B5 Ai Ai A2 A3 A4 A6 Bi Bi Ba B3 B4 Biia oe peating Ai A1 Ai A2 A3 A6 Bi Bi Bi B2 B3 Window Z1 A1 A1 A1 Ai A2 Asl Bi Bi Bi Bi B2 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 Ag Bi Bi Bi Bi Bi Rdg Rdg 4 18 Range Digits Rate Bandwidth and Filter Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Filter control and configuration The FILTER key toggles the state of the Filter When the Filter is enabled the FILT annunciator is on The FILT annunciator will flash when the filter is not settled When disabled the FILT annunciator is off The filter can be configured while it is enabled or disabled The filter is configured from the filter configuration menu Figure 4 4 Perform the following steps to configure the filter 1 2 3 Select the desired function Press SHIFT and then TYPE The present WINDOW setting will be displayed Use the RANGE A or key to display the desired window setting 0 01 0 1 1 10 or NONE and press ENTER Use the lt
25. Model 7702 the simulated SIM reference junction will instead be used and the ERR annunciator will turn on Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Basic DMM Operation 3 41 Table 3 3 Thermocouple temperature measurement configuration Step Menu structure Description 1 UNITS C F or K Select temperature measurement units C F or K 2 SENS TCOUPLE Select the thermocouple transducer 3 TYPE J K T E R S B or N Select thermocouple type 4 JUNC SIM INT or EXT Select the SIMulated INTernal or EXTernal reference junction SIM 000 C to 065 C For the SIMulated reference junction set the reference junction 273K to 338K or temperature The displayed units depend on the present UNITS 032 F to 149 F setting 5 OPEN DET Y or N Enable Y or disable N the open thermocouple detector When using multiple channel operation ROUT MULT command to connect a switching module input channel to the DMM the SIMulated reference junction will be used if the INTernal or EXTernal reference junction is selected Thermistor temperature measurement configuration The steps to configure thermistor measurements are provided in Table 3 4 After pressing SHIFT and then SENSOR the menu starts at step 1 to select measurement units Each time you press ENTER to make a selection the menu will automatically go to the next selection After pressing ENTER for the last step the instrument will return
26. RCL 12 6 RST 12 7 SAV 12 6 SRE 11 9 SRE 11 9 STB 11 9 TRG 12 7 TST 12 7 WAI 12 8 Common errors 3 11 Connections 2 wire system channel 2 7 4 wire RTDs 3 39 4 wire system channel 2 8 Continuity testing 3 47 Current measurements 3 17 Frequency and period measurements 3 45 GPIB 10 5 Resistance measurements 3 20 RS 232 10 20 Temperature measurements 3 36 Thermistor 3 39 Thermocouple connections 3 36 Trigger link 8 11 Voltage measurements 3 8 Connectors DIGITAL I O 1 14 TEEE 488 1 14 10 5 RS 232 interface 1 14 10 20 TRIG LINK 1 14 Contact information 1 2 Continuity connections 3 47 Continuity testing 3 47 Connections 3 47 Front panel input 3 47 Model 7700 switching module 3 47 Procedure 3 48 Control sources 7 7 External trigger 7 8 Immediate 7 8 Timer 7 8 Crest factor 3 12 Current measurements DCI and ACI 3 17 AMPS fuse replacement front panel AMPS input 3 19 Amps measurement procedure 3 18 Connections 3 17 Front panel inputs 3 17 Model 7700 switching module 3 18 CVI C examples H 2 Data flow D 7 dB 5 21 Commands 5 22 Configuration 5 21 Programming examples 5 23 Remote programming 5 22 Scanning 5 21 DCI and ACI connections Using front panel inputs 3 17 Using Model 7700 switching module 3 18 DCV and ACV connections Using front panel inputs 3 9 Using Model 7700 switching module 3 10 DCV input divider 10 3 Default settings 1 20 1 22 Delay 7 8 8 4 Auto 7 8 Auto delay settings 8 4 Man
27. Use Case 2 40 channel scan using 7708 module e 30 channels DCV 15 on 100mV range 15 on 10V range e 9 channels ACV 1V range e channel 4 wire RTD temperature e Measurement speed rate 1 plc Filter Disabled no filtering e Buffer Store 160 reading strings Buffer elements include reading only Triggering Timer scan 40 channels every one minute Data retrieval SRQ when buffer 4 12 3 4 and full Advance3 None Use Case 3 Two scans using 7708 module e 40 channel DCV 1V range scan e 20 channel Q4 scan e Models 2700 and 2701 100Q range e Model 2750 10Q range dry circuit ohms enabled e Measurement speed rate 0 1 plc e DCV input divider Enabled LOMQ input impedance e Filter Disabled no filtering e Buffer Store 40 DCV reading strings 20 Q4 reading strings Buffer elements include reading only e Limits DCV scan Limit 1 all channels 20mV Master Latch enabled e Triggering Bus control source e Data retrieval SRQ if limit fails H 4 KE2700 Instrument Driver Examples Table H 1 continued Visual Basic and CVI C examples Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Name Manual Reference Brief Description Advance4 None Use Case 4 Two scans using 7708 module e 40 channel DCV scan 1V range Configuration saved in User Setup 1 e 20 channel Q4 scan Config
28. able setup memory If a recall error occurs the setup memory defaults to the SYSTem PRESet values NOTE For RS 232 operation OPC or OPC should be used with SAV and RCL which are slow responding commands Details on OPC and OPC are provided in this section NOTE The following example can be run from the KE2700 Instrument Driver using the example named SrSetup in Table H 1 of Appendix H Programming example SAV 2 Save present setup in memory location 2 RST Return 2700 to RST defaults RCL 2 Return recall 2700 to setup stored in memo location 2 Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Common Commands 12 7 F RST reset Return Model 2700 to RST defaults When the RST command is sent Model 2700 performs the following operations 1 Returns Model 2700 to the RST default conditions see Default column of SCPI tables 2 Cancels all pending commands 3 Cancels response to any previously received OPC and OPC commands NOTE For RS 232 operation and in some cases GBIB operation OPC or OPC should be used with RST which is a slow responding command Details on OPC and OPC are provided in this section G TRG trigger Send bus trigger to Model 2700 Use the TRG command to issue a GPIB trigger to Model 2700 It has the same effect as a group execute trigger GET Use the TRG command as an event to control operation Model 2700 reacts to this trigger if BUS is the program
29. eesceeseeeseeeteeeteeeteeeees 3 11 AC voltage measurements and crest factor 0 0 3 12 Low level considerations 200 0 eee eeesceeseeeeeereeeeeeseeneeeeee 3 15 Current measurements DCI and ACI c cceeesseessseeeesteeees 3 17 COMMECHONS lt 2 c6s secssedecosssidessterescasseossesedeccedsssesvbesteveotseesens 3 17 Amps measurement procedure oc eeeeseeseeseceeeeseeeeeeees 3 18 AMPS fuse replacement front panel AMPS input 3 19 Resistance measurements Q2 and Q4 wo ecseesseeeseeeseeeees 3 20 COMME CHONG esre aiee ei ea iE Eaa EE Ea 3 20 Standard resistance measurements esseseeeeerereerereereee 3 23 Offset compensated ohms ssssessssessssesresesrrstrsrsrrsrerrsreseees 3 24 Measurement methods sessesesesseeeesesresrsrrerrersrrsrerrsresreses 3 25 4 wire common side CSID ohms measurements 7701 module snis a 3 32 Temperature measurements seeeeeseesesterreresreresreresreeersrsrrsrere 3 33 WhermOcouples s cic tsecssecatiststtedseteds tact cenibeceatvseeedbveeanebes 3 33 THermMiStOTS lt sicscchssesvisastecesachsediedeseedsnaidaageacnsscoaueipessanensazac s 3 35 AW REDS oriee eoii ri ENE ie 3 36 CONMMCCHIONS cissesesasesscceceesecisessindescaiendetsncdenseepagevnesemnagoandess 3 36 Temperature measurement configuration 0 0 0 eee 3 40 Temperature measurement procedure ee eeeeeeeeeeeees 3 43 Frequency and period measurements 0 0 eeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 3 44 Trigger level c
30. lt clist gt Specify rel value lt n gt 0 to 120e6 Q 0 FRESistance REFerence STATe lt b gt lt clist gt Enable disable rel lt b gt ON or OFF OFF FRESistance REFerence ACQuire lt clist gt Use input signal as rel value Rel commands for TEMP SENSe 1 Optional root command TEMPerature REFerence lt p gt lt clist gt Specify rel value lt n gt 328 to 3310 C 0 TEMPerature REFerence STATe lt b gt Enable disable rel lt b gt ON or OFF OFF lt clist gt TEMPerature REFerence ACQuire lt clist gt Use input signal as rel value Rel commands for FREQ SENSe 1 Optional root command FREQuency REFerence lt p gt lt clist gt Specify rel value lt n gt 0 to 1 5e7 Hz 0 FREQuency REFerence STATe lt b gt lt clist gt Enable disable rel lt b gt ON or OFF OFF FREQuency REFerence ACQuire lt clist gt Use input signal as rel value Rel commands for PERIOD SENSe 1 Optional root command PERiod REFerence lt n gt lt clist gt Specify rel value lt n gt 0 to 1 sec 0 PERiod REFerence STATe lt b gt lt clist gt Enable disable rel lt b gt ON or OFF OFF PERiod REFerence ACQuire lt clist gt Use input signal as rel value Channel list parameter lt clist gt SCH where S Mainframe slot number 1 or 2 CH Switching module channel number must be 2 digits Examples 101 Slot 1 Channel 1 101 203 Slot 1 Channel 1
31. tmavugQuror A 4sZ0 goram wan SSS ee aecranwrty See Oe Qe Sa re See Se ee Ocor OO Ee EH OOK SH OOS oo Oo Ce oC oO CS Se HS O82 6 O 0 2 SS y SoS z x M A n s J b d SOK NMTNON OD gt SGC KHNMTONONR OF NMNTONONR gt gt A Moy uwnjop a T a a gt a gt Command codes ssolppy Aled T lt xOOon IEEE 488 Bus Overview Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Typical command sequences For the various multiline commands a specific bus sequence must take place to properly send the command In particular the correct listen address must be sent to the instrument before it will respond to addressed commands Table G 3 lists a typical bus sequence for sending the addressed multiline commands In this instance the SDC command is being sent to the instrument UNL is generally sent as part of the sequence to ensure that no other active listeners are present Note that ATN is true for both the listen command and the SDC command byte itself Table G 3 Typical addressed command sequence Data bus Step Command ATN state ASCII Hex Decimal 1 UNL Set low 3F 63 2 LAG Stays low i 36 54 3 SDC Stays low EOT 04 4 4 Returns high Assumes primary address 16 Table G 4 gives a typical common command sequence In this instance ATN is true while the instrument is being addressed but it is set high whi
32. 100V 120V 220V 240V LINE FREQUENCY 50Hz to 60Hz and 400Hz automatically sensed at power up POWER CONSUMPTION 28VA OPERATING ENVIRONMENT Specified for 0 C to 50 C Specified to 80 RH at 35 C Altitude up to 2000 meters STORAGE ENVIRONMENT 40 C to 70 C BATTERY Lithium battery backed memory 3 years 23 C WARRANTY 3 years EMC Conforms to European Union Directive 89 336 EEC EN61326 1 SAFETY Conforms to European Union Directive 73 23 EEC EN61010 1 CATI VIBRATION MIL PRF 28800F Class 3 Random WARM UP 2 hours to rated accuracy DIMENSIONS Rack Mounting 89mm high x 213mm wide x 370mm deep 3 5 in x 8 375 in x 14 563 in Bench Configuration with handle and feet 104mm high x 238mm wide x 370mm deep 4 125 in x 9 375 in x 14 563 in SHIPPING WEIGHT 6 5kg 14 lbs DIGITAL I O 2 inputs 1 for triggering and 1 for hardware interlock 5 outputs 4 for Reading Limits and for Master Limit Outputs are TTL compatible or can sink 250mA diode clamped to 33V TRIGGERING AND MEMORY Window Filter Sensitivity 0 01 0 1 1 10 or Full scale of range none Reading Hold Sensitivity 0 01 0 1 1 or 10 of reading Trigger Delay 0 to 99 hrs 1ms step size External Trigger Delay lt 2ms External Trigger Jitter lt lms Memory Size 55 000 readings MATH FUNCTIONS Rel Min Max Average Std Dev Peak to Peak of stored reading Limit Test 1 x and mX b and with user defi
33. 440 248 6168 1 888 KEITHLEY 534 8453 www keithley com Bergensesteenweg 709 B 1600 Sint Pieters Leeuw 02 363 00 40 Fax 02 363 00 64 Yuan Chen Xin Building Room 705 12 Yumin Road Dewai Madian Beijing 100029 8610 8225 1886 Fax 8610 82251892 Halsuantie 2 e 00420 Helsinki Finland 09 53 06 65 60 Fax 09 53 06 65 65 3 all e des Garays 91127 Palaiseau C dex 01 64 53 20 20 Fax 01 60 11 77 26 Landsberger Strasse 65 82110 Germering 089 84 93 07 40 Fax 089 84 93 07 34 Unit 2 Commerce Park Brunel Road Theale Berkshire RG7 4AB 0118 929 75 00 Fax 0118 929 75 19 1 5 Eagles Street e Langford Town Bangalore 560 025 080 212 80 27 Fax 080 212 80 05 Viale San Gimignano 38 20146 Milano 02 48 39 16 01 Fax 02 48 30 22 74 New Pier Takeshiba North Tower 13F 11 1 Kaigan 1 chome Minato ku Tokyo 105 0022 81 3 5733 7555 Fax 81 3 5733 7556 2FL URI Building 2 14 Yangjae Dong Seocho Gu Seoul 137 888 82 2 574 7778 Fax 82 2 574 7838 Postbus 559 4200 AN Gorinchem 0183 63 53 33 Fax 0183 63 08 21 c o Regus Business Centre Frosundaviks All 15 4tr 16970 Solna 08 50 90 46 00 Fax 08 655 26 10 13F 3 NO 6 Lane 99 Pu Ding Road Hsinchu Taiwan ROC 886 3 572 9077 Fax 886 3 572 9031 Copyright 2003 Keithley Instruments Inc Printed in the U S A 5 03
34. 7703 and 7710 Scanning with Limits or Time Stamp On 170 s 7703 and 7710 Scanning DCV alternating 2WQ 40 s 7710 Scanning Temperature T C 80 s 7700 and 7708 Scanning Temperature T C 50 s Multiple Channels Into and Out of Memory 7703 and 7710 Scanning DCV 150 s 7703 and 7710 Scanning with Limits or Time Stamp On 150 s 7703 and 7710 Scanning DCV alternating 2WQ 40 s 7710 Scanning Temperature T C 70 s 7702 Scanning DCV 65 s 7700 and 7708 Scanning Temperature T C 50 s 15 16 17 18 HW 9 25 03 Revision F Page of 4 2700 Multimeter Data Acquisition System DC SPEED vs NOISE REJECTION RMS Noise Rate Filter Readings s Digits 10V Range NMRR CMRR 10 50 0 1 0 08 65 lt l2uV 110dB 140dB 1 Off 15 12 6 5 lt 4 uV 90dB 140 dB 0 1 Off 500 400 5 5 lt 22uV 80 dB 0 01 Off 2000 1800 4 5 lt I50 pV gt 80 dB DC MEASUREMENT CHARACTERISTICS DC Volts A D LINEARITY 2 0 ppm of reading 1 0 ppm of range INPUT IMPEDANCE 100mV 10V Ranges Selectable gt 10GQ with lt 400pF or 1OMQ 1 100V 1000V Ranges 10MQ 1 INPUT BIAS CURRENT lt 75pA at 23 C COMMON MODE CURRENT lt 500nApp at 50Hz or 60Hz AUTOZERO ERROR Add 2ppm of range error 5p1V for lt 10 minutes and 1 C INPUT PROTECTION 1000V all ranges 300V with plug in modules Resistance MAX 4WO LEAD RESISTANCE 10 of range per lead for 100Q and 1kQ ranges 1kQ per lead for all other ranges OFFSET COMPENSATION Selectable on 4W
35. ACV measurements square pulse and sawtooth waves Square AC coupled RMS Crest factor Vrms Vp Cre Rectified square Ve AC coupled RMS 0 Vams ve CF 2 Pulse vic AC coupled RMS Vrms Vr YD 1 D CF i where D duty cycle AC coupled pulse AC coupled peak a V Vo 1 D When 0 lt D lt 0 5 0 ki V VPD 7 V L Cra When 0 5 lt D lt 1 a el CF TD 1 Triangular sawtooth i RMS Vrms 0 557VpP CF 1 733 0 f Vp 4 Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Basic DMM Operation 3 15 Low level considerations For sensitive measurements external considerations beyond the Model 2700 affect the accuracy Effects not noticeable when working with higher voltages are significant in microvolt signals The Model 2700 reads only the signal received at its input therefore it is important that this signal be properly transmitted from the source The following paragraphs indicate factors that affect accuracy including stray signal pick up and thermal offsets Shielding AC voltages that are extremely large compared with the DC signal to be measured may produce an erroneous output Therefore to minimize AC interference the circuit should be shielded with the shield connected to the Model 2700 input low particularly for low level sources Improper shielding can cause the Model 2700 to behave in one or more of the following ways e Unexpected offset voltage
36. C to 0 03 C too Co cE CoE c3E oe cE where tog is the calculated temperature in C E is the measured voltage in microvolts Thermistor equation Temperature in Kelvin is calculated using the Steinhart Hart equation as follows 1 A BInR C InR where Ty is the calculated temperature in Kelvin InR is the natural log of the measured resistance of the thermistor A B and C are the curve fitting constants The constants for the three thermistor types used by the Model 2700 are listed in Table F 9 Table F 9 Model 2700 curve fitting constants for thermistors 2252Q at 25 C 5000Q at 25 C 10kQ at 25 C Constant Series 44004 Series 44007 Series 44006 A 0 0014733 0 001288 0 0010295 B 0 0002372 0 0002356 0 0002391 C 1 074e 7 9 557e 8 1 568e 7 Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Temperature Equations F 7 Selecting a thermistor The thermistor manufacturers specified curve fitting values A B and C may not be exactly the same as the ones used by the Model 2700 If they are not exactly the same perform the following steps to select a thermistor to use with the Model 2700 NOTE The specified thermistor temperature measurement accuracy of the Model 2700 see Appendix A is based on the curve fitting constants listed in Table F 9 If the thermistor manufacturer s curve fitting constants are not exactly the same as the ones listed in Table F 9
37. Channel 3 101 110 Slot 1 Channels 1 through 10 Notes 1 The lt clist gt parameter is used to configure one or more channels for a scan Each channel in the lt clist gt must be set to the function specified by the command If not a conflict error 221 will occur For example RESistance NPLCycles 1 101 is only valid if scan channel 101 is set for the Q2 function For 60Hz line power x 60 For 50Hz line power x 50 For 60Hz line power x 1 67e 4 For 50Hz line power x 2e 4 For 60Hz line power the default is 16 67msec For 50Hz line power the default is 20msec Commands to set rate for ACV and ACI are only valid if bandwidth is set to 300 300Hz to 300kHz See Rate and bandwidth conflict error page 4 12 for details The instrument will actually accept a parameter value up to 10e6 but it will default to 3e5 7 DC is optional for the commands to set DCV and DCI integration rate mM WN ion 4 12 Range Digits Rate Bandwidth and Filter Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Aperture Aperture is a different way to specify the integration rate As previously explained 1 PLC sets the integration rate to 16 67msec assuming 60Hz line power You can instead use an APERture command as follows to set the same integration rate APERture 16 67e 3 Bandwidth There are three bandwidth settings for ACV and ACI measurements 3 3Hz to 300kHz 30 30Hz to 300kHz and 300 300
38. Cj are the coefficients for the thermocouple type E is the thermocouple voltage in microvolts uV 250 C to 700 C 291pV to 2 431p1V 700 C to 1 820 C 2 431pV to 13 820pV Error 9 842 332 1 x 10 6 997 150 0 x 10 8 476 530 4 x 104 1 005 264 4 x 106 8 334 595 2 x 10 10 4 550 854 2 x 1013 1 552 303 7 x 10 16 2 988 675 0 x 10 29 2 474 286 0 x 104 0 03 C to 0 02 C 2 131 507 1 1 x 107 2 851 0504 1x 10 5 274 288 7 1 x 10 9 916 080 4 1 x 10 1 296 530 3 1 x 10 1 119 587 0 1 x 10 16 6 062 519 9 1 x 10 1 866 169 6 1 x 10 2 487 858 5 1 x 10 9 0 02 C to 0 01 C too Co cyE E cE c3E vai cE where tog is the calculated temperature in C E is the measured voltage in microvolts Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Temperature Equations F 3 Table F 2 Type E inverse function polynomial 200 C to 0 C 0 C to 1 000 C 8 825pV to OpV OpV to 76 373pV co 0 0 0 0 cy 1 697 7288 x 107 1 705 703 5 x 107 c 4 3514970x 107 2 330 175 9 x 107 c3 1 585 969 7 x 10 10 6 543 558 5 x 10 cy 9 250 287 1 x 10 7 356 2749 x 10 17 c 2 608 431 4x 10 1 789 600 1 x 10 cg 4 1360199 x 10 8 403 616 5 x 1026 c7 3 403 403 0 x 1025 1 373 587 9 x 1030 cg 1 156 486 0 x 10 1 062 982 3 x 105 Cg 3 244 708 7 x 1074 Error 0 03 C to 0 01 C 0 02 C to 0 02 C tog Co cqE cE cE
39. DCV the channel assumes the setup of the selected function Available channels that follow will assume the same setup Note however that channels for slot 2 are not affected NOTE For the Model 7700 DCI and ACI cannot be selected for channels 101 through 120 and channels 201 through 220 DCI and ACI are the only functions that can be set for channels 121 122 221 and 222 3 If you did not disable the channel make your setup changes if any for the selected function These changes do not affect the following channels 4 Using the lt or gt keys or the CLOSE key to select the channel repeat steps 2 2 and 2 3 to set other channels 5 When finished setting up channels press ENTER to proceed to set up triggering NOTE If there are not at least two channels in the scan list two or more channels enabled the message INVALID LIST message will appear briefly You will not be able to exit from the scan configure menu or finish the scan setup until you enable at least two channels NOTE The remaining steps are used to check or change the setups for triggering timer and reading count If you are not going to make changes to any of those setups you can exit from the scan setup menu by pressing EXIT twice The instrument returns to the normal measurement mode Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Scanning 7 17 Step 3 Enable immediate scan The present state of immediate scan IMM SCAN is displayed Y yes
40. Figure B 1 shows a simplified schematic diagram of the Model 7700 module As shown the Model 7700 has channels that are grouped into two banks of ten channels twenty channels total Backplane isolation is provided for each bank Each bank also includes separate cold junction reference points The first bank contains channels through 10 while the second bank contains channels 11 through 20 Each channel of the 20 channel multiplexer card is wired with separate inputs for HI LO providing fully isolated inputs The Model 7700 also provides two channels of current input Channels 21 and 22 Although the Model 7700 relays are the latching type relays hold their state even after power has been removed all relay states are set to open a few seconds after either a power cycle or a RST command is issued Connections to DMM functions for system channel operation are provided through the card backplane connector Current provided through two protected channels Channels 21 and 22 e INPUT connections e SENSE Q4 wire connections AMP and LO common connections to the DMM are also provided Channel 23 2W 4W Configuration Channel 24 Sense Isolation and Channel 25 Input Isolation are normally automatically configured by the 2700 for system channel operation However by using multiple channel operation refer to Section 2 channels can be individually controlled NOTE Connect 4 wire sense leads using channels 11 20 To disconnect ch
41. For switching modules it must be in the R in position 1 Ifa switching channel is presently closed displayed press OPEN to open it 2 Select the volts measurement function by pressing DCV or ACV 3 Use the RANGE A and W keys to select a measurement range consistent with the expected voltage or press AUTO to select autoranging AUTO annunciator turns on Details on range are provided in Section 4 4 Apply the voltage s to be measured CAUTION Do not apply more than maximum input levels indicated in Figure 3 2 and Figure 3 3 or instrument damage may occur The voltage limit is subject to the 8 x 10 VHz product Model 7700 switching module The maximum allowable voltage is 300V DC or 300V RMS 425V peak for AC waveforms Exceeding these limits may cause damage to the switching module WARNING If both the front panel terminals and the switching module terminals are connected at the same time the test leads must be rated to the highest voltage that is connected For example if 1000V is connected to the front panel input the test lead insulation for the switching module must also be rated for 1000V 5 Ifusing a switching module perform the following steps to close the desired channel a Press the CLOSE key b Use lt gt A and to key in the channel number and press ENTER The previously closed channel if there is one will open and the specified channel will close NOTE While in the normal meas
42. If the signal changes to a value outside the window the filter resets and the filter starts processing again starting with a new initial conversion value from the A D converter The noise window which is expressed as a percentage of range or maximum temperature reading allows a faster response time to large signal step changes e g scanned readings A reading conversion outside the plus or minus noise window fills the filter stack immediately If the noise does not exceed the selected window the reading is based on the average of the reading conversions If the noise does exceed the selected window the reading is a single reading conversion and new averaging starts from this point The noise window for the two filter types are compared in Figure 4 3 The five window selections from the front panel are 0 01 0 1 1 10 and NONE no window For remote programming the window can be set to any value from 0 01 to 10 or NONE For voltage current and resistance the filter window is expressed as a percent of range For example on the 10V range a 10 window means that the filter window is 1V For temperature the filter window is expressed as a percent of the maximum temperature reading The maximum temperature depends on which thermocouple is being used For example for a Type J thermocouple the maximum reading is 760 C a 10 window means that the filter window is 76 C For temperatures below 0 C the overflow point is 20
43. Legal operation Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Close Open Switching Module Channels 2 15 Non measure switching modules NOTE Presently non measure Keithley modules include the Models 7705 7711 and 7712 You can check the Keithley website www keithley com for new modules Keep the following in mind when using a non measure module For a non measure card no channels are connected to the internal DMM the channels cannot be connected to the backplane Multiple channel operation should be used to close channels on a non measure module For remote operation the ROUT MULT commands are used to close channels Front panel system single channel operation cannot be used to close channels on a non measure module For front panel operation system channel operation will cause message NO MEAS CARD to be displayed A non measure module may have open close operations that are specific only to that module Refer to the appropriate module manual packing list for details on operation In order to perform measurements you must use the front panel inputs of the 2700 mainframe You can still use the non measure module to control other operations 2 16 Close Open Switching Module Channels Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Multiple channel operation The capability to individually control channels provides you with added flexibility in how you use a switching module For example assume you want
44. Line cycle synchronization see LSYNC Line frequency 1 16 Line power connection 1 15 Line voltage Setting 1 16 LOCAL key 10 11 Low level considerations 3 15 AC voltage offset 3 16 Shielding 3 15 Thermal EMFs 3 15 LSYNC 3 5 Magnetic fields E 6 Manual ranging 4 3 4 5 Math 5 8 Basic operation 5 12 Commands 5 13 mX b 5 9 Percent 5 10 Percent reference 5 14 Programming examples 5 15 Reciprocal 1 X 5 11 Remote programming 5 13 Scanning 5 12 Setting mX b units 5 14 Math commands Reading math result 5 14 Measurement event status 11 16 Measurement queries 3 56 FETCh 3 56 MEASure lt function gt 3 58 READ 3 57 SENSe 1 DATA FRESh 3 58 SENSe 1 DATA LATest 3 59 Examples 3 59 Measurements Basic 3 49 Capabilities 3 2 Considerations E 1 Current see Current measurements DCI and ACI Frequency and period see Frequency and period measurements One shot mode 13 7 Ranges 4 2 Resistance see Resistance measurements Q2 and Q4 3 20 Setting speed 4 9 Temperature see Temperature measurements Voltage see Voltage measurements DCV and ACV 3 7 Menus CARD 2 29 Message exchange protocol 10 17 Messages Program 10 15 Response 10 17 Status and error C 1 Meter loading E 9 Minimizing source resistance noise E 5 Model 7700 Q2 Wire and Thermistor connections B 8 4 Wire and RTD connections B 9 Connection Guide B 1 Connection Log B 10 Current connections AC or DC B 9 Module installation 2 3 Schematic diag
45. Mainframe slot number 1 or 2 CH Switching module channel number must be 2 digits Examples 101 Slot 1 Channel 1 101 203 Slot 1 Channel 1 and Slot 2 Channel 3 101 110 Slot 1 Channels 1 through 10 Notes 1 Not affected by RST and SYSTem PRESet Front panel factory default is OFF 2 RST sets count to 1 and SYSTem PRESet sets count to INFinity 3 The default value depends on which switching module is installed 7 30 Scanning Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Reference a ROUTe SCAN lt clist gt Channels will be scanned in the order that they are listed The following example shows the proper format for specifying channels in a scan list for a sequential scan ROUT SCAN 101 110 201 204 206 For the above scan list the scan will run starting with the lowest numbered channel 101 and then sequence up forward to the highest numbered channel 206 Remote programming can also be used to run non sequential scans Any scan list configured to scan backward is considered a non sequential scan The following examples configure non sequential scan lists Example 1 ROUT SCAN 101 105 103 106 110 Example 2 ROUT SCAN 110 101 Example 1 After channel 105 is scanned the unit backs up to scan channel 103 then proceeds forward to scan channels 106 through 110 Example 2 The scan starts with channel 110 then proceeds backward to channel 101 NOTES N
46. Manual Name Reference Brief Description Advance8 None Use Case 8 7706 module in slot 1 and 7702 module in slot 2 e 7706 module e Output analog output values to analog output channels e Output digital output values to digital output channels e 7702 module e Scan 120 DCV channels e Measurement speed rate 1 plc Filter Disabled no filtering e Math mX b m 0 555 b 17 778 e Limits Limit 1 all channels 100 Limit 2 180 e Buffer Store 320 reading strings Buffer elements include reading channel and limit code e Triggering Bus control source trigger delay 0 125 seconds Data retrieval SRQ when buffer 14 2 34 and full Simple1 None Use Case 1 30 channel scan using 7708 module 30 channels DCV 10V range e 10 channels type T thermocouple temperature e Measurement speed rate 1 plc Filter Disabled no filtering e Buffer Store 120 reading strings Buffer elements include reading only e Triggering Bus control source Simple2 None Use Case 2 40 channel scan using 7708 module e 30 channels DCV 15 on 100mV range 15 on 10V range 9 channels ACV 1V range e channel 4 wire RTD temperature e Measurement speed rate 1 ple Filter Disabled no filtering e Buffer Store 120 reading strings Buffer elements include reading only e Triggering Bus control source Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual K
47. Model 4288 4 side by side rack mount kit Mounts Model 2700 and a 5 25 inch instrument Models 195A 196 220 224 230 263 595 614 617 705 740 775A 6512 side by side in a standard 19 inch rack Carrying case Model 1050 padded carrying case A carrying case for the Model 2700 includes handles and shoulder strap Model 2700 features Model 2700 is a 612 digit high performance multimeter data acquisition system It can measure voltage DC and AC current DC and AC resistance 2 and 4 wire temperature thermocouple thermistor and 4 wire RTD frequency and period and test continuity Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Getting Started 1 7 The Model 2700 has two slots that will accommodate Keithley Model 7700 series switching modules Table 1 1 Each channel of a switching module that is closed or scanned is measured by the Model 2700 For scanning each channel can have its own unique setup i e function range digits etc More information on the measurement capabilities of the Model 2700 is provided in DMM measurement capabilities page 3 2 A connection guide for the Model 7700 is provided in Appendix B Specifications for the Model 2700 and 7700 switching module are provided in Appendix A Additional features of Model 2700 include Setup storage Six instrument setups four user RST defaults and factory defaults can be saved and recalled Offset compensated ohms
48. Set integration rate in line cycles 60Hz 5 0 Sec4 Vv 0 01 to 60 50Hz 0 01 to 50 NPLCycles lt clist gt Query line cycle integration rate v RANGe Path to set measurement range Sec4 v UPPer lt n gt lt clist gt Select range 0 to 3 1 3 Jv UPPer lt clist gt Query range Jv AUTO lt b gt lt clist gt Enable or disable auto range ON y AUTO lt clist gt Query state of auto range y DIGits lt p gt lt clist gt Specify measurement resolution 4 to 7 7 Sec 4 DIGits lt clist gt Query resolution REFerence lt n gt lt clist gt Specify reference 3 1 to 3 1 0 Sec 5 Jv STATe lt b gt lt clist gt Enable or disable reference OFF y STATe lt clist gt Query state of reference y ACQuire lt clist gt Use input signal as reference REFerence lt clist gt Query reference value y AVERage Path to configure and control filter Sec 4 TCONtrol lt name gt Select filter type MOVing or REPeat Note 3 TCONtrol Query filter type WINDow lt NRf gt Set filter window in of range 0 1 0 to 10 WINDow Query filter window COUNt lt n gt lt clist gt Specify filter count 1 to 100 10 COUNt lt clist gt Query filter count STATe lt b gt lt clist gt Enable or disable filter Note 4 STATe lt clist gt Query state of digital filter Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual SCPI Reference Table
49. Status register sets Provides bit identification and command information for the four status register sets Standard Event Status Operation Event Status Measurement Event Status and Questionable Event Status Queues Provides details and command information on the Output Queue and Error Queue 11 2 Status Structure Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Overview The Model 2700 provides a series of status registers and queues allowing the operator to monitor and manipulate the various instrument events The status structure is shown in Figure 11 1 The heart of the status structure is the Status Byte Register This register can be read by the user s test program to determine if a service request SRQ has occurred and what event caused it Status byte and SRQ The Status Byte Register receives the summary bits of four status register sets and two queues The register sets and queues monitor the various instrument events When an enabled event occurs it sets a summary bit in the Status Byte Register When a summary bit of the Status Byte is set and its corresponding enable bit is set as programmed by the user the RQS MSS bit will set to indicate that an SRQ has occurred Status register sets A typical status register set is made up of a condition register an event register and an event enable register A condition register is a read only register that constantly updates to reflect the present operating condit
50. This command will not work if the trigger source is set for BUS or EXTERNAL This will cause a 214 Trigger deadlock error Under this condition use a FETCh query or a DATA FRESh query see page 3 58 If the trigger model is continuously initiating INIT CONT ON sending this query may cause a 213 Init ignored error but it will still give a new reading When appropriate If the instrument receives a RST command then it defaults to INIT CONT OFF TRIG SOUR IMM and TRIG COUNT 1 Sending a READ query under these conditions will trigger a new reading 3 58 Basic DMM Operation Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual MEASure lt function gt What it does This query will reconfigure the instrument to the function specified in the query set the trigger source for immediate set the trigger count to 1 and configure the measurement parameters to RST defaults It will then trigger a single reading and return the result Limitations This query is much slower than a READ or FETCh query because it has to reconfigure the instrument each time it is sent It will reset the NPLC autoranging and averaging to default settings When appropriate This is an ideal command for taking one shot measurements if the default settings for a measurement are appropriate and speed is not a requirement SENSe 1 DATA FRESh What it does This query is similar to FETCh in that it returns the latest r
51. and normal byte order Header The data string for each set of reading conversions is preceded by a 2 byte header that is the binary equivalent of an ASCII sign and 0 As shown in Figure 14 2C only one header is sent at the beginning of the data string Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual FORMat and Misc SYSTem Commands 14 5 Figure 14 2 IEEE 754 data formats A Single precision data format 32 data bits Data Element l Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 s sign bit 0 positive 1 negative e exponent bits 8 f fraction bits 23 Normal byte order shown For swapped byte order bytes sent in reverse order Header Byte 4 Byte 3 Byte 2 Byte 1 B Double precision data format 64 data bits Data Element Byte 1 Byte 2 Bytes 3 4 5 and 6 not shown s sign bit 0 positive 1 negative e exponent bits 11 f fraction bits 52 Normal byte order shown For swapped byte order bytes sent in reverse order Header Byte 8 Byte 7 Byte 1 C Example data string showing 0 Header Header Measure Measure Measure Conversion 1 Conversion 2 Conversion 10 I ji l I l ooo Bytes Bytes Bytes eee 1 4 1 4 1 4 l l l l Data Data Data Data Element Element Element Element units reading timestamp units ata Data Data Data Data Element Element Element Element Element reading timestamp units reading timestamp 14 6 FORMat
52. bit in the Status Byte Register will set When used with the Initiate Immediately command INITiate a 1 will not be placed into the Output Queue until the Model 2700 goes back into the idle state The INIT command operation is not considered finished until the Model 2700 goes back into the idle state See the description for WAI for more information on command execution The execution of OPC is not completed until it has placed the 1 in the Output Queue Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Common Commands 12 5 Programming example The following command sequence demonstrates how to use OPC to signal the end of a measurement process NOTE The following example can be run from the KE2700 Instrument Driver using the example named SOPC in Table H 1 of Appendix H SYST PRES Returns 2700 to default setup INIT CONT OFF Disables continuous initiation ABORt Aborts operation Places 2700 in idle TRIG COUN 1 These two commands configure the 2700 SAMP COUN 5 to perform five measurements INIT Starts measurement process OPC Sends OPC command After all five measurements are performed and the instrument returns to the idle state an ASCII 1 will be placed in the Output Queue After addressing the Model 2700 to talk the 1 from the Output Queue is sent to the computer SYST PRES Returns 2700 to default setup NOTE The following commands take a long time to process a
53. blocks When SENS DATA FETCh READ or CALC1 DATA is sent the latest data array will be returned NOTE The READ command tries to perform an INIT operation This will cause error 213 Init ignored to occur since the instrument is already initiating measurements NOTE When the instrument is not in the continuous measurement mode the INIT CONT ON command can be sent to enable continuous initiation However if the sample count is gt 1 a setting conflict error 221 will occur Set the sample count to 1 SAMP COUN 1 and then send INIT CONT ON Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Signal Processing Sequence and Data Flow D 13 Scanning For remote operation scanning is normally performed with continuous initiation disabled INIT CONT OFF The sample count SAMP COUNTt specifies the number of channels to scan and store in the buffers sample buffer and data store and the trigger count TRIG COUNt specifies the number of scans to perform Note that if the trigger count is gt 1 the data for each subsequent scan will overwrite the data stored in the sample buffer and data store Once the scan is properly configured INIT or READ will start the scan READ also returns the scanned readings data arrays from the sample buffer or the CALC1 block if Math is enabled FETCh will not start a scan but it will return the readings already stored While the scan is in process SENS DATA and CALC1 DATA commands can be
54. eee 2 22 Dual independent multiplexers oe eee eeeeeseeeeeeees 2 24 Identifying installed modules and viewing closed channels 2 28 CARD Ment ois eke ctececieh cece tieceniienadoesbdvesabeeeloidal vets Whesest 2 29 Switching module queries remote operation 2 31 Relay closure COUN oo eee cece seeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeaeesaeeseeeaeeeeeeatens 2 32 Reading relay closure count 00 lees eeceeseeeeeneeeeeteeneeeees 2 33 Setting count update interval oo eee eeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeens 2 33 Model 7700 switching module 00 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 34 Switching module capabilities 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeee 2 34 SCHEMAUC MAGA sissioni iria 2 35 Basic DMM Operation DMM measurement capabilities 00 eee eeeeeeeeseeseeeseeeeeenees 3 2 High energy circuit safety precautions 2 00 elec eeeeeseeeeeeees 3 3 Performance Considerations csceseseeseeseceseeeceeseeeeeeaeeneeeaes 3 4 Warmip ee tases esse eve eats ia re enie e Riro Enie 3 4 PRULOZOLO PPE E E A E testa leesaseees 3 4 LSYNC line cycle synchronization s s s 3 5 Remote programming autozero and LSYNC 3 6 Channel list parameter lt clist gt oo eeceesceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeaeees 3 6 Voltage measurements DCV and ACV occ eeeeeeeereeeeeees 3 7 DCV inp t divider s2eccsccis iecestevecsstveassacavecsiecececesceteaveesstect ines 3 7 Connections 55655 Feeselik S565 cesesccscnendieledtesessstendinsdcssentes taxeoteeteds 3 8 Volts measurement procedure
55. gt A and W keys to display the number of readings to filter 1 to 100 and press ENTER Use the A or W key to display the desired filter type moving or repeating and press ENTER The filter turns on and the instrument returns to the normal measurement state NOTE While the filter is enabled FILT annunciator on changes to the configuration take effect as soon as they are made With filter disabled FILT annunciator off changes to the configuration take place when the filter is enabled While the filtering operation is in progress the FILT annunciator blinks Readings will continue to be processed i e displayed stored sent over the bus but they could be questionable When the FILT annunciator stops blinking the filter has settled Changing function or range causes the filter to reset The filter then assumes the state enabled or disabled and configuration for that function or range Figure 4 4 Filter configuration flow chart 0 01 0 1 1 NONE RDGS 001 to 100 REPEAT TYPE MOVNG AV Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Range Digits Rate Bandwidth and Filter 4 19 Scanning The moving filter cannot be used when scanning A scan channel cannot be configured to use the moving filter Also the filter window is not used when scanning When a simple scan is configured the present filter count and state will apply to all channels in the scan The window setting is ignored effectively se
56. lt clist gt This command functions like the front panel CLOSE key MULTI menu option to close channels When you send this command to close the channels specified in the lt clist gt only those listed channels will close Channels not specified are not affected and channel pairing is disabled NOTES Channels closed by ROUT MULT CLOS are not displayed The ROUT MULT CLOS command cannot be used to perform thermocouple temperature measurements using the internal or external reference junction The simulated reference junction will instead be used and the integrity of the temperature reading will be questionable ERR annunciator on See Temperature measurements page 3 33 for details NOTE For RS 232 operation and in some cases GPIB operation OPC or OPC should be used with ROUT MULT CLOS if the lt clist gt is large Details on OPC and OPC are provided in Section 12 Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Close Open Switching Module Channels 2 21 b ROUTe MULTiple OPEN lt clist gt With this command you can open one or more switching module channels When you send this command to open the channels specified in the lt clist gt only those listed channels will open Channels not specified are not affected NOTE For RS 232 operation and in some cases GPIB operation OPC or OPC should be used with ROUT MULT OPEN if the lt clist gt is large Details on OPC and OPC are provided in Section 12
57. no measurement capability This 1 x 4 multiplexer is a cascading tree design one of the channels of each is always connected to a common out It can be used to connect one instrument to multiple devices or multiple instruments to a single device Model 7712 The Model 7712 is a 50Q 3 5GHz single pole dual 1 x 4 RF Multiplexer module eight channels no measurement capability This 1 x 4 multiplexer is a cascading tree design one of the channels of each is always connected to a common out It can be used to connect one instrument to multiple devices or multiple instruments to a single device Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Getting Started 1 5 Cables and connector kits for switching modules Model 7788 DB 50 connector kit Contains two male DB 50 solder cup connectors with strain relief connector shells These connectors mate to the female connectors of the Models 7703 and 7705 switching modules Model 7789 50 25 pin solder cup connector kit Contains one male DB 50 and one male DB 25 solder cup connectors These connectors mate to the female connectors on the Models 7701 and 7709 switching modules Model 7790 ribbon cable adapter kit Contains one female DB 50 one male DB 50 and one male DB 25 IDC ribbon cable connectors These connectors are used with the Models 7701 7707 and 7709 switching modules Model 7051 X BNC cable male to male 7051 2 is 2 ft long 7051 5 is 5 ft long and 7051
58. or EXIT CHA AVG message to indicate that the calculation must first be disabled as explained in step 5 of the above procedure 5 18 Rel Math Ratio Channel Average dB Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Scanning Ratio and channel average can be used in an advanced scan The 2 channel scan for the calculation is performed for every primary channel that is scanned For example assume the Model 7700 is installed in slot 1 and is configured to perform the ratio calculation for 10 channels When channel 101 is scanned measurements are performed on channels 101 and on its paired channel 111 The calculation is performed and the result is displayed When the next channel 102 is scanned measurements are performed on that channel 102 and on its paired channel 112 The calculation is performed and the result is displayed This process continues for each scanned channel When an advanced scan is configured each channel can have its own unique setup That is one or more channels can use ratio and other channel s can use channel average Details to configure and run a scan are provided in Section 7 Advanced scan configuration notes 1 When a calculation ratio or channel average is enabled for a primary scan channel the following setup actions occur The calculation enables for the paired channel The primary channel setup function range rel etc will be copied to the paired channel The filter setup
59. selects the relative timestamp type Table 6 1 Real time clock timestamp With the real time clock selected each stored reading is timestamped with the time and date For the time the seconds reading has 0 01 sec resolution Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Buffer 6 5 Configuring timestamp Setting time and date For the real time clock the time and date is set at the factory However you can check and correct the time and date as follows Perform the following steps to set the time Press SHIFT and then SETUP Use the A and W keys to display SET TIME and press ENTER The displayed clock will be running in the hour minute second AM PM format Use the edit keys lt gt A and W to set the hour minute and AM PM seconds cannot be set and press ENTER Perform the following steps to set the date Press SHIFT and then SETUP Use the A and W keys to display SET DATE and press ENTER to display the date in the month day year format Use the edit keys lt gt A and Y to set the date month day year and press ENTER Selecting timestamp Perform the following steps to select either the real time clock timestamp or the relative timestamp NOTE Changing the timestamp will clear the buffer if a storage is in process The message BUF CLEARED will be displayed to indicate the buffer readings were lost If no storage is in process changing the timestamp will not clear the buffer
60. voltage range if the minimum voltage spacing is reduced in the external connections For details to safely make high energy measurements see High energy circuit safety precautions in Section 3 As described in the International Electrotechnical Commission IEC Standard IEC 664 the Model 2700 is Installation Category I and must not be connected to mains Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Model 7700 Connection Guide B 5 Screw terminals Figure B 2 shows how to access the screw terminals on the Model 7700 Channel designations for the screw terminals are contained in Figure B 3 Figure B 2 Screw terminal access LOCK zazei B 6 Model 7700 Connection Guide Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Figure B 3 Model 7700 screw terminal channel designations INPUT SENSE CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 CH9 CH10 HL HL AHL HL HL HL HL HL HELE HL AHL H L SONU Cs ee Se etal eae IZIZIZIZIZIZIZIZ Hol oH b O HH L WL HL A bk AOL AHO OL UO UL AO AL E CH21 CH22 27 CH11
61. 1 6 25 E 200 to 0 C 0 2 0 1 0 4 0 8 1 6 BS E 200 to 0 C 0 1 0 3 0 8 1 6 2 5 R 0 to 400 C 0 4 0 6 1 2 0 5 1 0 22 S 0 to 400 C 0 4 0 6 1 2 0 5 1 0 2 2 B 350 to 1100 C 0 8 0 3 1 7 0 5 1 0 22 20 For lead resistance gt 0Q add the following uncertainty Q for measurement temperatures of 70 100 C 100 150 C 2 2 KQ 44004 0 22 C 1 11 C 5 0 KQ 44007 0 10 C 0 46 C 10 kQ 44006 0 04 C 0 19 C 21 Front panel resolution limited to 0 1Q HW 9 25 03 Revision F Page 2 of 4 2700 Multimeter Data Acquisition System AC SPECIFICATIONS Accuracy of reading of range 23 C 5 C Calibration 3 Hz 10 Hz 20 kHz 50 kHz 100 kHz Function Range Resolution Cycle 10 Hz 20 kHz 50 kHz 100 kHz 300 kHz Voltage 100 0000 mV 0 1 pV 90 Days 0 35 0 03 0 05 0 03 0 11 0 05 0 6 0 08 4 0 0 5 1 000000 V 1 0 pV all ranges 10 00000 V 10 uV 1 Year 0 35 0 03 0 06 0 03 0 12 0 05 0 6 0 08 4 0 0 5 100 0000 V 100 uV all ranges 750 000 V 1 0 mV Temp Coeff C 0 035 0 003 0 005 0 003 0 006 0 005 0 01 0 006 0 03 0 01 3 Hz 10 Hz 10 Hz 3 kHz 3 kHz 5kHz Current 1 000000 A 1 0 pA 90 Day 1 Yr 0 30 0 04 0 10 0 04 0 14 0 04 3 00000 A 10 pA 0 35 0 06 0 15 0 06 0 18 0 06 Temp Coeff C 0 035 0 006 0 015 0 006 0 015 0 006 Accuracy ppm of reading offset ppm 3 Hz 500 kHz 333 ms 2 ps Frequency 100 mV 0 333 ppm 90 Day 1 Yr 80 ppm 0 333 ppm S
62. 10 Typical command sequences sssssesessesessesereessrerrsreresreseeees G 12 IEEE command groups cescecescceseseeceseeeeeeceseeeeneeeaeeees G 13 Interface function codes sssessesessessseesesessssesssresssteseresssresssess G 14 KE2700 Instrument Driver Examples Introduction sensen E E eects H 2 Visual Basic and CVI C examples ssssssesseeseeeeesseeressesrsereeees H 2 LabVIEW examples ccsccssscsssscesscessrecsosssnssersnscessesesensers H 12 List of Illustrations 1 Getting Started Figure 1 1 Model 2700 front panel 0 eee eee eseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeaeees 1 10 Figure 1 2 Model 2700 rear panel oo eee ee eeeeeseeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeees 1 14 Figure 1 3 Power mod le srian imene nn aA RRR 1 15 Figure 1 4 Connection to DMM for 2 wire function system channel 101 closed esseseeseseeeeseseeresrrersrereseee 1 29 Figure 1 5 Connection to DMM for 4 wire function system channel 106 closed eeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeesees 1 30 Figure 1 6 Front panel keys to close and open system channels 1 31 Figure 1 7 Simple scan Operation 0 0 eee eeeeseseeesseeeseeseeeaeeseeeaeeeeens 1 33 Figure 1 8 Exercise 4 Trigger and return a single reading 1 36 Figure 1 9 Exercise 5 Trigger and return multiple readings 1 37 Figure 1 10 Exercise 6 Return a single reading continuous triggering oo eee eee eseeeeeeseeeeeeaeeseeeaeeeeeens 1 38 2 Closing and
63. 10 is 10 ft long These cable are used with the Model 7711 switching module Model 7712 SMA 1 SMA cable male to male 1 0m 3 3 ft long This cable is used with the Models 7711 and 7712 switching modules Model 7712 SMA N Female SMA to male N type adapter This adapter is used with the Models 7711 and 7712 switching modules S46 SMA X SMA cable male to male S46 SMA 1 is one foot long and S46 SMA 0 5 is one half foot long This cable is used with the Models 7711 and 7712 switching modules Cables and adapters GPIB and trigger link Models 7007 1 and 7007 2 shielded GPIB cables Connect Model 2700 to the GPIB bus using shielded cables and connectors to reduce electromagnetic interference EMI Model 7007 1 is one meter long Model 7007 2 is two meters long Models 8501 1 and 8501 2 trigger link cables Connect Model 2700 to other instruments with Trigger Link connectors e g Model 7002 Switch System Model 8501 1 is one meter long Model 8501 2 is two meters long Model 8502 trigger link adapter Lets you connect any of the six trigger link lines of Model 2700 to instruments that use the standard BNC trigger connectors Model 8503 DIN to BNC trigger cable Lets you connect trigger link lines one Voltmeter Complete and two External Trigger of Model 2700 to instruments that use BNC trigger connectors Model 8503 is one meter long 1 6 Getting Started Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s
64. 101 to DMM Input e Channel 111 paired channel for 4 wire measurements e Channel 124 connects channel 111 to DMM Sense e Channel 123 isolates channel 101 from channel 111 The Model 2700 will display the 1kQ reading for system channel 101 Remote programming ROUT CLOS 101 Using the MULTI option for the OPEN key open channel 111 This opens the connection to DMM Sense and causes an OVRFLW reading Keep in mind that channel 101 is still closed and displayed as the system channel Remote programming ROUT MULT OPEN 111 In an attempt to clear the overflow reading problem use the SINGLE option of the CLOSE key to again close channel 101 You might think that this will again close channel 111 to reconnect it to DMM Sense However that is not the case Since channel 101 is still the system channel selecting it again in this manner is a no action Channel 111 does not close Remote programming ROUT CLOS 101 A simple way to resolve the above problem is to repeat step 1 to open all channels and then repeat step 2 to close channel 101 All the listed channels in step 2 will close to make the 4 wire connection to the 1kQ resistor Close Open Switching Module Channels Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Dual independent multiplexers Using multiple channel operation any multiplexer switching module can be configured as two independent multiplexers For example the Model 7700 is normally used as a single
65. 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Widely varying temperatures within the circuit can also create thermal EMFs Therefore maintain constant temperatures to minimize these thermal EMFs A shielded enclosure around the circuit under test also helps by minimizing air currents The REL control can be used to null out constant offset voltages AC voltage offset The Model 2700 at 51 2 digits resolution will typically display 100 counts of offset on AC volts with the input shorted This offset is caused by the offset of the TRMS converter This offset will not affect reading accuracy and should not be zeroed out using the REL feature The following equation expresses how this offset Vopfser is added to the signal input Vyn Displayed reading Jn Vorrser Example Range 1VAC Offset 100 counts 1 0mV Input 100mV RMS Displayed reading 100mV 1 0mvV 2 Joo1v x 10 v 0 100005 V The offset is seen as the last digit which is not displayed Therefore the offset is negligible If REL were used to zero the display the 100 counts of offset would be subtracted from Vyy resulting in an error of 100 counts in the displayed reading Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Basic DMM Operation 3 17 Current measurements DCI and ACI The Model 2700 can make DCI measurements from 10nA to 3A and ACI measurements from 1pA to 3A RMS NOTE See the previous discussion about crest facto
66. 5 d 1 C 100 0000 V 100 uV gt 10 MQ 1 15 6 354 9 45 9 5 1 C 1000 000 V mV gt 10 MQ 1 20 6 354 9 50 9 5 1 C Resistance 100 0000 Q 100 uQ 1 mA 6 6 V 20 20 80 20 100 20 BEIE 1 000000 kQ mQ 1 mA 6 6 V 20 6 80 6 100 6 8 1 C 10 00000 kQ 10 mQ 100 pA 6 6 V 20 6 80 6 100 6 8 1 C 100 0000 kQ 100 mQ 10 pA 12 8 V 20 6 80 10 100 10 8 1 C 1 000000 MQ 0Q 10 pA 12 8 V 20 6 80 10 100 10 8 1 C 10 00000 MQ 10Q 0 7 pA 10MQ 7 0 V 150 6 200 10 400 10 70 1 C 100 0000 MQ 00 Q 0 7 pA 10MQ 7 0 V 800 30 2000 30 2000 30 385 1 C Continuity 2W 1 000 kQ 100 mQ 1mA 6 6V 40 100 100 100 100 100 8 1 C Current 20 00000 mA OnA lt 0 2 V 60 30 300 80 500 80 50 5 C 100 0000 mA 100 nA lt 0 05 V 100 300 300 800 500 800 50 50 C 1 000000 A 1 0 pA lt 0 3 V 200 30 500 80 800 80 50 5 C 3 000000 A OA lt 1 0 V 1000 15 1200 40 1200 40 50 5 C Channel Ratio Ratio Accuracy Accuracy of selected Channel Range Accuracy of Paired Channel Range Channel Average Average Accuracy Accuracy of selected Channel Range Accuracy of Paired Channel Range TEMPERATURE DC MEASUREMENT SPEEDS Display in C F or K Exclusive of probe errors Thermocouples Accuracy based on ITS 90 90 Day 1 Year 23 C 5 C Relative to Simulated Temperature Reference Using 77XX Coefficient Type Range Resolution Junction Module 0 18 C
67. 80 05 ITALY Viale San Gimignano 38 20146 Milano 02 48 39 16 01 Fax 02 48 30 22 74 JAPAN New Pier Takeshiba North Tower 13F 11 1 Kaigan 1 chome Minato ku Tokyo 105 0022 81 3 5733 7555 Fax 81 3 5733 7556 KOREA 2FL URI Building 2 14 Yangjae Dong Seocho Gu Seoul 137 888 82 2 574 7778 Fax 82 2 574 7838 NETHERLANDS Postbus 559 4200 AN Gorinchem 0183 63 53 33 Fax 0183 63 08 21 SWEDEN c o Regus Business Centre Frosundaviks All 15 4tr e 16970 Solna 08 50 90 46 00 Fax 08 655 26 10 TAIWAN 13F 3 NO 6 Lane 99 Pu Ding Road Hsinchu Taiwan ROC 886 3 572 9077 Fax 886 3 572 9031 5 03 Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual 2001 Keithley Instruments Inc All rights reserved Cleveland Ohio U S A Seventh Printing August 2003 Document Number 2700 900 01 Rev G Manual Print History The print history shown below lists the printing dates of all Revisions and Addenda created for this manual The Revision Level letter increases alphabetically as the manual undergoes subsequent updates Addenda which are released between Revisions contain important change information that the user should incorporate immediately into the manual Addenda are numbered sequentially When a new Revision is created all Addenda associated with the previous Revision of the manual are incorporated into the new Revision of the manual Each new Revision includes a revised copy of this print histor
68. CONT is again selected the beeper will automatically enable Parameters lt b gt 0 Disable beeper 1 Enable beeper Figure 14 3 Key press codes Integra Series SENSE 8 a4awire INPUT OOQ HI 350V 1000V PEAK A PEAK CONT OCWMP PENIOD SENSOR INPUTS DELAY HOLD LIMITS _ ON OFF TYPE MONITOR CH OFF _CARD m TRIG STORE RECALL FILTER REL a a gt CONFIG HALT A TEST __LSYNC GPIB__RS 232 STEP scanf hiairs RaTE ExT jENTEF 14 10 FORMat and Misc SYSTem Commands Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual 15 SCPI Reference Tables 15 2 SCPI Reference Tables Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Reference tables Table 15 1 through Table 15 10 summarize the commands to operate the Model 2700 and Model 7700 switching module NOTE The commands listed in the following tables pertain to operation of the Model 2700 and the Model 7700 switching module For commands that are unique to operation of other switching modules refer to the packing list provided with each switch module Table 15 1 CALCulate command summary Table 15 2 DISPlay command summary Table 15 3 FORMat command summary Table 15 4 ROUTe command summary Table 15 5 SENSe command summary Table 15 6 STATus command summary Table 15 7 SYSTem command summary Table 15 8 TRACe command summary Table 15 9 Trigger command summary Table 15 10 UNIT command summary Gen
69. DATA Return measured reading 3 56 Basic DMM Operation Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Example 4 Scan configuration Model 7700 The following commands configure scan channels 101 102 and 121 of a Model 7700 installed in slot 1 When channel 101 is scanned DCV will be selected When channel 102 is scanned Q2 will be selected When channel 121 is scanned DCI will be selected NOTE The following example can be run from the KE2700 Instrument Driver using the example named ConigChan in Table H 1 of Appendix H FUNC VOLT 101 Configure scan channel 101 for DCV FUNC RES 102 Configure scan channel 102 for Q2 FUNC CURR 121 Configure scan channel 121 for DCI NOTE Detailed information on scanning is provided in Section 7 Measurement queries NOTE For more information on read commands see Section 8 Triggering Section 13 SCPI Signal Oriented Measurement Commands and Appendix D Signal Processing Sequence and Data Flow FETCh What it does This command will simply return the latest available reading from an instrument Limitations If the instrument does not have a reading available indicated by dashes in the display sending this command will cause a 230 Data corrupt or stale error This query will not cause the box to trigger a reading nor will it wait for a result if a reading is in progress It is possible to get the same reading over and over using
70. DUT e Opening channel 24 isolates the external source from the backplane of the Model 2700 This channel must remain open while testing DUT e Closing channel 25 connects an input channel 1 through 10 to the DMM In Figure 2 9 channels 1 and 11 are closed to test DUT 1 A more detailed view of the test for DUT 1 is shown in Figure 2 10 The test for the other DUTs is similar except that different source and measure channels are closed Closed channels for each DUT test are listed as follows Tested Tested device Closed channels device Closed channels DUT 1 1 11 23 and 25 DUT 6 6 16 23 and 25 DUT 2 2 12 23 and 25 DUT 7 7 17 23 and 25 DUT 3 3 13 23 and 25 DUT 8 8 18 23 and 25 DUT 4 4 14 23 and 25 DUT 9 9 19 23 and 25 DUT 5 5 15 23 and 25 DUT 10 10 20 23 and 25 NOTE Do not use this application to measure the temperature of DUT using a thermocouple with the INTernal or EXTernal reference junction selected The SIMulated reference junction will instead be used resulting in invalid readings The ERR annunciator will turn on to indicate that the integrity of the temperature reading is questionable Test procedure NOTES The following test procedure assumes a Model 7700 switching module installed in slot 1 of the mainframe The procedure assumes that the instrument is operating in the continuous measurement triggering mode see Defaults and user setups page 1 20 Do not us
71. ENTER 7 Recall buffer readings Press RECALL gt use edit keys to display readings Press EXIT to exit recall mode TRAC CLE RST FUNC VOLT AC VOLT AC RANG 10 SAMP COUN 15 READ CALC1 DATA 1 To avoid problems with remote programming it is good practice to routinely clear the buffer TRAC CLE at the beginning of a program that performs multiple measurements SAMP COUN gt 1 Restoring RST or FACTory defaults does not clear the buffer 2 FACTory defaults place the instrument in a continuous measurement mode RST places the instrument in a non continuous measurement mode 3 READ triggers and returns 15 readings These 15 readings are automatically stored in the buffer See Exercise 4 and 5 for more information on the READ command 4 Statistics for buffer readings are also stored in the buffer For remote programming CALC1 DATA only returns the readings that were stored It does not return buffer statistics CALC2 commands are used to calculate and return buffer statistics see Section 6 for details Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Getting Started 1 29 Closing and opening channels system channel operation NOTE See Section 2 for details on closing and opening switching module channels NOTE The following discussion assumes a multiplexing switching module i e Model 7700 is installed in slot 1 of the mainframe Switching module installation is covere
72. Figure 8 3 TRIG LINK pinout oo eeeeeeseeeeseseeeeeeetseeetseeeeseees 8 8 Figure 8 4 Trigger link input pulse specifications EXT TRIG 8 8 Figure 8 5 Trigger link output pulse specifications VMO 8 9 Figure 8 6 IDUT test Sy Stem siseses yera a E AEREE let viata leven 8 10 Figure 8 7 Trigger link connections 0 etl eeeeseeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeaeeeaeees 8 11 Figure 8 8 Operation model for triggering example eee eee 8 12 Figure 8 9 DIN to BNC trigger cable oo ee eeeceeesceeseeeeeeceneeeeeeeeeeesees 8 13 Figure 8 10 Trigger model remote operation 0 00 eeeeseeeeeeeees 8 15 9 Limits and Digital 1 O Figure 9 1 Default IMIS srs ureri aiin 9 2 Figure 9 2 Digital YO port scseisccics crscaceeetesbgassasssaacecoestsuaseasssaxeavaraceaaczades 9 5 Figure 9 3 Digital I O port simplified schematic 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 6 Figure 9 4 Controlling externally powered relays 2 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 9 Figure 9 5 NAND gate Control 2c c cccsscccstocsecesceeceesbaesenssessevesnevecsioenstees 9 10 Figure 9 6 Setup to test 100Q resistors oo sees eseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeees 9 15 Figure 9 7 Limits to sort 100Q resistors 1 5 and gt 5 00 9 16 10 Remote Operations Figure 10 1 IEFE 488 COMMeCtOr sostier insae asee 10 5 Figure 10 2 IEFE 488 Conmectons cuiere 10 6 Figure 10 3 TEEE 488 connector location eee eeeseeeseeeeeeeeereeeeeees 10 7 Figure 10 4 RS 232 interface connector oo elec eeeeeseee
73. IN gt 1x__ HIGH gt Lr E a 2V 1V OV 1V 2V LO2 LO1 HIT HI2 a Limit 1 Limit 2 When a reading is within both limits the message IN will be displayed When the reading is high or low the HIGH or LOW annunciator turns on and the number 1 or 2 will replace the IN message A 1 indicates that Limit 1 has failed while 2 indicates that Limit 2 has failed However if the reading is outside both limits the number 1 will be displayed For the limits shown in Figure 9 1 a reading of 1 5V is outside Limit 1 but inside Limit 2 The HIGH annunciator will turn on and display the number 1 For a reading of 2 5V which is outside both Limit 1 and Limit 2 the same status indication HIGH 1 will be displayed since Limit 1 takes precedence Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Limits and Digital I O 9 3 Overflow readings A reading that exceeds the present measurement range causes the OVRFLW message to be displayed The IN 1 and 2 messages are not displayed while in the overflow condition The HIGH annunciator will turn on to indicate an out of limits reading The LOW annunciator is not used for an overflow reading An overflow reading is interpreted by the Model 2700 as a positive reading even if the input signal is negative That is the reason why the LOW annunciator does not turn on NOTE When a switching module channel is
74. Opening Switching Module Channels Figure 2 1 2 wire system channel connections to Model 2700 DMM 2 7 Figure 2 2 4 wire system channel connections to Model 2700 DMM 2 8 Figure 2 3 System channel operation closing next or previous measurement Channel 0 0 cee eeeeseeeeeseceeeeseceseeseeeaeeseeees 2 9 Figure 2 4 System channel operation specifying measurement Channel to CLOSE sikeso ssiri riaan is 2 10 Figure 2 5 System channel operation opening all channels in M AMFAME sees csssveseysevivessdeeensessecscessgeeseneuseyivetevivisedeesesseees 2 11 Figure 2 6 Multiple channel operation specifying a channel tO CLOSES ueiaire ii aa E E N i 2 18 Figure 2 7 Multiple channel operation opening one or all Channels cc aseseaviestveritictessieesasepeertees iiai 2 19 Figure 2 8 Dual multiplexer configuration Model 7700 0 0 0 0 eee 2 24 Figure 2 9 Dual multiplexer application connections eee 2 25 Figure 2 10 Testing DULL csscsssscsdecdsoscesdasssensssdegassns ctaasstegveceaaevnesvaneseandees 2 27 Figure 2 11 CARD men tree sissisota iea 2 29 Figure 2 12 Model 7700 simplified schematic 2 0 0 eeeeeeeseeseeereeeeeees 2 36 3 Basic DMM Operation Figure 3 1 Line cycle synchronization 0 0 eee eeeeeseeeseereeeeeeaeenseeseeeaes 3 5 Figure 3 2 DCV and ACV connections using front panel inputs 3 9 Figure 3 3 DCV and ACV connections using Model 7700 switching MOTUL ccscscscscescsoussavseessenndnsee
75. The TRACe CLEar command clears the data store INITiate CONTinuous OFF command disables continuous initiation and TRIGger COUNt 1 configures the instrument to perform one measurement cycle The INIT command can then be used to initiate the measurement cycle When the INIT command is sent the programmed number of measurements set by the SAMPle COUNt command are performed and the respective data is temporarily stored in the sample buffer For example if 20 measurements were performed SAMP COUN 20 then 20 data arrays will be stored in the sample buffer Data from this buffer is then routed to other enabled data flow blocks The data in the sample buffer remains there until data from another measurement cycle overwrites the buffer NOTE The trigger count TRIG COUN determines how many measurement cycles are performed However only the data arrays for the last measurement cycle end up in the sample buffer For example assume TRIG COUN 2 and SAMP COUN 20 The first measurement cycle stores 20 data arrays in the sample buffer The second measurement cycle then overwrites the 20 data arrays in the sample buffer Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Signal Processing Sequence and Data Flow D 9 SENS 1 DATA LATest SENS 1 DATA FRESh These commands are used to return read the last processed data array stored in the sample buffer SENS 1 DATA LATest This command returns reads one data array It returns the la
76. To Model 27xx i Channels 12 19 u oof Channel 20 Channel 22 LO Backplane Channels 23 25 in this schematic refer to the designations used for control and not actual available channels For more information refer to the ROUTe MULTiple command section in the Model 2700 User s Manual Channels 24 and 25 can be individually controlled using ROUTe MULTiple if the module is not to be connected to the internal DMM HW 10 10 02 Rev B Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Specifications A 7 Accuracy calculations The information below discusses how to calculate accuracy for both DC and AC characteristics Calculating DC characteristics accuracy DC characteristics accuracy is calculated as follows Accuracy ppm of reading ppm of range ppm parts per million and 10ppm 0 001 As an example of how to calculate the actual reading limits assume that you are measuring 5V on the 10V range You can compute the reading limit range from one year DCV accuracy specifications as follows Accuracy 30ppm of reading Sppm of range 30ppm x 5V Sppm x 10V 150nV 50uV 200u V Thus the actual reading range is 5V 200nV or from 4 9998V to 5 0002V DC current and resistance calculations are performed in exactly the same manner using the pertinent specifications ranges and input signal values Calculating AC characteristics accuracy AC characteristics
77. To set sample count gt 1 continuous initiation must be disabled see Idle page 7 7 Note that only sample count readings are stored in the buffer See Section 8 for detailed information on the trigger model Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Scanning 7 27 Channel setup Buffer The lt clist gt parameter is used to set up scan channels For example the following examples show how to set up scan channel 101 FUNC VOLT 101 VOLT RANG 10 101 VOLT DIG 4 5 101 VOLT NPLC 3 101 Set 101 for DCV Set 101 for 10V range Set 101 for 4 digit resolution Set 101 rate for 3 PLC NOTE Inthe above command sequence channel 101 is first set for DCV before sending the other commands to set range digits and rate If channel 101 was instead set to a different function i e RESistance the VOLT commands to set range digits and rate would generate error 700 Invalid function in scanilist For front panel scanning the reading count specifies the number of readings to store in the buffer For remote scanning the sample count specifies the number of readings to store in the buffer Readings stored in the buffer by the TRAC command or by front panel data store operation must be cleared before sending INITiate or READ to take the instrument out of idle The following command clears the buffer TRACe CLEar Clear buffer Scanning commands Scanning commands are listed in Table 7 1 Add
78. Y and press ENTER 3 Finish configuring the scan by performing Step 4 and Step 5 of the Advanced scan setup procedure page 7 16 NOTE For a remote programmed monitor scan use the ROUTe MONitor POINts command to specify the number of channels to scan Table 7 1 4 While in the normal measurement state select and enable the monitor channel as explained in Scan configuration Monitor channel page 7 18 When the reading limit for the monitor channel is reached the scan will be triggered to start When the monitor channel is scanned the display will show the reading that triggered the scan If the reading limit event is still present on the monitor channel when the scan finishes the scan will be triggered to run again Note that the scan can also be run by pressing STEP or SCAN 5 To disable the monitor scan perform the following steps a To disable monitor press SHIFT and then MONITOR MON annunciator turns off b To disable limits press SHIFT and then ON OFF Press A or W to display LIMITS OFF and press ENTER 7 26 Scanning Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Remote programming scanning NOTE Scanning examples remote programming and front panel operation are provided at the end of this section Trigger model The trigger model for bus operation is shown in Figure 7 2 Bus operation is similar to front panel SCAN operation with the following significant differences Idle
79. YES and press ENTER 9 12 Limits and Digital I O Scanning Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual While limits can be configured on a per scan channel basis the digital output configuration cannot Therefore for all scan channels that are set to use limits the digital output will function according to how the Model 2700 is set up when the scan is run Remote programing limits and digital output Limits and digital output commands The limits and digital output commands are provided in Table 9 2 Table 9 2 Limits and digital I O commands Commands Description Def Ref Limit 1 commands CALCulate3 LIMit UPPer lt NRf gt Set HI1 limit lt NRf gt 4294967295 to 1 lt clist gt 4294967295 CALCulate3 LIMitl LOWer lt NRf gt Set LOI limit lt NRf gt 4294967295 to 1 lt clist gt 4294967295 CALCulate3 LIMit1 STATe lt b gt clist gt Enable disable Limit 1 test lt b gt ON or OFF a CALCulate3 LIMit1 FAIL Query test result 0 pass in 1 fail b high or low CALCulate3 LIMit1 CLEar Clear fail indication c CALCulate3 LIMit1 CLEar AUTO lt b gt Enable disable auto clear lt b gt ON or OFF ON c Limit 2 commands CALCulate3 LIMit2 UPPer lt NRf gt Set HI2 limit lt NRf gt 4294967295 to 2 lt clist gt 4294967295 CALCulate3 LIMit2 LOWer lt NRf gt Set LO2 limit lt NRf gt 4294967295 to 2 lt clist gt 4294967295 CALCulate3 LIMit2 STATe
80. accuracy is calculated similarly except that AC specifications are given as follows Accuracy of reading of range As an example of how to calculate the actual reading limits assume that you are measuring 120V 60Hz on the 750V range You can compute the reading limit range from ACV one year accuracy specifications as follows Accuracy 0 06 of reading 0 03 of range 0 0006 x 120V 0 0003 x 750V 0 072V 0 225V 0 297V In this case the actual reading range is 120V 0 297V or from 119 703V to 120 297V AC current calculations are performed in exactly the same manner using the pertinent specifications ranges and input signal values A 8 Specifications Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Calculating dBm characteristics accuracy As an example of how to calculate the actual reading limits for a 13dBm measurement with a reference impedance of 50Q assume an applied signal of 0 998815V The relationship between voltage and dBm is as follows 2 Vin Rrer dBm 10log mw From the previous example on calculating DC characteristics accuracy it can be shown that a measurement of 0 998815V on the 1V range has an uncertainty of 36 9644mV or 0 998778V to 0 998852V using one year specifications Expressing 0 998778V as dBm 0 998778V 50Q dBm 10log mw 12 99968dBm and expressing 0 998852V as dBm _ 0 998852V 50Q TimW 13 00032dBm dBm Thus the actual reading r
81. accuracy will be affected Choose the thermistor type to be used 22520 5kQ or 10kQ 2 Compare the A B and C constants from the thermistor manufacturer with those used by the Model 2700 see Table F 9 3 Select a thermistor that closely matches the A B and C constants in Table F 9 4 Analyze the differences between the two sets of curve fitting constants to determine the affect on measurement accuracy Converting K to C The temperature in Kelvin can be converted to C as follows Toc Tk 273 15 where Toc is the temperature in C Tx is the calculated Kelvin temperature Example Calculate the temperature for a Series 44007 thermistor that measures 5kQ R InR 1n 5000 8 5172 A 0 001288 B 0 0002356 C 9 557e 8 Tk 1 A BlnR C InR 1 0 001288 0 0002356 8 5172 9 557e 8 8 5172 1 0 001288 0 002007 0 000059 1 0 003354 298 15 Toc Tk 273 15 298 15 273 15 25 C F 8 Temperature Equations Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual RTD equations The temperature vs resistance readings listed in the RTD reference tables are calculated using the Callendar Van Dusen equation There are two equations based on different temperature ranges There is an equation for the 200 to 0 C range and one for the 0 to 630 C range Equation for 200 to 0 C temperature range Rerp Ro 1 AT BT CT T 100 where Rppp is the calcu
82. also places the Model 2700 in the one shot measurement mode RST Disable continuous initiation and place 2700 in one shot mode READ Trigger and return one reading When readings are stored in the buffer by the TRACe command or by front panel data store operation INIT and multi sample READ queries are locked out With readings in the buffer that were stored in that manner you cannot use the INIT or READ command if sample count is gt 1 error 225 out of memory Buffer operation is covered in Section 6 The buffer of the Model 2700 is nonvolatile Therefore readings stored in the buffer are not lost when the instrument is turned off or when RST or SYSTem PRESet is sent When writing test programs that perform multi sample measurements SAMPle COUNTt gt 1 you may want to add the TRACe CLEar command at the beginning to clear the buffer However be careful not to inadvertently clear stored readings that are needed 13 8 SCPI Signal Oriented Commands Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual MEASure lt function gt lt rang gt lt res gt lt clist gt MEASure VOLTage DC lt rang gt lt res gt lt clist gt Measure DCV MEASure VOLTage AC lt rang gt lt res gt lt clist gt Measure ACV MEASure CURRent DC lt rang gt lt res gt lt clist gt Measure DCI MEASure CURRent AC lt rang gt lt res gt lt clist gt Measure ACI MEASure RESistance lt
83. and Misc SYSTem Commands Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual FORMat ELEMents lt item list gt Parameters READing DMM reading UNITs Units TSTamp Timestamp RNUMber Reading number CHANnel Channel number LIMits Limits reading The specified elements are included in the data string in response to FETCh READ MEASure and TRACe DATA Note that each element in the item list must be separated by a comma i e send FORMat ELEMents READing UNITs TSTamp RNUMber CHANnel LIMits to include all elements in the data string The elements for the ASCii format are shown in Figure 14 1 An overflow reading is returned as 9 9E37 When a specified data element has invalid data associated with it NAN Not A Number will be the response NAN is returned as 9 9E37 Timestamp Timestamp references the returned data string to a point in time There are two timestamps relative and real time clock The following command selects the timestamp SYSTem TSTamp TYPE lt name gt Select timestamp type RELative or RTCL NOTE The real time clock timestamp can only be returned for the ASCII data format For the binary formats timestamp will not be sent with the real time clock selected The relative timestamp operates as a timer that starts at zero seconds when the instrument is turned on or when the relative timestamp is reset S YSTem TSTamp RELative RESet After 99 999 99 seconds the timer resets back to zero a
84. and event enable registers and the Error Queue are listed in Table 11 1 In addition to these commands any enable register can be reset by sending the 0 parameter value with the individual command to program the register NOTE SYSTem PRESet and RST have no effect on status structure registers and queues Table 11 1 Common and SCPI commands to reset registers and clear queues Commands Description Notes Reset registers CLS Reset all bits of the following event registers to 0 1 Standard Event Register Operation Event Register Measurement Event Register Questionable Event Register STATus PRESet Reset all bits of the following enable registers to 0 1 Operation Event Enable Register Measurement Event Enable Register Questionable Event Enable Register Clear error queue CLS Clear all messages from Error Queue 2 STATus QUEue CLEar Clear messages from Error Queue 3 SYSTem CLEar Clear messages from Error Queue 3 Notes 1 The Standard Event Enable Register is not reset by STATus PRESet or CLS Send the 0 parameter value with ESE to reset all bits of that enable register to 0 see Status byte and service request commands page 11 9 2 STATus PRESet has no effect on the Error Queue 3 Use either of the two clear commands to clear the Error Queue Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Status Structure 11 5 Programming and reading registers Programming enable registers T
85. are not intended to be used with buffer size smaller than four readings 6 12 Buffer Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual g TRACe TSTamp FORMat ABSolute DELta Select timestamp format For front panel operation both timestamp formats absolute and delta can be recalled For remote programming you can only use one timestamp at a time NOTE Changing the timestamp format clears the buffer The timestamp will only be included with a returned buffer reading if it is specified as a data element see FORMat ELEMents h TRACe FEED SENSe CALCulate NONE Select source of readings TRACe FEED CONTrol NEXT ALWays NEVer Select buffer control TRACe FEED The SENSe parameter selects readings before any enabled mX b Percent or Reciprocal math calculation For the CALCulate parameter the result of the calculation is stored in the buffer The NONE parameter disables storage into the buffer Math functions are covered in Section 5 NOTE In order to store readings in the buffer TRACe FEED cannot be set to NONE TRACe FEED CONTrol Selecting NEXT enables the buffer After the specified number of readings buffer size are stored buffer operation disables The ALWays parameter places the buffer into a continuous filling mode After the specified number of readings are stored operation wraps back to the first buffer location and overwrites the previous readings The NEVer parameter disables buffer operation i TRACe D
86. channel setup menu the displayed information indicates the present setup for the selected channel The position of the decimal point in the SETUP message indicates present range Examples S ETUP V 101 1V range for channel 101 If the AC annunciator is off the function is DCV If it is on ACV is selected SE TUP KQ 102 10kQ range for channel 102 If the 4 wire annunciator is off the function is Q2 If it is on Q4 is selected SET UP mA 121 100mA range for channel 121 If the AC annunciator is off the function is DCI If it is on ACI is selected SETUP C 103 TEMP function selected for channel 103 SETUP HZ 104 FREQ function selected for channel 104 SETUP S 105 PERIOD function selected for channel 105 SETUP PR 111 For the Model 7700 channel 111 is paired to channel 101 and cannot be changed Channel pairing occurs when Ratio or Channel Average is enabled or when a 4 wire function Q4 or 4 wire RTD TEMP is selected The annunciators indicate which of the other instrument settings are enabled for the selected channel When you edit settings for the selected channel auto range rel rate etc the related annunciators will turn on off Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Scanning 7 15 Advanced scan setup notes 1 The CHAN annunciator is on while in the scan setup menu 2 For some channel specific setups you have to configure them from a menu For example to set up and enable mX B you have to
87. close channel 102 The system channel is not affected Channels 101 102 and 125 are now closed Remote programming ROUT MULT CLOS 102 Use the MULTI option for the OPEN key open channel 101 Even though channel 101 is still being displayed on the Model 2700 it is channel 102 that is actually connected to the DMM Input channels 102 and 125 closed Remote programming ROUT MULT OPEN 101 To correctly display the channel that is closed channel 102 repeat step 1 above to open all channels and then use the p key or the RouT cLos 102 command to close and display channel 102 This closes channel 102 which is the system channel and channel 125 to connect it to the DMM Input Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Close Open Switching Module Channels 2 23 Anomaly 2 example opening the paired channel Assume 4 wire connections to a 1kQ resistor using channels 1 and 11 of the Model 7700 switching module Also assume the 04 function is selected The following procedure demonstrates how careless multiple channel operation can cause an overflow reading even though everything else from the front panel looks right Ls Use the ALL option for the OPEN key OPEN ALL to open all channels in the mainframe Remote programming ROUT OPEN ALL Press the gt key to close and display channel 101 The following channels close see Figure 2 2 e Channel 101 system channel e Channel 125 connects channel
88. closed the message I replaces the message IN to indicate that the reading is inside both Limit I and Limit 2 For limit test readings that get stored in the buffer the limits status indicators are displayed for each recalled reading When a limit test reading is returned using remote programming limit test status can be included with the reading See Section 14 FORMat commands for details When using Limits with Ratio or Ch Avg the limit values will be compared the result of the calculation and not to the individual channels Beeper A beeper is also available for limit testing There are three beeper options NEVER OUTSIDE and INSIDE These options are explained as follows NEVER With this option the beeper is disabled OUTSIDE With this option the beeper sounds when the reading is outside HIGH or LOW of Limit 1 or Limit 2 Again referring to Figure 9 1 a 1 5V reading is outside HIGH Limit 1 and the beeper will sound INSIDE With this option the beeper will sound when the reading is inside Limit 1 and or Limit 2 If the reading is inside Limit 1 the beeper will sound raspy If the reading is outside Limit 1 but inside Limit 2 the beeper will sound at a lower pitch The beeper will not sound for readings outside both limits For the limits shown in Figure 9 1 a 0 5V reading will sound the beeper at its normal pitch a 1 5V reading will sound the beeper at a lower pitch and for a 2 5V read
89. defaults see Default column of this table Places 2700 in the idle state Notes 1 SYSTem PRESet enables continuous initiation RST disables continuous initiation 2 SYSTem PRESet sets the trigger count to INF infinity RST sets the count to 1 8 18 Triggering Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Reference a ABORt With continuous initiation disabled the 2700 goes into the idle state With continuous initiation enabled operation continues at the top of the trigger model INITiate Whenever the instrument is operating within the trigger model sending this command causes an error and will be ignored INITiate CONTinuous lt b gt With continuous initiation enabled you cannot use the READ command or set sample count SAMPle COUNt greater than one FETCh READ See Section 3 Section 13 and Appendix D for details on using these commands to trigger and retrieve readings NOTE SENSe 1 DATA LATest and SENSe 1 DATA FRESh can be used to retrieve the last reading These commands are also explained in Section 3 Section 13 and Appendix D TRIGger SOURce lt name gt With the timer control source selected use the TRIGger TIMer command to set the interval DELay AUTO lt b gt The auto delay times are listed in Table 8 1 Disabling auto delay sets the delay time to 0 TRIGger SIGNal Send this action command to bypass the control source when you
90. designator Percent reference The PERCent lt NRf gt command specifies the reference value for the percent calculation while the PERCent ACQuire command uses the input signal as the reference value The ACQuire command is only functional if a reading is available If the instrument is overflowed OVERFLOW or a reading has not been triggered an execution error 200 occurs when ACQuire is sent The PERCent lt NRf gt command is coupled to the PERCent ACQuire command When a reference value is set using PERCent lt NRf gt the PERCent query command returns the programmed value When reference is set using ACQuire the PERCent query command returns the acquired reference value Reading math result CALCulate 1 DATA LATest or CALCulate DATA FRESh can be used to retrieve the result of the selected math calculation These commands do not trigger a reading They simply return the last reading string The reading reflects the result of the calculation While the instrument is performing measurements you can use these commands to return the last reading If the instrument is not performing measurements CALC DATA will keep returning the same reading string CALC DATA FRESh can only be used once to return the same reading string That is the reading must be fresh Sending this command again to retrieve the same reading string will generate error 230 data corrupt or stale or cause the G
91. do not wish to wait for the programmed event to occur The instrument must be waiting at the control source for the event when this command is sent Otherwise an error occurs and the command is ignored SAMPle COUNt A sample count gt 1 specifies how many readings will automatically be stored in the buffer However with continuous initiation enabled you cannot set the sample count greater than one SENSe 1 HOLD commands Hold cannot be set when the scanner is enabled ROUTe SCAN LSEL INT Sending a hold command will result in a settings conflict error 221 Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Triggering 8 19 Programming example The following program fragment triggers and stores in the buffer 10 readings Note that in order to send the readings to the computer you must address the Model 2700 to talk after sending READ RST Restore RST defaults TRAC CLE Clear buffer TRIG DEL 0 5 Set delay for 0 5sec SAMP COUN 10 Set sample count to 10 READ Trigger store and request readings 8 20 Triggering Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual 9 Limits and Digital O Limits Explains how to perform limit tests on measured readings Digital I O Covers the digital I O port Explains how the five digital outputs respond to the results of limit tests Remote programming limits and digital output Summarizes the commands to perform limit tests and control the dig
92. e Auto scan and auto channel configuration FACTory defaults disable auto scan and auto channel configuration while SYSTem PRESet has no effect The RST defaults front panel and remote operation have no effect e Memory buffer auto clear FACTory defaults enable buffer auto clear while SYSTem PRESet has no effect The RST defaults front panel and remote operation have no effect The instrument will power up to whichever default setup is saved as the power on setup NOTE At the factory the factory default setup is saved as the SAVO SAV1 SAV2 or SAV3 setup Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Getting Started 1 21 Saving and restoring setups Saving a user setup Pe Configure Model 2700 for the desired measurement application Press SHIFT and then SAVE to access the save setup menu Press p gt to place the cursor on the present setup SAVO SAV1 SAV2 SAV3 Use the A or W key to display the desired setup and press ENTER The instrument returns to the normal measurement state Saving a power on setup 1 Configure Model 2700 for the desired measurement application 2 Press SHIFT and then SAVE to access the save setup menu 3 Press the A key to display the present power on PWR ON setup FACT RST SAVO SAV1 SAV2 or SAV3 4 Press p to place the cursor on the present power on setup 5 Use the A or W key to display the desired setup and press ENTER The instrument returns to the normal measure
93. ecceeceeececeseeeeeececeeeneceaeeeeeeeeseeesees 1 20 Saving and restoring setups 0 0 eeeeeeceeeseeeseeeeeeeeseeeeneeeeees 1 21 Remote programming default and user setups 1 25 Remote programming information 0 esl eeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeee 1 26 Quick st rt CXErCises aineen rE E a E 1 26 Basic DMM measurements front panel inputs 1 27 Closing and opening channels system channel OPELAUION M E E T 1 29 Simple Scanning seiss isisisi ire ie eenei 1 32 Trigger and return readings remote programming 1 35 2 Closing and Opening Switching Module Channels Close open Overview oo cece eeeeeseeeeeseceseesecesecaeeeseseeesesneeeaeesaees 2 2 Switching module installation and connections Lee 2 3 Module installation oo ee eeeeseeseeeeceeeeseceeeeaeesseeseenees 2 3 COMME CHONG E susie see cp Seuds ances A E 2 4 PSCUGOCALS ismena a E E RE A hvaets 2 5 System channel operation 20 0 eee seeeeeeeseceeeeseeeseeseeeeseeeeeeees 2 6 2 Wite TUNCHONS sssri arinei iese KE E ateacensetougenses 2 7 4 wire functions paired channels cceeseeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 2 8 Controlling the system channel sseeeeeeeeseeeeereererrereresreee 2 9 Non amp and non measure switching modules 2 14 Multiple channel operation 2 0 0 cece eeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeees 2 16 Controlling multiple channels 2 0 0 lee eeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeees 2 17 Multiple channel operation anomalies
94. error EE 473 Frequency gain error EE 474 1K Ohm loff Ocomp FS error EE 475 10K Ohm loff Ocomp FS error EE 476 Temperature Cold Cal error EE 477 Analog output zero error EE 478 Analog output pos gain error EE 479 Analog output neg gain error EE 480 1k 4 w dckt Ioff zero error EE 481 1k 4 w dckt Ion zero error EE 482 1k 4 w dckt Ioff full scale EE 483 1k 4 w dckt Ion full scale error EE 484 100 4 w dckt Ioff zero error EE 485 100 4 w dckt Ion zero error EE 486 100 4 w ocomp Ion zero error EE 487 100 4 w ocomp Ion full scale EE 488 100 4 w dckt Ioff full scale EE 489 100 4 w dckt Ion full scale EE 490 10 4 w dckt Ioff zero error EE 491 10 4 w dckt Ion zero error EE 492 10 4 w dckt full scale error EE 493 10 4 w full scale error EE 494 10 4 w ocomp Ion zero error EE 495 10 4 w ocomp Ion full scale EE Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Table C 1 continued Status and error messages Status and Error Messages Number Description Event 496 1 4 w dckt Ioff zero error EE 497 1 4 w dckt Ion zero error EE 498 1 4 w dckt Ion full scale error EE 499 1V 10Hz frequency error EE 500 Calibration data invalid EE 510 Reading buffer data lost EE 511 GPIB address lost EE 512 Power on state lost EE 513 AC calibration data lost EE 514 DC calibration data lost EE 515 Calibration dates lost EE 516 Battery backed RAM error EE 517 Cannot resume scan EE 518 Card calibration data lost
95. for both scan channels are controlled by the primary channel After the calculation is enabled the range setting can be independently set for both the primary and paired channel 4 Before the calculation is enabled rel can be independently set for both the primary and paired channel In general set up rel from the normal measurement state then go into the advanced menu and enable rel for the primary and or paired channel See Relative page 5 2 for details on setting rel for scan channels 5 Settings such as NPLC aperture bandwidth OCOMP etc are ignored on the paired channel These settings are controlled by the primary channel 6 For remote programming the lt clist gt parameter is used to configure channels for a scan Table 5 3 Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Rel Math Ratio Channel Average dB 5 19 Remote programming ratio and channel average Ratio and channel average commands The ratio and channel average are listed in Table 5 3 Details on these commands follow the table NOTE Queries are not included in Table 5 3 All the math commands are provided in Table 15 5 Table 5 3 Ratio and channel average commands Commands Description Def SENSe 1 Optional root command RATio STATe lt b gt lt clist gt Enable disable ratio lt b gt ON or OFF OFF RATio DELay lt NRf gt lt clist gt Set delay in secs lt NRf gt 0 to 99999999 0 5 CAVerage STA
96. from the sample buffer With a math function enabled the readings are the result of the math calculation The following conditions must be met in order to use READ e Continuous initiation must be disabled It can be disabled by sending RST or INIT CONT OFF e If there are readings stored in the data store the sample count SAMP COUN must be set to 1 To use a sample count gt 1 the data store must be cleared empty It can be cleared by sending TRAC CLE Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Signal Processing Sequence and Data Flow D 11 MEASure The MEASure command places the instrument in a one shot measurement mode which places one data array in the sample buffer and then performs a READ With no math function enabled the one data array in the sample buffer is read With a math function enabled the reading is the result of the math calculation CALC 1 DATA LATest CALC 1 DATA FRESh These two commands are similar to the LATest and FRESh commands for the SENSel subsystem except that returned data arrays are the result of the math calculation See SENS 1 DATA LATest and SENS 1 DATA FRESh for details on the differences between LATest and FRESh With a math function enabled both CALC 1 DATA and CALC 1 DATA FRESh return a single data array whose reading is the result of the math calculation Note that the calculation is performed on the last data array stored in the sample bu
97. handshaking 10 19 Signal processing sequence D 2 Slot numbering 2 5 Software 1 6 Source mode Logic control 9 10 SPE SPD serial polling 11 8 Specifications A 1 Speed Setting measurement speed 4 9 vs noise characteristics 4 8 Standard event status 11 12 Status and error messages C 1 Status byte and service request SRQ 11 6 Commands 11 9 Status indicators GPIB 10 10 Status structure 11 1 Overview 11 2 STEP 7 7 7 17 Operation overview 7 7 Switching modules 1 3 1 7 Cables and connector kits 1 5 Closing and opening channels 1 29 2 1 Connections 2 3 Identifying installed 1 10 2 28 Installation 2 3 Model 7700 2 34 Queries 2 31 Viewing closed channels 2 28 System channel Control commands 2 12 Controlling 2 9 Operation 1 29 2 6 SYSTem commands 14 8 Summary 15 21 SYSTem BEEPer STATe lt b gt 14 9 SYSTem KEY lt NRf gt 14 8 SYSTem PRESet 14 8 SYSTem VERSion 14 8 Temperature Best temperature sensor 3 33 Equations F 1 Measurements see Temperature measurements Temperature measurements 3 33 4 wire RTDs 3 36 Configuration 3 40 Connections 3 36 Procedure 3 43 Thermistors 3 35 Thermocouples 3 33 Terminator 10 19 Tests Continuity see Continuity testing Thermal EMFs 3 15 Minimizing E 4 Thermistors 3 35 Connections 3 39 Equation F 6 Temperature measurement configuration 3 41 Thermocouples 3 33 Color codes 3 38 Connections 3 36 Equation F 2 Open thermocouple detection 3 35 Reference junctions see Ref
98. high humidity environment use Teflon insulated cables to minimize errors due to cable leakage Standard resistance measurements NOTE Make sure the INPUTS switch is in the correct position To use front panel inputs it must be in the F out position For switching modules it must be in the R in position Perform the following steps to measure resistance 1 Ifa switching channel is presently closed displayed press OPEN to open it 2 Select the ohms measurement function by pressing Q2 or Q4 3 Use the RANGE A and W keys to select a measurement range consistent with the expected resistance or press AUTO to select autoranging AUTO annunciator turns on Details on range are provided in Section 4 4 Connect the resistance s to be measured CAUTION Front panel inputs Do not apply more than 1000V peak between INPUT HI and LO or instrument damage may occur Model 7700 switching module Do not apply more than 300V DC or 300V RMS 425V peak for AC waveforms between input high H or input low L or switching module damage may occur 5 Ifusing a switching module perform the following steps to close the desired channel Keep in mind that for Q4 measurements you will close the primary INPUT channel 1 through 10 The paired channel will close automatically a Press the CLOSE key b Use lt gt A and W to key in the channel number and press ENTER The previously closed channel s if any wi
99. in Figure 3 3 For basic DCV and ACV measurements Figure 3 3A and B channels 1 through 20 can be used Ratio and channel average calculations Ratio calculates the reading ratio of two channels while channel average calculates the reading average of two channels For these calculations paired switching channels are used Primary channels through 10 are paired to channels 11 through 20 channel 1 paired to channel 11 channel 2 paired to channel 12 and so on As shown in Figure 3 3C one DC voltage source is connected to a primary channel i e 104 and the other source is connected to its paired channel i e 114 NOTE The ratio and channel average calculations are covered in Section 5 Figure 3 3 DCV and ACV connections using Model 7700 switching module Caution Maximum input 300VDC or RMS 1A switched 60W 125VA maximum Model 7700 Switching Module DC Voltage Source Model 7700 Switching Module AC Voltage Source B ACV Connections DC DC Voltage _ _ _ Voltage Source Source C Ratio and Channel Average Connections DCV Note The low connections for channels 1 through 10 do not need to be referenced to the low connections for channels 11 through 20 Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Basic DMM Operation 3 11 Volts measurement procedure NOTE Make sure the INPUTS switch is in the correct position To use front panel inputs it must be in the F out position
100. indicate that the integrity of the temperature reading is questionable 3 With a Model 7700 7706 or 7708 installed the default sensor junction is Internal Otherwise the Simulated 23 C junction is selected 4 The RST default is OFF and the SYSTem PRESet default is ON 3 52 Basic DMM Operation Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Reference a FUNCtion lt name gt lt clist gt Note that the lt name gt parameters in the table are enclosed in single quotes However double quotes can instead be used For example FUNC VOLT AC FUNC VOLT AC Scan configuration When using the lt clist gt command to configure a scan channel the scan channel must first be set to the appropriate function before sending other commands to configure it For example to set scan channel 101 to use offset compensated ohms the following command sequence would be sent FUNC FRES 101 Set scan channel 101 to Q4 function FRES OCOM ON 101 Enable offset compensated ohms for scan channel 101 If scan channel 101 was not set first for the Q4 function the following errors will occur for the following operations e Error 221 Settings conflict will occur when trying to enable offset compensated ohms for that channel Error 700 Invalid function in scanlist will occur when trying to query the state of offset compensated ohms for that channel FRES OCOM ON 101 Det
101. installed modules OPT and summarizes other query commands that can be used to acquire information about the installed modules e Model 7700 switching module Covers operating characteristics that are unique to the Model 7700 Also includes a simplified schematic diagram of the switching module 2 2 Close Open Switching Module Channels Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Close open overview NOTE This section covers basic close open operations for switching module channels It also covers the operating characteristics that are unique to the Model 7700 switching module There are two modes of close open operation e System channel operation This is the mode of operation that should be used exclusively by most if not all users When you close an input channel or channel pair other channels on the switching module close automatically to internally connect it the DMM of the Model 2700 e Multiple channel operation This mode of operation provides additional flexibility by providing individual control of each switching module channel However careless operation could create a safety hazard and or damage the switching module and other equipment Multiple channel operation should only be used by experienced test engineers CAUTION WARNING To prevent damage to a switching module do not exceed the maximum signal level input for that module Most switching modules are rated for 303V The following command
102. is only functional if the instrument is on the specified function For example If the instrument is on the DCV function the only valid acquire command is VOLT DC REF ACQ Also if the instrument is overflowed COVERFLOW or a reading has not been triggered an execution error 200 occurs when ACQuire is sent The REFerence lt n gt command is coupled to the ACQuire command When a rel value is set using REFerence lt n gt the REFerence query command returns the programmed value When rel is set using ACQuire the REFerence query command returns the acquired rel value Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Rel Math Ratio Channel Average dB 5 7 Rel programming examples Example 1 The following command sequence zeroes the display for DCV NOTE The following example can be run from the KE2700 Instrument Driver using the example named Relativel in Table H 1 of Appendix H FUNC VOLT Select DCV VOLT REF ACQ Use input level as rel value for DCV VOLT REF STAT ON Enable rel Example 2 The following command sequence configures channel 101 of the Model 7700 to enable rel and use a 1V rel value when it is scanned NOTE The following example can be run from the KE2700 Instrument Driver using the example named Relative2 in Table H 1 of Appendix H FUNC VOLT 101 Select DCV for channel 101 VOLT REF 1 101 Set 1V rel value VOLT REF STAT ON 10
103. is the FACTORY RST and SYSTem PRESet default Readings are displayed in engineering units i e 100 23mV while annunciators indicate various states of operation See Front panel summary page 1 10 for a complete listing of display annunciators NOTE The display test allows you to test display digit segments and annunciators The key test checks the functionality of front panel keys These tests are accessed by pressing SHIFT and then TEST Refer to the Model 2700 Service Manual for details Status and error messages Status and error messages are displayed momentarily During operation and programming you will encounter a number of front panel messages Typical messages are either of status or error variety as listed in Appendix C Remote programming display Using remote programming the Model 2700 can display a custom ASCII message up to 12 characters Also the front panel display and controls can be disabled Display commands The commands are listed in Table 1 3 Details on these commands follow the table Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Getting Started 1 19 NOTE Optional command words and queries are not included in Table 1 3 Table 15 2 provides an unabridged list of all display commands Table 1 3 Display commands Command Description Default DISPlay TEXT DATA lt a gt Define message lt a gt ASCH characters none up to 12 DISPlay TEXT STATe lt b gt Enabl
104. lt b gt Enable disable Limit 1 test lt b gt ON or OFF a lt clist gt CALCulate3 LIMit2 FAIL Query test result 0 pass in 1 fail b high or low CALCulate3 LIMit2 CLEar Clear fail indication c CALCulate3 LIMit2 CLEar AUTO lt b gt Enable disable auto clear lt b gt ON or OFF ON c Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Limits and Digital I O 9 13 Table 9 2 continued Limits and digital I O commands Commands Description Def Ref Digital output commands CALCulate3 OUTPut LSENse lt name gt Set logic sense lt name gt AHIGh or ALOW AHIGh CALCulate3 OUTPut STATe lt b gt Enable disable digital outputs lt b gt ON or OFF OFF CALCulate3 OUTPut PULSe TIMe lt NRf gt Set output pulse time in secs lt NRf gt 0 001 0 002 to 99999 999 CALCulate3 OUTPut PULSe STATe lt b gt Enable disable pulse output lt b gt ON or OFF OFF CALCulate3 MLIMit LATChed lt b gt Enable disable master limit latch OFF Channel list parameter lt clist gt SCH where S Mainframe slot number 1 or 2 CH Switching module channel number must be 2 digits Examples 101 Slot 1 Channel 1 101 203 Slot 1 Channel 1 and Slot 2 Channel 3 101 110 Slot 1 Channels 1 through 10 The lt clist gt parameter is used to configure one or more channels for a scan NOTE When measurements are performed the readings are fed to other ena
105. module must also be rated for 1000V Dangerous arcs of an explosive nature in a high energy circuit can cause severe personal injury or death If the multimeter is connected to a high energy circuit when set to a current range low resistance range or any other low impedance range the circuit is virtually shorted Dangerous arcing can result even when the multimeter is set to a voltage range if the minimum voltage spacing is reduced in the external connections For details to safely make high energy measurements see Section 3 High energy circuit safety precautions page 3 3 As described in the International Electrotechnical Commission IEC Standard IEC 664 the Model 2700 is Installation Category I and must not be connected to mains For the Model 7700 detailed connection and wiring information is provided in Appendix B of this manual Model 7700 Connection Guide Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Close Open Switching Module Channels 2 5 Pseudocards Using remote programming you can assign a pseudocard to an empty switching module slot With a pseudocard installed the Model 2700 will operate as if the switching module is installed in the Model 2700 This feature allows you exercise open close scan operations or configure your system without having the actual switching module installed in the unit There is a pseudocard for every Keithley Model 77XX series switching module A pseudocard cannot be ins
106. not support amps measurements System channel operation cannot be used to close channels while an amps function DCI or ICI is selected If an amps function DCI or ACI is selected and you attempt to close a system channel the message NO AMPS CHAN will be displayed briefly For remote programming error 222 Parameter data out of range is generated Example SYST PRES SENS FUNC CURR DC Selects DCI function ROUT CLOS 101 Attempts to close system channel 101 Generates r error 222 Restores system preset defaults If a system channel is already closed and you attempt to select the DCI or ACI function the message INVALID FUNC will be displayed briefly For remote programming error 221 Settings conflict is generated Example SYST PRES Restores system preset defaults ROUT CLOS 101 Close system channel 101 SENS FUNC CURR DC Attempts to select DCI function Generates X error 221 Making amps measurements In order to perform amps measurements you must use the front panel inputs of the 2700 mainframe You can still use the non amps module for other aspects of the test but you must use multiple channel operation to close channels Example NOTE In order to use the front panel inputs make sure the INPUT switch is in the out F position SYST PRES Restores system preset defaults ROUT MULT CLOS 101 Closes channel 101 SENS FUNC CURR DC Selects DCI function
107. number of readings have been stored in the buffer The TRACe NOTify command specifies the number of stored readings that will set this bit see Section 6 for details Bit B7 Buffer Available BAV Set bit indicates that there are at least two readings in the buffer Bit B8 Buffer Half Full BHF Set bit indicates that the trace buffer is half full Bit B9 Buffer Full BF Set bit indicates that the trace buffer is full NOTE A programming example to read the BHF bit is provided in Example 3 Read BHF bit of measurement event register on page 11 21 Bit B10 Buffer Overflow BOF Set bit indicates that the filled buffer has wrapped and written over previously stored readings Bit B11 Hardware Limit Event HL Set bit indicates that a reading has exceeded the hardware limit Bit B12 Buffer Quarter Full BQF Set bit indicates that the trace buffer is one quarter full NOTE Bits B12 full and B13 full are not intended to be used with buffer sizes smaller than four readings 11 16 Status Structure Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Bit B13 Buffer Three Quarter Full BTF Set bit indicates that the trace buffer is three quarters full Bit B14 Master Limit ML Set bit indicates that one or more of the other limits have been reached or exceeded Bit B15 Not used Figure 11 6 Measurement event status Measurement Condition Register Meas
108. of range 0 1 0 to 10 WINDow Query filter window COUNt lt n gt lt clist gt Specify filter count 1 to 100 10 COUNt lt clist gt Query filter count STATe lt b gt lt clist gt Enable or disable filter Note 4 STATe lt clist gt Query state of digital filter DETector Path to set bandwidth Sec 4 BANDwidth lt NRf gt Set AC detector bandwidth in Hertz 30 lt clist gt 3 to 3e5 BANDwidth lt clist gt Query bandwidth 15 14 SCPI Reference Tables Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Table 15 5 continued SENSe command summary Default Command Description parameter Ref SCPI SENSe 1 RESistance Path to configure resistance Sec 3 v APERture lt n gt lt clist gt Set integration rate in seconds 60Hz Note 2 Sec 4 1 67e 4 to 1 50Hz 2e 4 to 1 APERture lt clist gt Query aperture integration rate NPLCycles lt n gt lt clist gt Set integration rate in line cycles 60Hz 5 0 Sec4 Vv 0 01 to 60 50Hz 0 01 to 50 NPLCycles lt clist gt Query line cycle integration rate v RANGe Path to set measurement range Sec4 v UPPer lt n gt lt clist gt Select range 0 to 120e6 120e6 Jv UPPer lt clist gt Query range Jv AUTO lt b gt lt clist gt Enable or disable auto range ON y AUTO lt clist gt Query state of auto range y DIGits lt p gt lt clist gt Specify measurement resolu
109. old reading When an instrument setting that is relevant to the readings in the sample buffer is changed the FETCh command will cause error 230 data corrupt or stale or a bus time out to occur To get FETCh working again a new reading must be triggered Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual SCPI Signal Oriented Commands 13 7 READ Description This command is typically used with the instrument in the one shot measurement mode to trigger and acquire a specified number of read ings The SAMPle COUNt command is used to specify the number of readings see Trigger Subsystem Note that with sample count gt 1 the readings are stored in the buffer When this command is sent the following commands execute in the order they are presented ABORt INITiate FETCh When ABORt is executed the instrument goes into the idle state if continuous initiation is disabled If continuous initiation is enabled the operation re starts at the beginning of the Trigger Model If the instrument is in the idle state INITiate takes the instrument out of the idle state If continuous initiation is enabled INITiate CONTinuous ON then the INITiate command generates error 213 init ignored NOTE If continuous initiation is enabled the READ command will generate NOTE error 213 init ignored It can be disabled by sending INITiate CONTinuous OFF The RST command can also be used to disable continuous initiation It
110. outputted with each DATA or each buffer reading in a TRAC DATA RNUMber is reading number TSTamp is Timestamp as set by the SYST TSTamp TYPE command The other elements should be self explanatory The query acts the same as 2000 except there are six possible elements instead of 3 Therefore if only READ is selected then FORM ELEMents returns the string READ The LIMits are returned in ASCII format as a four bit number abcd where a corresponds to High Limit 2 b is Low Limit 2 c is High Limit 1 and d is Low Limit 1 A zero in the bit position indicates a passing limit while a 1 indicates failure In the binary formats the limit information must be decoded from the value 0 15 returned where the MSB is High Limit 2 and the LSB is Low Limit 1 For example a value of 10 returned in the limits field would indicate that High Limit 2 and High Limit 1 both failed Real time timestamps are not available for output data formats other than ASCII The element TSTamp can still be selected and will show up when FORM ELEM is queried but no timestamp will be included in the output data Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Buffer 6 15 m CALCulate2 FORMat lt name gt Select buffer statistic CALCulate2 STATe ON OFF Control on off buffer statistic CALCulate2 IMMediate Calculate data in buffer CALCulate2 IMMediate Calculate and read result CALCulate2 DATA2 Read result of statistic calculation lt name gt MINimum MAXimum
111. provided with the Models 2700 2701 and 2750 The driver supports programming in LabView LabWindows CVI Visual Basic and C Test examples provided by the KE2700 Instrument Driver are listed in Table H 1 and Table H 2 Some of the examples demonstrate the simple command sequence examples that are used throughout this manual These examples include a reference to appropriate manual section in the References column of the tables Visual Basic and CVI C examples Table H 1 lists the Visual Basic and CVI C examples and Use Cases that are provided with the KE2700 Instrument Driver By default Visual Basic examples are installed in Program Files Keithley Instruments KE2700 Examples VB and CVI examples are installed in Program Files Keithley Instruments KE2700 Examples CVI Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual KE2700 Instrument Driver Examples H 3 Table H 1 Visual Basic and CVI C examples Name Manual Reference Brief Description Advancel None Use Case 1 40 channel scan using 7708 module e 30 channels DCV 10V range e 10 channels type T thermocouple temperature e Measurement speed rate 1 plc e Filter Disabled no filtering e Buffer Store 160 reading strings Buffer elements include reading channel and real time clock e Triggering Timer scan 40 channels every one minute e Data retrieval SRQ when buffer 4 12 3 4 and full Advance2 None
112. queries maximum module voltage SYSTem CARDx VMAX Request maximum allowable voltage for CARDx where x is the slot number for the module For system channel operation the instrument will display the OVERFLOW message when the maximum allowable voltage for the module is being exceeded However for multiple channel operation the OVERFLOW message will not occur until the maximum voltage of the mainframe not module is exceeded Therefore the OVERFLOW message would occur only if 1010V is exceeded Careless multiple channel operation could create an electric shock hazard that could result in severe injury or death Improper operation can also cause damage to the switching modules and external circuitry Multiple channel operation should be restricted to experienced test engineers who recognize the dangers associated with multiple channel closures NOTE The Model 2700 can scan switching module channels Each channel in the scan can have its own unique setup configuration Scanning is covered in Section 7 NOTE Whena setup is saved as a user setup SAVO SAVI SAV2 or SAV3 closed channels are also saved When the setup is restored those channels and only those channels will be closed see Defaults and user setups page 1 20 Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Close Open Switching Module Channels 2 3 Switching module installation and connections In order to exercise close open
113. ratio channel average buffer etc of the Model 2700 disabled the input signal is conditioned and measured A D conversion process The reading is then displayed on the Model 2700 Based on the selected measurement function and range signal conditioning transforms the input signal into a DC voltage that is applied to the A D converter The A D Conversion Process measures the DC signal voltage and internal voltages that correspond to offsets zero and amplifier gains For TC temperature measurements using a switching module that has an internal reference junction i e Model 7700 the internal temperature is also measured These measurements are used in an algorithm to accurately calculate the reading of the input signal The voltage current resistance frequency or period or temperature reading is then displayed by the Model 2700 NOTE The multiple measurement process used by the A D converter is known as autozeroing It can be disabled to increase speed only the signal is measured However stability and accuracy will be affected over time and changes in temperature Figure D 1 Basic signal processing Input Signal Signal Conditioning A D Conversion Process Display Reading Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Signal Processing Sequence and Data Flow D 3 Signal processing using instrument features Figure D 2 shows the processing sequence for an input signal with various instrument featu
114. simulated reference junction for thermocouple temperature measurements An ice bath as shown in Figure 3 14A serves as an excellent cold junction since it is relatively easy to hold the temperature to 0 C Notice that copper wires are used to connect the thermocouple to the Model 2700 input NOTE The positive lead of the type T thermocouple is made of copper Therefore that lead can be connected directly to the input of the Model 7700 It does not have to be maintained at the simulated reference temperature i e immersed in ice bath For the Model 7700 switching module you can also use a simulated reference junction as shown in Figure 3 14B or you can connect the thermocouple wires directly to the screw terminals internal reference junction as shown in Figure 3 14C Using a simulated reference junction may be inconvenient but it will provide more accurate temperature measurements assuming the user enters a precise reference temperature Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Basic DMM Operation 3 37 With open thermocouple detection disabled the Model 2700 can calculate the average temperature of two thermocouple channels using Channel Average see Section 5 for details As shown in Figure 3 14D one thermocouple is connected to a primary channel 1 through 10 and the other thermocouple is connected to its paired channel 11 through 20 Channel 1 is paired to channel 11 channel 2 is paired to channel 12 and so on Kee
115. start of the 2 channel scan Trigger pulse requirements and trigger cable connections are covered in Section 7 NOTE For this example the front panel TRIG key can be used in place of an external input trigger Each time the TRIG key is pressed the 2 channel scan will run One channel 101 measures temperature and the other channel 102 measures resistance The two readings are stored in the buffer Each time the scan is run the two readings will be appended added to the buffer A type K thermocouple is used to measure temperature Since the internal cold reference junction of the Model 7700 is being used the thermocouple can be connected directly to the screw terminals of the switching module 7 34 Scanning Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Operation A simplified model of external trigger scan operation is shown in Figure 7 4 while the procedure steps and programming commands are listed in Table 7 2 As shown in the operation model when the scan is enabled channel 101 closes and the Model 2700 waits for an external trigger When the trigger is received channels 101 and 102 are measured Operation then returns to the control source where it waits for another trigger NOTE After the scan is enabled Table 7 2 step 5 the TRIG key can be used to trigger the scan Figure 7 4 External trigger scan example Enable Scan Close Chan 101 Wait For Trigger 2 Measurements 2 Open Last Cha
116. test This setup will be used for all selected channels in the scan Press SHIFT and then CONFIG to access the scan setup menu Press the A or W key to display INT SIMPLE and press ENTER Set the minimum channel MIN CHAN for the scan and press ENTER Set the maximum channel MAX CHAN for the scan and press ENTER Enable YES or disable NO the timer and press ENTER See STEP and SCAN keys for details on timer operation OY Ae eS Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual If you enabled the timer set the timer interval using the hour minute second format The timer can be set from 0 001 sec 00H 00M 00 001S to 99 hrs 99 min 99 999 sec 99H 99M 99 999S Note that pressing the AUTO key sets the timer to 0 001 sec With the desired interval displayed press ENTER The displayed reading count RDG CNT sets the number of channels to scan STEP or the number of scans to run SCAN You can change the reading count to any finite value from 2 to 55000 or you can select infinite continuous scanning To select infinite set the reading count to 000000 to display INF See Trigger models page 7 4 for details on reading count With the desired reading count setting displayed press ENTER to return to the normal measurement display state Advanced scan For an advanced scan each enabled channel can have its own unique setup Channels that are disabled are excluded from the scan list When you enter the
117. the LSD and a is the MSD For example the value 10 converted to its binary equivalent is1010 That means High Limit 2 and High Limit 1 have failed FORMat BORDer lt name gt Parameters NORMal Normal byte order for IEEE 754 binary format SWAPped Reverse byte order for IEEE 754 binary format For normal byte order the data format for each element is sent as follows Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Single precision Byte 1 Byte 2 sts Byte 8 Double precision For reverse byte order data is sent as follows Byte 4 Byte 3 Byte 2 Byte Single precision Byte 8 Byte 7 as Byte 1 Double precision The 0 header Figure 14 2 is not affected by this command The header is always sent at the beginning of the data string The ASCII data format can only be sent in the normal byte order The SWAPped selection is ignored when the ASCII format is selected NOTE The SWAPped byte order must be used when transmitting binary data to any IBM PC 14 8 FORMat and Misc SYSTem Commands Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Miscellaneous SYSTem commands SYSTem commands not covered in other sections of the manual are documented here Table 15 7 lists all SYSTem commands and provides references on where to find more information SYSTem PRESet Returns the instrument to states optimized for front panel operation SYSTem PRESet defaults are listed in the SCPI tables in Section 15 NOTE For RS 232 operation and in som
118. the buffer location number and a timestamp The data store also provides statistical data on the measured readings stored in the buffer These include minimum maximum average peak to peak and standard deviation NOTE When scanning the readings are automatically stored in the buffer NOTE The various instrument operations including buffer operation are performed on the input signal in a sequential manner See Signal processing sequence page D 2 for details It includes flowcharts showing where in the processing sequence that buffer operations occur Front panel buffer Auto clear With buffer auto clear enabled the buffer is cleared readings lost before a new storage operation starts The buffer can be manually cleared by setting the number of readings to store buffer size to 000000 NOTE When editing the reading count over the front panel press AUTO to reset the count to 000000 You can then press lt ENTER gt to clear the buffer When buffer auto clear is disabled the buffer is not cleared and the buffer size is set to 55000 Each subsequent storage operation appends the readings to the buffer When the buffer fills with 55 000 readings the storage process stops The 55 000 readings are cleared before the next storage operation starts Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Buffer 6 3 With buffer auto clear disabled the only two valid buffer size values are 55000 and 000000 Buffer size 000000 cle
119. the external triggering mode 7 24 Scanning Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Monitor scan analog trigger A channel can be assigned as a monitor channel When the monitor channel detects that a reading limit has been reached the scan will be triggered to start There are four reading limits that can be used to trigger the start of the scan low limit 1 LLIM1 high limit 1 HLIM1 low limit 2 LLIM2 and high limit 2 HLIM2 The scan will start when any enabled reading limit event is detected by the monitor channel Details on Limits are provided in Section 9 NOTE An overflow reading OVRFLW message displayed is interpreted by the Model 2700 as a positive reading even if the input signal is negative This could inadvertently trigger a monitor scan For example assume the monitor channel is monitoring a negative input signal and the instrument is configured to trigger a monitor scan if a positive input signal is detected If for some reason the negative input signal exceeds the measurement range the overflow reading will be interpreted as positive and trigger the start of the scan Perform the following steps to run a monitor scan NOTE The last enabled scan function STEP or SCAN will be used for the monitor scan 1 Perform Step 1 and Step 2 of the Advanced scan setup procedure page 7 16 to set up scan channels With the channel to be used as the monitor selected set and enable lim
120. the maximum signal levels of the instruments and accessories as defined in the specifications and operating information and as shown on the instrument or test fixture panels or switching card When fuses are used in a product replace with same type and rating for continued protection against fire hazard Chassis connections must only be used as shield connections for measuring circuits NOT as safety earth ground connections If you are using a test fixture keep the lid closed while power is applied to the device under test Safe operation requires the use of a lid interlock Ifa screw is present connect it to safety earth ground using the wire recommended in the user documentation The uN symbol on an instrument indicates that the user should refer to the operating instructions located in the manual The A symbol on an instrument shows that it can source or measure 1000 volts or more including the combined effect of normal and common mode voltages Use standard safety precautions to avoid personal contact with these voltages The e symbol indicates a connection terminal to the equipment frame The WARNING heading in a manual explains dangers that might result in personal injury or death Always read the associated information very carefully before performing the indicated procedure The CAUTION heading in a manual explains hazards that could damage the instrument Such damage may invalidate the warranty Instrumentation and accessor
121. the result of the calculation will be displayed Note that the calculation will be applied to all measurement functions To disable mX b again press SHIFT and then MATH The MATH annunciator will turn off 5 10 Rel Math Ratio Channel Average dB Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual mX b rel The mX b function can be used to manually establish a rel value To do this set the scale factor m to 1 and set the offset b to the rel value Each subsequent reading will be the difference between the actual input and the rel value offset Percent This math function determines percent deviation from a specified reference value The percent calculation is performed as follows Input Reference x 100 Reference where Input is the normal display reading Reference is the user entered constant Percent is the displayed result Percent NOTE When using Rel the rel ed reading of the input signal is used by the percent calculation Percent configuration 1 Press SHIFT and then MATH to display the math menu 2 Press the RANGE A or W key to display PERCENT and press ENTER to display the present reference value REF 1 000000 A factory default 3 Key in the reference value The lt and gt keys control cursor position and the A and w keys increment decrement the digit value To change range place the cursor on the multiplier and use the A and W keys m x0 001 A x1 K x1000 and M x1 000
122. then continuously read the status byte to determine when the OPC bit sets When OPC sets bit B5 ESB in the status byte sets Since this time you only want to read bit B5 a different mask will be needed B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 BI BO 0 0 1 0 0 O 0O 0 Mask to read B5 decimal 32 When a returned value for STB is AND ed with the above mask it will read 0 OPC clear or 32 OPC set NOTE More information on OPC is provided in Section 12 11 22 Status Structure Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Queues The Model 2700 uses two queues which are first in first out FIFO registers e Output Queue Used to hold reading and response messages e Error Queue Used to hold error and status messages The Model 2700 status model Figure 11 1 shows how the two queues are structured with the other registers Output queue The Output Queue holds data that pertains to the normal operation of the instrument For example when a query command is sent the response message is placed in the Output Queue When data is placed in the Output Queue the Message Available MAV bit in the Status Byte Register sets A data message is cleared from the Output Queue when it is read The Output Queue is considered cleared when it is empty An empty Output Queue clears the MAV bit in the Status Byte Register A message is read from the Output Queue by addressing the Model 2700 to talk after the appropriate query is sent
123. this query It will continue to give the same result until one of two things has happened e A new reading has been triggered The old reading has been invalidated by changing ranges or by changing function Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Basic DMM Operation 3 57 Where appropriate Since this query does not trigger a reading and can give duplicate results there are not many cases where this command should be used The DATA FRESh query see page 3 47 is often a better choice If this query is used the following conditions should be met e A reading has been triggered either by free running INIT CONT ON and TRIG SOUR IMM by some event such as a bus trigger TRG or by an external trigger TRIG SOUR EXT e Itis confirmed that the reading is completed either by the setting of the RAV bit in the status model or by allowing sufficient time to pass for the reading to complete READ What it does This command performs three actions It will reset the trigger model to the idle layer equivalent to the ABORt command take the trigger model out of idle equivalent to the INIT command and return a reading equivalent to a FETCh query This command will always return a new reading since aborting the trigger model will invalidate any old readings and trigger a new one This query will wait for a new reading to become available before the instrument sends a result back Limitations
124. to 6 digits From the front panel setting digits for one function affects all the other functions For example if you set DCV for 3 digits the other functions will also set to 3 2 digits For remote programming each mainframe input function can have its own unique digits setting Digits has no effect on the remote reading format The number of displayed digits does not affect accuracy or speed Speed is set by the RATE key Setting display resolution To set display resolution press the DIGITS key until the desired number of digits is displayed 4 6 Range Digits Rate Bandwidth and Filter Scanning Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual When a simple scan is configured the present digits setting will apply to all channels in the scan When an advanced scan is configured each channel can have its own unique digits setting Details to configure and run a scan are provided in Section 7 For remote programming the lt clist gt parameter is used to configure channels for a scan Remote programming digits Digits commands The commands to control display resolution digits are listed in Table 4 3 Additional information on these commands follow the table NOTE Query commands are not included in Table 4 3 All commands for the SENSe subsystem are provided in Table 15 5 Table 4 3 Digits commands Commands Description Default SENSe 1 Optional root command VOLTage DC DIGits lt n gt l
125. to route a signal into channel 1 and out channel 20 of a Model 7700 switching module You would do this by closing channels 1 20 and 23 If you open channels 24 and 25 you will isolate the input signal from the DMM of Model 2700 Multiple channel operation allows any channel or channels in the test system to be closed or opened It allows more than one measurement channel to be closed at the same time It also allows individual control of non measurement channels such as backplane isolation channels Multiple channel operation should only be performed by experienced test system engineers WARNING Careless multiple channel operation could create an electric shock hazard that could result in severe injury or death Improper operation can also cause damage to the switching modules and external circuitry Multiple channel operation should be restricted to experienced test engineers who recognize the dangers associated with multiple channel closures NOTE Multiple channel operation cannot be used to perform thermocouple temperature measurements using the internal or external reference junction The simulated reference junction will instead be used and the integrity of the temperature reading will be questionable ERR annunciator turns on See Temperature measurements page 3 33 for details Some other key points for multiple channel operation include the following e Closing a channel using multiple channel operation has no affe
126. triggering The EX TRIG key selects triggering from three external sources trigger link digital I O and the TRIG key When EX TRIG is pressed the TRIG annunciator lights and dashes are displayed to indicate the instrument is waiting for an external trigger From the front panel press the TRIG key to trigger a single reading Pressing the EX TRIG key again toggles back to continuous triggers The Model 2700 uses two lines of the TRIG LINK rear panel connector as External Trigger EXT TRIG input and Voltmeter Complete VMC output The EXT TRIG line allows the Model 2700 to be triggered by other instruments The VMC line allows the Model 2700 to trigger other instruments Line 1 is configured as VMC and line 2 as EXT TRIG The connector pinout is shown in Figure 8 3 Digital I O Pin 6 Ext Trig of the Digital I O can also be used as the external trigger input for the Model 2700 Line 2 of the TRIG LINK is physically connected to pin 6 of the Digital I O connector The Digital I O has a hardware interlock line pin 8 that allows the use of an external circuit to control input triggers When that line is left open or pulled high 5V input triggers are enabled When pulled low to OV input triggers are disabled When disabled the Model 2700 will not respond to an input trigger Details on the Digital I O are provided in Section 9 Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual 8 8 Triggering Figure 8 3 TRIG LINK pinout
127. use MATH menu While in that menu the CHAN annunciator will flash to indicate that you are editing the mX b math setup for that channel in the scan list When you exit from the mX b setup menu the CHAN annunciator stops flashing 3 Paired channels A paired channel function or operation can only be selected for a primary channel For the Model 7700 channels through 10 are the primary channels Trying to select a paired channel function or operation for channels 11 through 22 will result in INVALID CHAN 4 Function changes When you press a function key the selected channel assumes the mainframe setup for that function Also available channels for the specified slot that follow will also assume that setup Model 7700 example If you press DCV for channel 101 channels 101 through 120 will assume the DCV setup Note that channels for slot 2 are not affected When you press the 24 function key for a primary channel the subsequently paired channels will be displayed briefly Model 7700 example If you press Q4 for channel 108 channels 109 and 110 will also assume the Q4 function and the message 118 120 PRD will be displayed to indicate the paired channels A channel that is paired to a primary channel is not affected by function changes Model 7700 example Assume channel 102 is paired to channel 112 Now select channel 103 and press DCV All following channels except channel 112 will assume the DCV setup Channel 112
128. value of the waveform is different for a DC coupled waveform and an AC coupled waveform In an AC coupled waveform the peak is measured from the original DC average value not DC zero For example if a voltage pulse is measured on the AC function of the Model 2700 with a peak voltage of Vp and a low voltage of zero volts the AC coupled peak value will be calculated as follows ACpraxk Vp 1 duty cycle Therefore the AC coupled crest factor will differ from the DC coupled waveform The RMS function will calculate the RMS value based on the pulsed waveform with an average value of zero The reason to consider crest factor in accuracy of RMS measurements is because the meter has a limited bandwidth Theoretically a sine wave can be measured with a finite band width because all of its energy is contained in a single frequency Most other common waveforms have a number of spectral components requiring an almost infinite bandwidth above the fundamental frequency to measure the signal exactly Because the amount of energy contained in the harmonics becomes smaller with increasing frequency very accu rate measurements can be made with a limited bandwidth meter as long as enough spec tral components are captured to produce an acceptable error Crest factor is a relative measurement of the harmonic content of a particular waveform and reflects the accuracy of the measurement For a rectangular pulse train the higher the crest factor the hi
129. which is accessed by pressing SHIFT and then CONFIG Figure 7 3 shows the basic flowchart to configure a scan After entering the menu structure you can configure a simple scan an advanced scan or reset the configuration to the default setup for a simple scan Refer to the flowchart in Figure 7 3 for the following discussions on Scan reset Simple scan and Advanced scan NOTE Only a sequential scan can be configured from the front panel For a sequential scan the scan proceeds from the lowest numbered channel to the highest Non sequential backward scanning is only intended to be performed using remote programming Unexpected results may occur if a non sequential scan is run from the front panel For more information see Scanning fundamentals Sequential and non sequential scans page 7 3 Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Scanning 7 11 Figure 7 3 Scan configuration flowchart NOTE The instrument is always configured to run a scan On power up each available channel uses the power on default setup For example for factory power on default settings and two Model 7700s installed the instrument will scan channels 101 through 220 when the scan is run See Section for details on power on default settings There are two scan configurations simple and advanced When you configure the simple scan the instrument uses the present instrument setup for each channel in the sc
130. which is the factory and RST default or N no With immediate scan enabled the scan will start when you press the STEP or SCAN key Use the A or W key to display IMM SCAN Y and press ENTER NOTE Disable immediate scan IMM SCAN N when you wish to use a monitored reading limit to trigger the start of the scan This technique to start a scan is covered later in this section See Scan operation page 7 22 Step 4 Timer controlled scan The present state of the TIMER will be displayed NO or YES If you do not wish to use the timer use the A or W key to display TIMER NO which is the factory and RST default and press ENTER To use the timer use the A or W key to display TIMER YES and press ENTER The timer interval is displayed in the hour minute second format The timer can be set from 0 001 sec 00H 00M 00 001S to 99 hr 99 min 99 999 sec 99H 99M 99 999S Note that pressing the AUTO key sets the timer to 0 001 sec With the desired interval displayed press ENTER Step 5 Set the reading count The displayed reading count RDG CNT sets the number channels to scan STEP or the number of scans to run SCAN You can change the reading count to any finite value from 2 to 55000 or you can select infinite continuous scanning To select infinite set the reading count to 00000 to display INF With the desired reading count setting displayed press ENTER The instrument returns to the normal measurement mode See Trig
131. will NOT affect the scan list ROUT SCAN still returns a 10 channel scan list 101 110 The following command will set the scan list for 20 channels ROUT SCAN 101 120 b ROUTe SCAN TSOurce lt list gt lt list gt _IMMediate HLIMitl HLIMit2 LLIMit1 LLIMit2 As with front panel operation the scan can start immediately when it is enabled and triggered OR it can be started by a reached reading limit detected by the monitor channel For immediate the IMMediate command must be the only parameter in the list To use reading limits each limit must be separated by a comma Examples ROUT SCAN TSO IMM Start scan when it is enabled and triggered ROUT SCAN TSO HLIM1 LLIM1 Enable high limits 1 and low limits 1 Note that any reached limit will start the scan c ROUTe MONitor lt clist gt The channel that you specify as the monitor must be a channel that is in the scan list If it is not the first channel in the scan list will automatically become the monitor channel If the lt clist gt has more than one channel error 223 too much data occurs and the command is not executed d ROUTe MONitor POINts Use this command to specify the number of channels to scan each time the monitor scan is triggered to start For example assume the monitor scan list has 10 channels To scan that list once send ROUT MON POIN 10 To scan that list twice use parameter value 20 For three scans send parameter value 30
132. you want to select 4 Press ENTER to close the channel An invalid channel cannot be closed The error messages associated with system channel operation also apply to multiple channel operation Figure 2 6 Multiple channel operation specifying a channel to close Press CLOSE key Display MULTI option CLOSE MULTI and press ENTER Specify channel number CLOSE MLT XXX XXX and press ENTER Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Close Open Switching Module Channels 2 19 OPEN key The OPEN key has two options to open channels ALL and MULTI The ALL option simply opens all channels in the mainframe The MULTI option opens only the specified channel All other closed channels remain closed Figure 2 7 summarizes OPEN key operation OPEN ALL Perform the following steps to open all channels in the mainframe 1 Press the OPEN key to display OPEN ALL 2 Press OPEN again or press ENTER to open all channels OPEN MULTI Perform the following steps to open only the specified channel Press the OPEN key The OPEN ALL message will be displayed Press the A or W key to display the OPEN MULTT message Press ENTER to display the prompt to open a channel OPEN MLT XXX Using lt gt A and Y key in the three digit channel you want to select Press ENTER to open the channel Vi ee a NOTE Ifthe channel you open using OPEN MULTI is the system channel channel number display
133. 0 C so a 10 filter window is 20 C If using F units a 20 filter window is calculated as follows 9 5 x 20 36 The filter window for the 20 window is 36 C Filter example Filter Type Moving Filter Window 0 01 of range Filter Count 10 Filter State On Ten readings fill the stack to yield a filtered reading Now assume the next reading which is the 11 is outside the window A reading will be processed displayed however the stack will be loaded with that same reading Each subsequent valid reading will then displace one of the loaded readings in the stack The FILT annunciator will flash until 10 new readings fill the stack NOTE Bit 8 of the Operation Event Status Register sets when the filter window has properly settled or the filter is disabled See Section 11 Status Structure for details Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Range Digits Rate Bandwidth and Filter 4 17 Figure 4 3 Filter window Voltage 1 of range B Windows fp SSS ae Violation 1 of range 1 of range Integration Time Conversions Filter configuration Ai A2 A3 A4 A5 Ag B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 A1 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A5 B B2 B3 B4 Mii MOving A1 A1 A1 A2 A3 A4 A4 A5 Bi B2 B3 Window None A1 A1 A1 A1 A2 A3 A3 A4 A5 Bi B2 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A3 A4 A5 Bi 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Filter configuration A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 Ag B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 2 A1 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 Bi Bi B2 B3 B4
134. 0 Pin 7 5V to 33V Digital Output Flyback Diode Digital Output Pin 9 Digital Ground The five digital output lines pins 1 through 5 are controlled by limit operations Each of these five outputs correspond to the following limit operations Digital Output 1 Low Limit 1 LO1 Digital Output 2 High Limit 1 HI1 Digital Output 3 Low Limit LO2 Digital Output 4 High Limit 2 HI2 Digital Output 5 Master Limit logical OR of the four above limits Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Limits and Digital I O 9 7 When a limit LOI HI2 LO2 HL2 is reached the digital output line for that limit will be pulled high or low When a reading is within the limit the output line is released Digital output 5 is the logical OR of the four limits Therefore if any of the four limits are reached or exceeded output 5 will be pulled high or low NOTE When the reading is taken and a limit has been reached there is a short delay before the digital output line is active As measured from the output trigger TLINK the delay is about 10msec when closing a channel and about 2msec without a channel closure Because of additional time needed for data conversion the delay can be up to 10 times longer for temperature readings Allow for this delay when designing test systems Logic sense The selected logic sense active high or active low determines if an output is pulled high or low when the limit is reache
135. 000 With the cursor on the polarity sign the A and Y keys toggle polarity 4 Press ENTER The MATH annunciator will turn on and the result of the calculation will be displayed Note that the calculation will be applied to all measurement functions 5 To disable mX b again press SHIFT and then MATH The MATH annunciator will turn off NOTE The result of the percent calculation is positive when the input exceeds the reference and negative when the input is less than the reference The result of the percent calculation may be displayed in exponential notation For example a displayed reading of 2 500E 03 is equivalent to 2500 2 5K Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Rel Math Ratio Channel Average dB 5 11 Reciprocal 1 X The reciprocal of a reading is displayed when the reciprocal 1 X math function is enabled Reciprocal 1 X where X is the normal input reading The displayed units designator for reciprocal readings is R This units designator cannot be changed Example Assume the normal displayed reading is 2 5Q The reciprocal of resistance is conductance When the reciprocal math function is enabled the following conductance reading will be displayed 0 4R Reciprocal 1 X configuration Press SHIFT and then MATH to display the math menu 2 Press the RANGE A or 9 key to display 1 X and press ENTER The MATH annunciator will turn on and the result of the calculation w
136. 1 Enable rel Example 3 The following command sequence configures channel 101 of the Model 7700 to zero correct the DCV input when it is scanned NOTE The following example can be run from the KE2700 Instrument Driver using the example named Relatives in Table H 1 of Appendix H Select DCV for channel 101 Close channel 101 Use input to channel 101 as rel value Enable rel FUNC VOLT 101 ROUT CLOS 101 VOLT REF ACQ 101 VOLT REF STAT ON 101 5 8 Rel Math Ratio Channel Average dB Mode 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Math The Model 2700 has three built in math calculations that are accessed from the MATH menu mX b percent and reciprocal 1 X Figure 5 1 shows the MATH menu tree Note that the settings shown in the menu tree are the factory defaults NOTE The various instrument operations including Math are performed on the input signal in a sequential manner See Signal processing sequence page D 2 for details It includes flowcharts showing where in the processing sequence that the Math operation is performed Figure 5 1 MATH menu tree SHIFT PERCENT REF 1 000000 a M 1 000000 B 00 00000 m UNITS X NOTE A Math operation can be used with the ratio and channel average calculation The ratio or channel average reading will be used in the calculation for the selected math function Model 2700 Multimeter S mX b witch System User s Manua
137. 1 Use the CLOSE key or the lt and p keys to close the channel that you want to be the monitor 2 Press SHIFT and then MONITOR MON annunciator turns on Method 2 If a channel is closed press OPEN to open it 2 Press SHIFT and then MONITOR 3 Use the lt gt A and W keys to display the monitor channel i e MONITOR 101 and press ENTER The monitor channel closes and the MON annunciator turns on To disable monitor again press SHIFT and then MONITOR MON annunciator turns off Once enabled you can change the monitor channel using the CLOSE key or the lt and gt keys If you open the monitor channel the monitor does not disable but it does become inactive MON annunciator turns off When a channel is closed monitor becomes active MON annunciator turns on While in the normal measurement state the present monitor channel dictates which channel in the scan list is the monitor Therefore if you change the monitor channel the scan list monitor channel also changes When you change the monitor channel while in the normal measurement state the instrument setup does not change If you want the monitor channel to assume the setup of the scan list channel you must disable the monitor and then re enable it 7 20 Scanning Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Auto channel configuration Auto channel configuration allows you to recall scan list setups With auto channel configuration enabled a cl
138. 1 x 20 multiplexer but it can also be configured as two 1 x 10 multiplexers NOTE Thermocouple temperature measurements using the internal or external reference junction cannot be performed when using multiple channel operation to connect an input channel to the DMM The simulated reference junction will instead be used resulting in invalid readings ERR annunciator turns on See Temperature measurements page 3 33 for details A multiplexer switching module is configured as two multiplexers by using multiple channel operation to close the 2 pole 4 pole relay The Model 7700 is configured as two independent multiplexers by closing channel 23 As shown in Figure 2 8 the closed position of channel 23 isolates Multiplexer A channels 1 through 10 from Multiplexer B channels 11 through 20 For the dual multiplexer configuration only Multiplexer A channels can be internally connected to the DMM of the Model 2700 For the Model 7700 closing channel 25 allows channels 1 through 10 to be measured by the DMM When using the dual multiplexer configuration the sense backplane isolation relay must be kept open to isolate Multiplexer B channels from the sense terminals of the DMM For the Model 7700 channel 24 must be kept open Figure 2 8 Figure 2 8 Dual multiplexer configuration Model 7700 HI o oT Ch 1 LO oo Multiplexer A Channels S 1x10 2 9 e HI oa o o Hi CKI0 lt Chi25 Input LO oco o o LO sr Chi
139. 101 201 301 401 or 501 101 201 301 401 or 501 Maximum channel No effect No effect Timer Off Off Reading count No effect No effect Advanced scan Setup No effect No effect Immediate trigger On On Limit triggers Off Off Timer Off Off Reading count No effect No effect Temperature Digits 5 digits 5 digits Filter On Off v Window 0 1 0 1 Count 10 10 Type Moving Repeat Jv Rate Slow 5 PLC Slow 5 PLC Rel Off Off Sensor Thermocouple Thermocouple Junction See Note See Note Open detector No off No off Type K K Units C C Timestamp No effect No effect Triggering Continuous One shot v Delay Auto Auto Source Immediate Immediate Reading hold Off Off Window 1 1 Count 5 5 Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Getting Started 1 25 Table 1 4 continued Default settings Setting Factory RST Set Diff Voltage AC and DC dB Off Off Reference 1 0 1 0 Digits AC 5 digits 5 digits Digits DC 6 digits 6 digits Filter On Off Window 0 1 0 1 Count 10 10 Type Moving Repeat Range Auto Auto Rate DC Slow 5 PLC Slow 5 PLC Rel Off Off Note With a Model 7700 7706 or 7708 installed the default sensor junction is Internal Otherwise the Simulated 23 C junction is selected Remote programming default and user setups Default and user setup commands are listed in Table 1 5 NOTE The SYSTem PRESet and RST defaults are listed in the SCPI tables in Se
140. 19 Selecting and configuring RS 232 interface 0 0 0 10 20 RS 232 connections 2 cstiasiscsscecsecessnscesucsesceitoasteneebenentenes 10 20 Error MESSABES c0s5 cessecdeecesdesseecs iii ieia stave sev i 10 21 Status Structure OVERVIEW orinocense erae A S E iee EIR iE sateen tees 11 2 Status byte and SRO oe eeeccessessseceeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaees 11 2 Status register sets oo eeeeeecceseceseeesteeeteeesaeeeseeeeeeeseeeseeeeees 11 2 QUEUES 5s552255s 562 aer ARE E E AE oedeen esse 11 2 Clearing registers and queues sssesssssessesseeseesstesstssessesseessess 11 4 Programming and reading registers eeesseseseeseseeresrereereerrees 11 5 Programming enable registers 2 0 0 0 eee eeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeees 11 5 Reading registers ean eiri EEE 11 6 Status byte and service request SRQ sesesssssessssssssssesssssssss 11 6 Status byte TESISLEL ccs scccsdecess devs cicesiaWiiveaeecvecedeteadaaeea causes 11 7 Service request enable register eeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 8 Serial polling and SRQ wee ceeeesceeseeeseceeeceseeeeeeceseeeeeeeeaees 11 8 Status byte and service request commands eee 11 9 Serial poll programming example ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 11 10 Status register sets oo eeeceecessccsceceteeeseeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeeeteeeteeees 11 12 Register bit descriptions cceeeeeeeseeceseeeteeeeteeeeneeeneees 11 12 Condition registers 0 0 eeeecceseeceeeceseeceeeeseeceeeeeneeeaeens 11 18 Ey nt regis
141. 2 5 Front Panel Operation For front panel operation the INSIDE beeper mode must be used A normal pitch beep and the message IN indicates that the resistor is within the 1 tolerance limit Figure 9 7 This 1 resistor belongs in Bin 1 A raspy beep and the 1 message indicates that the resistor is gt 1 tolerance but lt 5 tolerance This 5 resistor belongs in Bin 2 For resistors gt 5 no beep will sound Place these resistors in Bin 3 Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Limits and Digital I O 9 17 Remote Operation For remote operation make sure both Limit 1 and Limit 2 are enabled The following table evaluates the three possible pass fail combinations for this example Limit 1 result Limit 2 result Resistor tolerance Bin assignment Pass Fail Fail Pass Pass Fail 1 5 gt 5 Keep in mind that a fail condition must be reset before testing the next resistor Fail can be reset manually or automatically see Table 9 2 CLEar command Digital outputs With the digital outputs of the Model 2700 enabled the digital outputs will respond as follows for each resistor reading LO limit 2 LO limit 1 Pass Pass Pass Fail Pass Resistor Affected HI limit 1 HI limit 2 tolerance bin outputs Pass Pass Pass 1 1 None Fail Pass Pass 5 2 1 and 5 Pass Fail Pass 5 2 2 and 5 Fail Pass Pass gt 5 3 1 3 and 5 Pass Fail Fai
142. 21 CH22 o CH1 CHI2 CHI3 Ci 29 CH13 CHI4 CH15 CH16 B 8 Model 7700 Connection Guide Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Typical connections The following examples show typical wiring connections for the following types of measurements Thermocouple connections Figure B 5 e 2 Wire and thermistor connections Figure B 6 e 4 Wire and RTD connections Figure B 7 Current connections AC or DC Figure B 8 e Voltage connections AC or DC Figure B 9 Figure B 5 Thermocouple connections Channel 1 LO Channels 2 19 s Thermocouple i HI Channel 20 LO Figure B 6 Q2 Wire and thermistor connections HI l Channel 1 l LO Channels 2 19 Resistor or e i Thermistor i HI Channel 20 LO Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Model 7700 Connection Guide B 9 Figure B 7 Q4 Wire and RTD connections Resistor or PREN 4 Wire RTD LO Channels 2 9 HI Resistor or Channel 10 4 Wire RTD LO HI Channel 11 LO e Channels 12 19 e HI Channel 20 Figure B 8 Channel 21 HI Channel 22 LO B 10 Model 7700 Connection Guide Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Figure B 9 Voltage connections DC or AC DC Voltage AC Voltage Cee See Cae ae ee ee lt HI i Channel 1 LO fe _ Channels 2 19 s j lt lt HI Channel 20 i LO TEE ANETE S E T P Connect
143. 23 To Closed Model 2700 DMM HI o o1 o o HI Ch 11 Ch 24 I Sense Oo o o o LO Multiplexer B Channels 1x10 12 19 For the dual multiplexer configuration HI Ch 23 must be closed and Ch 24 must Ch20 remain open Oo oo Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Close Open Switching Module Channels 2 25 Dual multiplexer application This application demonstrates how to use the Model 7700 as a dual multiplexer to bias and measure 10 DUT An external source powers DUT while the DMM of the Model 2700 measures the output of the DUT To prevent overloading of the external source each DUT is powered and measured separately Figure 2 9 shows the connections for this application The external source is connected to the Sense terminals of the switching module and DUT is connected to channels 1 through 10 Channels 11 through 20 are used to connect external power to each DUT Figure 2 9 Dual multiplexer application connections External Source 2 26 Close Open Switching Module Channels Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual For this application the 2 pole 4 pole relay and backplane isolation relays of the switching module are to be controlled as follows e Closing channel 23 connects the External Source to DUT via channels 11 through 20 Closing channel 23 also isolates measure channels 1 through 10 from the source channels 11 through 20 This channel must remain closed while testing
144. 25 out of memory NOTE The measurement event register can be read to check when the buffer becomes 14 Y2 or full Status registers are covered in Section 11 Buffer commands NOTE When measurements are performed the readings are fed to other enabled operations including the Buffer Appendix D explains Data flow remote operation page D 7 and the commands used to read the buffer and buffer Statistics The commands to perform buffer operations are listed in Table 6 1 Details on these commands follow the table NOTE Optional command words and most queries are not included in Table 6 1 The unabridged tables for all SCPI commands are provided in Section 15 Table 6 1 Buffer commands Command Description Default Ref SYSTem TIME lt hr min sec gt Set clock time in 24 hour format a SYSTem DATE lt yr mo day gt Set clock date yr specified as 20xx b SYSTem TSTamp TYPE Select timestamp lt name gt RELative or RTCLock REL c lt name gt SYSTem TSTamp TYPE Query timestamp type that will be used for c the next buffer storage TRACe TSTamp TYPE Query timestamp type for readings presently in buffer c TRACe CLEar Clear the buffer immediately d TRACe CLEar AUTO lt b gt Enable disable buffer auto clear lt b gt ON or OFF ON d TRACe FREE Query bytes available and bytes in use e TRACe POINts lt NRf gt Specify size of buffer lt NRf gt 2 to 55000 100 f TRACe TSTamp FORMat Select timestamp form
145. 27 Scanning 5 18 7 1 Advanced 7 14 Advanced scan setup procedure 7 16 Allowed settings per channel 7 2 Auto scan 7 21 Basic scan 7 22 Buffer 7 22 Configuration 7 10 dB 5 21 Digital outputs 9 12 Digits 4 6 Examples 7 33 External trigger scan example 7 33 Filter 4 19 Fundamentals 7 2 Limits 9 4 Manual external trigger scan 7 23 Math 5 12 Monitor scan 7 36 Monitor scan analog trigger 7 24 Operation 7 22 Process 7 4 Range 4 3 Rate and bandwidth 4 10 Ratio and channel average 5 18 Relative 5 3 Remote programming 7 26 Remote programming example 7 32 Reset 7 13 Resume scan after power up 7 21 Sequential and non sequential 7 3 Simple 1 32 7 13 SCPI commands G 10 SCPI commands see FORMat commands SCPI reference tables SCPI signal oriented measurement commands and SYSTem commands SCPI reference tables 15 1 CALCulate commmand summary 15 3 DISPlay command summary 15 6 FORMat command summary 15 6 ROUTe command summary 15 7 SENSe command summary 15 9 STATus command summary 15 20 SYSTem command summary 15 21 TRACe command summary 15 24 Trigger command summary 15 25 UNIT command summary 15 26 SCPI signal oriented measurement commands 13 1 CONFigure lt function gt lt rang gt lt res gt lt clist gt 13 4 FETCh 13 6 READ 13 7 Serial polling and SRQ 11 8 Settings Default 1 20 1 22 Setups 1 20 Commands 1 25 Remote programming 1 25 Restoring 1 21 Saving 1 21 7 21 Shielding 3 15 3 22 E 8 Signal
146. 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Status Structure 11 9 Status byte and service request commands The commands to program and read the Status Byte Register and Service Request Enable Register are listed in Table 11 2 For details on programming and reading registers see Programming enable registers page 11 5 and Reading registers page 11 6 NOTE To reset the bits of the Service Request Enable Register to 0 use 0 as the parameter value for the SRE command SRE 0 Table 11 2 Status byte and service request enable register commands Command Description STB Read Status Byte Register SRE lt NRf gt Program the Service Request Enable Register 0 to 255 SRE Read the Service Request Enable Register Note CLS and STATus PRESet have no effect on the Service Request Enable Register Programming example set MSS B6 when error occurs The second command in the following sequence enables EAV error available When an invalid command is sent line 3 bits B2 EAV and B6 MSS of the Status Byte Register set to 1 The last command reads the Status Byte Register Keep in mind that you have to address the Model 2700 to talk after sending a query command To determine the exact nature of the error you will have to read the Error Queue see Queues page 11 22 NOTE The following example can be run from the KE2700 Instrument Driver using the example named PollSRQ in Table H 1 of
147. 5 C 32 to 149 F or 273 to 338 K TEMPerature THERmistor lt NRf gt Set thermistor type in ohms 5000 lt clist gt lt NRf gt 1950 to 10050 TEMPerature FRTD TYPE lt name gt Select FRTD type lt name gt PT100 PT100 e lt clist gt D100 F100 PT3916 PT385 or USER TEMPerature FRTD RZERo lt NRf gt Specify constant for USER type 100 lt clist gt lt NRf gt 0 to 10000 TEMPerature FRTD ALPHa lt NRf gt Specify constant for USER type 0 00385 lt clist gt lt NRf gt 0 to 0 01 TEMPerature FRTD BETA lt NRf gt Specify constant for USER type 0 111 lt clist gt lt NRf gt 0 to 1 00 TEMPerature FRTD DELTa lt NRf gt Specify constant for USER type 1 507 lt clist gt lt NRf gt 0 to 5 00 FREQ function SENSe 1 Optional root command FREQuency THReshold VOLTage Select threshold voltage range 10 f RANGe lt n gt lt clist gt lt n gt 0 to 1010 FREQuency APERture lt p gt lt clist gt Set gate time for FREQ measurements 1 0 g in secs lt n gt 0 01 to 1 0 Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Basic DMM Operation 3 51 Table 3 7 continued Basic measurement commands Commands Description Default Ref PERIOD function PERiod THReshold VOLTage RANGe Select threshold voltage range 10 f lt n gt lt clist gt lt n gt 0 to 1010 PERiod APERture lt n gt lt clist gt Set gate time for PERIOD measuremen
148. 6 2 x 10 2 503 131 2 x 10 19 8 315 270 2 x 1014 1 228 034 2 x 10 9 804 036 2 x 10 22 4 413 030 2 x 10 76 1 057 734 2 x 1030 1 052 755 2 x 1035 0 04 C to 0 05 C 1 318 058 x 10 4 830 222 x 10 1 646 031 x106 5 464 731 x 10 9 650 715 x 10 16 8 802 193 x 10 3 110 810 x 1026 0 06 C to 0 05 C tog Co cqE cE c3E wae cE where tog is the calculated temperature in C E is the measured voltage in microvolts Table F 5 Type N inverse function polynomial 200 C to 0 C 3 990pV to OpV 0 C to 600 C OuV to 20 613pV 600 C to 1 300 C 20 613pV to 47 513pV Co Cy Cy 3 c4 C5 C6 C7 Cg Co Error 0 0 3 843 6847 x 10 1 101 0485 x 10 5 222 9312x 10 7 206 052 5 x 10 2 5 848 858 6 x 10 75 2 775 491 6 x 10 8 7 107 516 6 x 10 22 1 158 266 5 x 10 7 313 886 8 x 1030 0 03 C to 0 02 C 0 0 3 868 96 x 10 1 082 67 x 10 4 702 05 x 10 2 121 69 x 10 18 1 172 72 x 10 19 5 392 80 x 10 24 7 981 56 x 10 29 0 03 C to 0 02 C 1 972 485 x 10 3 300 943 x 10 3 915 159 x 107 9 855 391 x 10 2 1 274 371 x 10 6 7 767 022 x 10 22 0 02 C to 0 04 C tog Co cE cE T c3E is cE where tog is the calculated temperature in C E is the measured voltage in microvolts Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Table F 6 Type R inverse function poly
149. 7 Read enable register Note Power up and STATus PRESet resets all bits of all enable registers to 0 CLS has no effect 11 20 Status Structure Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Programming examples Example 1 Program and read a register set NOTE The following example can be run from the KE2700 Instrument Driver using the example named Prmr in Table H 1 of Appendix H The following command sequence programs and reads the measurement register set STAT MEAS ENAB 512 Enable BFL buffer full STAT MEAS COND Read Measurement Condition Register STAT MEAS Read Measurement Event Register NOTE Examples 2 and 3 demonstrate the proper method to read an individual bit of an event register In general the state of an event register bit is determined by enabling the event bit then reading the status byte STB Example 2 Read RAV bit of measurement event register The following command sequence demonstrates the proper method to read the RAV bit of the measurement event register RST Put 2700 in one shot mode CLS Clear measurement event register STAT PRES Clear measurement event enable register STAT MEAS ENAB 32 Enable RAV bit B5 of the measurement event register INIT Trigger one measurement STB Read status byte register CLS and STAT PRES resets the measurement register bits to zero The ENAB command enables the reading available bit B5 RAV of th
150. 8 6 Reading hold autosettle sssseseeeeessesssseseesesesresesresrrsessesersesee 8 6 Hold example ooo eee eeecceesesscceseeceseeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeseeeneeees 8 6 External trig ceri vseccsoceisassdesecisoacsesescideceisuests e EE aE 8 7 Digtal TO secam E 8 7 External tigger sonene ona n aes 8 8 Voltmeter complete sssssssssssseseessesssssessesssssstsseesressrsseeseess 8 9 External triggering example ssssseesseeseseeresrsrsresreresreseees 8 10 External triggering with BNC connections eee 8 13 Remote programming triggering 0 0 eee eeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeee 8 14 Trigger model remote operation 0 0 eee eeeeseeeeeeeees 8 14 Trigger model Operation eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeseeeaees 8 16 Triggering commands 00 eee eeseeeeeseeeeeeseteeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 8 17 Programming example ese eeeeceeseceeeeeceseeseeeaeeseeenees 8 19 10 Limits and Digital 1 O TTS opise esan res aae odee pote Eri eiere pEr E ineei Tea Saai 9 2 DOCAMMING sirien EEE E E E E EE 9 4 Basic limits operation ssesesseeseeeeseesesesrrsessesrrererrsreereresresese 9 4 Digital VO siiiu eea E E a 9 5 Digital input trigger link input eseeseeseeesessresesrerrsreresrese 9 5 Digital Outputs seesi tarsier n e a a aetoens aria esses 9 6 Setting digital output sssssesessesessesessesresessesresesresreresresenees 9 10 SCANNE e a E EE E ORERE 9 12 Remote programing limits and digital output 9 12 Limits and d
151. A two measurement process for 4 wire ohms to cancel the effects of thermal EMFs Available for the 100Q 1kQ and 10kQ ranges e Math mX 4b percent and reciprocal 1 X calculations provide mathematical manipulation of readings e Relative Null offsets or establish baseline values Ratio and channel average Ratio and average calculations for two switching module channels Buffer Store up to 55 000 readings in the internal buffer Limits Two sets of high and low reading limits to test devices Digital I O port Five digital limit test output lines to control external circuitry The trigger link and hardware interlock input can also be accessed at this port e Monitor The Model 2700 can monitor a selected channel A scan can be triggered to start when the Monitor detects a reached reading limit e Remote interface Model 2700 can be controlled using the IEEE 488 interface GPIB or the RS 232 interface Plug in switching modules Up to two Keithley Model 77xx series switching modules can be installed in the Model 2700 A side by side comparison of the switching modules is provided in Table 1 1 Basic close open operation for switching module channels is provided in Section 2 while scanning is covered in Section 7 Connection information for the Model 7700 switching module is provided in Appendix B For all other switching modules connection information is provided in their respective packing lists
152. ACY s es A 7 Calculating dBm characteristics accuracy s es A 8 Calculating dB characteristics acCUracy s es A 8 Additional derating factors 0 0 eee eeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeseeeaeeseees A 9 Optimizing Measurement ACCULACY eee eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees A 9 DC voltage DC current and resistance eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee A 9 AC voltage and AC current eceeeeeeeseeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees A 9 WOMIPCTAture seoses anse i aN E guebiens A 9 Optimizing measurement speed ee eeeeseeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeres A 10 DC voltage DC current and resistance eeeeeeeeeeeees A 10 AC voltage and AC current cee eeeceesceeeseeeeeeseneeeneeeeaees A 10 MCMPCTAtUIe nisterio iieri seni ii NEEN E a iai A 10 Model 7700 Connection Guide Card configuration schematic 0 0 ceecceescesssceeseeeseeeseeeeeeeeaes B 2 Connections and wiring ceeccescecencceseeeeaceeseeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeesaes B 4 Screw terminals ee eeeescceesseeeeeseeeseeseeesecseeeasesseeseeees B 5 Wiring Procedure as sess ois wessdessvere auetteievahivenitenerteinierts B 6 Typical connections 0 0 eeecescecesecesceeeaeeeseeceaeeeseeseaeeeteeesaes B 8 Connection log ssrin iinei i B 10 Status and Error Messages Signal Processing Sequence and Data Flow Signal processing sequence eeeeeceeesceeseeceeeeeeeeeaeeteneesaeeeners D 2 Basic signal processing csc eeeseeseeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeneeaeenes D 2 Signal processing using inst
153. ACel DATA Use TRACe or DATA as root command Sec 6 CLEar Path to clear the buffer IMMediate Clear the buffer AUTO lt b gt Enable or disable buffer auto clear ON AUTO Query state of buffer auto clear FREE Query bytes available and bytes in use v POINts lt NRf gt Specify size of buffer 2 to 55000 100 v POINts Query buffer size v NOTify lt NRf gt Specify number of stored readings that will set 50 Trace Notify bit B6 of measurement event register 2 to 109999 Must be less than TRACe POINts value NOTify Query trace notify value NEXT Query buffer location for next stored reading TSTamp Path to set timestamp format FORMat lt name gt Select timestamp format ABSolute or DELTa ABS FORMat Query timestamp format TYPE Query timestamp type for readings presently in buffer FEED lt name gt Select source of readings SENSe 1 CALC Jv CALCulate 1 or NONE CONTrol lt name gt Select buffer control mode NEVer NEXT or NEV J ALWays CONTrol Query buffer control mode v FEED Query source of readings for buffer y DATA Read all readings in the buffer v DATA SELected lt start gt lt count gt Specify readings to be returned specify starting point first reading is 0 and number of readings count SYSTem PRESet and RST have no effect on commands in this subsystem The listed defaults are defaults set at the factory Model 2700 Mu
154. ANKs For single with open card query number of banks CSOhms Query whether card supports common side 4 wire ohms i e 7701 TIME lt hr min Set system time using 24 hour format Sec 6 sec gt TIME Query system time DATE lt yr mo Set system date yr 1999 or 20xx Sec 6 day gt DATE Query system date TSTamp Path to set timestamp Sec 6 TYPE lt name gt Select timestamp type RELative or RTCLock REL TYPE Query timestamp type that will be used for the next buffer storage RELative Path to reset relative timestamp RESet Reset relative timestamp to 0 RNUMber Path to reset reading number Sec 14 RESet Reset reading number Next reading will be 1 ERRor Query read Error Queue Note 3 Sec 11 v CLEar Clears messages from the Error Queue Sec 11 VERSion Query rev level of SCPI standard Sec 14 Vo LOCal Take 2700 out of remote and restore operation of Sec 10 front panel controls RS 232 only REMote Place 2700 in remote RS 232 only Sec 10 RWLock Lockout front panel controls RS 232 only Sec 10 Note 1 Tf there is no card in the specified slot error 241 Hardware Missing will occur revision 3 Power up and CLS clears the error queue RST SYSTem PRESet and STATus PRESet has no effect on the error queue 15 24 SCPI Reference Tables Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Table 15 8 TRACe command summary Default parame Command Description ter Ref SCPI TR
155. ANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR USE THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYER S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES NEITHER KEITHLEY INSTRUMENTS INC NOR ANY OF ITS EMPLOYEES SHALL BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF ITS INSTRUMENTS AND SOFTWARE EVEN IF KEITHLEY INSTRUMENTS INC HAS BEEN ADVISED IN ADVANCE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES SUCH EXCLUDED DAMAGES SHALL INCLUDE BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO COSTS OF REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION LOSSES SUSTAINED AS THE RESULT OF INJURY TO ANY PERSON OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY KEITHLEY Keithley Instruments Inc 28775 Aurora Road Cleveland Ohio 44139 440 248 0400 Fax 440 248 6168 1 888 KEITHLEY 534 8453 e www keithley com Sales Offices BELGIUM Bergensesteenweg 709 B 1600 Sint Pieters Leeuw 02 363 00 40 Fax 02 363 00 64 CHINA Yuan Chen Xin Building Room 705 12 Yumin Road Dewai Madian Beijing 100029 8610 82251886 Fax 8610 82251892 FINLAND Halsuantie 2 e 00420 Helsinki Finland 09 53 06 65 60 Fax 09 53 06 65 65 FRANCE 3 all e des Garays 91127 Palaiseau C dex 01 64 53 20 20 Fax 01 60 11 77 26 GERMANY Landsberger Strasse 65 82110 Germering 089 84 93 07 40 Fax 089 84 93 07 34 GREAT BRITAIN Unit 2 Commerce Park Brunel Road Theale Berkshire RG7 4AB 0118 929 75 00 Fax 0118 929 75 19 INDIA 1 5 Eagles Street e Langford Town Bangalore 560 025 080 212 80 27 Fax 080 212
156. ATA2 Read buffer Use TRACE DATA to retrieve all readings that are stored in the buffer You can send this command even if the instrument is still storing readings When TRACe DATA is sent it will return the readings stored up to that point in time Subsequent TRACe DATA commands will not retrieve readings already returned However once the buffer has filled and you have retrieved all buffer readings you can again send TRACe DATA to retrieve all the stored readings The data elements returned with each stored reading depends on which ones are selected with FORMat ELEMents command see Section 14 for details Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Buffer 6 13 j TRACe DATA SELected lt start gt lt count gt Specify readings to return TRACe NEXT Query location of last buffer reading Use the TRACe DATA SELected command to specify which stored readings to return The lt start gt parameter specifies the first stored reading to return Note that the first stored reading in the buffer is 0 The lt count gt parameter specifies the number of readings to return When the storage process is aborted you can use TRACe NEXT to determine the buffer location for the next stored reading For example if the last reading is stored at memory location 36 TRACe NEXT will return the value 37 This query is useful when using the buffer in the continuous storage mode TRACe FEED CONTrol ALWays as demonstrated by the following exampl
157. Any enabled event summary bit that goes from 0 to 1 will set bit B6 and generate an SRQ service request In your test program you can periodically read the Status Byte to check if an SRQ has occurred and what caused it If an SRQ occurs the program can for example branch to an appropriate subroutine that will service the request Typically SRQs are managed by the serial poll sequence of the Model 2700 If an SRQ does not occur bit B6 RQS of the Status Byte Register will remain cleared and the program will simply proceed normally after the serial poll is performed If an SRQ does occur bit B6 of the Status Byte Register will set and the program can branch to a service subroutine when the SRQ is detected by the serial poll The serial poll automatically resets RQS of the Status Byte Register This allows subsequent serial polls to monitor bit B6 for an SRQ occurrence generated by other event types After a serial poll the same event can cause another SRQ even if the event register that caused the first SRQ has not been cleared The serial poll does not clear MSS The MSS bit stays set until all Status Byte summary bits are reset SPE SPD serial polling The SPE SPD General Bus Command sequence is used to serial poll the Model 2700 Serial polling obtains the serial poll byte status byte Typically serial polling is used by the controller to determine which of several instruments has requested service with the SRQ line Model
158. Appendix H Clear Error Queue CLS i SRE 4 Enable EAV XYZ Generate error 1 STB Read Status Byte Register 11 10 Status Structure Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Serial poll programming example This example is written specifically for the KPCI 488 2 GPIB card and QuickBasic VisualBasic with the appropriate IEEE libraries Other types of cards and or languages may have different function calls that are equivalent to the initialize transmit sendQ srq and spoll calls used below SRQ when buffer fills with 500 1000 1500 and 1750 readings The following program will store 2000 readings in the buffer When the buffer fills with 500 readings quarter full an SRQ will occur and a message will be displayed on the computer to indicate that event An SRQ and message will also occur when the 1000th half full 1500th three quarter full 1750th buffer notify and 2000th full reading is stored Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Status Structure 11 11 Clear PC output screen Set instrument address y Send Device Clear ede unl status Restore rst defaults Clear buffer Infinite trigger count Set buffer size to 2000 Set Trace Notify bit on 1750th reading Enable buffer Reset measure enable bits Clear all event registers Enable buffer bits B6 B8 Disable standard events B9 B12 B13 Enable measurement events
159. B sssssssssssessesssessesesssssssssesssssrsse 5 22 Buffer Buffer oyervieW occa sussid Sebissheeelaaessapastoresienceaiisgeagacsnei cea seesustasanizess 6 2 Front panel buffer 22 cles teisceret steve sopcaade aevienetese dadesuetveceda vanes 6 2 Auto ClEAD pcrea aia ER R 6 2 Tiesta MDS ecrire ra e Ere SE RE ENEE R 6 4 Storing teadings sccivsisstezscceassancssenagadsscsigescssusansdeceesconsbeesgidoes 6 6 Recalling readings ssesnirsireineiciiisiiinsiiii iasi 6 6 Buffer Statistics siecseceuces sec ssnessaisseeestiaaatancedai siseaaeteacbusnscenassaned 6 8 Remote programming buffer eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaes 6 9 Buller commands sissors agn 6 9 Programming example 00 es eeeeeeseeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeaeeneeeaes 6 15 Scanning Scanning fundamentals cc ceeeesceceseceseeceneeeseeeeeeesaeeeeeeteeees 7 2 Channel assignments cceccescceseceenecsseeeeeceeseeceeceeeneeeaees 7 3 Sequential and non sequential scans 0 0 eee eeeeseeeeeeees 7 3 SCAM Process oiea e eE aE i EEO 7 4 Trigger models siseses issos rasettoadososes tes seedscteves 7 4 Scan COMPSULATION eessesscsseserscessesersetssesesseesrssseessnseranes 7 10 SCANMESCE csi sttssuecncssepsscnseedsdasudessevsasuee E A E EET 7 13 Simple SCAM ironiese ai 7 13 Advanced SCAN srmrnrresir errira inae a aai 7 14 Setting delay scsietinscie ces nini aaiae aai 7 18 Monitor chanel cc cc csesiassseosescaionastdecacenseepacevneseanagieadass 7 18 Auto chan
160. CARD menu 2 29 CARD CONFIG 2 29 CARD VIEW 2 30 Tree 2 29 Carrying case 1 6 Channel average 5 16 5 19 Basic operation 5 17 Commands 5 19 Delay 5 19 Enabling disabling 5 19 Programming examples 5 20 Remote programming 5 19 Scanning 5 18 Channel list parameter lt clist gt 3 6 Channels Assignments 2 5 7 3 Auto channel configuration 7 20 Average see Channel average Closing and opening 1 29 2 1 Monitor 7 18 Multiple see Multiple channels Numbering 2 5 Setup 7 27 Setup considerations 7 11 System see System channel CLOSE key 2 10 2 18 CLOSE MULTI 2 10 CLOSE SINGLE 2 10 Color codes Thermocouple wires 3 38 Commands Address G 9 Addressed multiline G 9 Autozero and LSYNC 3 6 Basic measurement 3 49 Buffer 6 9 Bus G 6 Codes G 10 Common see Common commands Condition register 11 18 dB 5 22 Digits 4 6 Display 1 18 Error queue 11 23 Event enable registers 11 19 Event register 11 18 Execution rules 10 16 Filter 4 20 General bus see General bus commands Limits and digital output 9 12 Math 5 13 Multiple channel control 2 20 Range 4 4 Ratio and channel average 5 19 Rel 5 4 Scanning 7 27 SCPI see FORMat commands SCPI refer ence tables and SYSTem commands Setups 1 25 Status byte and service request 11 9 System channel control 2 12 Triggering 8 17 Unaddress G 9 Uniline G 8 Universal multiline G 8 Common commands 12 1 G 10 CLS 11 4 ESE 11 19 ESE 11 19 ESR 11 18 IDN 12 3 OPC 12 3 OPC 12 4 OPT 12 6
161. CH12 CH13 CH14 CH15 CH16 CH17 CH18 CH19 CH20 Wiring procedure Use the following procedure to wire the Model 7700 module Make all connections using correct wire size up to 20 AWG Also make sure to add supplementary insulation around the harness for voltages above 42V peak Figure B 4 WARNING All wiring and supplementary insulation must be rated for the maximum voltage in the system For example if 1000V is applied to the front terminals of the DMM the plug in module wiring must be rated for 1000V 1 Make sure all power is discharged from the Model 7700 module 2 Access the screw terminals Figure B 2 Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Model 7700 Connection Guide 3 Using a small flat blade screwdriver loosen terminal screws and install wires as desired Figure B 4 shows connections to channels 1 and 2 4 Route wire along wire path and secure with cable tie as shown 5 Fill in a copy of the connection log Table B 1 and affix it to the module cover Close and lock cover a Figure B 4 Wire dressing eee H ee Na ja i input MN IZAZIZIZIZIZIZIZ v 2 WIRE Supplementary Insulation ae Guri P z 5 z il el H LH LH LHL A Q SE SSSS JE EE JE Ch17 Chs CH9 cH20 N HLH LS HLA LA LH in LH OL CH
162. Cg Co Error 0 0 1 849 494 60 x 10 8 005 050 62 x 10 1 022 374 30 x 107 1 522 485 92 x 10 19 1 888 213 43 x 10713 1 590 859 41 x 10 16 8 230 278 80 x 10 29 2 341 819 44 x 10 23 2 797 862 60 x 10 27 0 02 C to 0 02 C 1 291 509 199 x 10 1 466 298 863 x 10 1 534 713 402 x 10 3 145 945 973 x 10 4 163 257 839 x 10 13 3 187 963 771 x 10 1 291 637 500 x 10 77 2 183 475 087 x 10 26 1 447 379 511 x 10 8 211 272 125 x 1036 0 01 C to 0 01 C 5 333 875 126 x 104 1 235 892 298 x 10 1 092 657 613 x 10 4 265 693 686 x 108 6 247 205 420 x 10 3 8 087 801 117 x 10 1 621 573 104 x 10 8 536 869 453 x 10 4 719 686 976 x 10 9 1 441 693 666 x 10 4 2 081 618 890 x 10 19 0 0002 C to 0 0002 C 0 002 C to 0 002 C tog Co cqE cE c3E ae i cE where tog is the calculated temperature in C E is the measured voltage in microvolts F 6 Temperature Equations Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Table F 8 Type T inverse function polynomial 200 C to 0 C 0 C to 400 C 5 603pV to OV OpV to 20 872pV co 0 0 0 0 c 2 5949192x 107 2 592 800 x 107 c 2 131 696 7 x 107 7 602 961 x 107 c3 7 901 8692x101 4 637 791 x 101 c4 4 2527777x 109 2 165 394 x 10 cs 1 3304473 x 10 16 6 048 144 x 10 c 2 024 144 6 x 10 7 293 422 x 10 c7 1 266817 1 x 104 Error 0 04 C to 0 02 C 0 03
163. Ch will return the reading strings In general READ performs an INIT to trigger measurements and then a FETCh to retrieve the reading strings With continuous initiation disabled INITiate CONTinuous OFF you can use the READ command to trigger and return readings The sample count determines the number of reading strings to be returned With the sample count gt 1 the returned readings are automatically stored in the buffer NOTE When readings are stored in the buffer by the TRACe command or by front panel data store operation INIT and multi sample READ queries are locked out With readings in the buffer that were stored in that manner you cannot use the INIT or READ command if sample count is gt I error 225 out of memory Buffer operation is covered in Section 6 Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Basic DMM Operation 3 55 Basic measurement programming examples Example 1 continuous triggering The following command sequence places the Model 2700 in a continuous trigger mode to measure ACV Whenever DATA is sent the last measured reading will be sent to the computer when the Model 2700 is addressed to talk NOTE The following example can be run from the KE2700 Instrument Driver using the example named CTMMV in Table H 1 of Appendix H SYST PRES Continuous measurement mode INIT CONT ON FUNC VOLT AC Select ACV function DATA Request last measured reading Example 2 one s
164. Crest factor 3 12 AC voltage offset 3 16 Accessories 1 3 Adapters 1 5 AMPS fuse replacement front panel AMPS input 3 19 Amps measurement procedure 3 18 Annunciators 1 12 Flashing CHAN 7 15 Flashing OCOMP 3 25 LSTN 10 10 REM 10 10 SRQ 10 11 TALK 10 10 Aperture 4 12 Applications Sorting resistors 9 15 ASCII data format 14 3 Auto delay settings 8 4 Auto ranging 4 3 4 5 Autozero 3 4 10 2 Bandwidth 4 10 Aperture 4 12 Commands 4 10 Programming examples 4 13 Rate conflict error 4 12 Remote programming 4 10 Scanning 4 10 Settings 4 9 Basic measurements 3 7 Basic operation 3 1 Overview 3 2 Baud rate 10 18 Beeper control 8 7 Buffer 6 1 7 27 Auto clear 6 2 Clear 6 12 Commands 6 9 CALCulate2 DATA 6 15 CALCulate2 FORMat 6 15 CALCulate2 MMediate 6 15 CALCulate2 MMediate 6 15 CALCulate2 STATe 6 15 FORMat ELEMents 6 14 SYSTem DATE 6 10 SYSTem TIME 6 10 SYSTem TSTamp TYPE 6 11 TRACe CLEar 6 11 TRACe CLEar AUTO 6 11 TRACe DATA SELected lt start gt lt count gt 6 13 TRACe DATA 6 12 TRACe FEED 6 12 TRACe FEED CONTrol 6 12 TRACe FREE 6 11 TRACe NEXT 6 13 TRACe NOTify 6 13 TRACe POINts 6 11 TRACe TSTamp FORMat 6 12 Front panel 6 2 Overview 6 2 Programming example 6 15 Remote programming 6 9 Standard deviation 6 8 Statistics 6 8 Wrap around buffer 6 12 Bus lines G 4 Bus management lines G 5 Data lines G 4 Handshake lines G 5 Cables 1 5 Leakage 3 23 Cables and connector kits for switching modules 1 5
165. Description parameter Ref SCPI UNIT TEMPerature lt name gt Select temperature units C CEL F C Sec 3 Jv FAR or K TEMPerature Query temperature units v VOLTage Path to configure voltage units Sec 5 DC lt name gt Select DCV measurement units V or DB V lt clist gt DB Path to set DB reference voltage REFerence lt n gt Specify reference in volts 1e 7 to 1000 1 REFerence Query reference DC lt clist gt Query DCV units AC lt name gt lt clist gt Select ACV measurement units V or DB V DB Path to set DB reference voltage REFerence lt n gt Specify reference in volts le 7 to 1000 1 REFerence Query DB reference AC lt clist gt Query ACV units A Specifications Model 2700 Data Acquisition Control System Model 7700 20 Channel Differential Multiplexer w Automatic CJC 2700 Multimeter Data Acquisition System DC CHARACTERISTICS CONDITIONS MED 1 PLC or 10 PLC or MED 1 PLC with Digital Filter of 10 TEST CURRENT INPUT ACCURACY ppm of reading ppm of range 5 OR RESISTANCE OR PP parts per million e g 10ppm 0 001 TEMPERATURE BURDEN OPEN CKT 24 Hour 90 Day 1 Year COEFFICIENT FUNCTION RANGE RESOLUTION VOLTAGE VOLTAGE 23 C 1 23 C 5 23 C 5 0 18 C amp 28 50 C Voltage 100 0000 mV 0 1 uV gt 10 GQ 15 30 25 35 30 35 1 5y C 1 000000 V 1 0 uV gt 10 GQ 15 6 25 7 30 7 1 1 C 10 0000 V 10 uV gt 10 GQ 10 4 20 5 30
166. Dow lt NRf gt Set filter window in of range 0 1 0 to 10 WINDow Query filter window COUNt lt n gt lt clist gt Specify filter count 1 to 100 10 COUNt lt clist gt Query filter count STATe lt b gt lt clist gt Enable or disable filter Note 4 STATe lt clist gt Query state of digital filter IDIVider lt b gt Enable or disable 1OMQ input divider OFF Sec 3 Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual SCPI Reference Tables 15 11 Table 15 5 continued SENSe command summary Default Command Description parameter Ref SCPI SENSe 1 VOLTage AC Path to configure AC voltage Sec 3 v APERture lt n gt lt clist gt Set integration rate in seconds 60Hz Note 2 Sec 4 1 67e 4 to 1 50Hz 2e 4 to 1 APERture lt clist gt Query aperture integration rate NPLCycles lt n gt lt clist gt Set integration rate in line cycles 60Hz 5 0 Sec4 Vv 0 01 to 60 50Hz 0 01 to 50 NPLCycles lt clist gt Query line cycle integration rate v RANGe Path to set measurement range Sec4 Vv UPPer lt n gt lt clist gt Select range 0 to 757 5 750 y UPPer lt clist gt Query range y AUTO lt b gt lt clist gt Enable or disable auto range ON Jv AUTO lt clist gt Query state of auto range Jv DIGits lt p gt lt clist gt Specify measurement resolution 4 to 7 6 Sec 4 DIGits lt clist gt Query resolution REFerence lt n gt l
167. E 223 Too much data EE 222 Parameter data out of range EE 221 Settings conflict EE 220 Parameter error EE 215 Arm deadlock EE 214 Trigger deadlock EE 213 Init ignored EE 212 Arm ignored EE 211 Trigger ignored EE 210 Trigger error EE 202 Settings lost due to rtl EE 201 Invalid while in local EE 200 Execution error EE 178 Expression data not allowed EE 171 Invalid expression EE 170 Expression error EE 168 Block data not allowed EE 161 Invalid block data EE 160 Block data error EE 158 String data not allowed EE 154 String too long EE 151 Invalid string data EE 150 String data error EE Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Table C 1 continued Status and error messages Status and Error Messages Number Description Event 148 Character data not allowed EE 144 Character data too long EE 141 Invalid character data EE 140 Character data error EE 128 Numeric data not allowed EE 124 Too many digits EE 123 Exponent too large EE 121 Invalid character in number EE 120 Numeric data error EE 114 Header suffix out of range EE 113 Undefined header EE 112 Program mnemonic too long EE 111 Header separator error EE 110 Command header error EE 109 Missing parameter EE 108 Parameter not allowed EE 105 GET not allowed EE 104 Data type error EE 103 Invalid separator EE 102 Syntax error EE 101 Invalid character EE 100 Command error EE 000 No error SE
168. E BY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL ONLY ome Gm ows d DIGITAL VO Noe LINK S232 EI A CAUTION FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE HAZARD REPLACE FUSE WITH SAME TYPE AND RATING Model 2700 8 14 Triggering Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Remote programming triggering Trigger model remote operation The following paragraphs describe how the Model 2700 operates for remote operation The flow chart in Figure 8 10 summarizes operation over the bus The flow chart is called the trigger model because operation is controlled by SCPI commands from the Trigger subsystem Key SCPI commands are included in the trigger model Idle and initiate The instrument is considered to be in the idle state whenever operation is at the top of the trigger model As shown in Figure 8 10 initiation needs to be satisfied to take the instrument out of idle While in the idle state the instrument cannot perform any measure or step scan operations The following commands will return operation to the top of the trigger model idle at the START point of the trigger model e ABORt e RCLO 1 or 2 e SYSTem PREset e RST What happens next depends on the state of initiation If continuous initiation is already enabled the instrument will leave the idle state SYSTem PRESet enables continuous initiation Therefore operation will immediately leave the idle state when it is sent The RCL command will do the sa
169. E2700 Instrument Driver Examples H 17 Table H 2 continued LabVIEW examples Manual Name Reference Brief Description Simple3 None Use Case 3 Two scans using 7708 module 40 channel DCV 1V range scan e 20 channel Q4 scan e Models 2700 and 2701 100Q range e Model 2750 10Q range dry circuit ohms enabled e Measurement speed rate 0 1 ple e DCV input divider Enabled LOMQ input impedance Filter Disabled no filtering e Buffer Store 40 DCV reading strings 20 Q4 reading strings Buffer elements include reading only e Limits DCV scan Limit 1 all channels 20mV Master Latch enabled e Triggering Bus control source Simple4 None Use Case 4 Two scans using 7708 module e 40 channel DCV scan 1V range Configuration saved in User Setup 1 e 20 channel Q4 scan Configuration saved in User Setup 2 e Models 2700 and 2701 100Q range e Model 2750 10Q range dry circuit ohms enabled e Setup 1 or Setup 2 recalled to perform scan e Measurement speed rate 0 1 ple e DCV input divider Enabled LOMQ input impedance Filter Disabled no filtering e Buffer Store 40 DCV reading strings 20 Q4 reading strings Buffer elements include reading only e Limits DCV scan Limit 1 all channels 20mV Master Latch enabled e Triggering Bus control source H 18 KE2700 Instrument Driver Examples Model 2700 Multime
170. EE 519 Card calibration dates lost EE 520 Saved setup scancard mismatch EE 521 Card relay counts lost EE 522 GPIB communication language lost EE 523 Card hardware error EE 524 Unsupported card detected EE 525 Scancard memory pattern mismatch EE 610 Questionable calibration SE 611 Questionable temperature SE 700 Invalid function in scanlist EE 800 RS 232 Framing error detected EE 802 RS 232 Overrun detected EE 803 RS 232 Break detected EE 805 Invalid system communication EE 808 ASCII only with RS 232 EE 900 Internal system error EE EE error event SE status event SYS system error event C 7 NOTE SCPI confirmed messages are described in Volume 2 Command Reference of the Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments Refer to the SYSTem ERRor command C 8 Status and Error Messages Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Signal Processing Sequence and Data Flow D 2 Signal Processing Sequence and Data Flow Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Signal processing sequence Basic signal processing The signal is applied to the multimeter input via front panel input terminals or a switching module When a channel is closed or scanned the signal connected to that channel or channel pair for 4 wire measurements is connected to the input Figure D 1 is a flowchart that shows the basic processing sequence of an input signal With all the various features filter rel math
171. ER type can only be set using remote programming see TEMPerature FRTD commands in Table 3 7 Table 3 6 4 wire RTD temperature measurement configuration Step Menu Structure Description 1 UNITS C F or K Select temperature measurement units C F or K 2 SENS 4W RTD Select the 4 wire RTD transducer 3 TYPE PT100 D100 F100 Select 4 wire RTD type PT385 PT3916 or USER Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Basic DMM Operation 3 43 Temperature measurement procedure NOTE Make sure the INPUTS switch is in the correct position To use front panel inputs it must be in the F out position For switching modules it must be in the R in position 1 Ifa switching channel is presently closed displayed press OPEN to open it 2 Select the temperature measurement function by pressing TEMP 3 Configure the temperature measurement as previously explained in Temperature measurement configuration Connect the temperature transducer s to be measured 5 Ifusing a switching module perform the following steps to close the desired channel Keep in mind that for 4 wire RTD measurements you will close the primary INPUT channel 1 through 10 The channel that it is paired to will close automatically a Press the CLOSE key b Use lt gt A and to key in the channel number and press ENTER The previously closed channel s if any will open and the specified channel o
172. EV A01 A01 where First AOI is the main board ROM revision Second AO1 is the display board ROM revision Installed switching modules are then displayed For example if there is a Model 7700 switching module installed in both slots the following messages will be displayed 1 7700 2 7700 If a slot is empty the message NONE will be displayed instead If the saved power on setup is not the factory defaults setup SYSTem POSetup PRESet a message to identify the setup will be briefly displayed Defaults and user setups page 1 20 After the power up sequence the instrument begins its normal display of readings NOTE The serial number of the Model 2700 can be displayed by selecting the SNUM item of the SETUP menu Press SHIFT and then SETUP to access the menu For remote operation the serial number can be read using the IDN command see Section 12 for details 1 18 Getting Started Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Keyclick Display With keyclick enabled an audible click will sound when a front panel key is pressed Perform the following steps to disable or enable keyclick 1 Press SHIFT and then LOCAL to display the present state of KEYCLICK ON or OFF 2 Press A or to display the desired keyclick state and press ENTER Remote programming The following command controls keyclick SYSTem KCLick lt b gt Enable or disable keyclick where lt b gt ON or OFF NOTE _ Keyclick ON
173. Examples H 13 Table H 2 continued LabVIEW examples Manual Name Reference Brief Description Advance2 None Use Case 2 40 channel scan using 7708 module e 30 channels DCV 15 on 100mV range 15 on 10V range 9 channels ACV 1V range e 1 channel 4 wire RTD temperature e Measurement speed rate 1 plc Filter Disabled no filtering e Buffer Store 160 reading strings Buffer elements include reading only Triggering Timer scan 40 channels every one minute Data retrieval SRQ when buffer 14 12 34 and full Advance3 None Use Case 3 Two scans using 7708 module 40 channel DCV 1V range scan e 20 channel Q4 scan e Models 2700 and 2701 100Q range e Model 2750 10Q range dry circuit ohms enabled e Measurement speed rate 0 1 plc e DCV input divider Enabled LOMQ input impedance Filter Disabled no filtering e Buffer Store 40 DCV reading strings 20 Q4 reading strings Buffer elements include reading only e Limits DCV scan Limit 1 all channels 20mV Master Latch enabled e Triggering Bus control source e Data retrieval SRQ if limit fails H 14 KE2700 Instrument Driver Examples Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Table H 2 continued LabVIEW examples Manual Name Reference Brief Description Advance4 None Use Case 4 Two scans using 7708 module e 40 channel DC
174. For resistances gt 1kQ the 2 wire Q2 method is typically used for measurements For resistances lt 1kQ the 4 wire Q4 measurement method should be used to cancel the effect of test lead and channel path resistances Offset compensated ohms OCOMP The presence of thermal EMFs voltages can adversely affect low resistance measurement accuracy To overcome these unwanted offset voltages you can use offset compensated ohms on the 100 1kQ and 10kQ ranges for the Q4 function Connections NOTE When using the front panel inputs the INPUTS switch must be in the F out position For switching modules it must be in the R in position Front panel inputs Connections for resistance measurements are shown in Figure 3 8 For 2 wire resistance measurements 22 connect the test leads to INPUT HI and LO as shown in Figure 3 8A For 4 wire resistance Q4 connect the test leads to INPUT HI and LO and SENSE Q4 HI and LO as shown in Figure 3 8B Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Basic DMM Operation 3 21 Figure 3 8 Q2 and 94 connections for front panel inputs Model 2700 Shielded Optional Shield Q4WIRE ii CAUT ys Cabe Resistance Under Test Note Source current flows from the ENSE es J INPUT HI to INPUT LO terminals A Q2 Connections Model 2700 Shielded Cable Optional Shield Q4WIRE HI 2 m G N PEAK meur
175. G STORE RECALL FILTER REL danda Shifted DELAY HOLD LIMITS ON OFF TYPE MONITOR CH OFF CARD Selects DC voltage measurement function Selects AC voltage measurement function Selects DC current measurement function Selects AC current measurement function Selects 2 wire resistance measurement function Selects 4 wire resistance measurement function Selects frequency measurement function Selects temperature measurement function Configures and controls mX b percent or reciprocal 1 X calculation Configures and controls digital and audio beeper output for limits Enables disables channel ratio Enables disables channel average Configures and controls continuity test Enables disables offset compensated ohms with 04 function selected Selects period measurement function Configures temperature measurements Selects external triggering front panel bus trigger link as the trigger source Triggers a measurement when in external triggering EX TRIG Sets the number of readings to store and enables the buffer Displays stored readings and buffer statistics Use the lt gt A and Ww keys to navigate through buffer Enables disables filter for selected function Enables disables relative for selected function Dual function Manually scans switching channels When in a menu these keys control cursor position for making selections or change values Sets user delay between trigger and measurement Holds
176. Hz to 300kHz To achieve the best accuracy for ACV and ACI measurements use the bandwidth setting that best reflects the frequency of the input signal For example if the input signal is 40Hz then a bandwidth setting of 30 should be used To set bandwidth simply specify approximately the frequency of the input signal The instrument will automatically set the bandwidth as follows lt NRf 3to29 3Hz to 300kHz 30 to 299 30Hz to 300kHz 300 to 300e3 300Hz to 300kHz NOTE A rate command NPLCycles or APERture for ACV and ACI is only valid if the bandwidth for that AC function is set to 300 300Hz to 300kHz See Rate and bandwidth conflict error page 4 12 for details Rate and bandwidth conflict error For bandwidth settings of 3 and 30 the normal A D conversion method is not used for ACV and ACI measurements Therefore integration rate commands NPLCycles and APERture for these bandwidth settings will cause a settings conflict error 221 and not be executed For a bandwidth setting of 300 the normal A D conversion method is used therefore the integration rate commands can be used The default bandwidth setting is 30 for both ACV and ACI If you want to set an integration rate for an AC function you will have to first set the bandwidth to 300 Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Range Digits Rate Bandwidth and Filter 4 13 Filter Rate and bandwidth programming examples NOTE The following e
177. JUNC INT TEMP RJUN RSEL INT 101 b Set and enable high limit 1 Set limit to 30 SHIFT LIMITS gt HI1 30 00000 CALC3 LIM1 UPP 30 101 Enable on limit SHIFT OFF ON gt LIMITS ON CALC3 LIM1 STAT ON 101 Close channel 101 ROUT CLOS 101 Enable Channel Average SHIFT CH AVG CAV ON 101 c Channel 102 103 and 104 Select DCV function FUNC VOLT 102 104 Select 10V range VOLT RANG 10 102 104 Set filter count to 20 SHIFT TYPE gt 020 RDGS VOLT AVER COUN 20 102 104 Enable filter FILTER VOLT AVER STAT ON 102 104 d Disable off channels 105 through 222 ROUT SCAN 101 104 SHIFT CH OFF e Disable immediate scan IMM SCAN N and enable ROUT SCAN TSO HLIM1 high limit 1 HLIM1 SCAN Y f Disable timer TIMER NO g Set reading count to 4 ROUT MON POIN 4 4 Select and enable monitor channel ROUT MON 101 SHIFT MONITOR gt 101 ROUT MON STAT ON O Triggering Trigger model Explains the various components of the front panel trigger model which controls the triggering operations of the instrument Reading hold Explains the Reading Hold feature which is used to screen out readings that are not within a specified reading window External triggering Explains external triggering which allows the Model 2700 to trigger and be triggered by other instruments Remote programming triggering Covers remote operation for triggering including t
178. KEITHLEY Model 2 00 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual A GR RAE MEAS UR GEORG ONFIDENCE WARRANTY Keithley Instruments Inc warrants this product to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of 3 years from date of shipment Keithley Instruments Inc warrants the following items for 90 days from the date of shipment probes cables rechargeable batteries diskettes and documentation During the warranty period we will at our option either repair or replace any product that proves to be defective To exercise this warranty write or call your local Keithley representative or contact Keithley headquarters in Cleveland Ohio You will be given prompt assistance and return instructions Send the product transportation prepaid to the indicated service facility Repairs will be made and the product returned transportation prepaid Repaired or replaced products are warranted for the balance of the original warranty period or at least 90 days LIMITATION OF WARRANTY This warranty does not apply to defects resulting from product modification without Keithley s express written consent or misuse of any product or part This warranty also does not apply to fuses software non rechargeable batteries damage from battery leakage or problems arising from normal wear or failure to follow instructions THIS WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCH
179. LOW 1s gate and Period to 3 33 ppm 80 ppm 3 33 ppm MED 100ms gate 750 V 33 3 ppm 80 ppm 33 3 ppm FAST 10ms gate Additional Uncertainty of reading AC MEASUREMENT SPEEDS Low Frequency Uncertainty MED FAST Single Channel 60Hz 50Hz Operation oe lied a Function Digits Readings s Rate Bandwidth 50Hz 100Hz 0 1 0 ACV ACI 6 5 2s Reading SLOW 3 Hz 300kHz 100Hz 200Hz 0 0 18 e3 4 8 4 MED 30 Hz 300kHz 200Hz 300Hz 0 0 10 6 5 35 28 FAST 300 Hz 300kHz gt 300Hz 0 0 Frequency 6 5 1 1 SLOW 3 Hz 300kHz CREST FACTOR 1 2 23 34 Pena ae 2 wel see Additional Uncertainty 0 05 0 15 0 30 om a a al an Cn Maximum Crest Factor 5 at full scale 10 11 AC MEASUREMENT CHARACTERISTICS AC Volts MEASUREMENT METHOD AC coupled True RMS INPUT IMPEDANCE 1MQ 2 by lt 100pF INPUT PROTECTION 1000Vp or 400VDC 300Vrms with plug in modules AC Current MEASUREMENT METHOD AC coupled True RMS SHUNT RESISTANCE 0 19 BURDEN VOLTAGE 1A lt 0 3Vrms 3A lt 1 Vrms Add 1 Vrms when used with plug in modules INPUT PROTECTION 3A 250V fuse Frequency and Period MEASUREMENT METHOD Reciprocal Counting technique GATE TIME SLOW 1s MED 100ms and FAST 10ms AC General AC CMRR 70dB VOLT HERTZ PRODUCT lt 8 x 10 Multiple Channel Into Memory 7710 SCANNING ACV 120 s 7710 Scanning ACV with Auto Delay on 2s reading AC System Speeds RANGE CHANGES 4 s 3 s FUNCTION CHANGES 4 s 3 s AUTORANGE
180. Manual Software The following optional software is available from Keithley ExceLINX 1A This is an economical easy to use add in utility for Microsoft Excel and Keithley Integra Series Multimeter Switch systems No programming is required Configure your measurements quickly using pop up menus and eliminate time consuming and error prone programming Acquire data into a spreadsheet on the fly during a scan or transfer data into a spreadsheet after a scan is completed A few mouse clicks are all it takes to configure channels set parameters triggers and scan lists There is no need to launch a separate data logging or data crunching application live data streams automatically into an Excel workbook ready for analysis or charting using all of Excel s powerful built in tools TestPoint application development package This powerful and economical programming environment uses object oriented technology through a drag and drop interface to build a basic system quickly and without in depth programming Optional toolkits database and statistical process control are available to expand ExceLINX 1A capability Rack mount kits Model 4288 1 single fixed rack mount kit Mounts a single Model 2700 in a standard 19 inch rack Model 4288 2 side by side rack mount kit Mounts two instruments Models 182 428 486 487 2000 2001 2002 2010 2400 2410 2420 2430 2700 6430 6517A 7001 side by side in a standard 19 inch rack
181. NE ROUTe CLOSe ROUTe MULTiple CLOSe ROUTe MULTiple CLOSe STATe lt clist gt These query commands are used to determine closed switching module channels ROUT CLOS is used to return a list of closed measurement channels including the paired channel for 4 wire measurements It will not return non measurement channels For details see Table 2 1 and related reference information ROUT MULT CLOS is used to return all closed channels measurement and non measurement For details see Table 2 2 and related reference information ROUT MULT CLOS STAT is used to return the state open or closed of each specified channel A 0 is returned for an open channel and a 1 is returned for a closed channel For details see Table 2 2 and related reference information SYSTem CARD commands There is a series of SYSTem CARD commands that can be used to acquire the following information about a switching module installed in the Model 2700 Return the serial number and firmware revision e Determine the maximum allowable voltage e Determine if the module supports multiplexer or isolated channels Determine if the module has built in temperature sensors for internal cold junction thermocouple temperature measurements e Determine which channels are used for volts 2 wire measurements and which are used for amps e Determine which channels are used for analog or digital output Determine the totalizer channel Mod
182. NE ienesa g eE E E e a aera EE EN 4 6 Remote programming digits ssseeseseeeeseseseerrrerrseerrsreses 4 6 Rate cssssessatessacsieraeaivengstsasscnaseaysaonseviabeteassaersatenstd aasaensiteueazees 4 8 Bandwidth siicstieceseeciessen tien tuecetenaane div ease ibe sedges 4 10 Scanning seorsan lesaesaede nach eawesbensasdeenasessesenceeadeeasvacdubeonsees 4 10 Remote programming rate and bandwidth 4 10 Filter scstss cies sascenieaes svengstuacdtvescevascancehens ceninasbea tie hiaacedans steauetensint 4 13 Filter Characteristics 0 0 ceeeeesseseeesesseceeecseeeseeseeeseeeeeeaees 4 13 Remote programming filter 0 eee eeeseeeeeseeeeeeees 4 20 Relative Saee enen ra ea EE ERE AER EATE RS 5 2 Basic operation esessssssssssrssesseessessrsssessrssssssessreseseessrssresens 5 2 Remote programming rel sesseseesssessesresesrrsrssrsrrsreresresese 5 4 DV et EE EEE EP AE A E 5 8 ina DeC Ao E E E A 5 9 PSI CODE siscessssiesecsscuesssescosessdesetoneveangendensticseedtesscbieinesesstssdon 5 10 Reciprocal 1 X sinsice oiana 5 11 Basic operation sesssseriescssisrsesisccpeisessisesrsoakeoiersouiasco sereen 5 12 Remote programming math sessseeesseereseseeererrerrsrerrsrese 5 13 Ratio and channel average csccessceseceeseeeseeeseeeseeeeseeeeeeeeee 5 16 Basic operation sesasine aeien et 5 17 Remote programming ratio and channel average 5 19 IB EOE E E E E E E E 5 21 Remote programming d
183. NSe 1 Optional root command RESistance AVERage TCONtrol lt name gt Select filter type lt name gt MOVing or Note 2 REPeat RESistance AVERage WINDow lt NRf gt Set filter window in lt NRf gt O0to 10 0 1 RESistance AVERage COUNt lt n gt clist Specify filter count lt n gt 1 to 100 10 RESistance AVERage STATe lt b gt clist Enable or disable the filter Note 3 Q4 filter commands SENSe 1 Optional root command FRESistance AVERage TCONtrol lt name gt Select filter type lt name gt MOVing or Note 2 REPeat FRESistance AVERage WINDow lt NRf gt Set filter window in lt NRf gt 0to 10 0 1 FRESistance AVERage COUNt lt n gt clist Specify filter count lt n gt 1 to 100 10 FRESistance AVERage STATe lt b gt clist Enable or disable the filter Note 3 TEMP filter commands SENSe 1 Optional root command TEMPerature AVERage TCONtrol lt name gt Select filter type lt name gt MOVing or Note 2 REPeat TEMPerature AVERage WINDow lt NRf gt Set filter window in lt NRf gt 0to 10 0 1 TEMPerature AVERage COUNt lt n gt clist Specify filter count lt n gt 1 to 100 10 TEMPerature AVERage STATe lt b gt clist Enable or disable the filter Note 3 Channel list parameter lt clist gt SCH where S Mainframe slot number 1 or 2 CH Switching module channel number must be 2 digits Examples 101 Slot 1 Channel 1 101 203 S
184. O WaitSRQ Return to Waits Display full Return to Waits Display full Return to Waits RQ message RQ message RQ Display 1750th reading message Return to Waits RQ 11 12 Status Structure Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Status register sets As shown in Figure 11 1 there are four status register sets in the status structure of the Model 2700 Standard Event Status Operation Event Status Measurement Event Status and Questionable Event Status Register bit descriptions Standard event register The used bits of the Standard Event Register Figure 11 4 are described as follows Bit BO Operation Complete OPC Set bit indicates that all pending selected device operations are completed and the Model 2700 is ready to accept new com mands This bit only sets in response to the OPC query command See Section 12 for details on OPC and OPC PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE oPc B15 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO Figure 11 4 Standard event status Standard Event Status Register ESR To Event Summary Bit ESB of Status Byte Register HEE pon ura cme exe ove ave opc efancars Event ESE B15 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO Register PON Power On QYE Query Error URQ User Request OPC Operation Complete CME Command Error EXE Execution Error amp
185. OTE The following information on trigger model operations apply specifically to front panel operation Block diagrams known as trigger models are used to show the two fundamental scan functions STEP or SCAN These two scan functions are enabled by the STEP and SCAN keys respectively The trigger models for scanning are shown in Figure 7 1 and Figure 7 2 Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Scanning 7 5 NOTE The trigger model in Figure 7 2 also applies for bus operation See Remote programming scanning page 7 20 for differences between front panel and remote scanning For the following discussion refer to Figure 7 1 for STEP operation and Figure 7 2 for SCAN operation Figure 7 1 Trigger model with STEP function Enable Scan Close First Chan in List Another Trigger Reading 2 Counter Reading Count Event Detection Control Source Immediate Open Last Chan External Close Next Chan Timer in List Timer Enabled Delay Auto or Manual Ratio Chan Average Delay Output Trigger Device Action Measurement Process 7 6 Scanning Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Figure 7 2 Trigger model with SCAN function Enable Scan Close First N Chan in List 9 Yes Another Trigger Control Event Source Detection Scan Counter Immediate External Timer Manual Output Bus Trigger Timer Bypass
186. PERATOR SERVICABLE PARTS SERVICE BY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL ONLY ote ogge k aO a San 1 Digital Output 1 low limit 1 12345 2 Digital Output 2 high limit 1 3 Digital Output 3 low limit 2 4 Digital Output 4 high limit 2 5 Digital Output 5 master limit 6789 DIGITAL I O 6 Ext Trig input 7 Diode Clamp 8 Hardware Interlock input 9 Digital chassis Ground Digital input trigger link input When enabled the Trigger In pin 6 and Digital Ground pin 9 can be used as the trigger link input for external triggering Pin 6 is physically connected to the input line pin 2 of the TRIG LINK connector Pin 8 of the digital I O is used to enable or disable Trigger In Trigger In is enabled by leaving pin 8 open or pulling it high 5V Trigger In is disabled by setting pin 8 low OV NOTE External triggering is covered in Section 8 9 6 Limits and Digital I O Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Digital outputs The digital I O port has five digital outputs Each digital output can be used as a sink to control devices e g relays or as a source to provide input to external logic TTL or CMOS circuitry The simplified schematic for the digital outputs are shown in Figure 9 3 Note that this illustration shows the schematic for one digital output All five digital output circuits are identical Figure 9 3 Digital I O port simplified schematic Model 270
187. PIB to time out In order to again use DATA FRESh a new fresh reading must be triggered If math is disabled CALCulate FORMat NONE or CALCulate STATe OFF the raw reading will be retrieved by CALC DATA and CALC DATA FRESh Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Rel Math Ratio Channel Average dB 5 15 Math programming examples Example 1 The following command sequence performs the mX b calculation for channels 101 and 102 of the Model 7700 Keep in mind that after CALC DATA is sent the Model 2700 has to be addressed to talk to send the math result to the computer NOTE The following example can be run from the KE2700 Instrument Driver using the example named Linear in Table H 1 of Appendix H CALC FORM MXB Select mX b calculation CALC KMAT MMF 2 Set m factor to 2 CALC KMAT MBF 100 Set b factor to 100 CALC STAT ON Enable math calculation ROUT CLOS 101 Close channel 101 CALC DATA Read mX b result for channel 101 ROUT CLOS 102 Close channel 102 CALC DATA Read mX b result for channel 102 Example 2 The following command sequence configures channels 101 through 110 of the Model 7700 to perform the percent calculation when they are scanned NOTE The following example can be run from the KE2700 Instrument Driver using the example named Percent in Table H 1 of Appendix H CALC FORM PERC 101 110 Select percent calculation CALC KMAT PERC 100
188. PLC Rel Off Off Frequency and Period Digits 6 digits 6 digits Range 10V 10V Rate aperture 1 second 1 second Rel Off Off Function DCV GPIB No effect No effect Address No effect 16 at factory No effect 16 at factory Keyclick On On Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Table 1 4 continued Getting Started 1 23 Default settings Setting Factory RST Set Diff Limits Off Off LO Limit 1 1 1 HI Limit 1 1 1 LO Limit 2 2 2 HI Limit 2 2 2 Line Synchronization Off Off Math mX B Off Off Scale Factor 1 0 1 0 Offset 0 0 0 0 Units x x Percent Off Off Reference 1 0 1 0 1 X Reciprocal Off Off Monitor Off Off Output Beeper Never Never Digital Output Off Off Logic Sense High High Pulse No off No off Ratio Off Off Resistance Q2 and Q4 Digits 6 digits 6 digits Filter On Off v Window 0 1 0 1 Count 10 10 Type Moving Repeat Jv Offset compensation OCOMP Off Off Range Auto Auto Rate Slow 5 PLC Slow 5 PLC Rel Off Off 1 24 Getting Started Table 1 4 continued Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Default settings Setting Factory RST Set Diff RS 232 Off Off Baud rate No effect No effect Flow control XonXoFF XonXoFF Terminator No effect No effect Scanning Disabled Disabled Auto scan No off No effect y Type Simple or Advanced No effect No effect Simple scan Minimum channel
189. Per lt n gt Set high limit 2 for monitor lt n gt 4294967295 to 2 0 4294967295 CALCulate3 LIMit2 _LOWer lt n gt Set low limit 2 for monitor lt n gt 4294967295 to 2 0 4294967295 CALCulate3 LIMit1 STATe lt b gt Enable disable limit 1 test lt b gt ON or OFF OFF CALCulate3 LIMit2 STATe lt b gt Enable disable limit 2 test lt b gt ON or OFF OFF Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Scanning 7 29 Table 7 1 continued Scanning commands Commands Description Default Ref Trigger commands TRIGger SOURce lt name gt Select control source lt name gt IMMediate TIMer IMM MANual BUS or EXTernal TRIGger TIMer lt n gt Set timer interval in sec lt n gt 0 001 to 999999 999 0 1 TRIGger COUNt lt NRf gt Set trigger count lt NRf gt 1 to 55000 or INFinity Note 2 e TRIGger DELay lt n gt Set delay in sec lt n gt 0 to 999999 999 0 TRIGger DELay AUTO lt b gt Enable disable auto delay lt b gt ON or OFF ON SAMPle COUNt lt NRf gt Set sample count lt NRf gt 1 to 55000 1 e SAMPle COUNt Query sample count INITiate CONTinuous lt b gt Enable disable continuous initiation lt b gt ON or OFF f INITiate Initiate one scan cycle f READ Initiate one scan cycle and request sample readings f Buffer commands TRACe DATA TRACe CLEar Channel list parameter lt clist gt SCH where S Read buffer readings Clear buffer
190. Press ENTER Press CLOSE gt Select MULTI gt Key in 111 gt Press ENTER Remote programming ROUT MULT CLOS 101 111 4 Measure DUT 1 Front panel operation Take reading from display Remote programming DATA 5 Open channels 1 and 11 Front panel operation Press OPEN gt Select MULTI gt Key in 101 gt Press ENTER Press OPEN gt Select MULTI gt Key in 111 gt Press ENTER Remote programming ROUT MULT OPEN 101 111 6 Modify steps 3 4 and 5 to test DUT 2 That is close channels 2 and 12 measure DUT 2 and then open channels 2 and 12 7 Test the remaining eight DUT in a similar manner That is close the appropriate channels for the DUT make the measurement and then open the channels 8 After the last DUT is tested repeat step 1 to open all channels Identifying installed modules and viewing closed channels On power up the model numbers of installed switching modules are displayed briefly If a Model 7700 7701 7702 7703 7705 7708 or 7709 switching module is removed while the Model 2700 is on the instrument will operate as if the module is installed That is the Model 2700 will operate as if the pseudocard is installed NOTE Ifa Model 7706 or 7707 is removed while power is on error 523 Card hardware error will occur and the module will be removed from the system NOTE In general it is not recommended to install or remove switching modules with the power on Model 2700 Multimeter Switch S
191. Q 100Q 1kQ and 10kQ ranges CONTINUITY THRESHOLD Adjustable 1 to 1000Q INPUT PROTECTION 1000V all Source Inputs 350V Sense Inputs 300V with plug in modules DC Current SHUNT RESISTORS 100mA 3A 0 19 20mA 5Q INPUT PROTECTION 3A 250V fuse Thermocouples CONVERSION ITS 90 REFERENCE JUNCTION Internal External or Simulated Fixed OPEN CIRCUIT CHECK Selectable per channel Open gt 11 4k 200Q EARTH ISOLATION 500V peak gt 10GQ and lt 150pF any terminal to chassis DC Notes 1 20 overrange except on 1000V and 3A 2 Add the following to ppm of range uncertainty 100mV 15ppm 1V and 100V 2ppm 100Q 30ppm lt IMQ 2ppm 10mA and 1A 10ppm 100mA 40ppm 3 2 measured with 10MQ input resistance DMM gt 10GQ DMM on 10MQ and 100MQ ranges 4 Relative to calibration accuracy 5 For signal levels gt 500V add 0 02ppm V uncertainty for portion exceeding 500V 6 Specifications are for 4 wire Q 100Q with offset compensation on 77xx plug in module with LSYNC and offset compensation on With offset compensation on OPEN CKT VOLTAGE is 12 8V For 2 wire Q add 1Q additional uncertainty 7 Must have 10 matching of lead resistance in Input HI and LO 8 Add the following to ppm of reading uncertainty when using plug in modules 10 kQ 100 kQ 1 MQ 10MQ 100 MQ All Modules 220 ppm 2200 ppm 7701 7703 7707 and 7709 Modules 10ppm 100ppm 1000 ppm 1 10 7706 7708 Modules 5 pp
192. RIG COUN 1 These two commands configure the 2700 SAMP COUN 30 to perform 30 measurements INIT Starts measurement process WAI Sends the WAI command Program waits for 2700 to go into idle before executing next command DATA Requests one reading 13 SCPI Signal Oriented Measurement Commands Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual The signal oriented measurement commands are used to acquire readings You can use these high level instructions to control the measurement process These commands are When measurements are performed the readings are fed to other enabled operations Appendix D explains Data flow remote operation and provides additional information on using FETCh READ and MEASure to acquire 13 2 SCPI Signal Oriented Commands summarized in Table 13 1 NOTE readings Table 13 1 Signal oriented measurement command summary Command Description CONFigure lt function gt lt rang gt lt res gt lt clist gt FETCh READ MEASure lt function gt lt rang gt lt res gt lt clist gt Channel list parameter lt clist gt SCH where S Mainframe slot number 1 or 2 Examples 101 Slot 1 Channel 1 Places the Model 2700 in a one shot measurement mode for the specified function Requests the latest reading Performs an ABORt INITiate and a FETCh Performs an ABORt CONFigure lt function gt and a READ See Note
193. Returns the model numbers of the switching D modules installed in the Model 2700 Returns NONE if a slot is empty RCL lt NRf gt Recall command Returns Model 2700 to the user saved setup 0 E 1 2 or 3 RST Reset command Returns Model 2700 to the RST default F conditions SAV lt NRf gt Save command Saves the present setup as the user saved setup E 0 1 2 or 3 SRE lt NRf gt Service request enable Programs the service request enable register sec 11 command SRE Service request enable query Reads the service request enable register Sec 11 STB Status byte query Reads the status byte register Sec 11 TRG Trigger command Sends a bus trigger to Model 2700 G TST Self test query Performs a checksum test on ROM and returns H the result WAI Wait to continue command Wait until all previous commands are executed I Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Common Commands 12 3 A IDN identification query Reads identification code The identification code includes the manufacturer model number serial number and firmware revision levels and is sent in the following format KEITHLEY INSTRUMENTS INC Model 2700 xxxxxxx yyyyy zzz Where XXXXXXxX is the serial number yyyyy zzzzz is the firmware revision levels of the digital board ROM and display board ROM B OPC Operation Complete Set the OPC bit in the standard event register after all pending commands are com
194. S Note that pressing the AUTO key sets the delay to 0 001 sec Press ENTER to accept the delay or EXIT for no change Device action The primary device action is a measurement However the device action block could include the following additional actions Figure 8 2 Figure 8 2 Device action From Delay Block To Output Trigger of Figure 8 1 Block of Figure 8 1 Filter DEVICE ACTION Filtering If the repeating filter is enabled the instrument samples the specified number of reading conversions to yield single filtered reading Only one reading conversion is performed if the filter is disabled or after the specified number of reading conversions for a moving average filter is reached After a reading Rdg is procured operation proceeds to Hold Hold The Hold feature is used to screen out reading anomalies When enabled the user selects a window and count for Hold In general when a reading is outside the window it is rejected operation loops back to the beginning of the Device Action as shown in Figure 8 2 The hold count specifies how many readings have to be within the window before it is accepted See Reading hold autosettle page 8 6 for operation details After a Hold Reading is acquired operation proceeds to Channel Closure Channel Closure When scanning the last device action is channel control Using the hold feature provides an auto settling time for switching relays Each open close transitio
195. SENSe VOLTage DC NPLC 0 01 DISPlay ENABle OFF SYSTem AZERO STATe OFF SENSe VOLTage DC AVERage STATe OFF TRIGger COUNt 1 READ Enter reading Use fixed range for fastest readings Use lowest NPLC setting for fastest readings Turn off display to increase speed Disable autozero to increase speed but may cause drift over time Turn off filter for speed 3 60 Basic DMM Operation Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual One shot reading DC volts bus trigger auto ranging RST INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt TRIGger SOURCe BUS SENSe FUNCtion VOLTage DC SENSe VOLTage DC RANGe AUTO ON TRIGger COUNt 1 INITiate TRG or GET Triggers reading GET is a GPIB general bus command SENSe DATA FRESh Enter reading One shot reading external trigger auto delay enabled RST INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt TRIGger SOURce EXTernal TRIGger DELay AUTO ON Note Auto trigger delay only takes effect with trigger source set for BUS or EXTernal SENSe FUNCtion VOLTage DC SENSe VOLTage DC RANGe AUTO ON INITiate external trigger SENSe DATA FRESh enter reading This step will time out if the trigger has not occurred 4 Range Digits Rate Bandwidth and Filter Range Provides details on measurement range selection Includes the commands for remote programming Digits Provides det
196. Scanning fundamentals Sequential and non sequential scans page 7 3 This topic is located near the beginning of this section For remote operation the ROUT CLOS ACON command is used to enable or disable auto channel configuration Table 7 1 Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Scanning 7 21 Saving setup Up to four instrument setups can be saved in memory using the SHIFT gt SAVE menu SAVO SAV1 SAV2 or SAV3 A user saved setup can also be used as the power on setup A user saved setup can be restored from the SHIFT gt SETUP menu Details on user setups are covered in Section 1 Auto scan When auto scan is enabled the scan operation is saved in memory If power to the Model 2700 is interrupted the scan will resume when power is restored With auto scan enabled the last scan setup becomes the power on setup It takes precedence over the factory RST or user saved power on setup Perform the following steps to set auto scan While in the normal measurement state press SHIFT and then SETUP 2 Use the A and keys to display the auto scan AUTOSCAN setting N no or Y yes 3 To change the setting press p gt to place the cursor on the setting N or Y and press A or to change the setting 4 Press ENTER to exit from the menu structure NOTE With auto scan enabled DO NOT save the present setup as the power on default setup If you do so an interrupted scan will not resume If durin
197. Section 12 CALCulate3 LIMit1 CLEar CALCulate3 LIMit1 CLEar AUTO lt b gt CALCulate3 LIMit2 CLEar CALCulate3 LIMit2 CLEar AUTO lt b gt These commands are used to clear the fail 1 indications for Limit 1 and Limit 2 If auto clear is enabled for a limit the fail indication clears when instrument operation enters the idle state With auto clear disabled the fail indication will remain until it is cleared by the CLEar command Limits and digital outputs programming example The following command sequence configures the Model 2700 to perform Limit 1 test on a DCV reading If the 100mV limit is reached digital output 2 will be pulled low If the 100mV limit is reached digital output 1 will be pulled low NOTE The following example can be run from the KE2700 Instrument Driver using the RST CALC3 CALC3 CALC3 CALC3 CALC3 READ CALC3 LIM1 UPP 0 1 LIM1 LOW 0 1 LIM1 STAT ON OUTP LSEN ALOW OUTP ON LIM1 FAIL example named Limits in Table H 1 of Appendix H One shot measurement mode DCV Set HI1 limit to 100mv Set LO1 limit to 100mvV Enable Limit 1 Set logic sense to active low Enable digital outputs Trigger and request reading Request result of limit 1 test Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Limits and Digital I O 9 15 Application sorting resistors For this application the idea is to sort a batch of 100Q resistors into three bins Bin 1 is for resistor
198. Select DCI range lt n gt 0 to 3 A 3 CURRent DC RANGe AUTO lt b gt Control DCI auto range lt b gt ON or OFF ON lt clist gt CURRent AC RANGe lt n gt lt clist gt Select ACI range lt n gt 0 to 3 A 3 CURRent AC RANGe AUTO lt b gt Control ACI auto range lt b gt ON or OFF ON lt clist gt RESistance RANGe lt n gt lt clist gt Select Q2 range lt n gt 0 to 120e6 Q 120e6 RESistance RANGe AUTO lt b gt lt clist gt Control Q2 auto range lt b gt ON or OFF ON FRESistance RANGe lt p gt lt clist gt Select Q4 range lt n gt 0 to 120e6 Q 120e6 FRESistance RANGe AUTO lt b gt lt clist gt Control Q4 auto range lt b gt ON or OFF ON Channel list parameter lt clist gt SCH where S Mainframe slot number 1 or 2 CH Switching module channel number must be 2 digits Examples 101 Slot 1 Channel 1 101 203 Slot 1 Channel 1 and Slot 2 Channel 3 101 110 Slot 1 Channels 1 through 10 1 The lt clist gt parameter is used to configure one or more channels for a scan Each channel in the lt clist gt must be set to the function specified by the range command If not a conflict error 221 will occur For example VOLTage AC RANGe 1 101 is only valid if scan channel 101 is set for the ACV function 2 DC is optional for the commands to set DCV and DCI range Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manua
199. TIME lt 3s ASCII READINGS TO RS 232 19 2k baud 50 s MAX INTERNAL TRIGGER RATE 300 s MAX EXTERNAL TRIGGER RATE 250 s AC Notes 1 20 overrange except on 750V and 3A 2 Specifications are for SLOW mode and sine wave inputs gt 5 of range SLOW and MED are multi sample A D conversions FAST is DETector BANDwidth 300 with nPLC 1 0 3 Applies to 0 18 C and 28 50 C 4 Specifications are for square wave inputs only Input signal must be gt 10 of ACV range If input is lt 20mV on the 100mV range then the frequency must be gt 10Hz 5 Applies to non sine waves gt 5Hz and lt 500Hz Guaranteed by design for Crest Factors gt 4 3 6 For IkQ unbalance in LO lead 7 Speeds are for 60Hz 50Hz operation using factory defaults operating conditions RST Autorange off Display off Limits off Trigger delay 0 8 Includes measurement and binary data transfer out GPIB reading element only 9 Auto Zero off 10 Sample count 1000 into memory buffer 11 DETector BANDwidth 300 with nPLC 0 01 12 Maximum useful limit with trigger delay 175ms 13 Typical uncertainties Typical represents two sigma or 95 of manufactured units measure lt 0 35 of reading and three sigma or 99 7 lt 1 06 of reading 14 For signal levels gt 2 2A add additional 0 4 to of reading uncertainty HW 9 25 03 Revision F Page 3 of 4 2700 Multimeter Data Acquisition System EXPANSION SLOTS 2 POWER SUPPLY
200. TN line Comments Uniline REN Remote Enable X Set up devices for remote operation EOI X Marks end of transmission IFC Interface Clear X Clears interface ATN Attention Low Defines data bus contents SRQ X Controlled by external device Multiline LLO Local Lockout Low Locks out local operation Universal DCL Device Clear Low Returns device to default conditions SPE Serial Enable Low Enables serial polling SPD Serial Poll Disable Low Disables serial polling Addressed SDC Selective Device Clear Low Returns unit to default conditions GTL Go To Local Low Returns device to local Unaddressed UNL Unlisten Low Removes all listeners from the bus UNT Untalk Low Removes any talkers from the bus Common High Programs IEEE 488 2 compatible instruments for common operations SCPI High Programs SCPI compatible instruments for particular operations G 8 IEEE 488 Bus Overview Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Uniline commands ATN IFC and REN are asserted only by the controller SRQ is asserted by an external device EOI may be asserted either by the controller or other devices depending on the direction of data transfer The following is a description of each command Each command is sent by setting the corresponding bus line true REN Remote Enable REN is sent to set up instruments on the bus for remote operation When REN is true devices will be removed from the local mode Depend
201. TRIG LINK Pinout Ce GIC 221 _ Pin 2 Pin 1 External Voltmeter Trigger Complete Input Output External trigger Pin Number N DD UV A U N Description Voltmeter Complete Output External Trigger Input No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection Signal Ground Signal Ground The EXT TRIG input requires a falling edge TTL compatible pulse with the specifications shown in Figure 8 4 In general external triggers can be used to control measure operations For the Model 2700 to respond to external triggers the trigger model must be configured for it Figure 8 4 Trigger link input pulse specifications EXT TRIG Triggers on Leading Edge TTL High 2V 5V TTL Low lt 0 8V 2us Minimum Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Triggering 8 9 Voltmeter complete The VMC output provides a TTL compatible output pulse that can be used to trigger other instruments The specifications for this trigger pulse are shown in Figure 8 5 Typically you would want the Model 2700 to output a trigger after the settling time of each measurement Figure 8 5 Trigger link output pulse specifications VMC Meter Complete TTL High 3 4V Typical TTL Low 0 25V Typical 10us Minimum 8 10 Triggering Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual External triggering example For a test system that requires a large number of switching channels the Model 2700 c
202. Table H 1 of Appendix H FUNC VOLT Select DCV function UNIT VOLT DB Select DCV dB UNIT VOLT DB REF 1V Set dB reference to 1V Example 2 The following command sequence configures channels 101 and 105 of the Model 7700 to perform ACV dB measurements when they are scanned A 10V input will be measured as OdB NOTE The following example can be run from the KE2700 Instrument Driver using the example named VoltdB2 in Table H 1 of Appendix H FUNC VOLT AC 101 105 Set 101 and 105 for ACV UNIT VOLT AC DB 101 105 Set 101 and 105 for dB UNIT VOLT AC DB REF 10V 101 105 Set 101 and 105 for 10VAC dB reference 5 24 Rel Math Ratio Channel Average dB Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Buffer Buffer overview Summarizes basic buffer data store capabilities Front panel buffer Explains how to store and recall readings and discusses the various statistics available on buffer data including minimum and maximum values average mean standard deviation and peak to peak values e Remote programming buffer Summarizes the commands to control the data store and provides a programming example 6 2 Buffer Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Buffer overview The Model 2700 has a data store buffer to store from 2 to 55 000 readings The instrument stores the readings that are displayed during the storage process Each timestamped reading includes
203. Te lt b gt lt clist gt Enable disable channel average lt b gt ON or OFF OFF CAVerage DELay lt NRf gt lt clist gt Set delay in secs lt NRf gt 0 to 99999 999 0 5 Channel list parameter lt clist gt SCH where S Mainframe slot number 1 or 2 CH Switching module channel number must be 2 digits Examples 101 Slot 1 Channel 1 101 203 Slot 1 Channel 1 and Slot 2 Channel 3 101 110 Slot 1 Channels 1 through 10 The lt clist gt parameter is used to configure one or more channels for a scan Enabling disabling ratio or channel average As with front panel operation enabling ratio disables channel average and conversely enabling channel average disables ratio Ratio and channel average delay RATio DELay or CAVerage DELay sets the delay between the two channel measure ments for the enabled calculation This delay is applied after the trigger delay in the trigger model see Section 8 for details This delay cannot be set from the front panel The 0 5s default delay keeps the relays from cycling too fast Setting a shorter delay may shorten the life of the relays It does not matter which of the two commands you use to set the delay The set delay affects both ratio and channel average 5 20 Rel Math Ratio Channel Average dB Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Ratio and channel average programming examples Example 1 The following command se
204. The following example can be run from the KE2700 Instrument Driver using the example named ScanChan in Table H 1 of Appendix H The following program will scan 10 channels 101 through 110 TRAC INIT TRIG TRIG SAMP ROUT ROUT ROUT READ SCAN LSEL INT SCAN TSO IMM Start scan when enabled and triggered Enable scan Trigger scan and request the readings CLE Clear buffer CONT OFF Disable continuous initiation SOUR IMM Select the immediate control source COUN 1 Set to perform one scan COUN 10 Set to scan 10 channels SCAN 101 110 Set scan list channels 101 through 110 1 1 1 Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Scanning 7 33 Scanning examples The following scanning examples assume that the Model 7700 switching module is installed in slot 1 of the mainframe Tables are used for the procedure steps to configure and run scan examples The left side of the table provides the front panel procedure while the right side shows the equivalent remote programming commands Where appropriate menu sequences are provided to summarize a front panel operation or selection For example SHIFT SETUP gt RESTORE FACT For the above menu sequence press SHIFT and then SETUP to access the menu use the edit keys lt P gt A and W to display RESTORE FACT and then press ENTER to select it External trigger scan For this example an external instrument is used to trigger the
205. Timer gt No Bda No Another Reading Yes Sample Counter Open Last Chan Delay i Auto or Manual Close Next Chan Ratio Chan in List Average Delay Device Action Measurement Process Remote programming only Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Scanning 7 7 STEP operation overview When the STEP key is pressed the Model 2700 leaves the idle state closes the first channel and waits for the programmed trigger event After the trigger is detected the instrument may be subjected to one or more delays before performing the measurement After a reading is taken and stored in the buffer the Model 2700 outputs a trigger pulse opens the closed channel and then closes the next channel in the scan list The instrument then waits for another trigger event to measure the channel After the last channel is scanned the instrument returns to the idle state with the first channel in the scan list closed SCAN operation overview When the SCAN key is pressed the Model 2700 leaves the idle state closes the first channel and waits for the programmed trigger event After the trigger is detected the instrument may be subjected to one or more delays before performing the measurement After a reading is taken and stored in the buffer the Model 2700 opens the closed channel and then closes the next channel in the scan list Operation keeps looping around to measure all channels in the scan list Afte
206. Untalk command addressing it to listen or sending the IFC Interface Clear command LSTN This indicator is on when the Model 2700 is in the listener active state which is activated by addressing the instrument to listen with the correct MLA My Listen Address com mand LSTN is off when the unit is in the listener idle state Place the unit in the listener idle state by sending UNL Unlisten addressing it to talk or sending IFC Interface Clear command over the bus Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Remote Operations 10 11 SRQ You can program the instrument to generate a service request SRQ when one or more errors or conditions occur When this indicator is on a service request has been generated This indicator stays on until the serial poll byte is read or all the conditions that caused SRQ have been cleared See Section 11 Status Structure for more information LOCAL key The LOCAL key cancels the remote state and restores local operation of the instrument Pressing the LOCAL key also turns off the REM indicator and returns the display to normal if a user defined message was displayed If the LLO Local Lockout command is in effect the LOCAL key is also inoperative For safety reasons the OUTPUT key will still be active in LLO Programming syntax The information in this section covers syntax for both common commands and SCPI com mands For information not covered here see the IEEE 488 2
207. V scan 1V range Configuration saved in User Setup 1 e 20 channel Q4 scan Configuration saved in User Setup 2 e Models 2700 and 2701 100Q range e Model 2750 10Q range dry circuit ohms enabled e Setup 1 or Setup 2 recalled to perform scan e Measurement speed rate 0 1 ple e DCV input divider Enabled LOMQ input impedance Filter Disabled no filtering Buffer Store 40 DCV reading strings 20 Q4 reading strings Buffer elements include reading only e Limits DCV scan Limit 1 all channels 20mV Master Latch enabled e Triggering Bus control source e Data retrieval SRQ if limit fails Advance5 None Use Case 5 32 channel scan using 7701 module e Common side 4 wire ohms measurements CSIDe mode e Dry circuit ohms option for Model 2750 e Install jumpers to connect Input Hi and Sense Hi directly to DUT common side bus e Install jumpers to connect channel 35 to Sense Lo and Input Lo e Buffer Store 32 reading strings Buffer elements include reading only Triggering Immediate control source Data retrieval SRQ when buffer full Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual KE2700 Instrument Driver Examples H 15 Table H 2 continued LabVIEW examples Manual Name Reference Brief Description Advance6 None Use Case 6 Scan 160 channels using 7703 module see NOTE e Type K thermocouple TC temperatur
208. VOLTage DC VOLT DC Sec 3 Jv lt clist gt VOLTage AC CURRent DC CURRent AC RESistance FRESistance TEMPerature FREQuency PERiod CONTinuity FUNCtion lt clist gt Query function Jv DATA LATest Return the last reading Sec 3 Jv DATA FRESh Return the last fresh reading Sec 3 HOLD Path to control Hold feature Sec 8 WINDow lt NRf gt Set Hold window in 0 01 to 20 1 WINDow Query Hold window COUNt lt NRf gt Set Hold count 2 to 100 5 COUNt Query Hold count STATe lt NRf gt Enable or disable Hold OFF STATe Query state of Hold CAVerage lt b gt lt clist gt Channel average calculation Sec 5 DELay lt NRf gt lt clist gt Set delay between the two measurements 0 5 in seconds 0 to 99999 999 DELay lt clist gt Query delay STATe lt b gt lt clist gt Enable or disable channel average OFF STATe lt clist gt Query state of channel average RATio lt b gt lt clist gt Channel ratio calculation OFF Sec 5 DELay lt NRf gt lt clist gt Set delay between the two measurements 0 5 in seconds 0 to 99999 999 DELay lt clist gt Query delay STATe lt b gt lt clist gt Enable or disable channel ratio OFF STATe lt clist gt Query state of channel ratio 15 10 SCPI Reference Tables Table 15 5 continued SENSe command summary Model 2700 Multimeter Switch Syste
209. Verage DELay and RATio DELay are coupled Changing the delay for channel average also changes the delay for channel ratio and vice versa For 60Hz line power the default for aperture is 16 67msec For 50Hz the default is 20msec REPeat is the RST default and MOVing is the SYSTem PRESet default From the front panel the factory default is MOVing OFF is the RST default and ON is the SYTem PRESet default The following commands can instead be used to select the reference junction and set the simulated reference temperature TEMPerature RJUNction RSELect lt name gt lt clist gt Select reference junction SIMulated INTernal or EXTernal TEMPerature RJUNction RSELect lt clist gt Query reference junction TEMPerature RJUNction SIMulated lt n gt lt clist gt Set simulated reference temperature 0 to 50 C 32 to 122 F or 273 to 323 K TEMPerature RJUNction SIMulated lt clist gt Query simulated reference temperature When using multiple channel operation ROUT MULT command to connect a switching module channel to the DMM for ther mocouple temperature measurements the SIMulated reference junction will be used if the INTernal or EXTernal reference junc tion is selected With a Model 7700 7706 or 7708 installed the default sensor junction is Internal Otherwise the Simulated 23 C junction is selected 15 20 SCPI Reference Tables Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Tabl
210. a opa 0 232 ca I E E gt IEEE 488 10 8 Remote Operations Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual General bus commands General commands are those commands such as DCL that have the same general mean ing regardless of the instrument Table 10 1 lists the general bus commands Table 10 1 General bus commands Command Effect on Model 2700 REN Goes into effect when next addressed to listen IFC Goes into talker and listener idle states LLO LOCAL key locked out GTL Cancel remote restore Model 2700 front panel operation Cancel remote restore front panel operation for all devices DCL Returns all devices to known conditions SDC Returns Model 2700 to known conditions GET Initiates a trigger SPE SPD Serial polls the Model 2700 REN remote enable The remote enable command is sent to the Model 2700 by the controller to set up the instrument for remote operation Generally the instrument should be placed in the remote mode before you attempt to program it over the bus Setting REN true does not place the instrument in the remote state You must address the instrument to listen after setting REN true before it goes into remote The Model 2700 must be in remote in order to use the following commands to trigger and acquire readings e INITiate and then FETCh e READ e MEASure IFC interface clear The IFC command is sent by the controller to place the Model 2700 in the local
211. adings may result NOTE Keep in mind that if the timer control source is selected the Delay period is only in effect for the first pass through the loop Ratio Chan Average Delay With ratio or channel average enabled a delay is typically used to keep the channel relays from cycling too fast The default delay period is 0 5 seconds but can be set from 0 to 999999 999 seconds using remote programming Ratio and channel average are covered in Section 5 NOTE The Ratio Chan Average Delay is in addition to the Timer or Delay Auto or Manual That is it occurs after the Timer interval or Delay period elapses Device action The channel measurement process is performed at this block If repeat filter is enabled the filter process is also performed Reading count NOTE For both STEP and SCAN the reading count specifies the number of readings to store in the buffer STEP operation The reading count specifies the number of channels to scan This can be equal to less than or greater than the number of channels in the scan list The last scanned channel remains closed If you start the scan again it will start at the next channel If the reading count is set to infinity INF the scan will continuously repeat until you stop it NOTE One counter is used for STEP operation As shown in Figure 7 1 reading count sets the Trigger Counter 7 10 Scanning Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual SCAN operation Whe
212. aeees 1 19 Table 1 4 Default settings scoit cece eeceeccceseeeseeceseeseeeceeessneceeeeseeeeeeesees 1 22 Table 1 5 Default setup ComMMANAS ee eeseeseeceeeeteeeeeeeeneeeseeeeeeesees 1 25 Table 1 6 Exercise 1 Measure AC volts store readings in buffer 1 28 Table 1 7 Exercise 2 Close and open channels system channel OPELAU OM cies cucssevach ivcescaseds seacersupvaiesecaetes iasecesteas increases ens tes 1 32 Table 1 8 Exercise 3 Simple scanning cecceesceesneeeneeeeeeeeseeeeees 1 34 2 Closing and Opening Switching Module Channels Table 2 1 System channel control commands ee eeeeeeeeeereeeeeees 2 12 Table 2 2 Multiple channel control commands eeeeeeeeeereeeeeeee 2 20 Table 2 3 Relay closure count commands ees eeseeseeseeseeeeeereeeeeees 2 32 3 Basic DMM Operation Table 3 1 Autozero and LSYNC commands 0 eee eeceeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 3 6 Table 3 2 Color codes thermocouple Wires esseeeeseeeeereeeeeees 3 38 Table 3 3 Thermistor temperature measurement configuration 3 41 Table 3 4 Thermocouple temperature measurement configuration 3 41 Table 3 5 RID parameters i cveeseiiscarscssieieb agenssovagelaasissxsessessenanedaasteiads 3 42 Table 3 6 4 wire RTD temperature measurement configuration 3 42 Table 3 7 Basic measurement commands ssssesessereresreresrrersreresreee 3 49 4 Range Digits Rate Bandwidth and Filter Table 4 1 Measurement ranges an
213. age 1 20 When scanning the unit is considered idle at the end of a scan operation when the reading for the last channel remains displayed To restore triggers press SHIFT and then HALT See Section 7 for details on scanning Control source and event detection The control source holds up operation until the programmed event occurs and is detected The control sources are described as follows e Immediate With this control source event detection is immediately satisfied allowing operation to continue External Event detection is satisfied for any of the following three conditions e An input trigger via the Trigger Link line EXT TRIG is received The front panel TRIG key is pressed The Model 2700 must be taken out of remote before it will respond to the TRIG key Use the LOCAL key or send GTL over the bus Trigger command TRG or GET is received over the bus 8 4 Triggering Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Delay auto or manual A programmable delay is available after event detection It can be set manually or an auto delay can be used With auto delay selected the instrument automatically selects a delay period that will provide sufficient settling for function and autorange changes and multi phase measurements Normal measurement state With auto delay selected and the External or Bus control source selected the Model 2700 selects a delay based on the selected voltage range The a
214. ails on scanning are provided in Section 7 FRESistance OCOMpensated lt b gt lt clist gt The instrument does not have to be on the Q4 function to enable offset compensated ohms When Q4 is selected offset compensated ohms will be enabled When using the lt clist gt parameter to configure a scan channel for offset compensated ohms that channel must already be set for Q4 If set for another function a settings conflict 221 will occur TEMPerature TCouple RJUNction RSELect lt name gt lt clist gt To use the EXTERnal reference junction the scan channel 101 201 301 401 or 501 to be used for the measurement must already be configured to use a thermistor or 4 wire RTD transducer Otherwise a settings conflict error 221 will occur The TEMPerature TRANsducer command is used to select the transducer NOTE The following command can instead be used to select the reference junction TEMPerature RJUNction RSELect lt name gt lt clist gt Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Basic DMM Operation 3 53 d TEMPerature TCouple RJUNction SIMulated lt p gt lt clist gt The units for the simulated reference temperature depend on the present temperature measurement units as set by UNIT TEMPerature see Ref h NOTE The following command can instead be used to set the simulated reference temperature TEMPerature RJUNction SIMulated lt n gt lt clist gt e TEMPerature FRTD RZERo l
215. ails on selecting display resolution Includes the commands for remote programming Rate and bandwidth Provides details on integration rate and bandwidth for AC measurements Includes the commands for remote programming Filter Provides details on filtering Includes the commands for remote programming 4 2 Range Digits Rate Bandwidth and Filter Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Range The range setting is remembered by each measurement function When you select a function the instrument will return to the last range setting for that function Measurement ranges and maximum readings The selected range affects both accuracy of the measurement as well as the maximum level that can be measured The measurement ranges and maximum readings for all functions except FREQ PERIOD and TEMP are listed in Table 4 1 Input values that exceed the maximum readings cause the message OVERFLOW to be displayed Table 4 1 Measurement ranges and maximum readings Maximum Function Ranges reading DCV 100mV 1V 10V 100V 1000V 1010V ACV 100mV 1V 10V 100V 750V 757 5V DCI 20mA 100mA 1A 3A 3 1A ACI 1A 3A 3 1A Q2 10009 1kQ 10kQ 100kQ 1MQ 1OMQ 100MQ 120MQ 4 100Q 1kQ 10kQ 100kQ IMQ 10MQ 100MQ 120MQ Offset compensated ohms OCOMP can be performed on the 100Q 1kQ and 10kQ ranges FREQ and PERIOD Frequency measurements from 3Hz to 500kHz and period measureme
216. ak 8 x 107V Hz Model 7700 switching module Connections for the Model 7700 switching module are shown in Figure 3 18 For this 2 wire measurement channels through 20 can be used Figure 3 18 FREQ and PERIOD connections using Model 7700 switching module Model 7700 AC Switching Voltage Module Source Caution Maximum 300V peak or RMS 8 x 107 VeHz 3 46 Basic DMM Operation Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Frequency and period measurement procedure NOTE Make sure the INPUTS switch is in the correct position To use front panel inputs it must be in the F out position For switching modules it must be in the R in position 1 Ifa switching channel is presently closed displayed press OPEN to open it 2 Perform one of the following steps to select the function e Press FREQ to perform frequency measurements e Press SHIFT and then FREQ to perform period measurements 3 Use the RANGE A and keys to select a measurement range consistent with the expected AC voltage Details on range are provided in Section 4 4 Apply the AC voltage s to be measured CAUTION Do not apply more than the maximum input levels indicated in Figure 3 17 and Figure 3 18 or instrument damage may occur 5 Ifusing a switching module perform the following steps to close the desired channel a Press the CLOSE key b Use lt gt A and to key in the channel number and press ENTER The previou
217. all test leads properly connected voltage on Sense Hi is at virtually the same potential as Input Hi and Sense Lo is at virtually OV When a sense lead Hi or Lo opens that terminal will drift to 15mV and it will trip the OVRFLW message Figure 3 12C shows detection for an open Sense Hi lead 3 30 Basic DMM Operation Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Figure 3 12 Open ohms test lead detection A Normal 4 wire ohms measurement 100mV 2700 H W Detection 100mV S W Detection lspurce 100 000 2 2700 Reading 100Q range OmV penser H W Detection 6 6V S W Detection E OVR FLW 2 2700 Reading 100Q range Open Input Lead C Open sense lead lead detected Open Sense Lead H W Detection S W Detection DUT OVR FLW 2 2700 Reading 100Q range Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Basic DMM Operation 3 31 10MQ and 100M ranges Open sense lead detection for the LOM and 100MQ detection is slightly different and is shown in Figure 3 13 Detection is performed at Sense Lo only Sense Hi is not used It does not need to be connected to the DUT When the Sense Lo lead opens the Sense Lo terminal will drift to 15mV and trip the OVRFLOW message Figure 3 13 Open Sense Lo lead detection 10M2 and 100M2 ranges OVRFLW MQR 2700 Reading 10MQ range Open Sense Lo Since Sense Hi is not used for the measurement there is no open Lead test lead
218. amming examples Programming example 1 The following command configures scanlist channels 101 through 105 for 4 wire resistance measurements on the 1MQ range CONF FRES 1le6 101 105 Programming example 2 The following command selects the DCV function 10V range 3 digit resolution and performs the no lt clist gt CONFigure operations CONF VOLT 10 3 5 13 6 SCPI Signal Oriented Commands Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual FETCh Description This command requests the latest post processed reading After sending this command and addressing the Model 2700 to talk the reading is sent to the computer This command does not affect the instrument setup This command does not trigger a measurement The command simply requests the last available reading FETCh can also be used to return more than one reading When returning more than one reading the readings are automatically stored in the buffer In order to return multiple reading strings continuous initiation must be disabled INIT CONT OFF so that the sample count SAMPle COUNt which specifies the number of measurements to be performed can be set gt 1 After INITiate is sent to trigger the measurements FETCh will return the reading strings FETCh is automatically asserted when the READ or MEASure command is sent NOTES FETCh can repeatedly return the same reading Until there is a new reading this command continues to return the
219. amp 28 50 C J 200 to 760 C 0 001 C 0 2 C 1 0 C 0 03 C C K 200 to 1372 C_ 0 001 C 0 2 C 1 0 C 0 03 C C N 200 to 1300 C 0 001 C 0 2 C 1 0 C 0 03 C C T 200 to 400 C 0 001 C 0 2 C 1 0 C 0 03 C C E 200 to 1000 C 0 001 C 0 2 C 1 0 C 0 03 C C R 0 to 1768 C 0 1 C 0 6 C 1 8 C 0 03 C C S 0 to 1768 C 0 1 C 0 6 C 1 8 C 0 03 C C B 350 to 1820 C 0 1 C 0 6 C 1 8 C 0 03 C C 4 Wire RTD 100Q platinum PT100 D100 F100 PT385 PT3916 or user type Offset compensation On 200 to 630 C 0 01 C 0 06 C 0 003 C C Thermistor 2 2kQ 5kQ and 10kQ 80 to 150 C 0 01 C 0 08 C 0 002 C C 15 18 DC SYSTEM SPEEDS RANGE CHANGES 50 s 42 s FUNCTION CHANGES 50 s 42 s AUTORANGE TIME lt 30ms ASCII READINGS TO RS 232 19k BAUD 55 s MAX INTERNAL TRIGGER RATE 2000 s MAX EXTERNAL TRIGGER RATE 375 s Single Channel 60Hz 50Hz Operation FUNCTION DIGITS READINGS s PLCs DCV DCI Ohms lt 10M 6 5 5 4 10 Thermocouple 6 516 30 24 1 Thermistor 6 51216 50 40 1 Sti 100 80 0 1 5 51617 250 200 0 1 5 517 480 400 0 1 4 5 2000 1800 0 01 4W Ohms lt 10M 6 56 14 1 1 10 6 56 is 12 1 5 517 33 25 0 1 RTD 6 516 0 9 0 7 10 6 5 6 8 6 4 1 5 51617 18 14 4 0 1 Channel Ratio 6 56 2 5 2 10 Channel AVG 6 516 15 12 1 5 517 25 20 0 1 Multiple Channels Into Memory 7703 and 7710 Scanning DCV 175 s
220. ample counter set to 10 and the trigger counter set to one a trigger will be sent after the 10 measurements are performed If instead the trigger counter is set to 10 and the sample counter is set to 1 a trigger will be sent after each measurement Triggering commands Commands for triggering are summarized in Table 8 2 Table 8 2 SCPI commands triggering Commands Description Default Ref ABORt Reset trigger system a INITiate IMMediate Initiate one trigger cycle b INITiate CONTinuous lt b gt Enable disable continuous initiation ON or OFF Note 1 c FETCh Request the last reading s d READ Perform an ABORt INITiate and a FETCh d TRIGger SOURce lt name gt Select control source IMMediate TIMer MANual IMM e BUS or EXTernal TRIGger TIMer lt n gt Set timer interval 0 to 999999 999 sec 0 1 TRIGger COUNt lt NRf gt Set trigger count 1 to 55000 or INFinity Note 2 TRIGger DELay lt n gt Set delay 0 to 999999 999 sec 0 TRIGger DELay AUTO lt b gt Enable or disable auto delay f TRIGger SIGNal Loop around control source g SAMPle COUNt lt NRf gt Set sample count 1 to 55000 1 h SENSe 1 Optional root command for HOLD commands i HOLD WINDow lt NRf gt Set Hold window in lt NRf gt 0 01 to 20 1 HOLD COUNt lt NRf gt Set Hold count lt NRf gt 2 to 100 5 HOLD STATe lt b gt Enable or disable Hold OFF SYSTem BEEPer STATe lt b gt Enable or disable the beeper ON RST Restore RST
221. an For the advanced scan each channel can have its own unique setup As explained in Trigger models page 7 4 there is a user set delay auto or manual that is in effect for both the simple and advanced scan Channel setup considerations Rel In order to use an acquired rel value for an advanced scan channel the rel value has to be acquired with the instrument in the normal measurement state Details to set rel for scan channels are provided in Relative page 5 2 Scanning examples front panel and remote programming at the end of this section demonstrate how to set rel values for scan channels Filter The moving filter cannot be used in a scan only the repeat filter can be used If you configure a channel or channels to use the moving filter the filter will be off when the scan is run See Section 4 for details on filter 7 12 Scanning Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Hold Reading hold cannot be used with scanning Do not set up a scan channel to use hold and do not run a scan with hold enabled NOTE When in the scan setup menu use the edit keys lt 4 gt A and W to make selections and set values Displayed selections and settings are entered by pressing the ENTER key Saving the configured scan The configured scan can be saved in a user saved setup SAVO SAV1I SAV2 or SAV3 For a front panel configured scan the reading count and timer values are also saved B04 and later so
222. an be used with external scanners such as the Keithley Models 7001 and 7002 For example 10 Model 7011s installed in the Model 7002 can provide up to 400 2 pole channels as shown in Figure 8 6 Figure 8 6 DUT test system OUTPUT KEITHLEY INPUTS Model 2700 10 7011 MUX Cards The Trigger Link connections for this test system are shown in Figure 8 7 Trigger Link of the Model 2700 is connected to Trigger Link either IN or OUT of the Model 7002 Note that with the default trigger settings on the Model 7002 line 1 is an input and line 2 is an output This complements the trigger lines on the Model 2700 Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Triggering 8 11 For this example the Models 2700 and 7002 are configured as follows Model 2700 Factory defaults restored accessed from SHIFT SETUP External triggers accessed from EX TRIG Buffer enabled and set to store 400 readings Model 7002 Factory defaults restored Scan list 1 1 1 400 Number of scans 1 Channel spacing TrigLink Figure 8 7 Trigger link connections Model 7002 Trigger Link aro O one O Trigger Link Cable 8501 Trigger Link ARNIBIG No INTERNAL OPERATOR SERVICABLE PARTS SERVICE BY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL ONLY ommo o RS232 MADE EEE 488 N A lt 0 ce ma k gt CAUTION For CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE HAZARD REPLACE FUSE WITH SAME TYPE AND RATING Model 2700
223. ance R is then calculated R V I and the reading is displayed For offset compensated ohms two measurements are performed one normal resistance measurement and one using the lowest current source setting The offset compensated ohms reading is then calculated as follows Offset compensated ohms reading AV AI where AV V2 V1 Al 12 Il V1 is the voltage measurement with the current source at its normal level V2 is the voltage measurement using the lowest current source setting The above 2 point measurement process and reading calculation eliminates the resistance contributed by the presence of VgpyF Enabling disabling offset compensated ohms Offset compensated ohms is enabled by pressing SHIFT and then OCOMP When enabled the OCOMP annunciator is on Offset compensated ohms is disabled by again pressing SHIFT and then OCOMP Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Basic DMM Operation 3 25 Performing offset compensated ohms measurements Offset compensated ohms can only be performed on the 24 function using the 100Q 1kQ or 10kQ range Make sure you use 4 wire connections to the DUT see Connections page 3 8 NOTE Make sure the INPUTS switch is in the correct position To use front panel inputs it must be in the F out position For switching modules it must be in the R in position If a switching channel is presently closed displayed press OPEN to open it Select the 4 wire ohm
224. and SCPI standards See Sections 12 through 15 for more details on common and SCPI commands Command words Program messages are made up of one or more command words Commands and command parameters Common commands and SCPI commands may or may not use a parameter The following are some examples SAV lt NRf gt Parameter lt NRf gt required RST No parameter used SYSTem BEEPer lt b gt Parameter lt b gt required SYSTem PRESet No parameter used NOTE Atleast one space between the command word and the parameter is required Brackets Some command words are enclosed in brackets These brackets are used to denote an optional command word that does not need to be included in the program message For example INITiate MMediate 10 12 Remote Operations Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual These brackets indicate that IMMediate is implied optional and does not have to be used Thus the above command can be sent in one of two ways INITiate or INITiate IMMediate Notice that the optional command is used without the brackets When using optional command words in your program do not include the brackets Parameter types The following are some of the more common parameter types lt b gt lt name gt lt NRf gt lt n gt lt clist gt lt list gt Boolean Used to enable or disable an instrument operation 0 or OFF disables the operation and or ON enables the oper
225. and Slot 2 Channel 3 101 110 Slot 1 Channels 1 through 10 The lt clist gt parameter is used to configure one or more channels for a scan Each channel in the lt clist gt must be set to the function specified by the rel reference command If not a conflict error 221 will occur For example VOLTage AC REFerence 1 101 is only valid if scan channel 101 is set for the ACV function 2 DC is optional for the commands to set DCV and DCI rel 5 6 Rel Math Ratio Channel Average dB Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Pressing REL using rel commands When the front panel REL key is pressed the displayed reading is used as the rel value Subsequent readings are then the result of the actual input value and the rel value The REFerence ACQuire and REFerence STATe ON commands in that order can be used to press the REL key For example the following command sequence is the equivalent of pressing the REL key while on the DCV function VOLT REF ACQ Acquire reading as rel value VOLT REF STAT ON Enable rel Setting rel values The REFerence lt n gt command specifies the rel value for the specified function while the ACQuire command uses the input signal as the rel value The ACQuire command is typically used to zero the display For example if the instrument is displaying a 1p V offset sending ACQuire and enabling rel STATe ON zeroes the display The ACQuire command
226. and so on 7 32 Scanning Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual SAMPle COUNt and TRIGger COUNt Sample count specifies the number of readings to scan and store in the buffer while the trigger count specifies the number of scans to perform If the sample count is greater than the number of channels in the scan list scan list length operation wraps around to the beginning of the scan list and continues For example assume the scan list is made up of channels 101 102 and 103 and the sample count is set to 4 After channels 101 102 and 103 are scanned operation loops around to scan channel 101 again The first and last readings in the buffer will be channel 101 When performing multiple scans trigger count gt 1 sample readings overwrite the readings stored for the previous scan Continuous initiation must be disabled in order to set the sample counter gt 1 see Reference c INITiate CONTinuous INITiate and READ In order to initiate a single scan cycle using INITiate or READ continuous initiation must be disabled If you send INIT or READ with continuous initiation enabled error 213 Init ignored will occur You cannot use READ or INITiate if sample count gt 1 AND there are readings stored in the buffer by the TRAC command or by front panel data store operation error 225 out of memory Either set the sample count to one or clear the buffer TRACe CLEar Scanning programming example NOTE
227. and the first channel in the scan list will close Keep in mind that the scan is still enabled STEP or SCAN annunciator on When you press STEP or SCAN the scan will continue starting with the next channel 5 With reading count set to infinite the scan will keep repeating NOTE While the scan is enabled STEP or SCAN annunciator on most front panel keys are inoperative and will cause the message HALT SCANNER to be displayed 6 To disable the scan press SHIFT and then HALT Buffer To recall scanned readings stored in the buffer press RECALL and use the lt gt A and Y keys to navigate through the buffer Note that the buffer can be read while the instrument is storing readings See Section 6 for details on recalling buffer readings When finished make sure to exit from buffer recall by pressing the EXIT key NOTE Channels for an advanced scan can be configured using different mX B units i e and Q temperature sensors i e 4 wire RTD and thermistor and measurement type i e OCOMP ohms and DCV However when readings are recalled from the buffer the display may not indicate the correct mX B units symbol or annunciator for each channel For example assume one channel used OCOMP ohms while a second used Q2 When the readings are recalled the OCOMP annunciator may remain on for both channels This display anomaly is due to memory limitations Preserving the mX B units and annunciators for each channel wou
228. and words sent by the computer to the instrument Each common command is a three letter acronym preceded by an asterisk SCPI commands are categorized in the STATus subsystem and are used to explain how command words are structured to formulate program messages STATus Path Root OPERation Path ENABle lt NRf gt Command and parameter ENABle Query command PRESet Command Single command messages The above command structure has three levels The first level is made up of the root com mand STATus and serves as a path The second level is made up of another path OPERation and a command PRESet The third path is made up of one command for the OPERation path The three commands in this structure can be executed by sending three separate program messages as follows stat oper enab lt NRf gt stat oper enab stat pres In each of the above program messages the path pointer starts at the root command stat and moves down the command levels until the command is executed Multiple command messages You can send multiple command messages in the same program message as long as they are separated by semicolons The following is an example showing two commands in one program message stat oper stat oper enab lt NRf gt When the above is sent the first command word is recognized as the root command stat When the next colon is detected the path pointer moves down to the next command level and executes the command Whe
229. anel of the instrument The actual listen address value sent out over the bus is obtained by ORing the primary address with 20 For example if the primary address is 16 the actual listen address is 36 36 16 20 In a similar manner the talk address is obtained by ORing the primary address with 40 With the present example the talk address derived from a primary address of 16 would be 56 56 16 40 The IEEE 488 standards also include another addressing mode called secondary addressing Secondary addresses lie in the range of 60 7F Note however that many devices including the Model 2700 do not use secondary addressing Once a device is addressed to talk or listen the appropriate bus transactions take place For example if the instrument is addressed to talk it places its data string on the bus one byte at a time The controller reads the information and the appropriate software can be used to direct the information to the desired location Bus lines The signal lines on the IEEE 488 bus are grouped into three different categories data lines management lines and handshake lines The data lines handle bus data and commands while the management and handshake lines ensure that proper data transfer and operation takes place Each bus line is active low with approximately zero volts representing a logic true The following paragraphs describe the operation of these lines Data lines The IEEE 488 bus uses ei
230. ange is 13dBm 0 00032dBm dBm and dB for other voltage inputs can be calculated in exactly the same manner using pertinent specifications ranges and reference impedances Calculating dB characteristics accuracy The relationship between voltage and dB is as follows Vin dB 20 log VREF As an example of how to calculate the actual readings limits for dB with a user defined VREF of 10V you must calculate the voltage accuracy and apply it to the above equation To calculate a 60dB measurement assume 10mV RMS for a VREF of 10V Using the 100mV range one year 10Hz 20kHz frequency band and SLOW rate the voltage limits are as follows Accuracy 0 06 of reading 0 03 of range 0 0006 x 10mV 0 0003 x 100mV 6uV 304V 364 V Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Specifications A 9 Thus the actual reading accuracy is 1OmV 36mV or 10 036mV to 9 964mV Applying the voltage reading accuracy into the dB equation yields 10 036mV dBm 20log 10y 59 96879dB 9 964mV dBm 20log joy 60 03133dB Thus the actual reading accuracy is 60dB 0 031213dB to 60dB 0 031326dB dBm and dB for other voltage inputs can be calculated in exactly the same manner using pertinent specifications ranges and other reference voltages Additional derating factors In some cases additional derating factors must be applied to calculate certain accuracy values For example an additional deratin
231. annels 11 20 from channels 1 10 send ROUT MULT CLOS 123 note opposite logic When automatically configured for 4 wire measurements including 4 wire Q RTD temperature Ratio and Channel Average the channels are paired as follows CH1 and CH11 CH6 and CH16 CH2 and CH12 CH7 and CH17 CH3 and CH13 CH8 and CH18 CH4 and CH14 CH9 and CH19 CH5 and CH15 CH10 and CH20 Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Figure B 1 Simplified schematic for Model 7700 HI Input nee LO Sense H LO old Junction f x3 Hl ot of o Channel 1 i LO oo Oo Channels 2 9 AD HI o of o Channel 10 i LO o o o E E A Channel 23 2 Pole Open 4 Pole Closed A TE ET See Note HI o of o Channel 20 3A O HI oo OO O Channel 21 O LO oO Oo oO 3A O HI od ood o Channel 22 l O LO Oo Oo oO AMPS O LO Model 7700 Connection Guide B 3 Channel 25 See Note Backplane Isolation O O 0 HI l Input O O o LO Channel 24 See Note Backplane Isolation o o oHI Sense To Model 2700 o O OLO Backplane AMPS O Notes Channels 23 and 25 in this schematic refer to the designations used for control and are not actual available measurement channels If the module is not to be internally connected to the DMM channels 24 and 25 can be opened using multiple channel operation see Multiple channel operation in Section 2 for details B 4 Model 7700 Conn
232. anual Front panel GPIB operation This section describes aspects of the front panel that are part of GPIB operation including messages status indicators and the LOCAL key Error and status messages See Appendix C for a list of error and status messages associated with IEEE 488 program ming The instrument can be programmed to generate an SRQ and command queries can be performed to check for specific error conditions GPIB status indicators The REM remote TALK talk LSTN listen and SRQ service request annunciators show the GPIB bus status Each of these indicators is described below REM This indicator shows when the instrument is in the remote state REM does not necessarily indicate the state of the bus REN line as the instrument must be addressed to listen with REN true before the REM indicator turns on When the instrument is in remote all front panel keys except for the LOCAL key are locked out When REM is turned off the instrument is in the local state and front panel operation is restored NOTE IfLLO is in effect LOCAL will be locked out If TRIGger SOURce is set to manual the TRIG key will be active in remote TALK This indicator is on when the instrument is in the talker active state Place the unit in the talk state by addressing it to talk with the correct MTA My Talk Address command TALK is off when the unit is in the talker idle state Place the unit in the talker idle state by sending an UNT
233. ars the buffer Entering any other buffer size value resets the buffer size to 55000 NOTE Ifthe buffer is empty when the Model 2700 is turned off buffer auto clear will enable when it is turned back on If the buffer is not empty the instrument will power up to the last auto clear setting Keep in mind that if the instrument powers up with buffer auto clear off buffer size is fixed at 55000 You will have to enable auto clear to change the buffer size The auto clear setting on or off is not affected by SYSTem PRESet or RST front panel or remote operation However front panel FACTory defaults enables buffer auto clear Enabling disabling buffer auto clear 1 Press SHIFT and then SETUP 2 Use the A and Y keys to display the present state of buffer auto clear BUF AUTOCLR Y yes or N no To retain the present state of buffer auto clear press ENTER or EXIT NOTE Ifyou change the state of buffer auto clear the buffer will clear 3 To change the state of buffer auto clear press p gt to place the cursor on the present setting Y or N 4 Use the A or W key to display the desired setting Y enabled N disabled and press ENTER NOTE For remote programming the TRACe CLEar and TRACe CLEar AUTO commands are used to clear the buffer Table 6 1 6 4 Buffer Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Timestamps Each stored reading is referenced to either a real time clock timestamp or to a relative times
234. at lt name gt ABSolute or ABS g lt name gt DELTa TRACe FEED lt name gt Select source of readings lt name gt SENSe 1 CALC h CALCulate 1 or NONE 6 10 Buffer Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Table 6 1 continued Buffer commands Command Description Default Ref TRACe FEED CONTrol Set buffer control lt name gt NEVer NEXT or NEV h lt name gt ALWays TRACe DATA Read all readings in the buffer i TRACe DATA SELected Specify readings to be returned lt start gt starting j lt start gt lt count gt point lt count gt number of readings TRACe NEXT Query buffer location for next stored reading j TRACe NOTify lt NRf gt Specify number of stored readings that will set Trace k Notify bit B6 of measurement event register lt NRf gt 2 to 109999 must be less than TRACe POINts value FORMat ELEMents lt item list gt Specify elements for TRACe DATA response Note 2 1 message lt item list gt READing CHANnel UNITs RNUMber and TSTamp CALCulate2 FORMat lt name gt Select buffer statistic lt name gt MINimum NONE m MAXimum MEAN SDEViation PKPK or NONE CALCulate2 STATe lt b gt Enable disable statistic calculation lt b gt ON or OFF m OFF CALCulate2 IMMediate Calculate data in buffer m CALCulate2 MMediate Calculate data and read result m CALCulate2 DATA Read the selected buffer statistic m Notes 1 SYSTem PRESet and RST h
235. atching electro Latching electro Connector type Confi guration Unique features mechanical 2 female DB 50s Independent SPST channels Multiple channel operation only mechanical Mini screw terminal Multiplexer 16 digital outputs 2 analog outputs one counter totalizer mechanical 1 male DB 50 lfemale DB 25 Multiplexer 32 digital inputs outputs mechanical Oversized screw terminals Multiplexer All DMM functions except amps Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Table 1 1 continued Model 77xx series switching modules Getting Started 1 9 Models 7711 Model 7709 Model 7710 and 7712 2 pole Operation 8 channels 20 channels N A 4 pole Operation 4 channel pairs 10 channel pairs N A 1 pole Operation N A N A 8 channels Measure Volts 300V maximum 60V maximum No Measure Amps _ No No No Measure Ohms 2 4 wire 2 4 wire No Thermocouple No Yes No Cold Junction Relay Type Latching electro Solid state opto High frequency mechanical coupled FET electromechanical Connector type 1 female DB 50 3 5mm removable 10 SMA 1 female DB 25 screw terminals Configuration 6 x 8 matrix Multiplexer Multiplexer Unique features Rows 1 amp 2 connect High speed switch 50Q RF dual 1 x 4 to DMM system ing and long life multiplexer channel operation relays Max Frequency 7711 2GHz 7712 3 5GHz ren seconds 2 All multiplexers can be configured as two in
236. ates that the associated command can be used to configure a scan channel For example SENSe FUNCtion VOLTage AC Select ACV function SENSe FUNCtion VOLTage AC 101 Configure scan channel 101 for ACV While in the normal measurement display state the first command simply selects the ACV function The second command configures channel 101 to measure ACV when it is scanned See Section 7 for detailed information on scanning Voltage measurements DCV and ACV The Model 2700 can make DCV measurements from 0 1pV to 1000V and ACV measurements from 0 luV to 750V RMS 1000V peak DCV input resistance 100V and 1000V ranges 10MQ 100mV 1V and 10V ranges gt 10GQ II lt 400pF or 1OMQ ACV input impedance IMQ lt 100pF DCV input divider Normally the input resistance for the 100mVDC 1 VDC and 10VDC ranges is gt 10GQ while the input resistance of the 100VDC and 1000VDC ranges is 1OMQ However the input resistance for the three lower DCV ranges can also be set to 1OMQ by enabling the input divider With the input resistance lowered a more stable OV reading is achieved with an open input Also some external devices such as a high voltage probe must be terminated to a 10MQ load The input divider cannot be enabled from the front panel For remote programming the following command controls the input divider VOLT IDIVider lt b gt Enable ON or disable OFF the DCV input divider 3 8 Basic DMM Operation Mod
237. ation Example SYSTem LSYNc ON Enable line synchronization Name parameter Select a parameter name from a listed group Example lt name gt NEVer NEXt ALWays TRACe FEED CONTrol NEXt Numeric representation format This parameter is a number that can be expressed as an integer e g 8 a real number e g 23 6 or an exponent 2 3E6 Example SYSTem KEY 11 Press EXIT key from over the bus Numeric value A numeric value parameter can consist of an NRf number or one of the following name parameters DEFault MINimum MAXimum When the DEFault parameter is used the instrument is programmed to the RST default value When the MINimum parameter is used the instrument is programmed to the lowest allowable value When the MAXimum parameter is used the instrument is programmed to the largest allowable value Examples ARM TIMer 0 1 Sets timer to 100 msec ARM TIMer DEFault Sets timer to 0 1 sec ARM TIMer MINimum Sets timer to 1 msec ARM TIMer MAXimum Sets timer to 99999 99 sec Channel list Specify one or more channels Example ROUTe SCAN 101 110 Scan list slot 1 channels 1 10 List Specify one or more numbers for a list Example STATus QUEue ENABIle 110 222 Enable errors 110 through 222 Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Remote Operations 10 13 Angle brackets lt gt Angle brackets lt gt are used to denote a parameter type Do not include the brackets in the prog
238. available accepts the data and then indicates that the data has been accepted 4 The talker aware that the data has been accepted stops sending data and indicates that data is not being sent 5 The listener aware that there is no data on the bus indicates that it is ready for the next byte of data Bus description The IEEE 488 bus which is also referred to as the GPIB General Purpose Interface Bus was designed as a parallel transfer medium to optimize data transfer without using an excessive number of bus lines In keeping with this goal the bus has only eight data lines that are used for both data and with most commands Five bus management lines and three handshake lines round out the complement of bus signal lines A typical setup for controlled operation is shown in Figure G 1 Generally a system will contain one controller and a number of other instruments to which the commands are given Device operation is categorized into three operators controller talker and listener The controller controls the instruments on the bus The talker sends data while a listener receives data Depending on the type of instrument any particular device can be a talker only a listener only or both a talker and listener Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual IEEE 488 Bus Overview G 3 Figure G 1 IEEE 488 bus configuration To Other Devices 2700 Data Byte Transfer Control Y A LN Device 1 Aar y able to ta
239. ave no effect on TRACe commands The listed defaults for TRACe commands are set at the factory 2 The SYSTem PRESet and RST default is READ UNIT RNUM and TST a SYSTem TIME lt hr min sec gt Set clock time Use to set the clock time in the 24 hour format hr min sec Seconds can be set to 0 01 sec resolution Examples SYST TIME 13 23 36 Set time to 1 23 36 PM SYST TIME 3 25 28 5 Set time to 3 25 28 5 AM The SYSTem TIME command can be used to read the time Note that it returns the actual clock time and not the time parameter specified by the TIME command b SYSTem DATE lt yr mo day gt Set clock date Use to set the clock date in the year month day format When setting the year a 4 digit value must be used Example SYSTem DATE 1999 11 10 Set clock date to November 11 1999 Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Buffer 6 11 C SYSTem TSTamp TYPE RELative RTClock Select timestamp SYSTem TSTamp TYPE Query timestamp type next storage TRACe TSTamp TYPE Query timestamp type readings in buffer SYSTem TSTamp TYPE lt name gt Use to select the relative timestamp or the real time timestamp Note that changing the timestamp will clear the buffer if a storage is in process If no storage is in process changing the timestamp will not clear the buffer SYSTem TSTamp TYPE and TRACe TSTamp TYPE Both of these commands query the timestamp type However SYSTem TSTamp TYPE queries the timesta
240. bilities This can be modified with the TestPoint application development package optional software KE2700 IVI Instrument Driver Provided for programmers designed for use with application development environments Optional Software available from Keithley is summarized on page 1 6 If an additional manual is required order the appropriate manual package The manual packages include a manual and any pertinent addenda Options and accessories Plug in switching modules NOTE NOTE Table 1 1 provides a side by side comparison of the following Keithley switching modules All multiplexer modules can be configured as two independent multiplexers The Model 77xx Series Switching Modules Instruction Manual provides operating and service information for the switching modules This manual is supplied with each switching module Model 7700 This differential multiplexer provides 20 channels of 2 pole input or 10 channels of 4 pole input The internal cold junction allows direct connection of thermocouples It also has two 2 pole channels used exclusively for current input 1 4 Getting Started Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Model 7701 This differential multiplexer provides 32 channels of 2 pole input or 16 channels of 4 pole input Model 7702 This differential multiplexer provides 40 channels of 2 pole input or 20 channels of 4 pole input It also has two 2 pole channels used exclusively for
241. ble messages For these commands the lt list gt parameter is used to specify which messages to enable or disable The messages are specified by their codes The following examples show various forms for using the lt list gt parameter lt list gt 110 Single message 110 222 Range of messages 110 through 222 110 222 220 Range entry and single entry separated by a comma When you enable messages messages not specified in the list are disabled When you disable messages each listed message is removed from the enabled list NOTE To prevent all messages from entering the Error Queue send the enable command along with the null list parameter as follows STATus QUEue ENABle Table 11 6 Error queue commands Command Description Notes STATus QUEue NEXT Read and clear oldest error status code and message 1 STATus QUEue ENABle lt list gt Specify error and status messages for Error Queue 2 STATus QUEue ENABle Read the enabled messages STATus QUEue DISable lt list gt Specify messages not to be placed in queue 2 STATus QUEue DISable Read the disabled messages STATus QUEue CLEar Clear messages from Error Queue SYSTem ERRor Read Error Queue 1 SYSTem CLEar Clear messages from Error Queue Notes 1 Power up and CLS empties the Error Queue STATus PRESet has no effect 2 Power up enables error messages and disables status messages CLS and STATus PRESet have no effec
242. bled Thermistors For thermistors the temperature measurement range is 80 C to 150 C 0 01 C resolution Thermistor types that are supported include the 2 2kQ 5kQ and 10kQ types The thermistor is a temperature sensitive resistor Its resistance changes non linearly with changes in temperature Most thermistors have a negative temperature coefficient As temperature increases the resistance decreases The Model 2700 measures the resistance of the thermistor and calculates the temperature reading Of all the temperature transducers the thermistor is the most sensitive It can quickly detect minute changes in temperature It is a good choice when measuring very small changes in temperature The downside for this increased sensitivity is the loss of linearity Since they are especially non linear at high temperatures it is best to use them for measurements below 100 C NOTE Curve fitting constants are used in the equation to calculate thermistor temperature The thermistor manufacturer s specified curve fitting constants may not be exactly the same as the ones used by the Model 2700 Thermistor equation page F 6 provides the equation and the constants used by the Model 2700 It also explains how to select a thermistor when the manufacturer s constants and the ones used by the Model 2700 do not match 3 36 Basic DMM Operation Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual 4 wire RTDs For 4 wire RTDs the temperatu
243. bled operations including Limits Appendix D explains Data flow remote operation and the commands used to read the result of limit tests Reference a CALCulate3 LIMitl STATe lt b gt lt clist gt CALCulate3 LIMit2 STATe lt b gt lt clist gt Unlike front panel operation Limit 1 and Limit 2 can be controlled on off separately for remote programming The front panel limit indicators are affected as follows Limit 1 enabled The front panel HIGH IN LOW indicators work the same as they do for front panel operation Limit 1 disabled and Limit 2 enabled The status indicators pertain to Limit 2 When the reading is within Limit 2 the message I2 is displayed When the read ing reaches or exceeds the high or low limit the HIGH or LOW annunciator will turn on and the number 2 will be displayed NOTE When limits are disabled from the front panel both Limit I and Limit 2 disable for remote operation 9 14 Limits and Digital I O Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual CALCulate3 LIMit1 FAIL CALCulate3 LIMit2 FAIL These commands are used to query the results of Limit 1 and Limit 2 0 Passing reading within the high and low limits 1 Failing reading has reached or exceeded the high or low limit The 1 response message does not tell you which limit high or low has been reached To determine which limit has failed you will have to read the measure ment event register
244. cause unwanted signals to occur in the test leads of a test system If the conductor has sufficient length or cross sectional area even weak magnetic fields such as those of the earth can create sufficient signals to affect low level measurements Three ways to reduce these effects are 1 reduce the lengths of the connecting cables 2 minimize the exposed circuit area and 3 change the orientation of the leads or cables In extreme cases magnetic shielding may be required Special metal with high permeability at low flux densities such as mu metal is effective at reducing these effects Even when the conductor is stationary magnetically induced signals may still be a problem Fields can be produced by various sources such as the AC power line voltage Large inductors such as power transformers can generate substantial magnetic fields so care must be taken to keep the Model 2700 voltage source and connecting cables a good distance away from these potential noise sources Radio frequency interference RFI Radio Frequency Interference is a general term used to describe electromagnetic interference over a wide range of frequencies across the spectrum Such RFI can be particularly troublesome at low signal levels but it can also affect measurements at high levels if the fields are of sufficient magnitude RFI can be caused by steady state sources such as radio or TV signals or some types of electronic equipment microprocessors high sp
245. cccccesssccsssseeessneeeesteeesseees 10 9 GET group execute trigger oo eee eeeeeeeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 10 9 SPE SPD Serial polling 0 eee eeeeeseeneeeeeeeeeaeees 10 9 Front panel GPIB operation 0 0 eee eeeesesseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeees 10 10 Error and status Messages es eeseeeeseeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeneeees 10 10 GPIB status indicators 0 cece eeeeseeseeseeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeees 10 10 LOCAL KEY srera ire ine ra doce lonscesesssoasscessenevsersys 10 11 11 12 Programming SYMtAX eee eee eseeeeeeseeeseeseeeseteeeeaeeneeeaeeeeeaes 10 11 Command WOrds ascecciecsesceissesenscegesescedecsicoastteasepeavesancenes 10 11 Query commands ssoi iriri 10 13 Case sensitiyity enrarir ess e a ana arar E ERES 10 13 Long form and short form versions s es 10 14 Short form rules cs sic svesscaeiedereeseegersbsectasstoaselpasvenaseasenseess 10 14 PLOPTAM MESSAGES oes cesec ec ssccaasedbevedseechececestaeseeipenneenaes 10 15 Response messages 00 eseeeeseeseeeceseeeseeeeetseeeeeeseeeeeeaes 10 17 Message exchange protocol 0 ee eeeseseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeetees 10 17 RS 232 interface operation ec eeeeeeceseceeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 10 18 Sending and receiving data oe eee eeeeseeeetseeeeeaees 10 18 Baud Tate cescsscecccetli conkelenescaicnsiccsessucenedsenewedaiveasedptacneaserses 10 18 Signal handshaking flow control sesser 10 19 Terminator sccscecsctvasscucesutesdainestenseageben cadens steautdpudesscavabaceeaes 10
246. ce value Relative3 Page 5 7 Ex 3 Demonstrates zero correction using relative value ScanChan Page 7 32 Prog Ex Demonstrates scanning 10 channels Simple1 None Use Case 1 30 channel scan using 7708 module 30 channels DCV 10V range e 10 channels type T thermocouple temperature e Measurement speed rate 1 plc Filter Disabled no filtering e Buffer Store 120 reading strings Buffer elements include reading only e Triggering Bus control source H 8 KE2700 Instrument Driver Examples Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Table H 1 continued Visual Basic and CVI C examples Name Manual Reference Brief Description Simple2 None Use Case 2 40 channel scan using 7708 module e 30 channels DCV 15 on 100mV range 15 on 10V range e 9 channels ACV 1V range e 1 channel 4 wire RTD temperature e Measurement speed rate 1 plc Filter Disabled no filtering e Buffer Store 120 reading strings Buffer elements include reading only e Triggering Bus control source Simple3 None Use Case 3 Two scans using 7708 module e 40 channel DCV 1V range scan e 20 channel Q4 scan e Models 2700 and 2701 100 range e Model 2750 10Q range dry circuit ohms enabled e Measurement speed rate 0 1 plc e DCV input divider Enabled LOMQ input impedance e Filter Disabled no filtering e B
247. circulating current develops a small but undesirable voltage between the LO terminals of the two instruments This voltage will be added to the source voltage affecting the accuracy of the measurement Figure E 2 Power line ground loops Signal Leads Instrument 1 Instrument 2 Instrument 3 Power Line Ground Figure E 3 shows how to connect several instruments together to eliminate this type of ground loop problem Here only one instrument is connected to power line ground Ground loops are not normally a problem with instruments like the Model 2700 that have isolated LO terminals However all instruments in the test setup may not be designed in this manner When in doubt consult the manual for all instrumentation in the test setup Figure E 3 Eliminating ground loops Instrument 1 Instrument 2 Instrument 3 Power Line Ground E 8 Measurement Considerations Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Shielding WARNING Do not float input LO more than 30V rms 42 4V peak above earth ground with an exposed shield connected to input LO To avoid a possible shock hazard surround the LO shield with a second safety shield that is insulated from the inner shield Connect this safety shield to safety earth ground using 18 AWG minimum wire before use Proper shielding of all signal paths and sources being measured is important to minimize noise pickup in virtually any low level measurement situation Otherwise interfe
248. command VOLTage AC AVERage TCONtrol lt name gt Select filter type lt name gt MOVing or Note 2 REPeat VOLTage AC AVERage WINDow lt NRf gt Set filter window in lt NRf gt 0to 10 0 1 VOLTage AC AVERage COUNt lt n gt clist Specify filter count lt n gt 1 to 100 10 VOLTage AC AVERage STATe lt b gt clist Enable or disable the filter Note 3 DCI filter commands SENSe 1 Optional root command CURRent DC AVERage TCONtrol lt name gt Select filter type lt name gt MOVing or Note 2 REPeat CURRent DC AVERage WINDow lt NRf gt Set filter window in lt NRf gt 0 to 10 0 1 CURRent DC AVERage COUNt lt n gt Specify filter count lt n gt 1 to 100 10 clist CURRent DC AVERage STATe lt b gt clist Enable or disable the filter Note 3 ACI filter commands SENSe 1 Optional root command CURRent AC AVERage TCONtrol lt name gt Select filter type lt name gt MOVing or Note 2 REPeat CURRent AC AVERage WINDow lt NRf gt Set filter window in lt NRf gt 0to 10 0 1 CURRent AC AVERage COUNt lt n gt clist Specify filter count lt n gt 1 to 100 10 CURRent AC AVERage STATe lt b gt clist Enable or disable the filter Note 3 Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Range Digits Rate Bandwidth and Filter 4 21 Table 4 6 continued Filter commands Commands 4 Description Default Q2 filter commands SE
249. ct on other closed channels Whatever channels were previously closed remain closed e A channel closed using multiple channel operation is not displayed on the Model 2700 Also the CHAN annunciator does not turn on when a channel is closed e Opening a channel using multiple channel operation has no affect on other closed channels Only the specified channel opens NOTE Use the VIEW option of the CARD menu to display closed channels see CARD menu page 2 29 Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Close Open Switching Module Channels 2 17 Controlling multiple channels WARNING When using multiple channel operation you must be very careful when switching hazardous voltages If you inadvertently close the wrong channel s you could create a shock hazard and or cause damage to the equipment Most switching modules use latching relays That is closed channels remain closed when the Model 2700 is turned off Never handle a switching module that is connected to an external source that is turned on Turn off all power sources before 1 making or breaking connections to the module and 2 installing or removing the module into or out of the Model 2700 Avoiding corrupt measurements Aside from the safety issues improper use of multiple channel operation can result in corrupt measurements For example assume two Model 7700s installed in slots 1 and 2 and a 2 wire function selected If you use multiple channel ope
250. ction 15 Table 1 5 Default setup commands Commands Description SYSTem PRESet Restore SYSTem PRESet defaults RST Restore RST defaults SAV lt NRf gt Save settings as user setup lt NRf gt 0 1 2 or 3 RCL lt NRf gt Restore user saved setup lt NRf gt 0 1 2 or 3 SYSTem POSetup lt name gt Specify power on setup lt name gt RST PRESet SAVO SAV1 SAV2 or SAV3 Programming example SAV 2 Save present setup in memory location 2 SYST POS SAV2 Specify SAV2 setup as the power on setup RST Return 2700 to RST defaults RCL 2 Return 2700 to setup stored in memory location 2 1 26 Getting Started Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Remote programming information Remote programming information is integrated with front panel operation throughout this manual Programming commands are listed in tables and additional information that pertains exclusively to remote operation is provided after each table The tables may reference you to other sections of this manual NOTE Except for Sections 11 through 15 most programming tables in this manual are abridged That is they exclude most optional command words and query commands Optional command words and query commands are summarized as follows Optional command words In order to be in conformance with the IEEE 488 2 standard Model 2700 accepts optional command words Any command word that is enclosed in brackets i
251. ction gt READ When ABORt is executed the instrument goes into the idle state if continuous initiation is disabled If continuous initiation is enabled the operation re starts at the beginning of the Trigger Model When CONfigure is executed the MEASure parameters lt rang gt lt res gt and lt clist gt are executed and the instrument goes into the one shot measurement mode It is similar to sending the CONFigure command with no lt clist gt parameter See CONFigure for more details When READ is executed its operations will then be performed In general another ABORt is performed then an INITiate and finally a FETCh to acquire the reading See READ for more details Programming examples Programming example 1 The following command measures DCV on channel 101 using the 10V range with 3 digit display resolution MEAS VOLT 10 0 01 101 Programming example 2 The following command measures DCV on the 100V range MEAS VOLT 100 13 10 SCPI Signal Oriented Commands Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual 14 FORMat and Miscellaneous SYSTem Commands e FORMat commands Covers the SCPI commands to configure the format that readings are sent over the bus e Miscellaneous SYSTem commands Covers miscellaneous SYSTem commands 14 2 FORMat and Misc SYSTem Commands Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual FORMat commands The commands in this subsystem are used to sel
252. current input Model 7703 This differential multiplexer provides 32 channels of 2 pole input or 16 channels of 4 pole input Model 7705 This control module provides 40 independent 1 pole switching SPST channels that are isolated from the internal DMM Model 7706 This all in one module provides 20 10 channels of 2 4 pole input 16 digital outputs two analog outputs one 32 bit counter with gating and totalizer Model 7707 This module provides 10 channels of 2 pole input or 5 channels of 4 pole input Also provides 32 digital inputs outputs Model 7708 This differential multiplexer provides 40 channels of 2 pole input or 20 channels of 4 pole input The internal cold junction allows direct connection of thermocouples for temperature measurements Model 7709 This module is configured as a 6 x 8 matrix six rows eight columns The matrix consists of 48 crosspoint channels and two backplane isolation channels For system channel operation row 1 is connected to DMM Input For 4 wire measurements row 2 is connected to DMM Sense Model 7710 This differential multiplexer provides 20 channels of 2 pole input or 10 channels of 4 pole input The internal cold junction allows direct connection of thermocouples for temperature measurements This module provides high speed switching and uses long life relays Model 7711 The Model 7711 is a 50Q 2GHz single pole dual 1 x 4 RF Multiplexer module eight channels
253. d If logic sense is set high the output line will be pulled high when the reading reaches or exceeds the limit If logic sense is set low the output line will be pulled low to OV when the reading reaches or exceeds the limit Pulse option Pulse option is available for the digital outputs When enabled an output line will pulse high or low depending on the logic sense setting for each reading that reaches or exceeds the limit The factory default time duration for the pulse is 2ms maximum but can be set from 0 001 to 99999 999 seconds using remote programming Pulse time cannot be set from the front panel NOTE The commands to set pulse time and enable disable pulse output are listed in Table 9 2 See Digital output commands in the table The pulse time does not affect measurement speed If a subsequent in limit reading occurs while the output line is being pulsed the line will be released immediately pulse terminated Master limit latch The master limit line is pulled high or low when one or more of the other four limits are reached or exceeded The master limit line can be programmed to release when a reading is inside all four limits or the master limit can be latched when a failure occurs When latched the master limit line will not release until operation within the trigger model returns to and passes the control source see Section 7 for details on triggering When scanning the latched master limit line will not rel
254. d other equipment before replacing the AMPS fuse Turn off the power and disconnect the power line and test leads 2 From the front panel gently push in the AMPS fuse holder with a flat blade screwdriver and rotate the fuse holder one quarter turn counterclockwise 3 Remove the fuse and replace it with the same type 3A 250V fast blow 5 x 20mm The Keithley part number is FU 99 1 CAUTION Do not use a fuse with a higher current rating than specified or instrument damage may occur If the instrument repeatedly blows fuses locate and correct the cause of the trouble before replacing the fuse 4 Install the new fuse by reversing the procedure above NOTE For the Model 7700 switching module and other similar modules that support the amps function there are solder mount amps fuses See the Model 2700 Service Manual for fuse replacement information 3 20 Basic DMM Operation Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Resistance measurements Q2 and Q4 The Model 2700 uses the constant current method to measure resistance from 100Q to 1MQ The Model 2700 sources a constant current I to the resistance and measures the voltage V Resistance R is then calculated and displayed using the known current and measured voltage R V I For the 10MQ and 100MQ ranges the ratiometric method is used to measure resistance Standard resistance measurements The Model 2700 can make resistance measure ments from 100pQ to 120M
255. d and lt res gt 0 1 a 100V reading will be displayed as 100 0 V 3 digits The display will default to 34 digits when using parameter values that attempt to set the display below 3 digits For example a 10V reading using lt res gt 0 1 for the 10V range is displayed as 10 00 V not 10 0 V A command using parameter values that attempt to set the display above 7 2 digits is ignored and generates error 221 settings conflict error The lt res gt parameter is ignored when a lt clist gt is included in the command string Resolution for the scanlist channel s is determined by the present setting for the specified function and by the present resolution setting for the specified function See the NOTES that follow Table 13 1 for additional information Channel s in the scanlist to be configured When the channel list parameter lt clist gt is included the present instrument settings are not affected Instead the channel s in the lt clist gt for the specified function is configured See the NOTES that follow Table 13 1 for additional information Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual SCPI Signal Oriented Commands 13 5 Query Description CONFigure Query the selected function lt clist gt included When the lt clist gt parameter is included with CONFigure command the specified channel s for the scanlist assumes the RST default settings for the specified function Range can als
256. d in Section 2 see Switching module installation and connections page 2 3 An alternative to installing a switching module is to assign slot 1 as a pseudocard using remote programming The instrument will operate as if a switching module is installed in slot 1 To install a 7700 pseudocard in slot 1 send the following command SYST PCAR1 C7700 System channel operation is used to connect input channels to the DMM of the Model 2700 e For a 2 wire function i e DCV closing a system channel connects the input to DMM Input of the Model 2700 Figure 1 4 shows system channel 1 closed For the Q2 function the resistance DUT would be connected to DMM Input as shown Figure 1 4 Figure 1 4 Connection to DMM for 2 wire function system channel 101 closed Switching Module Switching Module _ DMM I 1 Ch 1 i i Input DUT I 1 1 30 Getting Started Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual e Fora 4 wire function i e Q4 a channel pair is connected to the DMM when a system channel is closed The system channel is connected to DMM Input and the paired channel is connected to DMM Sense Figure 1 5 shows system channel 6 closed For a 4 wire function the paired channel also closes For the Model 7700 channels through 10 are paired to channels 11 through 20 When channel 6 is closed channel 16 also closes Figure 1 5 shows how the DUT is connected to the DMM for the 4 wire function NOTE Figure 1 4 a
257. d maximum reading S eee 4 2 Table 4 2 Range COMMANAS eee eee eseeeeeseeeseeeeeseeseeeaeceeeeaeesaeeaeenees 4 4 Table 4 3 Digits commands 00 eee eeeeeeeeseeseeeseeseeeseeseeeaeseeeeaesneeeseenaes 4 6 Table 4 4 Rate and bandwidth settings 2 0 0 ceeeeesceseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeeeneees 4 9 Table 4 5 Rate and bandwidth commands 2 0 0 0 eee eeeeseeeeeeeereeeeeees 4 11 Table 4 6 Filter commands issin iieiea e 4 20 5 Relative Math Ratio Channel Average and dB Table 5 1 Reb COMMANGS se is ceecsseescan sedecsigecieuensestdedessienutenseedisseivatoaaetdies 5 4 Table 5 2 Math commands cscccccscsicecacvessseesasveceevene scatseceuscnesscbieecseses 5 13 Table 5 3 Ratio and channel average commands eeseeeeereereeee 5 19 Table 5 4 dB COMMANAS scccesieesdcccvcdcclscsdesacsenseavdetsenecebedectisnceelvecctesees 5 22 6 Buffer Table 6 1 Buffer commands 0 0 eee eseeseeseeseeseeeseeseeesecsceeaeeneeeseeeeeeaes 6 9 7 Scanning Table 7 1 Scanning COMMANAS eee eeeeeseeeeeeeeceseeeeeeseeseeeaeeeseeeesaeens 7 28 Table 7 2 External trigger scan example 0 0 0 ee eeeeseeseeeseeseeseeseeeneees 7 35 Table 7 3 Monitor scan example 0 0 eeeeeeseeeeeseeeseeseeeeeeseesseeeeeaeens 7 38 8 Triggering Table 8 1 Auto delay Settings 0 eee ceeeseesseeseeeseeseeeseceeeaeeneeeseseeeeaes 8 4 Table 8 2 SCPI commands triggering eee eeeeeseeeneeeseeeseeeeseeeeees 8 17 9 Limits and Digital 1 O Table 9 1 OUTPUT Menu is
258. dependent multiplexers 3 The Models 7711 and 7712 have no measurement capabilities Pseudocards Latching relays hold their open close state after the mainframe is turned off When turned on all relays open after a few Using remote programming you can assign a pseudocard to an empty switching module slot With a pseudocard installed the Model 2700 will operate as if the switching module is installed in the Model 2700 This feature allows you to configure your system without having the actual switching module installed in the unit There is a pseudocard for every Keithley Model 77xx series switching module For details see Pseudocards page 2 5 1 10 Getting Started Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Identifying installed switching modules On power up the model numbers of installed switching modules are displayed briefly If a Model 7700 7701 7702 7703 7705 7708 7709 7710 7711 or 7712 switching module is removed while the Model 2700 is on the instrument will operate as if the module is installed That is the Model 2700 will operate as if the pseudocard is installed NOTE Ifa Model 7706 or 7707 is removed while power is on error 523 Card hardware error will occur and the module will be removed from the system In general it is not recommended to install or remove switching modules with the power on The CARD menu and remote query commands can be used to identify modules ins
259. designator each press of A or Y will increase or decrease the reading by a factor of 10 3 Key in the low limit for Limit 1 LO1 and press ENTER Key in the high limit for Limit 2 HI2 and press ENTER 5 Key in the low limit for Limit 2 LO2 and press ENTER The instrument will return the normal measurement state Beeper settings The beeper is configured from the OUTPUT menu shown in Table 9 1 as follows 1 Press SHIFT and then OUTPUT 2 Use the A or W key to display the present beeper BEEP setting NEVER INSIDE or OUTSIDE 3 Press gt to position the cursor on the present beeper setting use the A or W key to display the desired setting and press ENTER The instrument will return to the normal measurement state NOTE Remote programming cannot be used to set the beeper It can only be set from the front panel Enabling disabling limits Press SHIFT and then ON OFF to display the present state off or on of limits To enable limits use the A or W key to display LIMITS ON and press ENTER To disable limits again press SHIFT and then ON OFF select LIMITS OFF and press ENTER Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Limits and Digital I O 9 5 Digital 1 O Model 2700 s Digital I O port is accessed at a male DB 9 connector located on the rear panel The connector location and pin designations are shown in Figure 9 2 Figure 9 2 Digital I O port Model 2700 WARNING no INTERNAL O
260. desssecospesdenpstesseseonsesvontsvesveoes 3 10 Figure 3 4 ACV measurements sine WAVES 00 0 eseeseeseeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeees 3 13 Figure 3 5 ACV measurements square pulse and sawtooth waves 3 14 Figure 3 6 Figure 3 7 Figure 3 8 Figure 3 9 Figure 3 10 Figure 3 11 Figure 3 12 Figure 3 13 Figure 3 14 Figure 3 15 Figure 3 16 Figure 3 17 Figure 3 18 Figure 3 19 4 Figure 4 1 Figure 4 2 Figure 4 3 Figure 4 4 5 Figure 5 1 6 Figure 6 1 Figure 6 2 7 Figure 7 1 Figure 7 2 Figure 7 3 Figure 7 4 Figure 7 5 DCI and ACI connections using front panel inputs 3 17 DCI and ACI connections using Model 7700 switching mod le wsdessesed eis iastosscewceeesceeceasepecial secs suseavarseessbeetvanees 3 18 Q2 and Q4 connections for front panel inputs 3 21 Q2 and Q4 connections for Model 7700 switching Mod le c sccscrcsccsesesncconisocsanssheassasdsuscssensirensensn ses 3 22 Constant current method to measure ohms 100W to IMW ranges eeeeeeeeeeseseteeeseeeteeesseeeeeeeenees 3 26 Ratiometric method to measure ohms LOMQ and 100MQ ranges eceeceesesseeeseeteeeeesseeseees 3 27 Open ohms test lead detection 00 eee eeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeneees 3 30 Open Sense Lo lead detection LOMW and 100MW ranges ceeceeseesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 31 Thermocouple connections 0 00 ce eeeeeeseeeeeeseeseeeseeseeeaeees 3 37 Thermistor connections 00 ee eee eeeeseeseeeseesee
261. detection for Sense Hi The Sense Hi test lead does not need to be connected to the DUT 3 32 Basic DMM Operation Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual 4 wire common side CSID ohms measurements 7701 module For normal 4 wire ohms measurements using a switching module channels are paired to provide the switch paths for input and sense Each tested DUT requires two input channels For example the 7700 module has 20 channels With the Q4 function selected channel is paired to channel 11 channel 2 is paired to channel 12 and so on This configuration allows up to 10 DUT to be tested The 7701 module has 32 input channels For normal 4 wire ohms measurements up to 16 DUT can be tested However this module can be configured for common side CSID 4 wire ohms measurements allowing up to 32 DUT to be tested With a 7701 module installed the 4 wire ohms mode can be selected using the following key press sequence 1 Press SHIFT and then press CARD 2 Select CONFIG 3 Select slot that has the 7701 i e SLOT1 7701 4 Select 4W MODE NORM normal or CSID common side For remote programming the following commands are valid with a 7701 module installed SYSTem FRESistance TYPEx NORMal Select normal 4W mode SYSTem FRESistance TYPEx CSIDe Select common side 4W mode SYSTem FRESistance TYPEX Query 4W mode Where the x in TYPEx is the slot number for the 7701 module NOTE Details on 4 wire comm
262. e Example Assume the buffer is configured for continuous wrap around storage and the buffer size is 100 At some point you stop the storage process and want to return all the readings that were stored since the last time the buffer filled The following command will return the buffer location for the next stored reading TRACe NEXT Query buffer location for next stored reading Assume that the above query returned value 37 Now you can use that value as the lt count gt parameter for the following command to return the 37 readings 0 through 36 TRACe SELected DATA 0 36 Return buffer readings 0 through 36 NOTE When using the RS 232 interface the TRAC DATA SEL command should always be used when recalling more than 100 points of buffer data For large buffers the PC may lose synchronization and data can be lost To avoid this use this query command to recall buffer data in 100 point chunks k TRACe NOTify lt NRf gt Specify number of readings that will set Trace Notify bit lt NRf gt 2 to 109999 Use this command to specify the number of stored readings that will set bit B6 Trace Notify of the measurement event register See Section 11 for details on status structure The maximum valid parameter value for this command is one less than the present buffer size which is set by the TRACe POINTs command For example TRACe POINts 55000 sets the buffer size to 55 000 readings For this buffer size the maximum val
263. e SLOTX 77xx Use to scroll the closed channels and channel settings if applicable for the switching module in Slot X where X 1 or 2 Scrolling speed The scrolling speed of the channel string is adjustable or can be paused The lt key slows down scrolling speed and the key speeds it up The ENTER key pauses scrolling Press ENTER a second time to resume scrolling Exiting VIEW To exit from VIEW press the EXIT key Pressing an instrument setting key will also exit VIEW but it will also perform the operation associated with the key For example pressing Q2 will exit VIEW and select the Q2 function NOTE When a command is received while the display is scrolling the instrument exits from the CARD menu and the command is executed Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Close Open Switching Module Channels 2 31 Switching module queries remote operation For remote operation there are commands to identify installed switching modules and channels that are closed There are also commands to acquire general information about the installed modules OPT For remote operation the OPT command can be used to determine which switching modules or pseudocards are installed in the Model 2700 For example assume a Model 7700 is installed in slot 1 and the other slot is empty After sending OPT and addressing the Model 2700 to talk the following response message will be sent to the computer 7700 NO
264. e lt clist gt Rel commands for ACI SENSe 1 CURRent AC REFerence lt p gt lt clist gt CURRent AC REFerence STATe lt b gt lt clist gt CURRent AC REFerence ACQuire lt clist gt Optional root command Specify rel value lt n gt 1010 to 1010 V Enable disable rel lt b gt ON or OFF Use input signal as rel value Optional root command Specify rel value lt n gt 757 5 to 757 5 V Enable disable rel lt b gt ON or OFF Use input signal as rel value Optional root command Specify rel value lt n gt 3 1 to 3 1 A Enable disable rel lt b gt ON or OFF Use input signal as rel value Optional root command Specify rel value lt n gt 3 1 to 3 1 A Enable disable rel lt b gt ON or OFF Use input signal as rel value OFF OFF OFF Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Rel Math Ratio Channel Average dB 5 5 Table 5 1 continued Rel commands Commands Description Default Rel commands for Q2 SENSe 1 Optional root command RESistance REFerence lt n gt lt clist gt Specify rel value lt n gt 0 to 120e6 Q 0 RESistance REFerence STATe lt b gt lt clist gt Enable disable rel lt b gt ON or OFF OFF RESistance REFerence ACQuire lt clist gt Use input signal as rel value Rel commands for Q4 SENSe 1 Optional root command FRESistance REFerence lt p gt
265. e lt clist gt Close channel s specified in list Unlisted channels not affected STATe lt clist gt Query closed channels in specified list 1 closed CLOSe Return list of all closed channels SCAN Path to configure scan Sec7 v INTernal lt clist gt Specify list of channels to be scanned v INTernal Query scan list y TSOurce lt list gt Select trigger source to start the scan IMM or IMM HLIM1 HLIM2 LLIM1 and LLIM2 TSOurce Query trigger source for scan NVOLatile lt b gt Enable or disable nonvolatile memory for Note 2 scanning autoscan NVOLatile Query nonvolatile memory setting LSELect lt name gt Enable INTernal or disable NONE scan NONE LSELect Query state of scan Notes 1 2 3 4 Default value depends on which switching module is installed Not affected by RST and SYSTem PRESet Front panel factory default is OFF Not affected by RST and SYSTem PRESet Interval set to 15 minutes at the factory The ROUT MULT CLOS command cannot be used to measure thermocouple temperature using the internal or external refer ence junction The simulated reference junction will instead be used See Temperature measurements page 3 33 for details Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual SCPI Reference Tables 15 9 Table 15 5 SENSe command summary Default Command Description parameter Ref SCPI SENSe 1 FUNCtion lt name gt Select function
266. e press ENTER and proceed to step 4 Otherwise press the key to place the cursor on the baud rate value use the A or Y key to display the desired baud rate and then press ENTER 4 To retain the presently displayed FLOW control press ENTER and proceed to step 5 Otherwise press the p gt key to place the cursor on the flow control setting use the A or key to display the alternate flow control setting and then press ENTER 5 To retain the presently displayed terminator Tx TERM press ENTER Otherwise press the key to place the cursor on the terminator setting use the A or W key to display the desired terminator and then press ENTER RS 232 connections The RS 232 serial port is connected to the serial port of a computer using a straight through RS 232 cable terminated with DB 9 connectors Do not use a null modem cable The serial port uses the transmit TXD receive RXD and signal ground GND lines of the RS 232 standard It does not use the hardware handshaking lines CTS and RTS Figure 10 4 shows the rear panel connector for the RS 232 interface and Table 10 2 shows the pinout for the connector If your computer uses a DB 25 connector for the RS 232 interface you will need a cable or adapter with a DB 25 connector on one end and a DB 9 connector on the other wired straight through not null modem Figure 10 4 RS 232 interface connector 5 4 3 2 1 owm e 987 6 Rear Panel Connector Model 2700 Multimete
267. e 15 6 STATus command summary Default Command Description parameter Ref SCPI STATus Note 1 Secll VW gt MEASurement Path to control measurement event registers EVENt Read the event register Note 2 ENABle lt NRf gt Program the enable register Note 3 ENABle Read the enable register CONDition Read the condition register OPERation Path to control operation status registers v EVENt Read the event register Note 2 y ENABle lt NRf gt Program the enable register Note 3 v ENABle Read the enable register v CONDition Read the condition register Jv QUEStionable Path to control questionable status registers v EVENt Read the event register Note 2 y ENABle lt NRf gt Program the enable register Note 3 v ENABle Read the enable register v CONDition Read the condition register v PRESet Return status registers to default states Jv QUEue Path to access error queue Jv NEXT Read the most recent error message Note 4 y ENABle lt list gt Specify error and status messages for queue Note 5 v ENABle Read the enabled messages Jv DISable lt list gt Specify messages not to be placed in queue Note 5 DISable Read the disabled messages CLEar Clears all messages from Error Queue Notes Commands in this subsystem are not affected by RST and SYSTem PRESet The effects of cycling power CLS and STATus PRESet are explained by the following notes Event Register
268. e AC receptacle on the rear panel Connect the other end of the power cord to a grounded AC outlet WARNING The power cord supplied with the Model 2700 contains a separate ground wire for use with grounded outlets When proper connections are made instrument chassis is connected to power line ground through the ground wire in the power cord Failure to use a grounded outlet may result in personal injury or death due to electric shock 4 Turn on the instrument by pressing the front panel power switch to the on I position Line frequency The Model 2700 will operate at line frequencies from 45Hz to 66Hz and 360Hz to 440Hz There are no user settings for line frequency It is automatically sensed at power up The following command can be used to read the line frequency SYSTem LFRequency Query power line frequency Setting line voltage and replacing fuse A rear panel fuse located next to the AC receptacle protects the power line input of the instrument If the line voltage setting needs to be changed or the line fuse needs to be replaced perform the following steps WARNING Make sure the instrument is disconnected from the AC line and other equipment before changing the line voltage setting or replacing the line fuse 1 Place the tip of a flat blade screwdriver into the power module by the fuse holder assembly Figure 1 3 Gently push in and up Release pressure on the assembly and its internal spring will push it out of the po
269. e Model 2700 Delay and Device Action These blocks of the trigger model operate the same for both front panel and GPIB operation See the front panel Trigger model page 8 2 for operating information on these trigger model blocks Also see Reading hold autosettle page 8 6 for details on Hold Counters Programmable counters are used to repeat operations within the trigger model For example if performing a 10 channel scan the sample counter would be set to 10 Operation will continue until all 10 channels are scanned and measured If you wanted to repeat the scan three times you would set the trigger counter to three For a sample count value gt 1 the sample readings will automatically be stored in the buffer For example with sample count set to 5 the five measured readings will be stored in the buffer If the trigger model is configured to repeat the sample readings i e trigger count 2 those five new readings will overwrite the original five readings in the buffer Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Triggering 8 17 Output Trigger The Model 2700 will send one or more output triggers The output trigger is applied to the Trigger Link connector on the rear panel It can be used to trigger an external instrument to perform an operation The trigger model can be configured to output a trigger after the completion of a series of measurements or after every measurement For example with the s
270. e Path to select 4 wire ohms mode Sec 3 TYPEx lt name gt Select 4 wire ohms mode NORMal or CSIDe for 7701 installed in slot x x 1 or 2 TYPEx Query selected 4 wire ohms mode PCARdX lt name gt Set up an empty slot X 1 or 2 as a pseudocard Sec 2 C7700 C7701 C7702 C7703 C7705 C7706 C7707 7708 C7709 C7710 C7711 C7712 CARDX Path to query switching module in specified slot X slot number for module SNUMber Request serial number SWRevision Request firmware revision VMAX Request maximum allowable voltage MUX Support multiplexer channels 1 yes 0 no ISOLated Support isolated channels 1 yes 0 no TCOMpensated Built in temperature sensors for T C cold junction 1 yes 0 no VCHannel Path to query volts 2 wire channels 15 22 SCPI Reference Tables Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Table 15 7 continued SYSTem command summary Default Command Description parameter Ref SCPI SYSTem CARDX STARt Request lowest numbered volts 2 wire channel usually 1 0 voltage measurements not supported END Request highest numbered volts 2 wire channel 0 voltage measurements not supported ACHannel Path to query amps channels STARt Request lowest numbered amps channel 0 amps measurements not supported END Request highest numbered amps channel 0 amps measurements not supported ICHannel Path to query isolated channel
271. e a junction made up of two dissimilar metals Hence another voltage is introduced and is algebraically added to the thermocouple voltage The result will be an erroneous temperature measurement To cancel the affects of the unwanted thermal voltage the thermocouple circuit requires a reference junction that is at a known temperature 3 34 Basic DMM Operation Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Reference junctions A reference junction is the cold junction in a thermocouple circuit which is held at a stable known temperature It is at the cold junction where dissimilar wire connections must be made As long as the temperature of the cold junction is known the Model 2700 can factor in the reference temperature to calculate the actual temperature reading at the thermocouple The standard reference temperature is the ice point 0 C The ice point can be precisely controlled and the National Bureau of Standards uses it as the fundamental reference for its voltage to temperature conversion tables However other known temperatures can be used There are two ways for the Model 2700 to acquire the cold junction temperature It can measure the cold junction using a thermistor or 4 wire RTD or the known temperature value can be entered by the user There are three reference junction types supported by the Model 2700 simulated reference junction internal reference junction and external reference junction These reference ju
272. e amount of time the Model 2700 uses to sample frequency or period readings Use the RATE key to set the gate time SLOW sets the gate time to 1 0 sec MED sets it to 0 1 sec and FAST sets it to 0 01 sec For remote programming the gate time can be set from 0 01 to 1 0 sec using the FREQuency APERture and PERiod APERture commands Table 3 7 Note however that if you set a gate time other than 1 0 0 1 or 0 01 sec the SLOW MED and FAST annunciators will be off The Model 2700 completes a reading when it receives its first zero crossing after the gate time expires In other words the reading is completed 1 2 cycle after the gate time has expired For example to sample a 3Hz frequency you may wait up to three seconds before the Model 2700 returns a reading Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Basic DMM Operation 3 45 Connections NOTE When using the front panel inputs the INPUTS switch must be in the F out position For switching modules it must be in the R in position Front panel input When using the front panel input terminals connect the test leads to the INPUT HI and LO terminals as shown in Figure 3 17 Figure 3 17 FREQ and PERIOD connections for front panel inputs Model 2700 SENSE roy INPU 4 350 oO INPUT AC Voltage Source B FRONT R uf of Bs _ Input Impedance 1MQ in parallel with lt 100pF Caution Maximum Input 1000V pe
273. e cases GPIB operation OPC or OPC should be used with SYST PRES which is slow responding command Details on OPC and OPC are provided in Section 12 SYSTem VERSion Read the version of the SCPI standard being used by Model 2700 Example response message 1996 0 SYSTem KEY lt NRf gt Parameters 1 SHIFT key 15 Cursor right arrow key 2 DCV key 16 TEMP key 3 ACV key 17 LOCAL key 4 DCI key 18 EXTRIG key 5 ACI key 19 TRIG key 6 Q2 key 20 STORE key 7 Q4 key 21 RECALL key 8 FREQ key 22 FILTER key 9 23 RELkey 10 24 Cursor left arrow key 11 RANGE up arrow key 25 12 AUTO key 26 OPEN key 13 RANGE down arrow key 27 CLOSE key 14 ENTER key 28 STEP key 29 SCAN key 30 DIGITS key 31 RATEkey 32 EXIT key Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual FORMat and Misc SYSTem Commands 14 9 This command is used to simulate front panel key presses For example to select the volts measurement function send the following command to simulate pressing the DCV key SYSTem KEY 2 The key press codes are also shown in Figure 14 3 The queue for the KEY query command can only hold one key press When KEY is sent and Model 2700 is addressed to talk the key press code number for the last key pressed is sent to the computer SYSTem BEEPer STATe lt b gt You can disable the beeper for limits and continuity tests However when limits or
274. e detector is used to detect an open input lead The hardware detector uses a comparator circuit to monitor the voltage on the Input Hi terminal Open circuit voltage on the Input Hi terminal is either 6 6V or 12 8V depending on the selected measurement range see resistance specifications in Appendix A When an input lead Hi or Lo is open as shown in Figure 3 12B voltage rises to the open circuit level which trips the OVRFLW message 10MQ and 100MQ ranges For the two highest ohm ranges open input lead detection is implemented in software Open circuit voltage for the 10MQ and 100MQ ranges is 7V For the 1OMQ range the OVRFLW message trips when the open circuit voltage rises to approximately 3 5V For the 1OOMQ range the OVRFLW message trips when the open circuit voltage rises to approximately 6 5V Open sense lead detection 100Q through 1MQ ranges For the 4 function the sense leads must be connected to the DUT As shown in Figure 3 10B the sense leads connect the voltmeter of the Model 2700 to the DUT In general if a test lead for the voltmeter is open the reading on the Model 2700 will randomly drift due to the high impedance circuitry of the voltmeter If this were allowed to happen for the Q4 function erroneous ohm readings would be displayed To prevent erroneous ohms readings caused by an open sense lead the Model 2700 implements software to detect an open sense lead As shown in Figure 3 12A with
275. e for the readings stored in the buffer data store When the desired calculation is selected using the CALC2 FORMat command and CALC2 is enabled CALC2 STATe ON use the CALC2 IMM or CALC2 IMM command to perform the calculation e When CALC2 IMM is used the statistic is calculated and result is returned e When CALC2 IMM is used to calculate the statistic the CALC2 DATA command is then used to return the result The CALC2 DATA command does not initiate a calculate operation It simply returns the result of the last calculation If you calculate a statistic for an empty buffer the number 9 910000E 37 will be returned when it is read If you perform a calculation with no statistic selected CALC2 FORM NONE or CALC2 disabled CALC2 STAT OFF the result of the last statistic calculation will be returned when a read operation CALC2 IMM or CALC2 DATA is performed However if there was no calculation previously performed the number 9 910000E 37 will instead be returned Continuous measurement mode With continuous initiation enabled INIT CONT ON the instrument continuously performs and displays measurements Data flow is the same except that only one data array is stored in the sample buffer at a time The single data array is then fed to the other enabled data flow blocks When the next measurement occurs that data array overwrites the previous data array in the sample buffer The new data is then fed to the other data flow
276. e inputs of channels 24 and 25 isolation relays If channels through 20 are not intended to be connected to the internal DMM channels 24 and 25 can be controlled independently using multiple channel operation The Amps terminals are connected directly to the DMM 2 36 Close Open Switching Module Channels Figure 2 12 Model 7700 simplified schematic HI Input LO oO Sense H LO oO old Junction ef x3 Hi o AD Channel 10 a LO o o o w gt O o Q QO Q C Q ono Q Q Channel 21 3A O HI od OO1 o Channel 22 O LO oO o O AMPS O LO O Channel 1 1 LO oe l i e Channels 2 9 Hl oof o T Looe E Channel 23 2 Pole Open AS 2 4 Pole Closed P E EE A L EA E See Note 9 Cold Junction i Ref x3 HI o of o Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Channel 25 See Note Backplane Isolation o1 O O HI B Input O O Oo LO Channel 24 See Note Backplane Isolation O oO o HI Sense To Model 2700 o O OLO Backplane AMPS Notes Channels 23 and 25 in this schematic refer to the designations used for control and are not actual available measurement channels If the module is not to be internally connected to the DMM channels 24 and 25 can be opened using multiple channel operation Basic DMM Operation DMM measurement capabilities Summarizes the measurement capabilities of the Model 2700 and covers maximum signa
277. e measurement event register When a reading is triggered and becomes available bit BO MSB of the status byte will set INIT triggers a reading and STB reads the status byte Since you are only interested in bit BO of the status byte it is recommended that your pro gram routine mask out the other bits which may also be set For example STB may return decimal 17 The binary bit pattern for decimal 17 is as follows B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 BI BO 0 0 0 1 0 O0 O0 1 STB returns decimal 17 B4 and BO set If in your program you logically AND the above returned binary value with 00000001 you will mask out bits B1 through B7 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 BI BO 0 0 0 1 0 O0 O 1 STB returns decimal 17 BO and B4 set 0 0 0 0 0 O0 0 1 Mask to read BO decimal 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 O 1 Result of logic AND operation decimal 1 Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Status Structure 11 21 As shown in the above result for the AND operation when BO is set your program routine will generate a 1 to indicate that RAV is set If BO is not set 0 the AND operation will result in 0 to indicate that RAV is not set Example 3 Read BHF bit of measurement event register The buffer half full bit BHF is read in the same manner that the RAV bit was read in Example 2 The difference being that the BHF bit is enabled not the RAV bit The following example performs 500 measurements and stores them in the buffer NOTE De
278. e measurements e Reference junction Simulated e Measurement speed rate 0 01 plc Filter Disabled no filtering e Buffer Store 160 reading strings Buffer elements include reading and channel e Triggering Bus control source e Data retrieval Continuously store data into buffer Retrieve data for every 32 readings NOTE When using a module that has a built in cold junction use the Internal reference junction Keep in mind that the buffer and data retrieval will have to be modified to accommodate the number of scanned channels Modules that have cold junction include 7700 and 7706 modules 20 available TC channels 7708 module 40 available TC channels Advance7 None Use Case 7 Ten 40 channel scans using 7702 module e Channel uses an external reference junction e Measurement speed rate 1 ple e Filter Repeat 25 readings e Channels 2 through 40 are connected to type K thermocouples e Measurement speed rate 1 plc Filter Disabled no filtering e Open thermocouple detection Enabled e Buffer Store 400 reading strings Buffer elements include reading real time clock and channel e Triggering Bus control source Data retrieval SRQ when buffer 14 12 3 4 and full H 16 KE2700 Instrument Driver Examples Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Table H 2 continued LabVIEW examples
279. e on the bus These commands are designated by the instrument manufacturer and are based on the instrument model defined by the Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments SCPI Consortium s SCPI standard Generally these commands are sent as one or more ASCII characters that tell the device to perform a particular operation such as setting a range or closing a relay The IEEE 488 bus treats these commands as data in that ATN is false when the commands are transmitted Command codes Command codes for the various commands that use the data lines are summarized in Figure G 3 Hexadecimal and the decimal values for the various commands are listed in Table G 2 Table G 2 Hexadecimal and decimal command codes Command Hex value Decimal value GTL 01 1 SDC 04 4 GET 08 8 LLO 11 17 DCL 14 20 SPE 18 24 SPD 19 25 LAG 20 3F 32 63 TAG 40 5F 64 95 SCG 60 7F 96 127 UNL 3F 63 UNT SF 95 G 11 IEEE 488 Bus Overview Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Figure G 3 9129 1 U0q X 801A 40 LOL C AION 0027 JapOW Aq pau w jdw Jou TOALNOD JAVL LOL pue Oas 99d GAYNDIANOONN 110d T4ATIVaVd Add AANDISNOD 110d TATIVAVd Ddd dNOND dNOND aANYWWOD aANYWWOD AYVANODAS AIVWIad TT OVL 9v1 ON 9y dNOAD dNOAD dNOUD dNOwdD ssddddqv ssddyddqv GNVWWOD GNVYWWOD MIVL NaLsi TSYSAINN Cassady ddqv eee ee ee i i P ate lu CQ0T VY wsc ax Enc O 2OeXNED gt SSX gt N
280. e or disable message mode lt b gt ON OFF or OFF DISPlay ENABle lt b gt Enable or disable the front panel display ON lt b gt ON or OFF SYSTem PRESet and RST have no effect on DISPlay commands The listed defaults are power on defaults DISPlay TEXT DATA lt a gt Define text message This command defines the text message for display A message can be as long as 12 characters A space counts as a character Excess message characters results in an error The characters must be enclosed in either single quotes or double quotes DISPlay TEXT STATe ON OFF Control on off message for display This command enables and disables the text message mode When enabled a defined message is displayed When disabled the message is removed from the display A user defined text message remains displayed only as long as the instrument is in remote Taking the instrument out of remote by pressing the LOCAL key or sending GTL cancels the message and disables the text message mode DISPlay ENABle ON OFF Control display circuitry This command is used to enable and disable the front panel display circuitry When disabled the instrument operates at a higher speed While disabled the display is blanked All front panel controls except LOCAL are disabled Normal display operation can be resumed by using the ENABle command to enable the display or by putting the Model 2700 into local mode press LOCAL Prog
281. e output Channel Ready pulse from the Model 7002 triggers the Model 2700 to measure DUT 1 point E After the measurement is complete the Model 2700 outputs a completion pulse point F and then loops back to point A where it waits for another input trigger The trigger applied to the Model 7002 from the Model 2700 closes the next channel in the scan This triggers the Model 2700 to measure the next DUT The process continues until all 400 channels are scanned measured and stored in the buffer External triggering with BNC connections An adapter cable is available to connect the micro DIN Trigger Link of the Model 2700 to instruments with BNC trigger connections The Model 8503 DIN to BNC Trigger Cable has a micro DIN connector at one end and two BNC connectors at the other end The BNC cables are labeled VMC trigger line 1 and EXT TRIG trigger line 2 Figure 8 9 shows how a Keithley Model 220 Current Source can be connected to the Trigger Link of the Model 2700 using the adapter cable When used with the STEP mode of the Model 220 you can perform synchronized source measure operations without the use of a computer Whenever the Model 220 receives a trigger from the Model 2700 it will step to the next current source value Figure 8 9 DIN to BNC trigger cable Model 220 Current Source 8503 DIN to BNC Tri bl C Trigger Cable External NPUT Trigger Trigger Link NARNING ffo INTERNAL OPERATOR SERVICABLE PARTS SERVIC
282. e returned value of 0 denotes that the bit bit 0 is not set indicating that the INITiate operation is not complete ABORt Aborts operation Places 2700 in idle ESR Reads the Standard Event Status Register 12 4 Common Commands Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual After addressing the Model 2700 to talk the returned value of 1 denotes that the bit bit 1 is set indicating that the INITiate operation is now complete SYST PRES Returns 2700 to default setup NOTE The following commands take a long time to process and may benefit from using OPC or OPC RST and SYST PRES e RCL and SAV e ROUT MULT CLOS and ROUT MULT OPEN Only if the lt clist gt is long e CALC2 IMM and CALC2 IMM Only when performing the standard deviation calculation on a large buffer A 10 000 point buffer takes around 5 75 seconds C OPC Operation Complete Query Place a1 in the output queue after all pending operations are completed Description When this common command is sent an ASCII 1 will be placed in the Output Queue after the last pending operation is completed When the Model 2700 is then addressed to talk the 1 in the Output Queue will be sent to the computer The 1 in the Output Queue will set the MAV Message Available bit B4 of the Status Byte Register If the corresponding bit B4 in the Service Request Enable Register is set the RQS MSS Request for Service Master Summary Status
283. e the following procedure to perform thermocouple temperature measurements with the INTernal or EXTernal reference junction selected The SIMulated reference junction will instead be used resulting in invalid readings The ERR annunciator will turn on to indicate that the integrity of the temperature reading is questionable Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Figure 2 10 Testing DUT 1 External Source Mutliple channel operation Open channels Close channel 123 Close channel 125 Close channel 101 Close channel 111 Close Open Switching Module Channels Ch 23 DMM Closed ey HI Ch 24 Sense Po 2 27 1 Open all channels For most switching modules channels remain closed after the Model 2700 is turned off Therefore it is good safe practice to open all channels at the start and end of the test Front panel operation Remote programming 2 Close channels 23 and 25 Front panel operation Remote programming Press OPEN gt Display ALL gt Press OPEN ROUT OPEN ALL Press CLOSE gt Select MULTI gt Key in 123 gt Press ENTER Press CLOSE gt Select MULTI gt Key in 125 gt Press ENTER ROUT MULT CLOS 123 125 2 28 Close Open Switching Module Channels Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual 3 Close channels 1 and 11 to connect DUT 1 to the DMM and bias supply Front panel operation Press CLOSE gt Select MULTI gt Key in 101 gt
284. e the long form version However the short form version is indicated by upper case characters Examples SYSTem PRESet long form SYST PRES short form SYSTem PRES long form and short form combination Note that each command word must be in long form or short form and not something in between For example SYSTe PRESe is illegal and will generate an error The command will not be executed Short form rules Use the following rules to determine the short form version of any SCPI command Ifthe length of the command word is four letters or less no short form version exists Example auto auto These rules apply to command words that exceed four letters Ifthe fourth letter of the command word is a vowel including y delete it and all the letters after it Example immediate imm Ifthe fourth letter of the command word is a consonant retain it but drop all the letters after it Example format form Ifthe command contains a question mark query or a non optional number included in the command word you must include it in the short form version Example delay del Command words or characters that are enclosed in brackets are optional and need not be included in the program message NOTE For fastest response to commands always use short forms Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Remote Operations 10 15 Program messages A program message is made up of one or more comm
285. e three handshake lines are DAV DATA VALID The source controls the state of the DAV line to indicate to any listening devices whether or not data bus information is valid NRED Not Ready For Data The acceptor controls the state of NRFD It is used to signal to the transmitting device to hold off the byte transfer sequence until the accepting device is ready NDAC Not Data Accepted NDAC is also controlled by the accepting device The state of NDAC tells the source whether or not the device has accepted the data byte The complete handshake sequence for one data byte is shown in Figure G 2 Once data is placed on the data lines the source checks to see that NRFD is high indicating that all active devices are ready At the same time NDAC should be low from the previous byte transfer If these conditions are not met the source must wait until NDAC and NRFD have the correct status If the source is a controller NRFD and NDAC must be stable for at least 100ns after ATN is set true Because of the possibility of a bus hang up many controllers have time out routines that display messages in case the transfer sequence stops for any reason G 6 IEEE 488 Bus Overview Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Once all NDAC and NRED are properly set the source sets DAV low indicating to accepting devices that the byte on the data lines is now valid NRFD will then go low and NDAC will go high once all devices have accept
286. e to start and end a switching sequence by opening all channels Simple scanning NOTE See Section 7 for details on scanning With at least one multiplexer switching module i e Model 7700 installed in the mainframe the instrument can scan channels that are valid for the selected function For front panel operation Figure 1 7 shows the three basic steps to configure and run a simple scan The differences between the STEP function and the SCAN function involve the reading count and the timer Reading count RDG CT For both STEP and SCAN the reading count specifies the number of readings to store in the buffer For STEP the reading count determines the number of channels to scan Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Getting Started 1 33 For SCAN the reading count also determines the number of scans to perform and is best explained by an example Assume there are 10 channels in the scan list i e 101 through 110 If you set the reading count to 10 or less one scan of the 10 channels will be performed If you set the reading count to any value from 11 to 20 two scans will be performed A reading count from 21 to 30 gives you three scans and so on Timer interval TIMER For the STEP function the timer specifies the time delay between scanned channels For the SCAN function the interval specifies the time delay between scans The timer starts when the scan is started For SCAN the next scan will not start un
287. eading from the instrument but it has the advantage of making sure that it does not return the same reading twice Limitations Like the FETCh query this command does not trigger a reading When appropriate This is a much better choice than the FETCh query because it cannot return the same reading twice This would be a good query to use when triggering by BUS or EXTERNAL because it will wait for a reading to complete if a reading is in progress The CALC DATA FRESh query is similar to the DATA FRESh query but applies to readings that have math applied to them e g MX B scaling Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual SENSe 1 DATA LATest What it does Basic DMM Operation 3 59 This query will return the last reading the instrument had regardless of what may have invalidated that reading such as changing ranges or functions Limitations This query is fully capable of returning meaningless old data When appropriate If for some reason the user wanted the last completed reading even after changing ranges or other measurement settings which would invalidate the old reading The CALC DATA LATest query is similar to the DATA LAT query but applies to readings that have math applied to them e g MX B scaling Examples One shot reading DC volts no trigger fastest rate RST INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt SENSe FUNCtion VOLTage DC SENSe VOLTage DC RANGe 10
288. ease until the scan is finished and another scan is started For example if after testing a resistor network the master limit line did set then the network has passed all tests 9 8 Limits and Digital I O Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Sink mode controlling external devices Each output can be operated from an external supply voltage range from 5V to 33V applied through the external device being driven The high current sink capacity of the output driver allows direct control of relays solenoids and lamps no additional circuitry needed As shown in Figure 9 3 each of the digital open collector outputs includes a built in pull up resistor connected to 5V The output transistor is capable of sinking 250mA from voltages up to 33V Each output channel contains a fly back diode for protection when switching inductive loads such as a low power solenoid or relay coils To use these fly back diodes connect the external supply voltage to pin 7 of the digital I O port Make sure the external supply voltage is between 5V and 33V and the current required by the device does not exceed 250mA CAUTION On pin 7 do not exceed 33V For the output lines do not exceed the maximum sink current The maximum sink current for an output line is 250mA Exceeding these limits may cause damage to the instrument that is not covered by the warranty An externally powered relay connected to the digital output port is shown in Fi
289. ecified in parameters based on a number of power line cycles NPLC where 1 PLC for 60Hz is 16 67msec 1 60 and 1 PLC for 50Hz and 400Hz is 20msec 1 50 In general the fastest integration time 0 1 PLC from the front panel 0 01 PLC from the bus results in increased reading noise and fewer usable digits while the slowest integration time 5 PLC from the front panel 50 PLC from the bus provides the best common mode and normal mode rejection In between settings are a compromise between speed and noise The Model 2700 has a parabola like shape for its speed vs noise characteristics and is shown in Figure 4 1 The Model 2700 is optimized for the 1 PLC to 5 PLC reading rate At these rates lowest noise region in graph the Model 2700 will make corrections for its own internal drift and still be fast enough to settle a step response lt 100ms Figure 4 1 Speed vs noise characteristics Voltage Noise 166 7 s 16 67ms 83 33ms 1s 0 01 PLC 1 PLC 5 PLC Aperture Time Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Range Digits Rate Bandwidth and Filter 4 9 The front panel RATE settings for all but the AC functions are explained as follow FAST sets integration time to 0 1 PLC Use FAST if speed is of primary importance at the expense of increased reading noise and fewer usable digits e MEDium sets integration time to 1 PLC Use MEDium when a compromise between noise performance and speed is acceptable e SLOW
290. ect the format for transferring data Table 14 1 over the bus Table 14 1 SCPI commands data format Command Description Default FORMat DATA lt type gt lt length gt Specify data format ASCii SREal REAL 32 ASCii DREal or REAL 64 FORMat ELEMents lt item list gt Specify data elements READing UNITs TSTamp All 3 RNUMber CHANnel or LIMits FORMat BORDer lt name gt Specify byte order NORMal or SWAPped see Note Note RST default is NORMal SYSTem PRESet default is SWAPped FORMat DATA lt type gt l lt length gt Parameters ASCii ASCII format SREal Binary IEEE 754 single precision format REAL 32 Binary IEEE 754 single precision format DREal Binary IEEE 754 double precision format REAL 64 Binary IEEE 754 double precision format NOTE lt length gt is not used for the ASCii SREal or DREal parameters The response to READ FETCh MEASure TRACe DATA CALC1 DATA or CALC2 DATA over the GPIB can be returned in either the ASCii or binary format All other queries are returned in ASCii regardless of the selected format Over the RS 232 interface only the ASCII format is allowed NOTE Regardless of which data format for output strings is selected the instrument will only respond to input commands using the ASCII format Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual FORMat and Misc SYSTem Commands 14 3 ASCII data format The ASCII data format is in a direct
291. ection Guide Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Connections and wiring WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING The following information is intended for qualified service personnel Do not make or break switching module connections unless qualified to do so To prevent electric shock that could result in serious injury or death adhere to the following safety precautions e Before removing or installing the switching module in the mainframe make sure the Model 2700 is turned off and disconnected from line power e Before making or breaking connections to the switching module make sure power is removed from all external circuitry e Do not connect signals that will exceed the maximum specifications of the Model 7700 Specifications are provided in Appendix A If both the front panel terminals and the switching module terminals are connected at the same time the test lead insulation must be rated to the highest voltage that is connected For example if 1000V is connected to the front panel input the test lead insulation for the switching module must also be rated for 1000V Dangerous arcs of an explosive nature in a high energy circuit can cause severe personal injury or death If the multimeter is connected to a high energy circuit when set to a current range low resistance range or any other low impedance range the circuit is virtually shorted Dangerous arcing can result even when the multimeter is set to a
292. ed 7 8 Scanning Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Immediate control source With immediate triggering event detection is immediate allowing channels to be scanned Timer control source With the timer source enabled selected event detection is immediately satisfied On the initial pass through the loop the Timer Bypass is enabled allowing operation to bypass the Timer and continue to the Delay block On each subsequent pass through the loop the Timer Bypass is disabled Operation is then delayed by the Timer or the Delay If the user set Timer interval is greater than the user set Delay the Timer will control the length of the delay Otherwise the length of the delay is controlled by the user set Delay period The Timer interval can be set from 0 to 999999 999 seconds The timer resets to its initial state when the scan is completed STEP operation As shown in Figure 7 1 the timer control source affects the timing between scanned channels SCAN operation As shown in Figure 7 2 the timer control source affects the timing between scans It has no effect on the timing between scanned channels External trigger control source Pressing the EX TRIG key places the instrument in the external trigger mode TRIG annunciator on When the STEP or SCAN key is then pressed that scan is enabled However the scan does not start until an external trigger is received or the TRIG key is pressed The external trigg
293. ed 2 Ifthe GPIB is already ON press ENTER and proceed to step 3 Otherwise press the p key to place the cursor on OFF press the A or W key to display the ON state and then press ENTER NOTE Enabling ON the GPIB disables OFF the RS 232 interface Disabling the GPIB enables the RS 232 3 To retain the presently displayed address ADDR value press ENTER Otherwise press the key to place the cursor on the address value use the lt gt A and Y keys to display the desired address value and then press ENTER Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Remote Operations 10 5 GPIB connections To connect the Model 2700 to the GPIB bus use a cable equipped with standard IEEE 488 connectors as shown in Figure 10 1 Figure 10 1 IEEE 488 connector To allow many parallel connections to one instrument stack the connectors Two screws are located on each connector to ensure that connections remain secure Present standards call for metric threads which are identified with dark colored screws Earlier versions have different screws which are silver colored Do not use these types of connectors on the Model 2700 it is designed for metric threads 10 6 Remote Operations Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Figure 10 2 shows a typical connecting scheme for a multi unit test system Figure 10 2 IEEE 488 connections Instrument Instrument Instrument MeN Controller To avoid
294. ed the error occurs with a much smaller return string Your program could provide some type of error checking for these situations NOTE Another solution to the problem is to use the TRACe DATA SELected lt start gt lt count gt command to return small portions 100 points of a very large buffer With this command you specify a buffer location lt start gt and the number of readings to return lt count gt See Section 6 for details Terminator The Model 2700 can be configured to terminate each program message that it transmits to the controller with any of the following combinations of lt CR gt and lt LF gt lt CR gt Carriage return lt CR LF gt Carriage return and line feed lt LF gt Line feed lt LF CR gt Line feed and carriage return 10 20 Remote Operations Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Selecting and configuring RS 232 interface After selecting enabling the RS 232 interface you will then set the baud rate flow control and terminator 1 Press the SHIFT key and then the RS 232 key The RS 232 ON or RS 232 OFF message will be displayed 2 Ifthe RS 232 is already ON press ENTER and proceed to step 3 Otherwise press the p key to place the cursor on OFF press the A or W key to display the ON state and then press ENTER NOTE Enabling ON the RS 232 interface disables OFF the GPIB Disabling the RS 232 interface enables the GPIB 3 To retain the presently displayed BAUD rat
295. ed the voltage drop for the two test leads are 2 x VL Rap Therefore Vout VMEAS 2 VLEAD The Model 2700 still uses Eq 2 to calculate resistance but it uses Vpyr in place of Vmueas This ratiometric method cancels the effects of input test lead resistance Effects of open test leads on ohms readings The Model 2700 will display readings up to 120 of range Readings above 120 of range will cause the OVRFLW message to be displayed For example on the 100Q range readings up to 120Q will be displayed Above 120Q the OVRFLW message is displayed The Model 2700 will also display the OVRFLW message if a test lead is open during an ohms measurement A hardware H W detection circuit or software S W detection is used to detect an open input lead For an Q4 measurement a software S W detection routine is used to detect an open sense lead Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Basic DMM Operation 3 29 Open test lead detection is illustrated in Figure 3 12 for an Q4 measurement of a 100Q resistor using the 100Q range For an Q2 measurement sense circuity is not used With the test leads properly connected as shown in Figure 3 12A 1mA is sourced through the 100Q2 DUT The 100mV drop across the DUT appears on the Input Hi terminal Resistance is then calculated 100mV 1mA 100Q and displayed by the Model 2700 Open input lead detection 100Q through 1MQ ranges For the lower ohms ranges a hardwar
296. ed in the manual The A symbol on the instrument shows that high voltage may be present on the terminal s Use standard safety precautions to avoid personal contact with these voltages The WARNING heading used in this manual explains dangers that might result in personal injury or death Always read the associated information very carefully before performing the indicated procedure The CAUTION heading used in this manual explains hazards that could damage the instrument Such damage may invalidate the warranty Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Getting Started 1 3 Inspection Model 2700 was carefully inspected electrically and mechanically before shipment After unpacking all items from the shipping carton check for any obvious signs of physical damage that may have occurred during transit There may be a protective film over the display lens which can be removed Report any damage to the shipping agent immediately Save the original packing carton for possible future shipment The following items are included with every Model 2700 order Model 2700 with line cord Safety test leads Model 1751 Accessories as ordered Hardware for rack mounting Certificate of calibration Model 2700 User s Manual P N 2700 900 00 Manual Addenda pertains to any improvements or changes concerning the instrument or manual Software CD containing the following TestPoint Runtime Provides basic data logging capa
297. ed on the Model 2700 the channel will open but the system channel number will still be displayed see Multiple channel operation anomalies page 2 22 Figure 2 7 Multiple channel operation opening one or all channels OPEN ICLOSE Press OPEN key Display ALL option and press OPEN again Display MULTI option and press ENTER OPEN ALL OPEN MULTI OPEN MULT XXX Specify channel number XXX and press ENTER 2 20 Close Open Switching Module Channels Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Remote programming Multiple channel control commands The commands to close and open the system channel are listed in Table 2 2 Table 2 2 Multiple channel control commands Commands Description Ref ROUTe MULTiple CLOSe lt clist gt Specify one or more channels to close a ROUTe MULTiple OPEN lt clist gt Open channels specified in list Unlisted b channels not affected ROUTe OPEN ALL Open all channels c ROUTe MULTiple CLOSe Returns a lt clist gt of all closed channels d ROUTe MULTiple CLOSe STATe Query closed channels in specified list e lt clist gt 1 closed Channel list parameter lt clist gt SCH where S Mainframe slot number 1 or 2 CH Switching module channel number must be 2 digits Examples 101 Slot 1 Channel 1 101 203 Slot 1 Channel 1 and Slot 2 Channel 3 101 110 Slot 1 Channels 1 through 10 Reference a ROUTe MULTiple CLOSe
298. ed the data Each device will release NDAC at its own rate but NDAC will not be released to go high until all devices have accepted the data byte The previous sequence is used to transfer both data talk and listen addresses as well as multiline commands The state of the ATN line determines whether the data bus contains data addresses or commands as described in the following paragraphs Figure G 2 IEEE 488 handshake sequence DAV Source Valid All Ready Acceptor NRFD All Ready NDAC Acceptor Bus commands The instrument may be given a number of special bus commands through the IEEE 488 interface The following paragraphs briefly describe the purpose of the bus commands which are grouped into the following four categories 1 Uniline commands Sent by setting the associated bus lines true For example to assert REN Remote Enable the REN line would be set low true 2 Multiline commands General bus commands which are sent over the data lines with the ATN line true low 3 Common commands Commands that are common to all devices on the bus sent with ATN high false 4 SCPI commands Commands that are particular to each device on the bus sent with ATN false These bus commands and their general purpose are summarized in Table G 1 Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual IEEE 488 Bus Overview G 7 Table G 1 IEEE 488 bus command summary State of Command type Command A
299. eed digital circuits etc or it can result from impulse sources as in the case of arcing in high voltage environments In either case the effect on the measurement can be considerable if enough of the unwanted signal is present RFI can be minimized in several ways The most obvious method is to keep the Model 2700 voltage source and signal leads as far away from the RFI source as possible Additional shielding of the instrument signal leads sources and other measuring instruments will often reduce RFI to an acceptable level In extreme cases a specially constructed screen room may be required to sufficiently attenuate the troublesome signal The Model 2700 digital filter may help to reduce RFI effects in some situations In some cases additional external filtering may also be required Keep in mind however that filtering may have detrimental effects such as increased settling time on the desired signal Ground loops When two or more instruments are connected together care must be taken to avoid unwanted signals caused by ground loops Ground loops usually occur when sensitive instrumentation is connected to other instrumentation with more than one signal return Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Measurement Considerations E 7 path such as power line ground As shown in Figure E 2 the resulting ground loop causes current to flow through the instrument LO signal leads and then back through power line ground This
300. eee cE where tog is the calculated temperature in C E is the measured voltage in microvolts 0 C to 760 C OpV to 42 919pV 760 C to 1 200 C 42 919pV to 69 553pV 0 0 1 978 425 x 10 2 001 204 x 107 1 036 969 x 107 2 549 687 x 10 16 3 585 153 x10 5 344 285 x 10 26 5 099 890 x 107 Table F 3 Type J inverse function polynomial 210 C to 0 C 8 095pV to OpV Co 0 0 c 1 952 8268 x 107 c 1 228 6185 x 10 c3 1 0752178x 10 c4 5 908 693 3 x 10 cs 1 7256713x 10 cg 2 813 1513 x 10 c7 2 396 337 0 x 10 74 cg 8 382 332 1 x 10 Error 0 03 C to 0 05 C 0 04 C to 0 04 C 3 113 581 87 x 10 3 005 436 84 x 107 9 947 732 30 x 10 1 702 766 30 x 10 19 1 430 334 68 x 10 15 4 738 860 84 x10 0 03 C to 0 05 C too Co cE cE T c3E woe cE where tog is the calculated temperature in C E is the measured voltage in microvolts F 4 Temperature Equations Table F 4 Type K inverse function polynomial Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual 200 C to 0 C 5 891pV to OV 0 C to 500 C OpV to 20 644pV 500 C to 1 372 C 20 644pV to 54 886pV 0 0 2 517 346 2 x 10 1 166 287 8 x 10 1 083 363 8 x 10 8 977 354 0 x 10 13 3 734 237 7 x 10 16 8 663 264 3 x 10 29 1 045 059 8 x 10 23 5 192 057 7 x 10 28 0 04 C to 0 02 C 0 0 2 508 355 2 x 102 7 860 10
301. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee F 3 Type J inverse function polynomial eee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee F 3 Type N inverse function polynomial cceeseeseeeeeeeeneeeeneees F 4 Type K inverse function polynomial cceeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeee F 4 Type S inverse function polynomial 0 0 0 eee eeeeseeeeeeeeeees F 5 Type R inverse function polynomial eee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees F 5 Model 2700 curve fitting constants for thermistors F 6 Type T inverse function polynomial 0 00 0 eee eeeeseeeeeeeeeeees F 6 RID parameters cesses esee iecerei eni ekaa eei F 9 IEEE 488 Bus Overview TEEE 488 bus command summary esceeeeeeeseeeseeeeseeeenees G 7 Hexadecimal and decimal command codes eseeeereees G 10 Typical addressed command sequence scceeseeeereeeneeees G 12 Typical addressed command Sequence seceeseeeeseeeeeeees G 12 IEEE command groups eccescesseeeseceseeeeseeeseeeeeeseneeeaeeees G 13 Model 2700 interface function COdeS sees eeeeeeeeeseeeees G 14 H Table H 1 Table H 2 KE2700 Instrument Driver Examples Visual Basic and CVI C examples LabVIEW examples eee 1 Getting Started Quick Start Of the following section topics three can be used immediately to quickly acquaint yourself with fundamental instrument operations Use QS1 to familiarize yourself with front panel controls use QS2 to power up the instrument and finally use QS3
302. eeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaes 10 20 11 Status Structure Figure 11 1 Model 2700 status register structure s es 11 3 Figure 11 2 1G Dit StAtUS TEBISLED c i caccicbevesincsnshsong ecaeslipesesvesdenanranceeeiads 11 5 Figure 11 3 Status byte and service request SRQ eceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 11 6 Figure 11 4 Standard event Status sees eeseeseeeseeeeeeseceeeeseeeeeeeeseeeaees 11 12 Figure 11 5 Operation event Status eee eeseeeeseeseeeeeeeetaeeeeeeseeeeeeaes 11 14 Figure 11 6 Measurement event Status 0 0 eeeeseeseeseeeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeaes 11 16 Figure 11 7 Questionable event Status 0 eee eseeseeseeeeeeneeeeeeseeeeetees 11 17 14 FORMat and Miscellaneous SYSTem Commands Figure 14 1 ASCH data format saaks a a iais 14 3 Figure 14 2 TEEE 734 data formats sosnninoieirosii eiis 14 5 Figure 14 3 Key press codes seesssseseessseesesosseressoesessssosoerorseesesossorsesssses 14 9 B Figure B 1 Figure B 2 Figure B 3 Figure B 4 Figure B 5 Figure B 6 Figure B 7 Figure B 8 Figure B 9 D Figure D 1 Figure D 2 Figure D 3 Figure D 4 E Figure E 1 Figure E 2 Figure E 3 Figure E 4 Figure E 5 G Figure G 1 Figure G 2 Figure G 3 Model 7700 Connection Guide Simplified schematic for Model 7700 sosesc B 3 Screw terminal access sees eeeeseeseeeseeseeesecseeesesseeeaeesees B 5 Model 7700 screw terminal channel designations B 6 Wife dressing coirenc eie eeir aa N E B 7 Thermocouple connections s
303. el 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Connections WARNING Even though the Model 2700 can measure up to 1000V peak the maximum input to a switching module is less Exceeding the voltage rating of a switching module may cause damage and create a safety hazard NOTE When using the front panel inputs the INPUTS switch must be in the F out position For switching modules it must be in the R in position Front panel input When using the front panel input terminals connect the test leads to the INPUT HI and LO terminals as shown in Figure 3 2 Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Basic DMM Operation 3 9 Figure 3 2 DCV and ACV connections using front panel inputs Model 2700 SENSE Q4WIRE INPUT 7 DC a oy Voltage Source LO INPUTS 500V a PEAK le eC FRONT REAR Le _ su AMPS Input Resistance 10MQ on 1000V and 100V ranges gt 10GQ on 10V 1V and 100mV ranges Caution Maximum Input 1000V peak A DCV Connections Model 2700 ENSE si Q4WIRE INPUT 7 AC ay mn Voltage Source Lo INPUTS 500V TEK Q oot 2 AMPS Input Impedance 1MQ lt 100pF Caution Maximum Input 750V RMS 1000V peak 8 x 107V Hz B ACV Connections 3 10 Basic DMM Operation Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Model 7700 switching module Connections for the Model 7700 switching module are shown
304. el 7706 only The SYSTem CARD commands are covered in Table 15 7 2 32 Close Open Switching Module Channels Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Relay closure count The Model 2700 keeps an internal count of the number of times each module relay has been closed The total number of relay closures are stored in EEPROM on the card This count will help you determine if and when any relays require replacement see module contact life specifications Relay closures are counted only when a relay cycles from open to closed state If you send multiple close commands to the same channel without sending an open command only the first closure will be counted Relay closure count can only be read via remote operation The commands are summarized in Table 2 3 Details follow the table Table 2 3 Relay closure count commands Commands Description Default ROUTe CLOSe COUNt lt clist gt Query close count for specified channels ROUTe CLOSe COUNt INTerval lt NRf gt Set count update interval in Note minutes 10 to 1440 ROUTe CLOSe COUNt INTerval Query relay count update inter val Channel list parameter lt clist gt SCH where S Mainframe slot number 1 2 3 4 or 5 CH Switching module channel number must be 2 digits Examples 101 Slot 1 Channel 1 101 203 Slot 1 Channel 1 and Slot 2 Channel 3 101 110 Slot 1 Channels 1 through 10 Note Relay count interval set to 15 minut
305. el include function range rate AC bandwidth rel filter digits math Q offset compensation TEMP transducers limits channel average channel ratio and volts dB NOTE Readings for scanned channels are automatically stored in the buffer With buffer auto clear enabled which is the default the buffer clears when the scan is started When disabled scan readings are appended to the buffer The TRACe CLEar AUTO lt b gt command is used to enable disable buffer auto clear Section 6 A pseudocard can be installed in an empty slot With the 7700 pseudocard installed the instrument will operate as if a Model 7700 switching module is installed in the slot This allows the user to configure a scan and exercise its operation before the switching module is installed in the Model 2700 Use the following commands to install 7700 pseudocards in empty slots SYSTem PCARd C7700 Install 7700 pseudocard in slot 1 SYSTem PCARd2 C7700 Install 7700 pseudocard in slot 2 Pseudocards for other switching modules can instead be installed Details on installing other pseudocards are provided in Section 2 There are SCPI commands to query the capabilities of the installed switching modules For example the following queries are provided to determine which channels of a Model 7700 in slot 1 are available for volts 2 wire ohms and which channels are available for amps Note that the returned values for the Model 7700 switching module are shown i
306. ent channel be paired to the system channel For example if the switching module has 20 measurement channels channels 1 through 10 can be used as the system channel while channels 11 through 20 are used as the paired channel For a switching module that has 20 measurement channels channel is paired to channel 11 channel 2 is paired to channel 12 channel 3 is paired to channel 13 and so on Figure 2 2 shows an example of system channel connections for a 4 wire function Assume a Model 7700 switching module is installed in slot 1 of the mainframe and a 4 wire function such as 24 is selected When channel 101 is closed using the system channel close keys the Channel relay and the input backplane isolation relay Channel 25 closes to connect the channel to DMM Input Also the Channel 11 relay and the sense backplane isolation relay Channel 24 close to connect the paired channel to DMM Sense Also note in Figure 2 2 that the Channel 23 relay closes to isolate channel 1 from channel 11 The complete simplified schematic of Model 7700 is provided in Figure 2 12 i HI Figure 2 2 4 wire system channel connections to Model 2700 DMM AEE E E on eee E E E kee 1 Model 2700 Slot 1 Model 7700 Switching Module 00 DMM l Channel 1 i i Relay Channel 25 i OHI Relay nu I I I l I I I I I I I i I 1 1 1 Channel 1 1 1 if Input i LO KOLO i i Backplane i i Isolation ri 1 System channel opera
307. er s Manual Basic DMM Operation 3 3 High energy circuit safety precautions To optimize safety when measuring voltage in high energy distribution circuits read and use the directions in the following warning WARNING Dangerous arcs of an explosive nature in a high energy circuit can cause severe personal injury or death If the multimeter is connected to a high energy circuit when set to a current range or low resistance range the circuit is virtually shorted Dangerous arcing can result even when the multimeter is set to a voltage range if the minimum voltage spacing is reduced in the external connections As described in the International Electrotechnical Commission IEC Standard IEC 664 the Model 2700 is Installation Category I and signal lines must not be directly connected to AC mains When making measurements in high energy circuits use test leads that meet the following requirements Test leads should be fully insulated e Only use test leads that can be connected to the circuit e g alligator clips spade lugs etc for hands off measurements Do not use test leads that decrease voltage spacing These diminish arc protection and create a hazardous condition WARNING For the front panel inputs the maximum common mode voltage voltage between INPUT LO and the chassis ground is 500V peak For a switching module the maximum common mode voltage is 300VDC or 300V RMS 425V peak for AC waveforms Exceeding these val
308. er measurements They simply return the lastest reading If FETCH CALC DATA or DATA is again sent before a new reading is triggered the old reading will be returned 3 DATA FRESh can only be used once to return the same reading Sending it again before a new reading is triggered will cause error 230 data corrupt or stale 2 Closing and Opening Switching Module Channels e Close open overview Summarizes the two operating modes to control switching modules System channel operation and multiple channel operation Switching module installation and connections Explains how to install a switching module or pseudocard into the Model 2700 mainframe Also explains where to find connection information which should only be performed by qualified service personnel Channel assignments Explains the format for specifying the mainframe channel assignment which is made up of the slot number and switching module channel number System channel operation Provides detailed information for using system channel operation e Multiple channel operation Provides detailed information for using multiple channel operation Due to safety considerations this operating mode should only be used by experienced test engineers Identifying installed modules amp viewing closed channels Explains how to use the CARD menu to identify installed switching modules and view closed channels Explains how to remotely identify
309. er or TRIG keypress satisfies event detection STEP operation Each time an external trigger is received or TRIG key is pressed one channel is scanned SCAN operation Each time an external trigger is received or TRIG key is pressed one complete scan is performed Delays As shown in the trigger models operation may be subjected to one or more delays before a channel is measured NOTE As previously explained if the timer control source is selected and its user set interval is greater than the user set Delay the Timer interval will supersede the Delay period after the first pass through the loop Delay Auto or Manual The user can select either auto delay or manual delay With auto delay selected the instrument automatically selects a delay period that will provide sufficient settling for function and autorange changes and multi phase measurements Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Scanning 7 9 The auto delay period cannot be adjusted by the user It is a fixed delay for the selected function and range Table 8 1 NOTE When scanning the auto delay times in Table 8 1 are valid for all control sources Immediate External Timer Manual or Bus With manual delay selected the user can set the delay period from 0 seconds to 99 hours 99 minutes 99 999 seconds However if you set a delay shorter than the corresponding auto delay period measurement uncertainty increases noisy and or unsettled re
310. eral notes Brackets are used to denote optional character sets These optional characters do not have to be included in the program message Do not use brackets in the program message e Angle brackets lt gt are used to indicate parameter type Do not use angle brackets in the program message The Boolean parameter lt b gt is used to enable or disable an instrument operation 1 or ON enables the operation and 0 or OFF disables the operation e Upper case characters indicate the short form version for each command word Default Parameter Listed parameters are both the RST and SYSTem PRESet defaults unless noted otherwise Parameter notes are located at the end of each table e Ref The reference column indicates where to find detailed information on the command s e SCPI A checkmark V indicates that the command and its parameters are SCPI confirmed An unmarked command indicates that it is an SCPI command but does not conform to the SCPI standard set of commands It is not a recognized command by the SCPI consortium SCPI confirmed commands that use one or more non SCPI parameters are explained by notes Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual SCPI Reference Tables 15 3 Table 15 1 CALCulate command summary Default Command Description parameter Ref SCPI CALCulate 1 Subsystem to control CALC 1 Sec 5 J FORMat lt name gt Select math format NONE MXB PERCent or PERCent A
311. erence junctions Temperature measurement configuration 3 40 Thermoelectric Coefficients E 2 Generation E 3 Potentials E 2 Timestamps 6 4 Configuring 6 5 Real time clock timestamp 6 4 Relative 6 4 Selecting 6 5 Setting time and date 6 5 TRIG LINK 1 14 TRIG LINK pinout 8 8 Trigger link Connections 8 11 Input 9 5 Input pulse specifications EXT TRIG 8 8 Output pulse specifications VMC 8 9 Trigger model 8 2 Control source and event detection 8 3 Idle 8 3 Idle and initiate 8 14 Operation 8 16 Remote operation 8 14 With SCAN function 7 6 Trigger models 7 4 With STEP function 7 5 Triggering 8 1 Commands 8 17 External see External triggering Programming example 8 19 Remote programming 8 14 User setups see Setups Visual Basic examples H 2 Voltage measurements DCV and ACV 3 7 Connections 3 8 Front panel input 3 8 Model 7700 switching module 3 10 DCV input divider 3 7 Procedure 3 11 Voltmeter complete 8 9 Warm up 3 4 Warranty information 1 2 Specifications are subject to change without notice All Keithley trademarks and trade names are the property of Keithley Instruments Inc All other trademarks and trade names are the property of their respective companies KENT HLEY Keithley Instruments Inc Sales Offices BELGIUM CHINA FINLAND FRANCE GERMANY GREAT BRITAIN INDIA ITALY JAPAN KOREA NETHERLANDS SWEDEN TAIWAN 28775 Aurora Road Cleveland Ohio 44139 440 248 0400 Fax
312. ero error EE 414 100k 4 w zero error EE 415 10M 4 w sense lo zero error EE 416 1k 4 w full scale error EE 417 10k 4 w full scale error EE 418 100k 4 w full scale error EE 419 1M 4 w full scale error EE 420 10M 4 w full scale error EE 421 10m adc zero error EE 422 100m adc zero error EE 423 10m adc full scale error EE 424 100m adc full scale error EE 425 1 adc full scale error EE 426 10 4 w zero error EE 427 1k 4 w zero error EE 428 10 2 w zero error EE 429 10k 4 w zero error EE 430 10k 4 w ocomp Ion full scale EE 438 Date of calibration not set EE 439 Next date of calibration not set EE 450 100m vac dac error EE 451 1 vac dac error EE 452 10 vac dac error EE 453 100 vac dac error EE 454 100m vac zero error EE 455 100m vac full scale error EE C 5 C 6 Status and Error Messages Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Table C 1 continued Status and error messages Number Description Event 456 1 vac zero error EE 457 1 vac full scale error EE 458 1 vac noise error EE 459 10 vac zero error EE 460 10 vac full scale error EE 461 10 vac noise error EE 462 100 vac zero error EE 463 100 vac full scale error EE 464 750 vac zero error EE 465 750 vac full scale error EE 466 750 vac noise error EE 467 Post filter offset error EE 468 1 aac zero error EE 469 1 aac full scale error EE 470 3 aac zero error EE 471 3 aac full scale error EE 472 1V 10Hz amplitude
313. es at the factory SYSTem PREset and RST have no effect on the set interval NOTE The relay closure count can be reset to zero For details see the Model 2700 Service Manual Plug in module relay closure count Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Close Open Switching Module Channels 2 33 Reading relay closure count To determine the closure count of specific channels send this query via remote ROUTe CLOSe COUNt lt clist gt Here lt clist gt is the summary of channels For example to determine the closure count of channels 1 and 4 of a module in slot 1 the following query would be sent ROUT CLOS COUN 101 104 The following query would determine the closure count of slot 1 module channels 1 through 10 ROUT CLOS COUN 101 110 Setting count update interval Relay closure counts are updated in temporary RAM every time a channel is closed regardless of how it was closed by an SCPI command front panel control or during a scan These counts are permanently written to the EEPROM on the card only at a user set time interval which is initially set to 15 minutes at the factory or whenever the counts are queried Valid intervals set in integer number of minutes are between 10 and 1440 minutes 24 hrs The lower the interval the less chance there is of losing relay counts due to power failures However writing to the EEPROM more often may reduce scanning throughput The higher the inte
314. es symbol or ohms symbol Q 4 ON is the RST default parameter and OFF is the SYSTem PRESet default 15 6 SCPI Reference Tables Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Table 15 2 DISPlay command summary Default Command Description parameter Ref SCPI DISPlay see Note Sec 1 WINDow 1 y TEXT Path to control user text messages v DATA lt a gt ASCII message a up to 12 characters none Jv DATA Query text message v STATe lt b gt Enable or disable message mode OFF y STATe Query text message state v ENABle lt b gt Enable or disable the front panel display ON y ENABIle Query state of the display v Note RST and SYSTem PRESet have no effect on commands in this subsystem The listed defaults are power on defaults Table 15 3 FORMat command summary Default Command Description parameter Ref SCPI FORMat Sec 14 DATA lt type gt Select data format ASCii SREal or DREal ASCii lt length gt DATA Query data format v ELEMents lt item list gt Specify data elements READing CHANnel see Note v UNITs RNUMber TSTamp and LIMits ELEMents Query data elements v BORDer lt name gt Select binary byte order NORMal or SWAPped Jv SWAPped BORDer Query byte order Jv Note The SYSTem PRESet and RST default is READ UNIT RNUM and TST Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual SCPI Reference Table
315. eseeeeeseeseeeaeees 3 39 4 wire RTD connections oo eee eeeeseceeeeeceeeeeeseeeseeeeeeaees 3 39 FREQ and PERIOD connections for front panel inputs 3 45 FREQ and PERIOD connections using Model 7700 Switching module oo ele eee eeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeseeseeeatees 3 45 Continuity connections 0 0 lee eeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseceeeeaeeseeeaeees 3 47 Range Digits Rate Bandwidth and Filter Speed vs noise Characteristics ceeceescesseecsseeeeeeeeneeeseeeeeeees 4 8 Moving and repeating filters oo eee ee eeeeeeeseeeseeneeeneees 4 15 Filter WINdOW sess cccccesseuiesessciessedetsssevssceseevessceeerseeusnaedestivens 4 17 Filter configuration flow chart ssssesseeseseeseeseerersrerrsrereereeen 4 18 MATH menu treenis dics ceserssbteces coneasestovesaserseas a 5 8 Buffer Recalling buffer data relative timestamp eee 6 7 Recalling buffer data real time clock timestamp 6 7 Scanning Trigger model with STEP function wo eee eeeeseeeeeeees 7 5 Trigger model with SCAN function ssseessseseseseseeresrereeseerrees 7 6 Scan configuration flowchart ceeeeesseseeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 7 11 External trigger scan example 0 eee eseeeeeseeeeeereeeeeeneees 7 34 Monitor scan example e ce ceeceeseesceeeneeeseceeeeeseeeeteeeneeeees 7 37 8 Triggering Figure 8 1 Front panel trigger model without scanning 0 0 8 2 Figure 8 2 DEVICE ACTON ycess vse ecesd sack sates e EE aE E aE 8 5
316. estesestesreresrereseesenseses 1 2 Warranty information ssssssssseseesessssssesssssssstssteserssrsseeses 1 2 Contact information sissiisesissesssienssevnissenierirsseoreseirssicressseusis 1 2 Safety symbols and terms cceseescceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeees 1 2 Inspection sonreir innn anei a e a E ses 1 3 Options and accessories eeseeessessesessestesesrstsressresresrrsesrs 1 3 Model 2700 features nincinen nanen nesan e 1 6 Plug in switching modules s sssssssseesesssssssessessssssesseessessrssseseese 1 7 PseudocatdS siesau esee a r R ctu E 1 9 Identifying installed switching modules 0 0 0 eee 1 10 Front and rear panel familiarization 2 0 0 0 eeeeeeseeeseeeteeeneeeeees 1 10 Front panel summary ss sssssssesssssssssssessrssssssessessresseseresresns 1 10 Rear panel summary s escseroseicissiiesiesieseiiseonetaiii esis 1 14 POWET UD orreee neeaaeia en ieee eaaa ae Eana 1 15 Line power connection eeseeesesesessrsresrsreetesrsrrsrsresresreees 1 15 Line AE QUEMNCY scvicsiaseceessazveeveriaciecesesaeesdeapeasvers air state 1 16 Setting line voltage and replacing fuse eee 1 16 Power up sequence ooo eeeeeeececeseeeeeeceeeceseeeeeeeaeeetneeeaeeeees 1 17 IKGY CHICK sorron inore eE E OTET ORERE 1 18 Display cr e E E e aE ENEE 1 18 Status and error Messages esssssessessesssssressrssesserssessese 1 18 Remote programming display cesceesceeseeeeeeeeneeeeees 1 18 Defaults and user setups
317. eturn a single reading while in the continuous trigger state Figure 1 8 Exercise 4 Trigger and return a single reading INIT CONT OFF TRIG COUN 1 SAMP COUN 1 Place 2700 in non continuous trigger state Trigger Configuration Set 2700 to perform one measurement Trigger Reading Trigger and Return _ Trigger and Return Reading Read FETCh DATA oe OR OR CALC DATA DATA FRESh am Return result of MATH Return Basic Reading 4 calculation 3 1 If a MATH function mX B percent or 1 X is enabled the result of the calculation will be returned MATH functions are covered in Section 5 2 If there is no MATH function enabled FETCh2and CALC DATA will return the basic reading 3 FETCh CALC DATA and DATA do not trigger readings They simply return the last reading If you again send one of these commands before triggering a new reading the old reading will be returned 4 DATA FRESh can only be used once to return the same reading Sending it again without first triggering a new reading will cause error 230 data corrupt or stale Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Getting Started 1 37 Figure 1 9 Exercise 5 Trigger and return multiple readings TRAC CLE Clear buffer INIT CONT OFF Place 2700 in non continuous TRIG COUN 1 trigger state Set 2700 to perform x SAMP COUN x number of measurements x 2 to 110000 Trigger and Return Readi
318. ference value THReshold Path to select the threshold voltage range Sec3 Vv VOLTage v RANGe lt p gt lt clist gt Select threshold range 0 to 1010 10 RANGe lt clist gt Query threshold range PERiod Path to configure period Sec 3 APERture lt p gt lt clist gt Sets gate time for period measurements in 1 0 Sec 4 seconds 0 01 to 1 0 APERture lt clist gt Query period gate time DIGits lt n gt lt clist gt Specify measurement resolution 4 to 7 7 Sec 4 DIGits lt clist gt Query resolution REFerence lt n gt lt clist gt Specify reference 0 to 1 0 Sec 5 STATe lt b gt lt clist gt Enable or disable reference OFF STATe lt clist gt Query state of reference ACQuire lt clist gt Use input signal as reference REFerence lt clist gt Query reference value THReshold Path to select the threshold voltage range Sec 3 VOLTage RANGe lt p gt lt clist gt Select threshold range 0 to 1010 10 RANGe lt clist gt Query threshold range Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual SCPI Reference Tables 15 19 Table 15 5 continued SENSe command summary Default Command Description parameter Ref SCPI SENSe 1 CONTinuity Path to configure continuity test Sec 3 THReshold lt NRf gt Set threshold resistance in ohms 10 1 to 1000 THReshold Query threshold resistance Notes 1 Mi e ad CA
319. ffer These commands do not affect data in the sample buffer Therefore subsequent executions of these commands return the same data With no math function enabled these commands return the last data array stored in the sample buffer CALC3 LIM1 FAIL CALC3 LIM2 FAIL Each reading applied to the CALC 3 Limit Tests block is tested when Limits operations are enabled When comparing the reading to the programmed high and low limits of Limit 1 CALC3 LIM1 FAIL returns a 0 inside limits or a 1 outside limits Similarly CALC3 LIM2 FAIL compares the reading to the high and low limits of Limit 2 NOTE Each data array returned by the read commands SENS DATA FETCh READ MEAS CALC2 DATA TRACe DATA and CALCI1 DATA will include the result code for limit tests if the limits data element is selected See FORMat ELEMents lt item list gt page 14 6 to select the limits element and interpret the code TRACe DATA When the data store is enabled sample buffer data or CALC1 results are stored in the buffer The TRACe DATA command reads the entire contents of the data store The selected feed TRAC FEED SENSe or TRAC FEED CALC1 determines which group of readings are stored D 12 Signal Processing Sequence and Data Flow Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual CALC2 IMM 2 CALC2 IMM CALC2 DATA Statistical information minimum maximum mean standard deviation and peak to peak is availabl
320. for additional information lt clist gt Single channel only When included this is the channel to be closed and measured Description The MEASure command combines all of the other signal oriented measurement commands to perform a one shot measurement and acquire the reading If the lt clist gt parameter is included the specified channel will close before performing the measurement When a MEASure command is sent the specified function is selected If specified range and resolution will also set Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual SCPI Signal Oriented Commands 13 9 NOTE Depending on the specified resolution the measurement rate is set as follows 6 2 digits NPLC 1 0 Medium 5 2 digits NPLC 0 1 Fast 3 or 4 2 digits NPLC 0 01 gt Fast If resolution is not specified 6 2 digit resolution and medium speed will be selected when MEAS is sent All other instrument settings related to the selected function are reset to the RST defaults If only MEASure is sent the Medium measurement rate is selected If a function is not specified the command executes as if the present function is specified For example assume the Q2 function is presently selected When MEAS is sent the instrument resets to the RST defaults for the Q2 function and then performs a measurement When this command is sent the following commands execute in the order that they are presented ABORt CONFigure lt fun
321. ftware However if the settings for a user setup or power on setup do not match the switching module type presently installed error 520 Saved setup scancard mismatch occurs when the setup is recalled The scan resets to the factor default settings and all channels will open The saved setup is still retained in memory and can be restored when the matching switching module is later installed The displayed front panel CONFIG menu operates differently from other menus when a saved front panel scan is recalled The reading count value in the menu may not reflect the actual reading count of the scan For example Assume a Model 7700 module configured for a10 channel scan and a reading count of 30 For this configuration the instrument will scan through the scan list three times Now assume the scan setup is saved in SAV1 and SAV is the power on default After cycling power press SCAN or STEP to run the scan The scan will run properly That is the 10 channels will be scanned three times However if you check the reading count in the front panel CONFIG menu the reading count will be 10 instead of 30 This is because the scan list length suggests the reading count value during the setup precess NOTE Saving and recalling user setups is covered in Section I see Defaults and user setups on page 1 20 Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Scanning 7 13 Scan reset From the scan configuration menu you can reset t
322. g Sequence and Data Flow Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual FETCh2 READ MEASure CALC 1 DATA LATest CALC 1 DATA FRESh 2 As shown in Figure D 4 these commands are used to read data arrays output from the CALC1 Math block However if there is no math function enabled these commands read the data arrays in the sample buffer NOTE For more information on FETCh READ and MEASure see Section 13 SCPI Signal Oriented Measurement Commands FETCh With no math function enabled this command reads the data arrays stored in the sample buffer If for example there are 20 data arrays stored in the sample buffer then all 20 data arrays will be sent to the computer when FETCh is executed With a math function mX B Percent or 1 X enabled the reading in each data array returned by FETCh is the result of the math calculation Note that FETCh does not affect data in the sample buffer Therefore subsequent executions of FETCh acquire the same data NOTE When an instrument setting that is relevant to the readings in the sample buffer is changed the FETCh command will cause error 230 data corrupt or stale or a bus time out to occur To get FETCh working again a new reading must be triggered READ The READ command performs an INITiate and then a FETCh The INITiate triggers a measurement cycle which puts new data in the sample buffer With no math function enabled FETCh reads the data arrays
323. g equation v dB 20log a REF where Vy is the DC or AC input signal Vrer is the specified voltage reference level The instrument will read OdB when the reference voltage level is applied to the input If a relative value is in effect when dB is selected the value is converted to dB then REL is applied to dB If REL is applied after dB has been selected dB has REL applied to it NOTE The dB calculation takes the absolute value of the ratio Viy VREF The largest negative value of dB is 160dB This will accommodate a ratio of Vin LuV and V ggr 1000V dB configuration Remote programming must be used to configure the Model 2700 for dB measurements It cannot be configured from the front panel Scanning Typically a scan using dB is configured and run using remote programming However once dB is selected using remote programming a simple dB scan can be configured and run from the front panel When the simple scan is configured it will use the dB measurement setup for each channel in the scan Details on configuring and running a scan are provided in Section 7 NOTE See Section 7 to configure and run a scan 5 22 Rel Math Ratio Channel Average dB Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Remote programming dB dB commands The dB commands are listed in Table 5 4 Details on these commands follow the table NOTE Queries are not included in Table 5 4 All the dB commands are provided in
324. g factor of 0 02ppm V must be added to DCV specifications for voltages over 500V Before calculating accuracy study the associated specifications very carefully to see if any derating factors apply Optimizing measurement accuracy The configurations listed below assume that the multimeter has had factory setups restored DC voltage DC current and resistance e Select 6 digits 10 PLC filter ON up to 100 readings fixed range e Use REL on DC voltage and 2 wire resistance measurements e Use 4 wire resistance measurements for best accuracy AC voltage and AC current e Select 6 digits 10 PLC filter ON up to 100 readings fixed range Temperature e Select 6 digits 10 PLC filter ON up to 100 readings A 10 Specifications Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Optimizing measurement speed The configurations listed below assume that the multimeter has had factory setups restored DC voltage DC current and resistance e Select 3 digits 0 01 PLC filter OFF fixed range AC voltage and AC current e Select 3 digits 0 01 PLC filter OFF fixed range Temperature e Select 3 digits 0 01 PLC filter OFF For all functions turn off the display and autozero and set the trigger delay to zero Use the SAMPle COUNt and READ bus commands B Model 7700 Connection Guide B 2 Model 7700 Connection Guide Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Card configuration schematic
325. g module installed the internal temperature is also measured These measurements are used in the algorithm to calculate the reading of the input signal This process is known as autozeroing When autozero is disabled the offset gain and internal temperature measurements are not performed This increases the measurement speed However the zero gain and temperature reference points will eventually drift resulting in inaccurate readings of the input signal It is recommended that autozero only be disabled for short periods of time When autozero is enabled after being off for a long period of time the internal reference points will not be updated immediately This will initially result in inaccurate measurements especially if the ambient temperature has changed by several degrees NOTE To force a rapid update of the internal reference points set the integration rate to 0 01 PLC and then back to the desired rate i e 1 0 PLC The NPLC commands to set the integration rate are covered in Section 4 Remote programming can be used to enable or disable autozero Table 3 1 Autozero cannot be disabled from the front panel however it can be enabled by restoring factory default conditions Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Basic DMM Operation 3 5 LSYNC line cycle synchronization Synchronizing A D conversions with the frequency of the power line increases common mode and normal mode noise rejection When line cycle sync
326. g the power up sequence the Model 2700 detects a card ID change for any slot auto scan configuration will disable and an interrupted scan will not be resumed Error 517 occurs cannot resume scan to indicate that the scan has been disabled The instrument assumes the normal power on setup The Model 7706 does not support auto scan Trying to enable auto scan with a Model 7706 card installed will cause error 221 settings conflict 7 22 Scanning Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Scan operation A basic scan is controlled solely by the STEP and SCAN keys When one of these keys is pressed the STEP or SCAN operation will be performed For the manual external trigger scan the TRIG key or triggers received from another instrument starts the STEP or SCAN operation For the monitor scan a channel monitors readings When a set reading limit is reached STEP or SCAN will start Basic scan Perform the following steps to run the presently configured scan 1 To start the scan press STEP or SCAN 2 The STEP or SCAN annunciator turns on and channels are scanned from the low est to highest number channel Channels that are turned off will not be scanned 3 Keep in mind that the Timer Delay for STEP occurs between channels while the Timer Delay for SCAN occurs between scans If the timer is off both scans will run at virtually the same speed 4 With reading count set to a finite value the last channel scanned will open
327. ger models page 7 4 for details on reading count 7 18 Scanning Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Setting delay As shown in Figure 7 1 and Figure 7 2 a delay auto or manual can be set by the user With auto delay selected the delay period depends on function and range Table 8 1 With manual delay selected the delay period can be set from 0 secs to 99 hrs 99 mins 99 999 secs Perform the following steps to set auto or manual delay 1 With the instrument in the normal measurement display state press SHIFT and then DELAY 2 Press A or W to display AUTO auto delay or MAN manual delay and press ENTER 3 If you selected MAN you will be prompted to set the delay in the hour minute second time format Use the lt gt A and Y keys to set the delay NOTE Pressing the AUTO key sets the manual delay to 0 001 sec 4 With the desired manual delay displayed press ENTER For remote programming the TRIGer DELay lt NRf gt and TRIGger DELay AUTO lt b gt commands are used to set the delay See Table 7 1 for details NOTE The delay for ratio and channel average can only be set using remote programming Table 5 3 Monitor channel While in the normal measurement state a scan list channel can be used to monitor readings When a channel is selected to be the monitor it will assume the setup of the scan list channel NOTE _ If you change the setup while a monitor channel is closed that setup
328. gher the harmonic content of the waveform This is not always true when making spectral comparisons between different types of waveforms A sine wave for example has a crest factor of 1 414 and a square wave has a crest factor of 1 The sine wave has a single spectral component and the square wave has components at all odd harmonics of the fundamental The Model 2700 RMS AC volts and AC amps accuracies are specified for sine waves of different frequency ranges Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Basic DMM Operation 3 13 Additional error uncertainties are also specified for non sinusoidal waveforms of specific crest factors and frequencies The Model 2700 has capabilities of measuring AC waveforms of crest factors up to 5 Figure 3 4 ACV measurements sine waves Sine Vr AC coupled RMS Crest Factor 0 Vrms a GENF Vp Half Wave Rectified Sine Ve 0 Vrms Vey D 2 CF lt t YD T Vava Ve tt r where D duty cycle T avo AC coupled RMS of f NV a VRMS Ve D2 Vrm 2 CF 1 V VP 1 1 7 D 2 1 7 2 V V t Ve D 2 1 7 2 Full Wave Rectified Sine Vp CN NAN RMS 0 Vrms a CF 2 V AC coupled RMS ofYO Vrms ve INZ 2Ve t 2 CF 1 V Ve 1 2 7 7 1 2 4 7 2 V 2Ve n Vp J 1 2 4 7 2 3 14 Basic DMM Operation Figure 3 5 Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual
329. ght data lines that transfer data one byte at a time DIO1 Data Input Output through DIO8 Data Input Output are the eight data lines used to transmit both data and multiline commands and are bi directional The data lines operate with low true logic Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual IEEE 488 Bus Overview G 5 Bus management lines The five bus management lines help to ensure proper interface control and management These lines are used to send the uniline commands ATN Attention The ATN state determines how information on the data bus is to be interpreted IFC Interface Clear The IFC line controls clearing of instruments from the bus REN Remote Enable The REN line is used to place the instrument on the bus in the remote mode EOI End or Identify The EOI line is used to mark the end of a multi byte data transfer sequence SRQ Service Request The SRQ line is used by devices when they require service from the controller Handshake lines The bus handshake lines operate in an interlocked sequence This method ensures reliable data transmission regardless of the transfer rate Generally data transfer will occur at a rate determined by the slowest active device on the bus One of the three handshake lines is controlled by the source the talker sending information while the remaining two lines are controlled by accepting devices the listener or listeners receiving the information Th
330. gnetic fields wcvsccccccccscasstesadsecactesssvesastecessonestevscvenessecas E 6 Radio frequency interference ssssesssseeseseerrsrerrsresreresresesee E 6 Ground LOOPS creirie ai iaia E 6 Shielding soosse anir e n aeae r r eia E 8 Meter l oading sssri esisiini E 9 Temperature Equations Thermocouple equation ssis sssein ai F 2 Thermistor equation 0 eseeceeseeseeseceeeeseceseeseeesesseeeseeseeeseesaees F 6 RTD eguatiohS essien iritan a a E F 8 IEEE 488 Bus Overview TntrOductiOn DE E E E G 2 BuS GeSCription asteri iee E G 2 BUS HNES seirer recep soans aeae eE a reS EEE e a Eoria G 4 Data lines sennae E E RE G 4 Bus management lines ssssssssesseesssrerrsreresresesrrsrssesrrerrsreees G 5 Handshake ltn s 2 cesecoi seis desde cdare iaaii G 5 Bus commands cccccesseceesseeeesneeeescecesseeeeseaeeesseeessseeeessneeeees G 6 Uniline commands 3 0 4 0 603 ssceccehesceveetecssaccaesdstevescresnsiedss G 8 Universal multiline commands cccccccccesessseeeeeeessneeees G 8 Addressed multiline commands cccccccccsessseceeeessseeees G 9 Address commands cscccsssceeeseceeeseeeesseeeeseaeeessneeeseneeees G 9 Unaddress commands ccscccssscccesseeeeeseeeeseeeeeesneeesseeees G 9 Common commands ccceessccesseceesseeeessneeeseeeessseeessaees G 10 SCPI commands sesers cesio ecr oi iiser i spenat G 10 Command codes sssesesssssssssseeseeeeseeessresssrerserersresssresssesse G
331. gure 9 4 Other externally powered devices can be similarly connected by replacing the relay with the device When the output line is pulled low OV the output transistor sinks current through the external device In the high state the output transistor is off transistor switch open This interrupts current flow through the external device Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Limits and Digital I O 9 9 Figure 9 4 Controlling externally powered relays Model 2700 Pin 7 Diode Clamp Digital Output 1_ Flyback Diode 43K Pull Up Resistor External Power 5V to 33V Digital Output Control n Line Pin 9 Digital Ground Equivalent Circuit _ External Power 5V to 33V Transistor Switch 9 10 Limits and Digital I O Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Source mode logic control The digital outputs can be used as logic inputs to active TTL low power TTL or CMOS inputs For this mode of operation the output lines can source up to 200HA CAUTION Each output line can source up to 200pA Exceeding 200pA may cause damage to Model 2700 that is not covered by the warranty Figure 9 5 shows how to connect a logic device to one of the output lines When the output line is pulled high the transistor will turn off transistor switch open to provide a reliable logic high output gt 3 75V When the output line goes low the transistor turns on transistor switch c
332. h Ratio Channel Average and dB 5 1 Relay closure count 2 32 Reading relay closure count 2 33 Setting count update interval 2 33 Remote operations 10 1 Enhancements 10 2 Remote programing Limits and digital output 9 12 Remote programming Autozero and LSYNC 3 6 Basic measurements 3 49 Buffer 6 9 dB 5 22 Default and user setups 1 25 Digits 4 6 Display 1 18 Filter 4 20 Information 1 26 Math 5 13 Multiple channel control commands 2 20 Range 4 4 Rate and bandwidth 4 10 Ratio and channel average 5 19 Rel 5 4 Scanning 7 26 System channel control commands 2 12 Trigger and return readings 1 35 Triggering 8 14 Resistance measurements Q2 and Q4 3 20 4 wire common side CSID ohms 3 32 Connections 3 20 Cable leakage 3 23 Front panel inputs 3 20 Model 7700 switching module 3 22 Shielding 3 22 Measurement methods 3 25 Constant current 3 26 Effects of open test leads 3 28 Ratiometric 3 27 Offset compensated ohms 3 24 3 25 3 26 3 27 3 28 3 32 Resistors Sorting 9 15 Response messages 10 17 Multiple 10 17 Sending 10 17 Terminator RMT 10 17 RS 232 Connections 10 20 Connector 1 14 RS 232 interface Baud rate 10 18 Connector 10 20 Operation 10 18 Selecting and configuring 10 20 Sending and receiving data 10 18 Signal handshaking flow control 10 19 Terminator 10 19 RTD equation F 8 Safety precautions High energy circuits 3 3 Safety symbols and terms 1 2 SCAN 7 17 Operation overview 7 7 Scan Advanced 7 14 Commands 7
333. h System User s Manual Status Structure 11 19 Event enable registers As Figure 11 1 shows each status register set has an enable register Each event register bit is logically ANDed amp to a corresponding enable bit of an enable register Therefore when an event bit is set and the corresponding enable bit is set as programmed by the user the output summary of the register will set to 1 which in turn sets the summary bit of the Status Byte Register The commands to program and read the event enable registers are listed in Table 11 5 For details on programming and reading registers see Programming enable registers page 11 5 and Reading registers page 11 6 NOTE The bits of any enable register can be reset to 0 by sending the 0 parameter value with the appropriate enable command i e STATus OPERation ENABle 0 Description Table 11 5 Event enable registers commands Command ESE lt NRf gt ESE STATus OPERation ENABle lt NRF gt STATus OPERation ENABle STATus MEASurement ENABle lt NRf gt STATus MEASurement ENABle STATus QUEStionable ENABle lt NRf gt STATus QUEStionable ENABle Program Standard Event Enable Register 0 to 255 Read Standard Event Enable Register Program Operation Event Enable Register 0 to 32767 Read enable register Program Measurement Event Enable Register 0 to 32767 Read enable register Program Questionable Event Enable Register 0 to 3276
334. hannel operation Of the 22 measurement channels only one channel or channel pair can be closed at the same time When you close a channel or channel pair all other measurement channels will open The user has no control of channels 23 24 and 25 The open close state of these channels are determined by the selected function The Model 7700 has six temperature transducers to monitor the cold junction temperature at the screw terminals For temperature measurements this internal reference junction allows thermocouples to be connected directly to the screw terminals of the module When the Model 2700 is on the DCV ACV Q2 CONT 04 FREQ PERIOD or TEMP function channels 1 through 20 are available When on a current function DCI or ACI channels 21 and 22 are the only available channels The Model 7700 can accommodate 4 wire measurements by using channel pairs Primary channels through 10 become paired to channels 11 through 20 For example with the Q4 function selected channel 1 becomes paired to channel 11 For example when you close channel 1 channel 11 will also close Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Close Open Switching Module Channels 2 35 The 2 wire functions include DCV ACV DCI ACI Q2 CONT FREQ PERIOD and TEMP thermocouple and thermistor The 4 wire functions operations include 24 TEMP 4 wire RTD RATIO and CH AVG ratio and channel average are covered in Section 5 With a 4 wire f
335. hannels 101 102 105 108 and 109 are selected for a scan The scan will run in this order 101 gt 102 gt 105 gt 108 gt 109 For remote programming a non sequential scan can be configured Channels are scanned in the order that they are listed in the scan list This allows backward scanning For example assume the following scan list 101 102 104 105 103 109 The above scan will run in this order 101 gt 102 gt 104 gt 105 gt 103 gt 109 Notice that after channel 105 is scanned the unit backs up to scan channel 103 It then proceeds forward to scan channel 109 Any scan that performs backward scanning is considered a non sequential scan For more information on non sequential scanning see the reference information for the ROUT SCAN command that follows Table 7 1 NOTE Non sequential scanning is only intended to be performed using remote programming Unexpected results may occur if a non sequential scan is run from the front panel 7 4 Scanning Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Scan process Basic scan For functions that use 2 wire measurements the basic scan process is to 1 open any closed channel 2 close a channel and then 3 perform the measurement This 3 step process is repeated for each channel in the scan The last scanned channel opens Channel pair scan For the functions that use 4 wire measurements Q4 and 4 wire RTD TEMP the scan process uses paired channels The sca
336. he GPIB trigger model and the commands 8 2 Triggering Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Trigger model The flow chart in Figure 8 1 summarizes triggering as viewed from the front panel It is called a trigger model because it is modeled after the SCPI commands used to control triggering NOTE For scanning the trigger model has additional control blocks such as a Timer These are described in Section 7 Figure 7 1 and Figure 7 2 The complete trigger model which is based on bus operation is shown and discussed in Remote programming triggering page 8 14 Figure 8 1 Front panel trigger model without scanning Control Source Event Detection Immediate External Auto Delay or Manual Delay Output Trigger Device Action Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Triggering 8 3 Idle When not scanning and in the continuous trigger mode factory default setup the instrument will not stay in idle Operation will continuously fall through the idle state and proceed to the Event Detection block of the trigger model When in the one shot trigger mode RST default setup the TRIG key must be pressed to take the instrument out of idle After each measurement the instrument returns to idle and requires the TRIG key to be pressed to continue The FACT factory default setup or RST default setup is selected from the SHIFT gt SETUP menu see Defaults and user setups p
337. he above equation simplifies to Epms 1 27x 10 RF Since the peak to peak noise is five times the rms value 99 of the time the peak to peak noise can be equated as follows E_p 6 35 x 10 RF For example with a source resistance of 10kQ the noise over a 0 5Hz bandwidth at room temperature will be E_p 6 35 x 107 10 x 10 0 5 E _p 45nV Minimizing source resistance noise From the above examples it is obvious that noise can be reduced in several ways 1 lower the temperature 2 reduce the source resistance and 3 narrow the bandwidth Of these three lowering the resistance is the least practical because the signal voltage will be reduced more than the noise For example decreasing the resistance of a current shunt by a factor of 100 will also reduce the voltage by a factor of 100 but the noise will be decreased only by a factor of 10 Very often cooling the source is the only practical method available to reduce noise Again however the available reduction is not as large as it might seem because the reduction is related to the square root of the change in temperature For example to cut the noise in half the temperature must be decreased from 293K to 73 25K a four fold decrease E 6 Measurement Considerations Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Magnetic fields When a conductor loop cuts through magnetic lines of force a very small current is generated This phenomenon will frequently
338. he instrument on the present range You can also disable auto ranging by pressing the A or W key however a range change may occur Scanning When a simple scan is configured the present function and range setting will apply to all channels in the scan When an advanced scan is configured each channel can have its own unique range setting Details to configure and run a scan are provided in Section 7 For remote programming the lt clist gt parameter is used to configure channels for a scan 4 4 Range Digits Rate Bandwidth and Filter Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Remote programming range Range commands The commands to set range are listed in Table 4 2 Additional information on these commands follow the table NOTE Query commands and some optional command words are not included in Table 4 2 All commands for the SENSe subsystem are provided in Table 15 5 Table 4 2 Range commands Commands Description Default SENSe 1 Optional root command VOLTage DC RANGe lt p gt lt clist gt Select DCV range lt n gt 0 to 1010 V 1000 VOLTage DC RANGe AUTO lt b gt Control DCV auto range lt b gt ON or OFF ON lt clist gt VOLTage AC RANGe lt p gt lt clist gt Select ACV range lt n gt 0 to 757 5 V 750 VOLTage AC RANGe AUTO lt b gt lt clist gt Control ACV auto range lt b gt ON or OFF ON CURRent DC RANGe lt p gt lt clist gt
339. he only registers that can be programmed by the user are the enable registers All other registers in the status structure are read only registers The following explains how to ascertain the parameter values for the various commands used to program enable registers The actual commands are covered later in this section Table 11 2 and Table 11 5 A command to program an event enable register is sent with a decimal parameter value that determines the desired state 0 or 1 of each bit in the appropriate register The bit positions of the register Figure 1 2 indicate the binary parameter value For example if you wish to set bits B4 B3 and B1 the binary value would be 11010 where B4 1 B3 1 B1 1 and all other bits are 0 The binary value is then converted to its decimal equivalent Binary 11010 Decimal 26 Figure 11 2 includes the decimal weight for each register bit To set bits B4 B3 and B1 the decimal parameter value would be the sum of the decimal weights for those bits 16 8 2 26 Figure 11 2 16 bit status register A Bits O through 7 Decimal 32 16 8 4 2 1 Weights 25 24 23 22 21 20 B Bits 8 through 15 Decimal 16384 8192 4096 2048 1024 512 256 Weights 214 213 212 21 219 29 28 By SCPI standard definition B15 is not used The bit is always 0 11 6 Status Structure Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Reading registers Any register in
340. he present math calculation will apply to all channels in the scan When an advanced scan is configured each channel can have its own unique math setup Details to configure and run a scan are provided in Section 7 For remote programming the lt clist gt parameter is used to configure channels for a scan Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Rel Math Ratio Channel Average dB 5 13 Remote programming math Math commands NOTE When measurements are performed the readings are fed to other enabled processing operations including Math Appendix D explains Data flow remote operation page D 7 and the commands used to return Math results The commands to perform math calculations are listed in Table 5 2 Details on these commands follow the table NOTE Queries are not included in Table 5 2 All the math commands are provided in Table 15 5 Table 5 2 Math commands Commands Description Def CALCulate 1 FORMat lt name gt lt clist gt Select calculation lt name gt NONE PERC MXB PERCent or RECiprocal CALCulate 1 KMATh MMFactor lt NRf gt Set mX b m factor lt NRf gt 1 lt clist gt 4294967295 to 4294967295 CALCulate 1 KMATh MB Factor lt NRf gt Set mX b b factor lt NRf gt 0 lt clist gt 4294967295 to 4294967295 CALCulate 1 KMATh MUNits lt char gt lt clist gt Set mX b units see Setting mX b XK units CALCulate 1 KMATh PERCen
341. he reading count determines how many channel measurements will be performed during the scan sequence If the reading count is greater than the scan list length operation loops back to the beginning of the scan list and continues After a scan sequence as determined by the reading count is completed the scan remains enabled STEP annunciator on but the Model 2700 goes into the idle state If you wish to repeat the scan sequence you will have to first take the Model 2700 out of idle This can be done by pressing the STEP or TRIG key SCAN operation In general when the Model 2700 is triggered a complete scan of all the channels in the scan list is performed When the SCAN key is pressed to enable the scan the first channel in the scan list closes When a trigger occurs one scan of the scan list channels is performed After the last channel is scanned the first channel in the scan list will close Reading count determines how many scans will be performed see Trigger models page 7 4 If programmed for another scan it will start when another trigger occurs After the last scan is completed the scan remains enabled SCAN annunciator on but the Model 2700 goes into the idle state If you wish to repeat the scans you will have to first take the Model 2700 out of idle This can be done by pressing the SCAN or TRIG key 5 When finished press SHIFT and then HALT to disable the scan and press EX TRIG to take the Model 2700 out of
342. he scan mode Figuratively speaking it is as if a finger presses the SCAN key when the monitor detects that the average temperature is at or above 30 C The instrument is configured to scan four channels The monitor TEMP channel reading and three DCV channel readings are stored in the buffer After the fourth channel is measured operation returns to the monitor mode to again measure temperature Note that if the average temperature is still at or above 30 C the finger will again press SCAN to start the scan Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Scanning 7 37 Figure 7 5 Monitor scan example Monitor Mode Close Monitor Channel 101 Measure TEMP Scan Mode Close First Return to Channel Monitor Mode Measurements 2 Open Last Chan Close Next Chan Measure 7 38 Scanning Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Table 7 3 Monitor scan example Front panel operation Remote programming 1 Restore defaults SHIFT SETUP gt RESTORE FACT SYST PRES 2 For front panel operation proceed to step 3 For remote programming clear the buffer TRAC CLE 3 Configure advanced scan SHIFT CONFIG gt ADVANCED a Channel 101 Select TEMP function FUNC TEMP 101 Configure temperature SHIFT SENSOR Select Thermocouple sensor SENS TCOUPLE TEMP TRAN TC 101 Select type K thermocouple TYPE K TEMP TC TYPE K 101 Select internal reference junction
343. he scan configuration to the default setup for a simple scan For the Model 7700 switching module channels 21 and 22 are turned off not used and channels 1 through 20 are configured as follows Function DCV Range Auto Rate Slow All other multimeter features and functions are disabled When the scan is run by pressing STEP or SCAN channels through 20 will be scanned and the 20 DCV readings will be stored in the buffer Perform the following steps to reset the scan configuration 1 Press SHIFT and then CONFIG to enter the scan configuration menu 2 Press the A or W key to display INT RESET and press ENTER After briefly displaying LIST RESET the instrument returns to the normal measurement state Simple scan For a simple scan you specify a starting channel MIN CHAN and an ending channel MAX CHAN for the scan These settings determine the number of channels in the scan For example if you set MIN CHAN to 101 and MAX CHAN to 110 there will be 10 channels in the scan list The starting channel number must be lower than the ending channel number If you enter an invalid value the message TOO SMALL or TOO LARGE will be displayed briefly The displayed channel number will default to the lowest available channel i e 101 or the highest available channel i e 220 Perform the following steps to configure a simple scan 1 While in the normal measurement mode set up the instrument for your
344. he system channel close keys can only close measurement channels that will automatically connect to the DMM Non measurement channels cannot be closed by the system channel close keys NOTE Use the VIEW option of the CARD menu to display all closed channels in the mainframe see CARD menu page 2 29 Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual 2 wire functions Close Open Switching Module Channels 2 7 Figure 2 1 shows an example of how the system channel is connected to the DMM Input of the Model 2700 Assume a Model 7700 switching module is installed in slot 1 of the mainframe When channel 101 is closed using the system channel close keys both the Channel 1 relay and the backplane isolation relay Channel 25 close to connect the channel to the DMM The complete simplified schematic of the Model 7700 is provided in Figure 2 12 Figure 2 1 2 wire system channel connections to Model 2700 DMM Close channel 101 Relay Pe i l e a Lian a ee Slot 1 Model 7700 Switching Module DMM 3 Iu 1 i 1 i i I i Channel 1 E i Li Relay Channel 25 n 1 HI 0 0 0 0 7 0 _ lt 0 H i Channel 1 I i Input i LO ooo ool 11 ts Backplane n i System channel operation Isolation ri L I 2 8 Close Open Switching Module Channels Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual 4 wire functions paired channels A 4 wire function such as Q4 requires that another measurem
345. hing Module Channels Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual System channel operation The system channel is a closed measurement channel that is internally connected to the internal DMM Input of the Model 2700 The system channel number is displayed on the Model 2700 For a 4 wire function i e Q4 the paired channel for the system channel is internally connected to DMM Sense The paired channel is not displayed on the Model 2700 When triggered the DMM performs a measurement and displays it on the Model 2700 The system channel is selected by closing a measurement channel using the system channel close keys These include the lt and keys or the CLOSE key SINGLE menu option See Controlling the system channel page 2 9 for details Other important points about system channel operation include the following There can only be one system channel This is the channel that is presently displayed and closed on the Model 2700 When a channel is not displayed there is no system channel When a measurement channel is closed the input backplane isolation channel also closes to connect the system channel to DMM input For a 4 wire function the paired channel and the sense backplane isolation channel also close to make the sense connections to the DMM When a different measurement channel is closed the previous system channel opens The newly closed and displayed measurement channel becomes the system channel T
346. hot triggering The following command sequence places the Model 2700 in a one shot trigger mode to measure offset compensated ohms Whenever READ is sent a measurement will be triggered and the measured reading will be sent to the computer when the Model 2700 is addressed to talk NOTE The following example can be run from the KE2700 Instrument Driver using the example named Ohmm in Table H 1 of Appendix H RST One shot measurement mode INIT CONT OFF FUNC FRES Select Q4 function FRES RANG 1e3 Select 1kQ range FRES OCOM ON Enable offset compensated ohms READ Trigger and return one reading Example 3 temperature measurement using Model 7700 The following command sequence places the Model 2700 in a one shot trigger mode to perform a thermocouple temperature measurement at channel 101 Model 7700 switching module installed in slot 1 With channel 101 closed the INIT command triggers one measurement and the DATA command sends the measured reading to the computer when it is addressed to talk RST One shot measurement mode INIT CONT OFF FUNC TEMP Select TEMP function UNIT TEMP F Select F TEMP units TEMP TRAN TC Select thermocouple transducer TEMP TC TYPE J Select type J thermocouple TEMP RJUN RSEL SIM Select simulated reference junction TEMP RJUN SIM 32 Set reference temperature to 32 F ice point ROUT CLOS 101 Close channel 101 INIT Trigger one measurement
347. how many consecutive A D conversions within the filter window to place in the memory stack When the stack is full the A D conversions are averaged to calculate the final filtered reading The filter count can be set from 1 to 100 Note that with a filter count of 1 no averaging is done However only readings within the Filter window will be displayed stored or transmitted NOTE While the filter processes readings the FILT annunciator blinks Readings that are being displayed while the FILT annunciator blinks are not final filtered readings When the FILT annunciator stops blinking the filter has settled Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Figure 4 2 Moving and repeating filters A Type Moving Average Readings 10 Conversion Conversion Average Reading 1 Conversion Conversion B Type Repeating Readings 10 Conversion Conversion Average Reading 1 Conversion Conversion Range Digits Rate Bandwidth and Filter 4 15 Average Reading 2 Average Reading 2 Conversion Conversion Conversion Conversion Average Reading 3 Average Reading 3 4 16 Range Digits Rate Bandwidth and Filter Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Filter window The digital filter uses a noise window to control filter threshold As long as the input signal remains within the selected window A D conversions continue to be placed in the stack
348. hronization is enabled the measurement is initiated at the first positive going zero crossing of the power line cycle after the trigger Figure 3 1 shows the measurement process that consists of two A D conversions If the trigger occurs during the positive cycle of the power line Trigger 1 the A D conversion starts with the positive going zero crossing of the power line cycle If the next trigger Trigger 2 occurs during the negative cycle then the measurement process also starts with the positive going zero crossing Figure 3 1 Line cycle synchronization lt 1 PLC gt Reading Reading Done Done rr e ve I lt A D gt lt A D gt l Conversion l Conversion Perform the following steps to enable or disable line cycle synchronization 1 Press SHIFT and then LSYNC to display the present state of line synchronization OFF or ON 2 Use the up or down key to display LINESYNC ON or LINESYNC OFF 3 Press ENTER The instrument returns to the normal display state NOTE Line synchronization is not available for the AC functions ACV ACI FREQ or PERIOD and for integration rates lt 1 PLC regardless of the LSYNC setting 3 6 Basic DMM Operation Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Remote programming autozero and LSYNC Autozero and LSYNC commands The commands to control display resolution digits are listed in Table 3 1 Table 3 1 Autozero and LSYNC commands Com
349. ic front panel operation the hold process does not seek a new seed until the held condition is removed NOTE Hold cannot be used when scanning Hold example 1 Press SHIFT and then HOLD to display the present window 0 01 0 1 1 or 10 To change the window press the A or W key to display the desired window Press ENTER The present hold count is displayed 2 to 100 To change the hold count use the lt gt A and W keys to display the desired count Press DCV to measure DC voltage Oy Or ead Apply the test signal to the input of the Model 2700 Once the signal becomes stable enough to satisfy the hold condition the reading is released and the beeper sounds if enabled 7 Remove the hold condition by disconnecting the signal from the input Hold will then seek a new seed 8 To disable HOLD press SHIFT and then HOLD Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Triggering 8 7 Beeper control The beeper for Hold can be enabled or disabled from the OUTPUT menu as follows 1 Press SHIFT and then OUTPUT 2 Use the A or key to display the present beeper BEEP state NEVER OUTSIDE or INSIDE 3 Perform step a or b a To enable the beeper use the A or W key to display OUTSIDE or INSIDE b To disable the beeper use the A or W key to display NEVER 4 Press ENTER The instrument returns to the normal display state The instrument returns to the normal measurement state External
350. ice contact the Keithley representative or authorized repair facility in your area for further information When returning the instrument for repair be sure to fill out and include the service form at the back of this manual to provide the repair facility with the necessary information NOTE The service form requires the serial number of the Model 2700 The serial number label is located inside the unit on the bottom panel The serial number can be viewed by removing the slot covers and or switching modules from the mainframe WARNING Before removing or installing switching modules make sure to turn off the Model 2700 and disconnect the line cord Also remove any other external power connected to the instrument or switching module s The serial number can also be read from the front panel by selecting the SNUM item of the SETUP menu Press SHIFT and then SETUP to access the menu For remote operation the serial number can be read using the IDN command see Section 12 for details Contact information Worldwide phone numbers are listed at the front of this manual If you have any questions please contact your local Keithley representative or call a Keithley Application Engineer at 1 800 348 3735 U S and Canada only Safety symbols and terms The following symbols and terms may be found on the instrument or used in this manual The A symbol on an instrument indicates that the user should refer to the operating instructions locat
351. id parameter value for TRACe NOTify is 54999 55000 1 When an invalid parameter value is specified the command is ignored and causes error 222 parameter data out of range 6 14 Buffer Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual FORMat ELEMents lt item list gt Select elements for TRACe DATA lt item list gt READing CHANnel UNITs RNUMber TSTamp The data returned by TRACe DATA can include from one to all five data elements shown in the above item list For example if you want the units and reading number included with the reading you would send this command FORMat ELEMents READing UNITs RNUMber Only the elements defined by the list are used Elements not included in the list are not used You can specify the elements in the list in any order but they must be separated by commas The data elements that can accompany the reading are summarized as follows More details on data elements are provided in Section 14 FORMat commands e CHANnel References the reading to a switching module channel If the reading is not for a switching module channel 000 will be returned e UNITs Identifies the measurement function i e VDC e RNUMber References the reading to the buffer reading number TSTamp Timestamps the reading ABSolute or DELTa timestamp as set by the TRACe TSTamp FORMat command FORMat ELEMents READing CHANnel UNITs RNUMber TSTamp LIMits Choose the elements to be
352. ief Description Simple7 None Use Case 7 Ten 40 channel scans using 7702 module e Channel uses an external reference junction e Measurement speed rate 1 plc e Filter Repeat 25 readings e Channels 2 through 40 are connected to type K thermocouples e Measurement speed rate 1 plc Filter Disabled no filtering e Buffer Store 400 reading strings Buffer elements include reading only e Triggering Bus control source Simple8 None Use Case 8 7706 module in slot 1 and 7702 module in slot 2 e 7706 module e Output analog output values to analog output channels e Output digital output values to digital output channels e 7702 module e Scan 120 DCV channels e Measurement speed rate 1 plc Filter Disabled no filtering e Buffer Store 320 reading strings Buffer elements include reading only Triggering Bus control source trigger delay 0 125 seconds H 20 _KE2700 Instrument Driver Examples Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Index Symbols SCPI signal oriented measurement MEASure lt function gt lt rang gt lt res gt 13 8 Q symbol 5 14 Q2 and Q4 connections for front panel inputs 3 21 Q2 and Q4 connections for Model 7700 switching module 3 22 Numerics 2 wire functions 2 7 4 wire functions 2 8 4 wire RTDs 3 36 Connections 3 39 Temperature measurement configuration 3 42 AC voltage measurements
353. ies shall not be connected to humans Before performing any maintenance disconnect the line cord and all test cables To maintain protection from electric shock and fire replacement components in mains circuits including the power transformer test leads and input jacks must be purchased from Keithley Instruments Standard fuses with applicable national safety approvals may be used if the rating and type are the same Other components that are not safety related may be purchased from other suppliers as long as they are equivalent to the original component Note that selected parts should be purchased only through Keithley Instruments to maintain accuracy and functionality of the product If you are unsure about the applicability of a replacement component call a Keithley Instruments office for information To clean an instrument use a damp cloth or mild water based cleaner Clean the exterior of the instrument only Do not apply cleaner directly to the instrument or allow liquids to enter or spill on the instrument Products that consist of a circuit board with no case or chassis e g data acquisition board for installation into a computer should never require cleaning if handled accord ing to instructions If the board becomes contaminated and operation is affected the board should be returned to the factory for proper cleaning servicing Table of Contents 1 Getting Started General information ssessssseseseesesresessrseesesr
354. igital output commands eects 9 12 Limits and digital outputs programming example 9 14 Application sorting resistors eee eeeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeaeees 9 15 PARES wesc Sestestuze ses cas5 chavitcats tvedvarsatesvastscsvestesessesteeesscesiited 9 15 Digital Outputs sinsice deh Ga E E E eda 9 17 Remote Operations Operation enhancements 000 ce eeeeseseceseeeeeeseseeeeaeeseeeeesaeens 10 2 PSCUGOCALAS ossessione oaetsapseenasees 10 2 AULOZELO se ciesatiecesaacessedrberntteetedetiaat KEA 10 2 dB calculation kissirt ginni a 10 2 Separate function setups esseeeesseesesresreresesrrserresrrerssrserees 10 3 DCV inp t divider cecisss esiesestenc sence stsias cpeasar caaesactouestaasvenysens 10 3 Multiple channel operation eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 10 3 GPIB SCRIP scsiceisdiccasesdig sxsesicbasteseavanactansaacisacbdadeyeacancdscageesusecaaaecs 10 4 GPIB standard onecie ioiii iiaii 10 4 Selecting GPIB and setting primary address 10 4 GPIB connections sisissriiricirieiiissisiiiei ivii 10 5 General bus commands sesessesesseesesresesrerteesreresresenrstnrrsresrsee 10 8 REN remote enable ccscessssecesscecsseeessneeeesteeesseees 10 8 TFC interface clear cccsscccssssecsseecesseeessseessseeersseeers 10 8 ELO local locKOut osses neasi 10 9 GTL 20 tolocal sisien ane Era e egean areis 10 9 DCE device clean mces Se 10 9 SDC selective device Clear
355. igure 8 10 a control source is used to hold up operation until the programmed event occurs The control source options are as follows e IMMediate Event detection is immediately satisfied allowing operation to continue e MANual Event detection is satisfied by pressing the TRIG key The Model 2700 must be in LOCAL mode for it to respond to the TRIG key Press the LOCAL key or send GTL over the bus to remove the instrument from the remote mode TIMer With the timer source enabled selected event detection is immediately satisfied On the initial pass through the loop the Timer Bypass is enabled allowing operation to bypass the Timer and continue on to the Delay block On each subsequent pass through the loop the Timer Bypass is disabled Operation is then delayed by the Timer or the Delay If the user set Timer interval is larger than the user set Delay the Timer will control the length of the delay Otherwise the length of the delay is controlled by the user set Delay period The Timer interval can be set from 0 to 999999 999 seconds The timer source is only available during scan operation The timer resets to its initial state when the instrument goes into the normal mode of operation or into the idle state e EXTernal Event detection is satisfied when an input trigger via the TRIG LINK connector is received by the Model 2700 e BUS Event detection is satisfied when a bus trigger GET or TRG is received by th
356. ill be displayed Note that the calculation will be applied to all measurement functions 3 To disable 1 X again press SHIFT and then MATH The MATH annunciator will turn off NOTE The result of the 1 X calculation may be displayed in exponential notation For example a displayed reading of 2 500E 03 R is equivalent to 2500 R 2 5K R When using Rel the rel ed reading of the input signal is used by the 1 X calculation 5 12 Rel Math Ratio Channel Average dB Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Basic operation NOTE _ Ifusing switching module inputs make sure the front panel INPUTS switch is set to the REAR position in If using the front panel inputs the switch must be in the FRONT position out 1 Configure and enable the mX b percent or reciprocal 1 X math function as previously explained Select the desired measurement function 3 Apply the signal to be measured to a switching channel input or to the front panel inputs NOTE For the Model 7700 switching module channels 21 and 22 are available for DCI and ACI Channels 1 through 20 are available for all other functions 4 If using a switching module REAR inputs selected use the lt or key to select close the input channel If using the front panel inputs FRONT inputs selected it does not matter if a switching channel is closed The result of the math calculation will be displayed Scanning When a simple scan is configured t
357. ine level 3 Press the REL key to enable rel REL annunciator on The input signal level is used as the rel value 4 When configuring the advanced scan as explained in Section 7 select the desired channel press DCV and then press REL REL annunciator on When the channel is scanned rel will enable using the rel value established in step 3 For remote programming the lt clist gt parameter is used to configure channels for a scan Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual The rel commands to set range are listed in Table 5 1 Additional information on these NOTE Query commands are not included in Table 5 1 All commands for the SENSe 5 4 Rel Math Ratio Channel Average dB Remote programming rel Rel commands commands follow the table subsystem are provided in Table 15 5 Table 5 1 Rel commands Commands Description Default Rel commands for DCV SENSe 1 VOLTage DC REFerence lt p gt lt clist gt VOLTage DC REFerence STATe lt b gt lt clist gt VOLTage DC REFerence ACQuire lt clist gt Rel commands for ACV SENSe 1 VOLTage AC REFerence lt n gt lt clist gt VOLTage AC REFerence STATe lt b gt lt clist gt VOLTage AC REFerence ACQuire lt clist gt Rel commands for DCI SENSe 1 CURRent DC REFerence lt n gt lt clist gt CURRent DC REFerence STATe lt b gt lt clist gt CURRent DC REFerence ACQuir
358. ing the beeper will not sound Tips to use Limit 2 test Limits 1 lt Limits 2 When the set limits for Limit 1 are less than the limits for Limit 2 i e Figure 9 1 use the INSIDE beeper As previously explained when the reading is between Limit 1 and Limit 2 the beeper will sound raspy Limits 1 gt Limits 2 When the set limits for Limit 1 are greater than the limits for Limit 2 use the OUTSIDE beeper When the reading is between Limit and Limit 2 the beeper will sound raspy 9 4 Limits and Digital I O Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Scanning When a simple scan is configured the present limit values and state will apply to all channels in the scan When an advanced scan is configured each channel can have its own unique limits configuration Details to configure and run a scan are provided in Section 7 For remote programming the lt clist gt parameter is used to configure channels for a scan Basic limits operation The limits configuration is the same for all functions For example if a reading limit is set to 1 that will equate to 1V for a voltage function 1A for a current function and 1Q for an ohms function Setting limits 1 Press SHIFT and then LIMITS to display the high limit for Limit 1 HI1 2 Use lt gt A and to key in the HI1 limit and press ENTER When editing a reading use the range designator m K M or G as a multiplier With the cursor on the range
359. ing on device configuration all front panel controls except the LOCAL button if the device is so equipped may be locked out when REN is true Generally REN should be sent before attempting to program instruments over the bus EOI End or Identify EOI is used to positively identify the last byte in a multi byte transfer sequence thus allowing data words of various lengths to be transmitted easily IFC Interface Clear IFC is used to clear the interface and return all devices to the talker and listener idle states ATN Attention The controller sends ATN while transmitting addresses or multiline commands SRQ Service Request SRQ is asserted by a device when it requires service from a controller Universal multiline commands Universal commands are those multiline commands that require no addressing All devices equipped to implement such commands will do so simultaneously when the commands are transmitted As with all multiline commands these commands are transmitted with ATN true LLO Local Lockout LLO is sent to the instrument to lock out the LOCAL key and all their front panel controls DCL Device Clear DCL is used to return instruments to some default state Instruments usually return to their power up conditions SPE Serial Poll Enable SPE is the first step in the serial polling sequence which is used to determine which device has requested service SPD Serial Poll Disable SPD is u
360. ion constant was detected during the power up sequence The instrument will instead use a default calibration constant This error will clear after successful calibration of the instrument e Bits B9 through B13 Not used Bit B14 Command Warning Warn Set bit indicates that a Signal Oriented Measurement Command parameter has been ignored e Bit B15 Not used NOTE Whenever a questionable event occurs the ERR annunciator will turn on The annunciator will turn off when the questionable event clears Figure 11 7 Questionable event status Warn Cal Temp Questionable on Condition B15 B14 B13 B9 B8 B7 B5 B4 B3 BO Register i Warn Cal Temp Questionable im _ _ Event B14 B13 B9 B8 BZ B5 B4 B3 BO Register Warn Cal tL Questionable Event Enable Summary Bit of B15 B14 B13 B B9 B8 B7 7 B5 B4 B3 B BO Register ET Status QSB Byte Register Warn Command Warning Logical AND Cal Calibration Summary OR Logical OR Temp Temperature Summary 11 18 Status Structure Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Condition registers As Figure 11 1 shows each status register set except the Standard Event Register set has a condition register A condition register is a real time read only register that constantly updates to reflect the present operating conditions of the instrument For example while the Model 2700
361. ion 1 2 Getting started 1 1 GPIB Configuration G 3 Connections 10 5 Description G 2 Front panel 10 10 Overview G 1 Selecting 10 4 Setup 10 4 Standards 10 4 Status indicators 10 10 Ground loops E 6 High energy circuit safety precautions 3 3 Hold Example 8 6 Reading 8 6 Idle 7 7 8 3 8 14 TEEE G 3 IEEE command groups G 13 TEEE 488 Bus configuration G 3 Bus overview G 1 Connector 1 14 10 5 TEEE 488 2 common commands see Common commands TEEE 754 binary formats 14 4 Inputs Front panel 1 13 1 27 INPUTs switch 1 13 Inspection 1 3 Interface function codes G 14 AH Acceptor Handshake Function G 14 C Controller Function G 15 DC Device Clear Function G 15 DT Device Trigger Function G 15 E Bus Driver Type G 15 L Listener Function G 14 LE Extended Listener Function G 15 PP Parallel Poll Function G 15 RL Remote Local Function G 14 SH Source Handshake Function G 14 SR Service Request Function G 14 T Talker Function G 14 TE Extended Talker Function G 15 Johnson noise equation E 5 KE2700 Instrument Driver H 1 Keyclick 1 18 Remote programming 1 18 Key press codes 14 9 Keys CLOSE 2 10 2 18 FILTER 4 18 Function 1 11 LOCAL 10 11 OPEN 2 11 2 19 Operation 1 11 Range 1 12 RATE 4 8 Special 1 11 LabVIEW examples H 12 Limits 9 2 Basic operation 9 4 Beeper settings 9 4 Commands 9 12 Default 9 2 Enabling disabling 9 4 Programming example 9 14 Remote programming 9 12 Scanning 9 4 Setting 9 4
362. ion log Make a copy of Table B 1 and affix it to the cover of the Model 7700 Use this to record connection information and channel descriptions as needed Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Model 7700 Connection Guide B 11 Table B 1 Connection log Model 7700 Channel Color Description AMPS COM INPUT SENSE CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 CH9 CH10 CH11 7 CH12 CH13 E CH14 CH15 CH16 7 CH17 CH18 CH19 CH20 AMPS 21 AMPS 22 2 B 12 Model 7700 Connection Guide Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Status and Error Messages C 2 Status and Error Messages Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Table C 1 Status and error messages Number Description Event 440 Query unterminated after indefinite response EE 430 Query deadlocked EE 420 Query unterminated EE 410 Query interrupted EE 363 Input buffer overrun SYS 350 Queue overflow SYS 330 Self test failed EE 314 Save recall memory lost EE 315 Configuration memory lost EE 285 Program syntax error EE 284 Program currently running EE 282 Ilegal program name EE 281 Cannot create program EE 260 Expression error EE 241 Hardware missing EE 230 Data corrupt or stale EE 225 Out of memory EE 224 Ilegal parameter value E
363. ions of the instrument When an event occurs the appropriate event register bit sets to 1 The bit remains latched to 1 until the register is reset When an event register bit is set and its corresponding enable bit is set as programmed by the user the output summary of the register will set to 1 which in turn sets the summary bit of the Status Byte Register Queues The Model 2700 uses an Output Queue and an Error Queue The response messages to query commands are placed in the Output Queue As various programming errors and status messages occur they are placed in the Error Queue When a queue contains data it sets the appropriate summary bit of the Status Byte Register Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Status Structure Figure 11 1 Model 2700 status register structure Questionable Questionable Questionable Condition Event Event Enable Register Register Register 0 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 Temperature Summary Temp Temp 5 5 6 6 ee td f OR Calibration Summary Cal Cal Cal 9 9 0 i Error Queue 12 12 13 13 Command Warning Always Zero Standard Output Queue Service Standard Event Status Request Event Status Byte Enable Status Enable Register Register Register Register Operation Complete OPC 3 Query Error QYE OM Device Dependent Error DDE nce E Execution Error EXE ne Command Error CME O User Request URQ
364. irrosis rosins oeii 3 44 Gate TING 0501522653 ostenaisdoecsenvesiuadespateerestovcevesbisvsons nvoueusenes 3 44 COMMECHIONS iosita oe ners n aan aa aE r ERES 3 45 Frequency and period measurement procedure 3 46 Continuity TESTING sserrep uree irean AEE EAE aN 3 47 COMMECTIONS aiinsir aiaia a a 3 47 Continuity testing procedure ssesssseesessreeresrerrsrerrsrrerees 3 48 Remote programming for basic measurements eee 3 49 Basic measurement commands ce eeeeeeeseeseeereeeeeenees 3 49 Basic measurement programming examples 0 3 55 Measurement queries ee eeeeeeeeeeseeseeeseceeeeaeceeesaeteneeaeeneeeaes 3 56 SFE TCR onic Gesepei a a dead evi aaa 3 56 PRE ADD sasinen E R EE 3 57 SMEASure lt function gt 0 0 ceccesceessseeessneeesseeessneeeesees 3 58 SENSe 1 DATA FRESH oo eee eeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeees 3 58 SENSe 1 DATA LATest oseere 3 59 EXAM ples serorea a e aa 3 59 Range Digits Rate Bandwidth and Filter RANTE rossii ere ates eases E R EE E EEA 4 2 Measurement ranges and maximum readings ee 4 2 Manual ranging csiicciccessctectevcacesacscussscceenteasanesssecviecczacecsaneese 4 3 Auto ranging oo eeeeseeeeseeeseeesecesneeeaeeeseeseeeeeessaeeeseeeeaees 4 3 SC AMIN Gs as ede esdevvsexdene sae e aE e a a o eee ans 4 3 Remote programming range 0 eee eeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 4 4 DIIS oioi eenn vives sdevsacelvacesecauie ca A ET A E OEE 4 5 SCAN
365. is easy to see how thermal potentials of several microvolts can be generated even if reasonable precautions are taken Figure E 1 Thermal EMF generation 2700 Er Qas Ty T2 HI O A CH1 LO O Ti E 4 Measurement Considerations Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Minimizing thermal EMFs To minimize thermal EMFs use only copper wires lugs and test leads for the entire test setup Also it is imperative that all connecting surfaces are kept clean and free of oxides As noted in Table E 1 copper to copper oxide junctions can result in thermal EMFs as high as ImV C Even when low thermal cables and connections are used thermal EMFs can still be a problem in some cases It is especially important to keep the two materials forming the junction at the same temperature Keeping the two junctions close together is one way to minimize such thermal problems Also keep all junctions away from air currents in some cases it may be necessary to thermally insulate sensitive junctions to minimize temperature variations When a Cu Cu connection is made sufficient pressure must be applied to ensure the connection is gas tight to prevent future oxidation In some cases connecting the two thermal junctions together with good thermal contact to a common heat sink may be required Unfortunately most good electrical insulators are poor conductors of heat In cases where such low thermal conductivity may be a problem special insulato
366. is in the idle state bit B10 Idle of the Operation Condition Register will be set When the instrument is taken out of idle bit B10 clears The commands to read the condition registers are listed in Table 11 3 For details on read ing registers see Reading registers page 11 6 Table 11 3 Condition register commands Command Description STATus OPERation CONDition Read Operation Condition Register STATus MEASurement CONDition Read Measurement Condition Register STATus QUEStionable CONDition Read Questionable Condition Register Event registers As Figure 1 1 shows each status register set has an event register When an event occurs the appropriate event register bit sets to 1 The bit remains latched to 1 until the register is reset Reading an event register clears the bits of that register CLS resets all four event registers The commands to read the event registers are listed in Table 1 1 4 For details on reading registers see Reading registers page 11 6 Table 11 4 Event register commands Command Description ESR Read Standard Event Status Register STATus OPERation EVENt Read Operation Event Register STATus MEASurement EVENt Read Measurement Event Register STATus QUEStionable EVENt Read Questionable Event Register Note Power up and CLS resets all bits of all event registers to 0 STATus PRESet has no effect Model 2700 Multimeter Switc
367. isable ratio and channel d average Channel list parameter lt clist gt SCH where S Mainframe slot number 1 or 2 CH Switching module channel number must be 2 digits Examples 101 Slot 1 Channel 1 101 203 Slot 1 Channel 1 and Slot 2 Channel 3 101 110 Slot 1 Channels 1 through 10 Reference a ROUTe CLOSe lt clist gt This command functions the same as the front panel CLOSE key SINGLE menu option to select the system channel Only one measurement channel can be specified in the lt clist gt Trying to close an invalid channel such as a non measurement channel with this command will result in error 222 Parameter data out of range b ROUTe CLOSe STATe lt clist gt This query returns a 0 open or 1 closed for every measurement channel specified the lt clist gt For example assume lt clist gt 101 104 107 102 The response message 0 0 1 0 indicates that channel 107 is closed The state of non measurement channels cannot be checked with this command Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Close Open Switching Module Channels 2 13 c ROUTe CLOSe This query command returns a lt clist gt of closed measurement channels including paired channels for 4 wire functions This query command will not return non measurement channels such as backplane isolation channels and the pole mode channel d ROUTe OPEN ALL This co
368. istance Q2 FRESistance Q4 FREQuency FREQ PERiod PERIOD TEMPerature TEMP Each function can have its own unique setup configuration i e range digits speed etc For example the following command words select range and digits RANGe UPPer lt n gt Specify expected reading RANGe AUTO lt b gt Enable ON or disable OFF auto range DIGits Set display resolution 3 5 4 5 5 5 or 6 5 digits The following examples demonstrate how to include the function name in the command string for configuration commands VOLT RANG 10 Select 10V range for DCV RES RANG AUTO ON Enable auto range for Q2 CURR DIG 4 5 Set DCI for 4 digit resolution NOTE See Section 4 for details on setting range digits rate bandwidth and filter 1 28 Getting Started Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Exercise 1 Basic DMM measurements The exercise in Table 1 6 measures ACV on the 10V range and stores 15 readings in the buffer Table 1 6 Exercise 1 Measure AC volts store readings in buffer Front panel operation Command sequence 1 For front panel operation proceed to step 2 For remote programming clear the buffer 2 Restore defaults Press SHIFT gt press SETUP gt select RESTORE FACT 3 Select ACV function Press ACV 4 Select 10V range Press RANGE A to display RANGE 10V 6 Store 15 readings in buffer Press STORE gt set for 000015 RDGS gt press
369. it is a good safe practice to open all channels ROUT OPEN ALL 2 22 Close Open Switching Module Channels Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Multiple channel operation anomalies Anomaly 1 When you use multiple channel operation to open the system channel the channel will open but the system channel number will still be displayed on the Model 2700 For details see Anomaly 1 example wrong channel displayed Anomaly 2 For a 4 wire function you can use multiple channel operation to open the paired channel If you then use system channel operation to again select the already closed system channel it will not re close the paired channel For details see Anomaly 2 example opening the paired channel NOTE The following anomaly examples assume a Model 7700 installed in slot 1 Anomaly 1 example wrong channel displayed The following example closes channel 102 and connects it to the DMM Input However the Model 2700 will not display the measurement channel that is closed It will display channel 101 instead of channel 102 1 Use the ALL option for the OPEN key to open all channels in the mainframe Remote programming ROUT OPEN ALL Press the gt key to close and display channel 101 This closes channel 101 which is the system channel and channel 125 to connect it to the DMM Input Figure 2 1 Remote programming ROUT CLOS 101 Use the MULTI option for the CLOSE key to
370. ital I O port Application sorting resistors Provides an application to test the tolerances of 100Q resistors Provides the digital output response to the various pass fail combinations of the limit tests 9 2 Limits and Digital I O Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Limits NOTE Limits cannot be used with the CONT function When using limits you can set and control the values that determine the HIGH IN LOW status of subsequent measurements The limit test is performed on the result of an enabled Rel Math Ratio or Channel Average operation NOTE The various instrument operations including Limits are performed on the input signal in a sequential manner See Signal processing sequence page D 2 for details It includes flow charts showing where in the processing sequence that Limits are tested There are two sets of limits Limit 1 uses high and low limits HI1 and LO1 as does Limit 2 HI2 and LO2 The HIGH IN LOW status indication applies to the first limit limit 1 or limit 2 that fails Figure 9 1 illustrates the following limits which are the factory defaults Limit 1 HI1 1V and LOI 1V Limit 2 HI2 2V and LO2 2V Keep in mind that a limit value for Limit 2 does not have to exceed the Limit 1 value For example Limit 2 can be set to 1 V and Limit 1 can be set to 2V In this case Limit 2 will fail before Limit 1 Figure 9 1 Default limits lt Low gt x _____
371. itional information on these commands follow the table NOTE Query commands and optional command words are not included in Table 7 1 The unabridged SCPI tables are provided in Section 15 7 28 Scanning Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Table 7 1 Scanning commands Commands Description Default Ref Scan commands ROUTe SCAN lt clist gt Specify list of channels to be scanned a ROUTe SCAN Returns list of channels to be scanned ROUTe SCAN TSOurce lt list gt Select trigger s to start scan lt list gt IMMediate or IMM b HLIMit1 LLIMit HLIMit2 LLIMit2 ROUTe SCAN NVOLatile lt b gt Enable or disable auto scan lt b gt ON or OFF Note 1 ROUTe SCAN LSELect lt name gt Enable disable scan lt name gt INTernal on or NONE OFF off ROUTe MONitor lt clist gt Specify one channel to be monitored c ROUTe MONitor POINts lt NRf gt Specify number of channels to scan lt NRf gt 2 to Note 3 d 55000 ROUTe MONitor STATe lt b gt Enable disable monitor lt b gt ON or OFF OFF ROUTe MONitor DATA Returns the most recent monitor reading ROUTe CLOSe ACONfigure lt b gt Enable or disable auto channel configuration Limits commands CALCulate3 LIMit UPPer lt n gt Set high limit 1 for monitor lt n gt 4294967295 to 1 0 4294967295 CALCulate3 LIMit LOWer lt n gt Set low limit 1 for monitor lt n gt 4294967295 to 1 0 4294967295 CALCulate3 LIMit2 UP
372. its as follows Note that you only need to set values for limits that are going to be used a 0 Bo Ss Press SHIFT and then LIMITS to access the limits menu Note that the CHAN annunciator flashes to indicate that the menu is being used to set up a scan channel Use the lt gt A and Ww keys to set high limit 1 HI1 and press ENTER Set low limit 1 LO1 and press ENTER Set high limit 2 HI2 and press ENTER Set low limit 2 LO2 and press ENTER The instrument returns to the scan setup menu Press SHIFT and then ON OFF to display the present state of LIMITS ON or OFF Again the CHAN annunciator flashes to indicate that the menu is for a scan channel Press the A or W key to display LIMITS ON and press ENTER The instrument returns to the scan setup menu Note that the HIGH and LOW annunciators are on to indicate that limits are enabled After all scan channels are set up press ENTER The present state of IMM SCAN is Y yes or N no Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Scanning 7 25 2 Press the A or W key to display IMM SCAN N and press ENTER a Press the A or W key to enable or disable low limit 1 LLIM1 SCAN N Y and press ENTER b Press the A or W key to enable or disable high limit 1 HLIM1 SCAN N Y and press ENTER c Press the A or w key to enable or disable low limit 2 LLIM2 SCAN N Y and press ENTER d Press the A or W key to enable or disable high limit 2 HLIM2 SCAN N
373. l gt 5 3 2 4 and 5 Affected outputs are pulled or pulsed high or low when a limit test fails 9 18 Limits and Digital I O Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual 10 Remote Operations Operation enhancements Summarizes some of the more important operations that can only be performed using remote operation GPIB setup Covers GPIB bus standards selecting the GPIB primary address selection and bus connections General bus commands Describes general bus commands used for fundamental GPIB control Front panel GPIB operation Summarizes GPIB error messages status indicators and using the LOCAL key Programming syntax Describes the basic programming syntax for both common and SCPI commands RS 232 interface operation Outlines use of the RS 232 interface to control the Model 2700 10 2 Remote Operations Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Operation enhancements There are some operations you can do over the IEEE 488 bus and RS 232 interface that you cannot do from the front panel The more important ones are summarized below Pseudocards Using remote operation you can assign a pseudocard to an empty switching module slot With a pseudocard installed the Model 2700 will operate as if the switching module is installed in the Model 2700 This feature allows you to configure your system without having the actual switching module installed in the
374. l Range Digits Rate Bandwidth and Filter 4 5 Digits Manual ranging The range is selected by specifying the expected reading as an absolute value using the lt n gt parameter for the appropriate RANGe command The Model 2700 will then go to the most sensitive range for that expected reading For example if you expect a reading of approximately 3V let the parameter lt n gt equal 3 to select the 10V range Auto ranging The RANGe AUTO command is coupled to the command to select range manually RANGe lt n gt When auto range is enabled the parameter value for RANGe lt n gt changes to the automatically selected range value When auto range is disabled the instrument remains at the selected range When a valid RANGe lt n gt command is sent auto ranging disables Range programming examples NOTE The following examples can be run from the KE2700 Instrument Driver using the example named MultiRange in Table H 1 of Appendix H Example 1 The following commands select range for DCV Q2 and DCI VOLT RANG 0 5 Select 1V range for DCV RES RANG 2e3 Select 10kQ range for Q2 CURR RANG 0 1 Select 100mA range for DCI Example 2 The following command sequence configures channel 101 of the Model 7700 to select the 1OVDC range when it is scanned FUNC VOLT 101 Set 101 for DCV function VOLT RANG 1 5 101 Set 101 for 10V range The DIGITS key sets display resolution for the Model 2700 from 3
375. l Reference Brief Description Advance8 None Use Case 8 7706 module in slot 1 and 7702 module in slot 2 e 7706 module e Output analog output values to analog output channels e Output digital output values to digital output channels e 7702 module e Scan 120 DCV channels e Measurement speed rate 1 plc Filter Disabled no filtering e Math mX b m 0 555 b 17 778 e Limits Limit 1 all channels 100 Limit 2 180 e Buffer Store 320 reading strings Buffer elements include reading channel and limit code e Triggering Bus control source trigger delay 0 125 seconds e Data retrieval SRQ when buffer 4 12 4 and full Analout See 7706 packing list Demonstrates setting the output value of the analog output channels of the 7706 module AOCalibration See 7706 packing list Demonstrates how to remotely calibrate the analog output channels of the 7706 module BufStats Page 6 15 Prog Ex Demonstrates calculating the mean of 20 readings BusTrg Page 12 7 Demonstrates use of bus triggering TRG Prog Ex CloseChannels Page 2 21 Demonstrates closing channels multiple channel operation Remote Prog Ex ConfigChan Page 3 56 Ex 4 Demonstrates configuring channels CTMMV Page 3 55 Ex 1 Demonstrates continuous AC volts measurement Digits Page 4 7 Ex 1 amp 2 Demonstrates setting display resolution Digout See 7706 packing list Demonstrates setting the digital outputs on a 7706 m
376. l Rel Math Ratio Channel Average dB 5 9 This math operation lets you manipulate normal display readings X mathematically according to the following calculation Y mX b where NOTE X is the normal display reading m and b are the user entered constants for scale factor and offset Y is the displayed result When using Rel the rel ed reading of the input signal is used by the mX b calculation mX b configuration 1 2 Press SHIFT and then MATH to display the math menu Press the RANGE A and key to display mX b and press ENTER to display the present scale factor M 1 000000 A factory default Key in the scale factor value The lt and keys control cursor position and the amp and w keys increment decrement the digit value To change range place the cursor on the multiplier and use the A and Y keys m x0 001 A x1 K x1000 and M x1 000 000 With the cursor on the polarity sign the A and Y keys toggle polarity Press ENTER to enter the m value and display the offset b value b 00 00000 m factory default Key in the offset value Press ENTER to enter the b value and display the one character units designator UNITS X factory default Use the cursor keys and the A or W key if you wish to change the units designator The character can be any letter in the alphabet A through Z the degree symbol or the ohms symbol Q Press ENTER The MATH annunciator will turn on and
377. l levels for switching modules High energy circuit safety precautions Provides safety information when performing measurements in high energy circuits Performance considerations Covers some considerations that affect overall performance including warm up autozero and line synchronization Channel list parameter lt clist gt Summarizes the use of the lt clist gt parameter which is used throughout this manual to configure scan channels Voltage measurements DCV and ACV Provides detailed information for making basic DC and AC voltage measurements Current measurements DCI and ACI Provides detailed information for making basic DC and AC current measurements Resistance measurements Provides detailed information for making resistance measurements Also covered is offset compensated ohms OCOMP Temperature measurements Provides detailed information for making thermocouple thermistor and 4 wire RTD temperature measurements Frequency and period measurements Provides detailed information for making frequency and period measurements Continuity testing Explains how to use the CONT feature to test continuity Remote programming for basic measurements Covers the commands used to perform basic measurements Includes some simple programming examples Measurement queries Summarizes commands typically used to trigger and or return measured readings 3 2 Basic DMM Operation Model 2700 M
378. lated resistance of the RTD Rg is the known RTD resistance at 0 C T is the temperature in C A alpha 1 delta 100 B 1 alpha delta 1e 4 C 1 alpha beta 1e 8 The alpha beta and delta values are listed in Table F 10 Equation for 0 to 630 C temperature range Rerp Ro 1 AT BT where Rppp is the calculated resistance of the RTD Rg is the known RTD resistance at 0 C T is the temperature in C A alpha 1 delta 100 B 1 alpha delta 1e 4 The alpha and delta values are listed in Table F 10 Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Temperature Equations F 9 RTD parameters for equations The RTD parameters for the Callendar Van Dusen equations are listed in Table F 10 Table F 10 RTD parameters Type Standard Alpha Beta Delta Q at 0 C PT100 ITS 90 0 003850 0 10863 1 49990 100Q D100 ITS 90 0 003920 0 10630 1 49710 100Q F100 ITS 90 0 003900 0 11000 1 49589 100Q PT385 IPTS 68 0 003850 0 11100 1 50700 100Q PT3916 IPTS 68 0 003916 0 11600 1 50594 100Q Example 1 Calculate the resistance of a PT100 RTD at 100 C T The following Rg Q at 0 C alpha and delta values are used for the PT100 RTD Table F 10 T 100 C Ro Q at 0 C 1009 alpha 0 003850 delta 1 49990 Using the above alpha and delta values A and B are calculated as follows A 0 00385 1 1 4999 100 0 00385 1 014999 0 003907746 B 1 0 00385 1 4999 1e 4
379. ld reduce the number of readings that could be stored in the buffer Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Scanning 7 23 Manual external trigger scan The only difference between a manual external trigger scan and the basic scan is control The basic scan runs as soon as the STEP or SCAN key is pressed The manual external trigger scan is controlled by the front panel TRIG key or by triggers received from another instrument NOTE For the following procedure the Model 2700 can be triggered by pressing the TRIG key or by receiving a trigger pulse from another instrument Section provides details on triggering 1 Ifthe scanner is presently enabled STEP or SCAN annunciator on press SHIFT and then HALT to disable it 2 Press the EX TRIG to place the instrument in the external triggering mode The TRIG annunciator turns on and the reading is blanked 3 Press STEP or SCAN to enable the scan STEP or SCAN annunciator turns on The TRIG key or input triggers control the scan as follows STEP operation In general each time the Model 2700 is triggered one channel is scanned When the STEP key is pressed to enable the scan the first channel in the scan list closes When the first trigger occurs a measurement is taken the channel opens and the next channel closes This process continues for each channel in the scan After the last channel in the scan list is scanned the first channel in the scan list closes T
380. le sending the common command string Table G 4 Typical addressed command sequence Data bus Step Command ATN state ASCII Hex Decimal 1 UNL Set low 3F 63 2 LAG Stays low f 36 54 3 Data Set high 2A 42 4 Data Stays high R 52 82 5 Data Stays high S 53 83 6 Data Stays high T 54 84 Assumes primary address 16 Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual IEEE 488 Bus Overview IEEE command groups Command groups supported by the Model 2700 are listed in Table G 5 Common commands and SCPI commands are not included in this list Table G 5 IEEE command groups HANDSHAKE COMMAND GROUP NDAC NOT DATA ACCEPTED NRFD NOT READY FOR DATA DAV DATA VALID UNIVERSAL COMMAND GROUP ATN ATTENTION DCL DEVICE CLEAR IFC INTERFACE CLEAR REN REMOTE ENABLE SPD SERIAL POLL DISABLE SPE SERIAL POLL ENABLE ADDRESS COMMAND GROUP LISTEN LAG LISTEN ADDRESS GROUP MLA MY LISTEN ADDRESS UNL UNLISTEN TALK TAG TALK ADDRESS GROUP MTA MY TALK ADDRESS UNT UNTALK OTA OTHER TALK ADDRESS ADDRESSED COMMAND GROUP ACG ADDRESSED COMMAND GROUP GTL GO TO LOCAL SDC SELECTIVE DEVICE CLEAR STATUS COMMAND GROUP RQS REQUEST SERVICE SRQ SERIAL POLL REQUEST STB STATUS BYTE EOI END G 13 G 14 IEEE 488 Bus Overview Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Interface function codes The interface function codes which are part
381. lk listen and A Pa i cH namm 2 computen igi Data Bus p gt _ _ Device2 Ap able to talk and listen H A T A T Ii q pi o Device 3 aoi able to isten printer General Interface Management Device 4 i only able to EH L_ DIO 1 8 Data talk HR 4 8 Lines A A ee A DAV NRFD Handshake NDAC IFC ATN Bus a Management EOI G 4 IEEE 488 Bus Overview Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual There are two categories of controllers system controller and basic controller Both are able to control other instruments but only the system controller has the absolute authority in the system In a system with more than one controller only one controller may be active at any given time Certain protocol is used to pass control from one controller to another The IEEE 488 bus is limited to 15 devices including the controller Thus any number of talkers and listeners up to that limit may be present on the bus at one time Although several devices may be commanded to listen simultaneously the bus can have only one active talker or communications would be scrambled A device is placed in the talk or listen state by sending an appropriate talk or listen command These talk and listen commands are derived from an instrument s primary address The primary address may have any value between 0 and 31 and is generally set by rear panel DIP switches or programmed in from the front p
382. ll open and the specified channel or channel pair will close NOTE While in the normal measurement state you can use the qand p keys to close channels In general each key press will open the presently closed channel and then close the next higher or lower channel 6 Observe the displayed reading If the OVERFLOW message is displayed select a higher range until a normal reading is displayed or press AUTO for autoranging For manual ranging use the lowest possible range for the best resolution 7 To measure other switching channels repeat steps 5 and 6 8 When finished press OPEN if there is a channel closed 3 24 Basic DMM Operation Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Offset compensated ohms The presence of thermal EMFs Vgyp can adversely affect low resistance measurement accuracy To overcome these unwanted offset voltages you can use offset compensated ohms OCOMP Offset compensated ohms measurements can be performed on the 100Q 1kQ and 10kQ ranges for the Q4 function It cannot be done on the Q2 function NOTE The various instrument operations including OCOMP are performed on the input signal in a sequential manner See Signal processing sequence page D 2 for details It includes a flowchart showing where in the processing sequence that the OCOMP operation is performed For a normal resistance measurement the Model 2700 sources a current I and measures the voltage V The resist
383. losed to route current to digital ground As a result a low logic output OV is provided at the output If the second input B of the NAND gate is connected to another output line of the port the output of the NAND gate will go to logic 0 when both digital outputs are set high Figure 9 5 NAND gate control Model 2700 Logic Device 4 75k Pull Up Resistor Setting digital output The OUTPUT menu shown in Table 9 1 is used to control and configure digital outputs Menu items for the digital output include e DOUTPUT Use to enable ON or disable OFF the digital outputs e PULSE Use to enable YES or disable NO the pulse option for the digital outputs Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Limits and Digital I O 9 11 NOTE The factory default pulse time is 2ms maximum Using remote programming pulse time can be set from 0 001 to 99999 999 sec It cannot be set from the front panel LSENSE Use to select the logic sense active HIGH or active LOW With active high selected an output will be at approximately 5V when a reading is at or exceeds the limit Conversely with active low selected an output will be at OV when a reading reaches or exceeds the limit MASTR LATCH Use to enable Y or disable N the master limit latch When enabled the master limit remains latched when a reading limit is reached or exceeded When disabled the master limit line releases immediately when the readi
384. lot For the last inch or so press in firmly to mate the module connector to the mainframe connector On each side of the module there is a mounting screw Tighten these two screws to secure the module to the mainframe Do not overtighten Reconnect the power line cable and any other cables to the rear panel When you turn on the Model 2700 the model number of the switching module will be briefly displayed 2 4 Close Open Switching Module Channels Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Connections WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING Connection information for switching modules is intended for qualified service personnel Do not attempt to connect DUT or external circuitry to a switching module unless qualified to do so To prevent electric shock that could result in serious injury or death adhere to following safety precautions e Before making or breaking connections to the switching module make sure the Model 2700 is turned off and power is removed from all external circuitry e Do not connect signals that will exceed the maximum specifications of switching module Specifications for the Model 7700 are provided in Appendix A If both the front panel terminals and the switching module terminals are connected at the same time the test lead insulation must be rated to the highest voltage that is connected For example if 1000V is connected to the front panel input the test lead insulation for the switching
385. lot 1 Channel 1 and Slot 2 Channel 3 101 110 Slot 1 Channels 1 through 10 Notes 1 The lt clist gt parameter is used to configure one or more channels for a scan Each channel in the lt clist gt must be set to the function specified by the filter command If not a conflict error 221 will occur For example VOLTage AVERage STATe ON 101 is only valid if scan channel 101 is set for the DCV function REPeat is the RST default and MOVing is the SYSTem PRESet default From the front panel the factory default is MOVing OFF is the RST default and ON is the SYSTem PRESet default EDC is optional for the commands to set DCV and DCI filter Filter window Parameter value 0 for the WINDow commands sets the filter window to NONE 4 22 Range Digits Rate Bandwidth and Filter Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Filter programming examples NOTE The following example can be run from the KE2700 Instrument Driver using the example named MAFilter in Table H 1 of Appendix H Example 1 The following command sequence configures filtering for the DCI function CURR TCON MOV Select the moving filter CURR AVER WIND 0 01 Set filter window to 0 01 CURR AVER COUN 10 Set to filter 10 readings CURR AVER ON Enable filter NOTE The following example can be run from the KE2700 Instrument Driver using the example named RAFilter in Table H 1 of Appendix H Example 2 The foll
386. low limit Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Getting Started 1 13 MATH mX b percent or reciprocal 1 X calculation enabled MED Medium reading rate selected MON Monitor channel displayed OCOMP 4 wire offset compensated ohms enabled RATIO Channel ratio enabled REAR Front panel input terminals disconnected REL Relative enabled for selected function REM Instrument in GPIB remote mode SCAN Scanning operation being performed SHIFT Accessing a shifted key SLOW Slow reading rate selected SRQ Service request over GPIB STAT Displaying buffer statistics STEP Stepping operation being performed TALK Instrument addressed to talk over GPIB bus TIMER Timer controlled triggering in use TRIG External triggering selected trigger link TRIG key or GPIB 5 INPUTS switch Use to select front panel inputs out F position or switching module inputs in R position NOTE For remote programming the following command queries the INPUTS switch position SYSTem FRSWitch Query INPUTS switch 0 rear 1 front 6 Handle Pull out and rotate to desired position 7 Front panel inputs INPUT HI and LO Used for DCV ACV Q2 CONT FREQ PERIOD and thermocouple thermistor TEMP measurements SENSE HI and LO Use with INPUT HI and LO for Q4 and RTD TEMP measurements AMPS Use with INPUT LO for DCI and ACI measurements Amps fuse holder Holds current fuse for front panel amps input 1 14 Getti
387. ls deferred commands and clears any command that prevents the processing of any other device command A DCL does not affect instrument settings and stored data SDC selective device clear The SDC command is an addressed command that performs essentially the same function as the DCL command However since each device must be individually addressed the SDC command provides a method to clear only selected instruments instead of clearing all instruments simultaneously as is the case with DCL GET group execute trigger GET is a GPIB trigger that is used as a trigger event to control operation The Model 2700 reacts to this trigger if it is the programmed trigger control source The following com mand selects the GPIB trigger control source TRIGger SOURce BUS When a GPIB trigger is sent to the Model 2700 operation will continue in the trigger model See Section 8 for details on triggering SPE SPD serial polling Use the serial polling sequence to obtain the Model 2700 serial poll byte The serial poll byte contains important information about internal functions See Section 11 Status Structure Generally the serial polling sequence is used by the controller to determine which of several instruments has requested service with the SRQ line However the serial polling sequence may be performed at any time to obtain the status byte from the Model 2700 10 10 Remote Operations Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s M
388. ltimeter Switch System User s Manual SCPI Reference Tables 15 25 Table 15 9 Trigger command summary Default Command Description parameter Ref SCPI INITiate Subsystem command path Sec 8 v IMMediate Initiate one trigger cycle v CONTinuous lt b gt Enable or disable continuous initiation Note 1 v CONTinuous Query continuous initiation y ABORt Reset trigger system v TRIGger SEQuence 1 Path to program Trigger Layer v COUNt lt n gt Set measure count 1 to 55000 or INFinity Note 2 y COUNt Query measure count y DELay lt n gt Set delay 0 to 999999 999 sec 0 v AUTO lt b gt Enable or disable auto delay OFF AUTO Query state of delay DELay Query delay v SOURce lt name gt Select control source IMMediate TIMer IMM v MANual BUS or EXTernal SOURce Query control source y TIMer lt n gt Set timer interval 0 001 to 999999 999 sec 0 1 v TIMer Request the programmed timer interval Jv SIGNal Loop around control source Jv SAMPle COUNt lt NRf gt Specify sample count 1 to 55000 1 COUNt Query sample count Notes 1 Defaults for continuous initiation SYSTem PRESet enables continuous initiation RST disables continuous initiation 2 Defaults for count SYSTem PRESet sets the count to INF infinity RST sets the count to 1 15 26 SCPI Reference Tables Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Table 15 10 UNIT command summary Default Command
389. m 50 ppm 500 ppm 5000 ppm 5 7710 Model 23 C 5 C llppm 110ppm 1100ppm 1 1 11 7710 Model Temp Coeff gt 28 50 C_ 0 3 ppm C 3 ppm C 30 ppm C 0 03 C 0 3 C 9 0 ABRWN Add 1V when used with plug in modules For RATIO DCV only For AVERAGE DCV and Thermocouples only Available with plug in modules only Add 6V to of range uncertainty when using Models 7701 7703 and 7707 34V for Models 7706 7709 and 7710 Auto zero off For LSYNC On line frequency 0 1 For LSYNC Off use 60dB for gt 1PLC For 1kQ unbalance in LO lead AC CMRR is 70dB Speeds are for 60Hz 50Hz operation using factory defaults operating conditions RST Autorange off Display off Limits off Trigger delay 0 6 Speeds include measurements and binary data transfer out the GPIB 7 Sample count 1000 into memory buffer auto zero off 8 Auto zero off NPLC 0 01 9 Additional Uncertainty Type Range 7710 Module Using CJC J 0 to 760 C 15 C K 0 to 1372 C N 0 to 1300 C 0 5 C 1 0 to 400 C Se E 0 to 1000 C 0 5 C R 400 to 1768 C 0 9 C S 400 to 1768 C 0 9 C B 1100 to 1820 C OOS Plug In Modules Front Terminals 7709 Sim 7701 7703 7700and 7706 7710 Sim Ref Ref 7707 Sim 7708 Using Using Using Type Range Junction Junction Ref Junction CIC CJC CJC J 200 to 0 C 0 1 0 1 0 3 0 8 1 6 4 5 K 200 to 0 C 0 2 0 2 0 4 0 8 1 6 1 N 200 to 0 C 0 3 0 3 0 6 0 8
390. m User s Manual DIVider Query state of input divider Default Command Description parameter Ref SCPI SENSe 1 VOLTage DC Path to configure DC voltage Sec 3 v APERture lt n gt lt clist gt Set integration rate in seconds 60Hz Note 2 Sec 4 1 67e 4 to 1 50Hz 2e 4 to 1 APERture lt clist gt Query aperture integration rate NPLCycles lt n gt lt clist gt Set integration rate in line cycles 60Hz 5 0 Sec4 Vv 0 01 to 60 50Hz 0 01 to 50 NPLCycles lt clist gt Query line cycle integration rate v RANGe Path to set measurement range Sec4 Vv UPPer lt n gt lt clist gt Select range 0 to 1010 1000 Jv UPPer lt clist gt Query range Jv AUTO lt b gt lt clist gt Enable or disable auto range ON y AUTO lt clist gt Query state of auto range y DIGits lt p gt lt clist gt Specify measurement resolution 4 to 7 7 Sec 4 DIGits lt clist gt Query resolution REFerence lt n gt lt clist gt Specify reference 1010 to 1010 0 Sec 5 Jv STATe lt b gt lt clist gt Enable or disable reference OFF y STATe lt clist gt Query state of reference y ACQuire lt clist gt Use input signal as reference REFerence lt clist gt Query reference value y AVERage Path to configure and control filter Sec 4 TCONtrol lt name gt Select filter type MOVing or REPeat Note 3 TCONtrol Query filter type WIN
391. mands A command that allows the execution of subsequent commands while device operations of the Overlapped command are still in progress Use the WAI command to suspend the execution of subsequent commands until the device operations of all previous Overlapped commands are finished The WAI command is not needed for Sequential commands The Model 2700 has three overlapped commands e INITiate e INITiate CONTinuous ON TRG NOTE See OPC OPC and TRG for more information The INITiate commands remove the Model 2700 from the idle state The device operations of INITiate are not considered complete until the Model 2700 returns to idle By sending the WAI command after the INITiate command all subsequent commands will not execute until the Model 2700 goes back into idle The TRG command issues a bus trigger that could be used to provide the arm scan and measure events for the Trigger Model By sending the WAI command after the TRG command subsequent commands will not executed until the pointer for the Trigger Model has finished moving in response to TRG and has settled at its next state Programming example The following command sequence shows how to use the WAI command to allow the 2700 to wait for the programmed measurements to be completed before requesting a reading SYST PRES Returns 2700 to default setup INIT CONT OFF Disables continuous initiation ABORt Aborts operation Places 2700 in idle T
392. mands Description Default Autozero command SYSTem AZERo STATe lt b gt Enable or disable autozero lt b gt ON or ON OFF Line synchronization command SYSTem LSYNc STATe lt b gt Enable or disable LSYNC lt b gt ON or OFF OFF After enabling autozero you can update the internal reference points immediately by setting the integration rate to 0 01 PLC and then back to the desired setting see NPLC commands in Section 4 Channel list parameter lt clist gt Channels of one or more switching modules installed in the Model 2700 can be scanned Each scan channel can have its own unique setup For example a channel could be set to measure DCV on the 10V range while another channel can be set to measure ACV on the 1V range From the front panel scan channels are configured from the scan configuration menu as explained in Section 7 For remote programming the lt clist gt parameter is used to configure scan channels Channel list parameter lt clist gt SCH where S Mainframe slot number 1 or 2 CH Switching module channel number must be 2 digits Examples 101 Slot 1 Channel 1 101 203 Slot 1 Channel 1 and Slot 2 Channel 3 101 110 Slot 1 Channels 1 through 10 Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Basic DMM Operation 3 7 Throughout this manual you will encounter commands that can use the lt clist gt parameter The lt clist gt simply indic
393. me if INITiation CONTinuous ON is a user saved default RST disables continuous initiation Therefore the instrument will remain in the idle state Either of the following two initiate commands will take the instrument out of the idle state e INITiate e INITiate CONTinuous ON NOTE While in remote pressing the LOCAL key restores continuous front panel operation Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Triggering 8 15 Figure 8 10 Trigger model remote operation ABOrt RCL O START O SYST PRES RST INIT IMM Idle Or and INIT CONT ON Initiate 2 INIT IMM or INIT CONT ON 2 Trigger Signal Event Detection Trigger Source Immediate Trigger Source External Trigger Source Timer Trigger Source Manual Trigger Source BUS Another Trigger 2 Control Source Trigger Count lt n gt INFinity Output Trigger Timer Enabled Delay Auto or Manual Sample Count lt n gt Trigger Delay lt n gt Trigger Delay AUTO lt b gt Device Action 8 16 Triggering Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Trigger model operation Once the instrument is taken out of idle operation proceeds through the trigger model down to the device action In general the device action includes a measurement and when scanning closes the next channel Control Source As shown in F
394. med arm control source The control source is programmed from the TRIGger subsystem NOTE Details on triggering are provided in Section 8 Programming example The following command sequence configures Model 2700 to be controlled by bus triggers The last line which sends a bus trigger triggers one measurement Each subsequent bus trigger will also trigger a single measurement NOTE The following example can be run from the KE2700 Instrument Driver using the example named BusTrg in Table H 1 of Appendix H Restore RST defaults Select BUS control source RST TRIG SOUR BUS TRIG COUN INF Set trigger layer count to infinity INIT Take 2700 out of idle TRG Trigger one measurement H TST self test query Run self test and read result Use this query command to perform a checksum test on ROM The command places the coded result 0 or 1 in the output queue When Model 2700 is addressed to talk the coded result is sent from the output queue to the computer A returned value of zero 0 indicates that the test passed and a value of one 1 indicates that the test failed 12 8 Common Commands Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual WAI Wait to Continue Prevent execution of commands until previous commands are completed Description Two types of device commands exist e Sequential commands A command whose operations are allowed to finish before the next command is executed e Overlapped com
395. ment or decrement the channel number until there is no channel displayed Figure 2 3 System channel operation closing next or previous measurement channel Close previous Close next measurement measurement channel channel 2 10 Close Open Switching Module Channels Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual CLOSE key SINGLE menu option The SINGLE menu option for the CLOSE key can be used to select a measurement channel as the system channel Figure 2 4 Perform the following steps to select the system channel 1 Press the CLOSE key The CLOSE SINGLE message will be displayed NOTE Ifthe CLOSE MULTI message is instead displayed when CLOSE is pressed it indicates that there are no measurement modules installed in the mainframe See Multiple channel operation page 2 16 to close the channels of a non measurement module i e Model 7705 2 Press ENTER to display the prompt to close a channel CLOSE CH XXX 3 Using lt P gt A and Y key in the three digit channel you want to select 4 Press ENTER The channel closes and the CHAN annunciator turns on An invalid channel cannot be closed and will cause one of the following error messages to be briefly displayed INVALID CHAN This message indicates that the channel is not a valid measurement channel The following actions will cause this error e Trying to close a non measurement channel such as a backplane isolation channel a channel that se
396. ment speed rate 0 01 plc e Filter Disabled no filtering e Buffer Store 160 reading strings Buffer elements include reading and channel e Triggering Bus control source e Data retrieval Continuously store data into buffer Retrieve data for every 32 readings NOTE When using a module that has a built in cold junction use the Internal reference junction Keep in mind that the buffer and data retrieval will have to be modified to accommodate the number of scanned channels Modules that have cold junction include 7700 and 7706 modules 20 available TC channels 7708 module 40 available TC channels Advance7 None Use Case 7 Ten 40 channel scans using 7702 module e Channel uses an external reference junction e Measurement speed rate 1 plc e Filter Repeat 25 readings e Channels 2 through 40 are connected to type K thermocouples e Measurement speed rate 1 plc Filter Disabled no filtering e Open thermocouple detection Enabled e Buffer Store 400 reading strings Buffer elements include reading real time clock and channel e Triggering Bus control source e Data retrieval SRQ when buffer 4 12 3 4 and full H 6 KE2700 Instrument Driver Examples Table H 1 continued Visual Basic and CVI C examples Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Name Manua
397. ment state Restoring a setup 1 Press SHIFT and then SETUP to access the restore setup menu 2 Press to place the cursor on the present RESTORE setup FACT RST SAVO SAV1 SAV2 or SAV3 3 Use the A or W key to display the desired setup and press ENTER The instrument returns to the normal measurement state NOTE Ifthe settings for a user setup or power on setup do not match the switching module types presently installed in the Model 2700 error 520 Saved setup scancard mismatch occurs when the setup is recalled The scan list will reset to the factory defaults and all channels will open However the saved setup is still retained in memory and can be restored when the matching switching module is later installed 1 22 Getting Started Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Table 1 4 Default settings Setting Factory RST Set Diff Auto channel configuration No off No effect y Autozero On On Buffer No effect No effect Auto clear Yes on No effect v Channel Average Off Off Closed channels None None Closure count interval No effect No effect Continuity Beeper On On Digits 4 2 digits 4 2 digits Range 1kQ 1kQ Rate Fast 0 01 PLC Fast 0 01 PLC Threshold level 10Q 10Q Current AC and DC Bandwidth AC 30 30 Digits AC 5 digits 5 digits Digits DC 6 digits 6 digits Filter On Off v Window 0 1 0 1 Count 10 10 Type Moving Repeat Jv Range Auto Auto Rate DC Slow 5 PLC Slow 5
398. ments include the reading units and timestamp See FOR Mat ELEMents lt item list gt for details on all data elements Single precision data format 32 data bits For the single precision format each data element e g reading is sent as a 4 byte binary data block as shown in Figure 14 2A This drawing shows data returned in the normal byte order byte 1 first byte 4 last With the swapped byte order selected bytes are returned in the reverse order byte 4 first byte 1 last The REAL 32 or SREal command will select the binary IEEE 754 single precision data format Double precision data format 64 data bits For the double precision format each data element e g reading is sent as a 8 byte binary data block as shown in Figure 14 2B This drawing shows data returned in the normal bye order byte 1 first byte 8 last With the swapped byte order selected bytes are returned in the reverse order byte 8 first byte 1 last The REAL 64 or DREal command will select the binary IEEE 754 double precision data format Data strings The data string that is returned by a read command depends on the selected data elements and the number of measurement conversions that were performed A data string consists of a Header and the byte data blocks for each measurement conversion Figure 14 2C shows an example data string 10 measurement conversions single precision data format three data elements reading units and timestamp
399. mmand functions the same as the front panel OPEN key ALL menu option It simply opens all channels including non measurement channels installed in the mainframe Remote programming example system channel operation The following example assumes a Model 7700 installed in slot 1 and the Q4 function of the Model 2700 is selected This command sequence connects channel 101 and its paired channel 111 to DMM Input and Sense as shown in Figure 2 2 ROUT OPEN ALL Open all channels ROUT CLOS 101 Close channels 101 111 123 124 and 125 2 14 Close Open Switching Module Channels Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Non amp and non measure switching modules There are Keithley switching modules that do not support current measurements and there are modules that do not support any measurements at all Non amps module With an amps function selected DCI or ACI system channel operation cannot be used to close channels on that module Non measure module For front panel operation system channel operation cannot be used to close channels For remote programming system channel operation can be used but only the one specified channel will close All other channels on the module will open Non amps switching modules NOTE Presently non amps Keithley modules include the Models 7701 7703 7706 7707 7708 and 7709 You can check the Keithley website www keithley com for new modules A non amp module does
400. mmand would be sent ROUTe CLOSe 103 2 Only the closed system channel is returned by Route cLoSe The paired channel for a 4 wire function is not returned For example assume channel 2 in slot 1 is closed The following response message will be returned 102 1 32 Getting Started Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Exercise 2 Closing and opening channels system channel operation The exercise in Table 1 7 demonstrates a sequence to close and open channels of a Mode 7700 installed in slot 1 of the mainframe Table 1 7 Exercise 2 Close and open channels system channel operation Front panel operation Command sequence 1 Open all channels Press OPEN gt display OPEN ALL gt Press OPEN ROUT OPEN ALL 2 Select Q2 function Press Q2 FUNC RES 3 Close system channel 101 Press the p key Channel 1 connects to DMM Input see Figure 1 4 ROUT CLOS 101 4 Close system channel 102 Press the key Channel 2 connects to DMM Input ROUT CLOS 102 5 Close system channel 106 Press CLOSE gt select CLOSE SINGLE gt key in channel 106 gt press ROUT CLOS 106 ENTER Channel 6 connects to DMM Input 6 Select Q4 function Press Q4 4W annunciator turns on and channels 6 and 16 connects to FUNC FRES DMM Input and Sense see Figure 1 5 7 Open all channels Press OPEN gt display OPEN ALL gt Press OPEN ROUT OPEN ALL It is a good safe practic
401. mp that will be used for the next storage operation while TRACe TSTamp TYPE queries the timestamp for readings that are presently stored in the buffer TRACe CLEar Clear the buffer TRACe CLEar AUTO ON OFF Control on off buffer auto clear TRACe CLEar Used to clear the buffer Buffer readings are not lost cleared when the Model 2700 is turned off When TRAC CLE is sent while displaying stored readings the message BUF CLEARED is briefly displayed and the instrument returns to the normal measurement state TRACe CLEar AUTO With auto clear enabled the buffer will automatically clear when the storage process starts When disabled readings will append to old readings in the buffer until the buffer becomes full 55 000 readings or the storage process is stopped Disabling auto clear automatically sets the buffer size to 55 000 TRACe FREE Query status of storage memory Returns two values separated by commas The first value indicates in bytes memory available for storage while the second value indicates the number of bytes being used for stored readings TRACe POINts 2 to 55000 Set buffer size With buffer auto clear enabled you can set the buffer to store from 2 to 55 000 readings A buffer size of zero or one is not valid error 222 With buffer auto clear disabled you cannot use this command to set buffer size error 221 because it is fixed at 55 000 NOTE The full and 34 buffer full measurement events
402. must be updated to the new NPLC setting before a reading is generated Therefore frequent NPLC setting changes can result in slower measurement speed 4 10 Range Digits Rate Bandwidth and Filter Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Bandwidth Bandwidth specifies the lowest frequency of interest for AC measurements The RATE setting determines the bandwidth setting e SLOW 3Hz to 300kHz e MEDium 30Hz to 300kHz e FAST 300Hz to 300kHz When the Slow bandwidth 3Hz to 300kHz is chosen the signal goes through an analog RMS converter The output of the RMS converter goes to a fast 1kHz sampling A D and the RMS value is calculated from 1200 digitized samples 1 2s When the Medium bandwidth 30Hz to 300kHz is chosen the same circuit is used However only 120 samples 120ms are needed for an accurate calculation because the analog RMS converter has turned most of the signal to DC In the Fast bandwidth 300Hz to 300kHz the output of the analog RMS converter nearly pure DC at these frequencies is simply measured at 1 PLC 16 6ms For remote programming the integration rate can be set from 0 01 PLC to 50 or 60 PLC Table 4 4 lists the front panel bandwidth settings for the AC measurement functions For remote programming the FAST MED and SLOW annunciators are only lit when conditions in the table are met In other cases the annunciators are turned off Scanning When a simple scan is configured
403. n parenthesis SYSTem CARD1 VCHannel STARt Query first volt Q2 channel 7700 1 SYSTem CARD1 VCHannel END Query last volt Q2 channel 7700 20 SYSTem CARD1 ACHannel STARt Query first amps channel 7700 21 SYSTem CARD1 ACHannel END Query last amps channel 7700 22 All the commands to query switching module capabilities are covered in Table 15 7 Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Scanning 7 3 Channel assignments A switching module has a certain number of channels For example the Model 7700 switching module has 22 channels 1 through 22 When you encounter a 1 or 2 digit channel number in this manual the switching module channel is the point of discussion A switching module can be installed in one of two slots of the mainframe Therefore to close open or scan a channel it is necessary to specify the slot location and channel number of the switching module This is accomplished by using a 3 digit channel number for the mainframe The first digit 1 or 2 indicates the slot number and the next two digits indicate the channel number of the switching module Examples Channel 101 Slot 1 channel 1 Channel 112 Slot 1 channel 12 Channel 220 Slot 2 channel 20 Sequential and non sequential scans Only a sequential scan can be configured from the front panel For a sequential scan the scan proceeds from the lowest numbered channel to the highest For example assume c
404. n Close Next Chan Measure Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Table 7 2 External trigger scan example Scanning 7 35 Front panel operation Remote programming 2 y O e OG Restore defaults Restore defaults SHIFT SETUP gt RESTORE FACT For front panel operation proceed to step 3 For remote programming clear buffer and disable buffer auto clear Configure advanced scan SHIFT CONFIG gt ADVANCED Channel 101 Select TEMP function Configure temperature SHIFT SENSOR Select thermocouple sensor SENS TCOUPLE Select type K thermocouple TYPE K Select internal reference junction JUNC INT Channel 102 Select Q2 function Select IMQ range Disable off channels 103 through 122 SHIFT CH OFF Enable immediate scan IMM SCAN Y Disable timer TIMER NO Set reading count to infinity RDG CNT INF Select external trigger control source Press EX TRIG Enable scan Press SCAN RST TRAC CLE TRAC CLE AUTO OFF FUNC TEMP 101 TEMP TRAN TC 101 TEMP TC TYPE K 101 TEMP RJUN RSEL INT 101 FUNC RES 102 RES RANG 1le6 102 ROUT SCAN 101 102 ROUT SCAN TSO IMM TRIG COUN INF SAMP COUN 2 TRIG SOUR EXT ROUT SCAN LSEL INT INIT 7 36 Scanning Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Monitor scan For this example channel 101 of the Model 7700 is used to monitor temperature When the temperat
405. n a scan is started one or more complete scans will be performed The number of channels in the scan list determines the number of channels for each scan The reading count determines the number of scans to perform and is best explained by an example Assume there are 10 channels in the scan list If you set the reading count to 10 or less one scan of the 10 channels will be performed If you set the reading count to any value from 11 to 20 two scans will be performed A reading count from 21 to 30 gives you three scans and so on If the reading count is set to infinity INF the scan will continuously repeat until you stop it NOTE As shown in Figure 7 2 two counters are used for SCAN operation The Trigger counter controls the number of scans and the Sample Counter controls the number of channels for each scan The number of channels in the scan list and the programmed reading count automatically sets the Trigger Counter and the Sample Counter The Sample Count is equal to the scan list length For example if channels 101 102 and 103 are programmed to be scanned the Sample Count is 3 Output trigger STEP operation After each channel is scanned an output trigger is applied to the rear panel Trigger Link connector SCAN operation After all channels in the scan list are scanned an output trigger is applied to the rear panel Trigger Link connector Scan configuration A scan is configured from the scan configuration menu
406. n be calculated as follows VsRi M R Rg This relationship can be modified to directly compute for percent error 100Rg Percent error Ri Rgs From the above equation it is obvious that the input resistance of the Model 2700 must be at least 999 times the value of source resistance if loading error is to be kept to within 0 1 E 10 Measurement Considerations Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual F Temperature Equations Thermocouple equation Documents the ITS 90 inverse function polynomial and the coefficients to calculate thermocouple temperature Thermistor equation Documents the Steinhart Hart equation which is used to calculate thermistor temperature RTD equation Documents the Callendar Van Dusen equation which is used to calculate the temperature vs resistance readings listed in the RTD reference tables F 2 Temperature Equations Thermocouple equation The Model 2700 uses the ITS 90 inverse function coefficients for the polynomial to calculate thermocouple temperature The Model 2700 measures the thermocouple voltage Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual and then calculates temperature in C as follows tog Co CHE CR c3E3 sss cF where tog is the calculated temperature in C The coefficients for each thermocouple type are listed in Table F 1 through Table F 8 Table F 1 Type B inverse function polynomial Co Cy Cz Cz
407. n by pressing DCI or ACI Use the RANGE A and keys to select a measurement range consistent with the expected current or press AUTO to select autoranging AUTO annunciator turns on Details on range are provided in Section 4 4 Apply the current s to be measured CAUTION Do not apply more than 3A to the input or the AMPS fuse will blow Model 7700 switching module When performing current measurements the maximum allowable voltage is 60VDC or 30V RMS Exceeding these limits could cause damage to the switching module 5 Ifusing a switching module use the lt and keys to close the desired amps channel for the Model 7700 21 or 22 All other channels will be open Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Basic DMM Operation 3 19 6 Observe the displayed reading If the OVERFLOW message is displayed select a higher range until a normal reading is displayed or press AUTO for autoranging For manual ranging use the lowest possible range for the best resolution 7 To measure another amps channel repeat steps 5 and 6 8 When finished press OPEN if there is a channel closed NOTE When you have an amps only channel closed you cannot select a non amps function For example if channel 21 of the Model 7700 is closed you cannot select the DCV function INVALID FUNC displayed AMPS fuse replacement front panel AMPS input WARNING Make sure the instrument is disconnected from the power line an
408. n process is to 1 open any closed channels 2 close the paired channels and then 3 perform the 4 wire measure ment The last scanned channel pair opens NOTE For the Model 7700 switching module primary channels I through 10 are paired to channels 11 through 20 Channel 1 is paired to channel 11 channel 2 is paired to channel 12 channel 3 is paired to channel 13 and so on Calculations using channel pairs Ratio and channel average performs measurements on two channels and then calculates and displays the result Therefore these 2 channel calculations also use paired channels The scan process is to 1 open any closed channels 2 close the primary displayed channel and perform a measurement 3 open the primary channel 4 close the paired channel and perform a measurement 5 calculate and display the result and finally 6 open the paired channel NOTE When scanning the displayed channel number i e 101 is not necessarily the channel that is presently closed If both a reading AND a scan channel are displayed the reading and annunciators pertain to that channel but that channel is no longer closed The next channel in the scan list is the one that is now closed Therefore the reading and annunciators pertain to the channel and does not necessarily indicate the present state of the Model 2700 If the display is blanked the displayed channel is closed and has not been measured Trigger models N
409. n the path pointer sees the colon after the semicolon it resets back to the root level and starts over Commands that are on the same command level can be executed without having to retype the entire command path Example stat oper enab lt NRf gt enab After the first command enab is executed the path pointer is at the third command level in the structure Since enab is also on the third level it can be typed in without repeating the entire path name Notice that the leading colon for enab is not included in the pro gram message If a colon were included the path pointer would reset to the root level and expect a root command Since enab is not a root command an error would occur 10 16 Remote Operations Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Command path rules Each new program message must begin with the root command unless it is optional e g SENSe If the root is optional simply treat a command word on the next level as the root For fastest operation do not send optional data e A colon can be used at the beginning of a program message However using the colon slows down execution time Example stat pres stat pres When the path pointer detects a colon it moves down to the next command level An exception is when the path pointer detects a semicolon which is used to separate commands within the program message see next rule e When the path pointer detects a colon
410. n the signal processing sequence is a Math operation mX b Percent or Recipro cal These math operations allow you to mathematically manipulate the reading X that is applied to this block in the flowchart With one of the Math functions enabled the math result is calculated as shown in Figure D 2 NOTE For details on Math operations see Math page 5 8 Limits The reading that is applied to the Limits block in the flow chart is not modified and is the reading that is displayed on the Model 2700 With Limits enabled the reading is tested against two sets of high and low limits Along with the displayed reading annunciators and messages are used to indicate the result of the limits testing NOTE For details on Limits testing see Limits page 9 2 Buffer With the buffer data store enabled each displayed reading is stored and timestamped The buffer also provides statistics on the stored statistics Buffer statistics include minimum and maximum peak to peak average and standard deviation When buffer recall is enabled stored readings and the buffer statistics are displayed on the Model 2700 NOTE For details on the Buffer see Section 6 D 6 Signal Processing Sequence and Data Flow Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Signal processing using Ratio or Ch Avg With a switching module installed the ratio or average of two channels can be calculated Figure D 3 shows where Ratio or Ch Avg is calcula
411. n will restart the hold process and a reading for each channel will not occur until the relay settles 8 6 Triggering Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Output trigger After the device action an output trigger occurs and is available at the rear panel Trigger Link connector This trigger can be used to trigger another instrument to perform an operation e g select the next channel for an external scan Reading hold autosettle With hold enabled HOLD annunciator on the first processed reading becomes the seed reading and operation loops back within the device action block After the next reading is processed it is checked to see if it is within the selected hold window 0 01 0 1 1 or 10 of the seed reading If the reading is within the window operation again loops back within the device action block This looping continues until the specified number 2 to 100 of consecutive readings are within the window If one of the readings is not within the window the instrument acquires a new seed reading and the hold process continues When a hold reading is acquired an audible beep is sounded if enabled and the reading is considered a true measurement The reading is held on the display until an out of window reading occurs to restart the hold process For remote operation the hold process seeks a new seed once it has been satisfied and the reading has been released For bas
412. nable or disable limit test OFF y lt clist gt STATe lt clist gt Query state of limit test y FAIL Query test result 1 failing v CLEAR Path to clear events y IMMediate Clear high and low events y AUTO lt b gt Enable or disable auto clear ON y AUTO Query auto clear v Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Table 15 1 continued CALCulate command summary SCPI Reference Tables 15 5 Default Command Description parameter Ref SCPI CALCulate3 LIMit2 Path to control LIMIT 2 test Jv UPPer Path to configure upper limit v DATA lt n gt Set upper limit 4294967295 to 2 y lt clist gt 4294967295 DATA lt clist gt Query upper limit y LOWer Path to configure lower limit v DATA lt n gt Set lower limit 4294967295 to 2 Jv lt clist gt 4294967295 DATA lt clist gt Query lower limit y STATe lt b gt Enable or disable limit test OFF v lt clist gt STATe lt clist gt Query state of limit test Jv FAIL Query test result 1 failing Jv CLEAR Path to clear events Jv MMediate Clear high and low events y AUTO lt b gt Enable or disable auto clear ON y AUTO Query auto clear v Notes 1 The MMFactor and MA1Factor commands perform the same operations 2 The MBFactor and MAOFactor commands perform the same operations 3 For mX b units lt char gt one character A through Z degre
413. navigate through the menu structure e Press SHIFT and then SENSOR to enter the menu structure e Cursor position is indicated by a flashing menu item or parameter Cursor position is controlled by the lt and keys e With the cursor on a menu item or parameter use the A and W keys to scroll through the available options e A displayed menu item and parameter is selected by pressing ENTER e You can exit from the menu structure by pressing EXIT However any ENTERed selections will apply Thermocouple temperature measurement configuration The steps to configure thermocouple measurements are provided in Table 3 3 After pressing SHIFT and then SENSOR the menu starts at step 1 to select measurement units Each time you press ENTER to make a selection the menu will automatically go to the next selection After pressing ENTER for the last step the instrument will return to the normal measurement state NOTE An INT card is a switching module that has an internal reference junction i e Model 7700 The INT reference junction setting cannot be selected if there is not at least one INT card installed in the unit With no INT cards installed selecting INT will cause the NO INT CARDS message to be displayed briefly With at least one INT card installed the INT reference junction can be selected However if you select it for the front panel inputs or for a switching module that does not have an internal reference junction i e
414. nce information carefully before using the product Refer to the manual for complete product specifications If the product is used in a manner not specified the protection provided by the product may be impaired The types of product users are Responsible body is the individual or group responsible for the use and maintenance of equipment for ensuring that the equip ment is operated within its specifications and operating limits and for ensuring that operators are adequately trained Operators use the product for its intended function They must be trained in electrical safety procedures and proper use of the instrument They must be protected from electric shock and contact with hazardous live circuits Maintenance personnel perform routine procedures on the product to keep it operating properly for example setting the line voltage or replacing consumable materials Maintenance procedures are described in the manual The procedures explicitly state if the operator may perform them Otherwise they should be performed only by service personnel Service personnel are trained to work on live circuits and perform safe installations and repairs of products Only properly trained service personnel may perform installation and service procedures Keithley products are designed for use with electrical signals that are rated Measurement Category I and Measurement Category TI as described in the International Electrotechnical Commission IEC Standa
415. nch Yellow Green T U S Blue Red B U S Gray Red British White Blue British DIN Red Brown DIN Red Gray Japanese Red White Japanese Red Gray French Yellow Blue French Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Basic DMM Operation 3 39 Thermistor connections A thermistor can be connected directly to the front panel inputs or to any of the 20 input channels of the Model 7700 switching module as shown in Figure 3 15 Figure 3 15 Thermistor connections Model 2700 Input HI Thermistor B Model 7700 switching module Model 7700 Switching Thermistor Module 4 wire RTD connections Shown in Figure 3 16 are 4 wire RTD connections to the Model 2700 For the Model 7700 switching module paired channels are used to perform the 4 wire measurement The two input leads of the RTD are connected to a primary channel 1 through 10 while the two sense leads are connected to its paired channel 11 through 20 Channel 1 is paired to channel 11 channel 2 is paired to channel 12 and so on Figure 3 16 4 wire RTD connections al 9 Model 7700 O e Switching Module B Model 7700 switching module 3 40 Basic DMM Operation Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Temperature measurement configuration The Model 2700 is configured to measure temperature from the temperature measurement configuration menu Use the following general rules to
416. nctions are explained in the following paragraphs NOTE When using multiple channel operation ROUT MULT command to connect a switching module input channel to the DMM the SIMulated reference junction will be used if the INTernal or EXTernal reference junction is selected Simulated reference junction An example of a simulated reference junction is an ice bath Figure 3 14A and B The copper wire to thermocouple wire connections are immersed but electrically isolated in the ice bath and the user enters the 0 C simulated reference temperature into the Model 2700 The simulated reference temperature for the Model 2700 can be set from 0 to 65 C The Model 2700 measures the input voltage and factors in the simulated reference temperature to calculate the temperature reading at the thermocouple NOTE The most accurate temperature measurements are achieved by using a simulated reference junction using an ice point reference Internal reference junction Internal implies that a temperature transducer s is used to measure the cold junction For the Model 7700 switching module the cold junction is the screw terminals with voltage temperature sensors strategically placed to measure the temperature of the cold junction The Model 2700 measures the temperature of the cold junction screw terminals measures the input voltage and then calculates the temperature reading at the thermocouple Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User
417. nd Figure 1 5 show simplified schematics of the switching module They show a single switch closed to connect an input channel to the DMM In reality multiple switching to is used to make proper connections to the DMM However for system channel operation the user need not be concerned about which switches in the module close oo to DMM for 4 wire function system channel 106 closed 7700 7700 Switching Module Switching Module oti oro O HI Ch 6 l i Input oio 00 LO l DMM ott 9 0 HI Ch 16 i Sense Tot Oo NOTE Switching module channels can also be controlled using multiple channel operation This allows individual control of all module channels switches Multiple channel operation should only be used by experienced service personnel who recognize the dangers associated with multiple channel closures See Section 2 for details Close open operation The following points on operation pertain to system channel operation only e Only one input channel or channel pair is closed at one time When you close an input channel the previously closed input channel s will open Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Getting Started 1 31 e When a system channel is closed the channel number will be displayed on the Model 2700 The slot number for the module is also displayed For example 103 indicates that system input channel 3 for a module in slot 1 is closed e The paired channel for a 4 wire func
418. nd may benefit from using OPC or OPC RST and SYST PRES RCL and SAV e ROUT MULT CLOS and ROUT MULT OPEN Only if the lt clist gt is long e CALC2 IMM and CALC2 IMM Only when performing the standard deviation calculation on a large buffer A 10 000 point buffer takes around 5 75 seconds 12 6 Common Commands Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual D OPT option query Query installed switching modules Use this query command to determine which switching modules are installed in the Model 2700 For example if a Model 7703 is installed in slot 1 and the other slot is empty the response message will look like this 7703 NONE Note that the model number of an installed pseudocard is returned in the same manner See Section 2 for details on pseudocards E SAV lt NRf gt save Save present setup in memory RCL lt NRf gt recall Return to setup stored in memory Parameters Memory location 0 Il 0 1 Memory location 1 2 Memory location 2 3 Memory location 3 ll Use the SAV command to save the present instrument setup configuration in memory for later recall Any control affected by RST can be saved by the SAV command The RCL command is used to restore the instrument to the saved setup configuration Four setup configurations can be saved and recalled A saved setup is approximately 4k bytes in size Model 2700 ships from the factory with SYSTem PRESet defaults loaded into the avail
419. nd starts over For buffer readings recalled from the front panel the relative timestamp is referenced to the first reading stored in the buffer absolute format which is timestamped at 0 seconds and to the time between each stored reading delta format For remote programming you can only return the absolute or delta timestamp The following command is used to select relative timestamp format for the buffer TRACe TSTamp FORMat Select timestamp format ABSolute or DELTa Reading number The reading counter starts at zero when the Model 2700 is turned on When returning buffer readings using TRACe DATA each reading will be referenced to the first reading which is 0 The following command will reset the counter SYSTem RNUMber RESet Channel number The channel number indicates the switching module channel for the reading Channel number 000 indicates that no channel was closed Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual FORMat and Misc SYSTem Commands 14 7 Limits For the ASCII data format limit test results are returned as a 4 bit binary number abcd where a High limit 2 b Low limit 2 c High limit 1 d Low limit 1 A 0 indicates that the limit has passed while a 1 indicates that the limit has failed For the binary data formats the limits information must be decoded from the returned value 0 to 15 Convert the value to its binary equivalent for abcd where d is
420. ne or more measurements NOTE Note that sending INITiate while the instrument is performing measurements will cause error 213 init ignored 3 54 Basic DMM Operation Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual DATA LATest DATA FRESh These commands do not trigger a reading They simply return the last reading string The reading reflects what is applied to the input While the instrument is performing measurements you can use these commands to return the last reading If the instrument is not performing measurements DATA LATest will keep returning the same reading string DATA FRESh can only be used once to return the same reading string That is the reading must be fresh Sending this command again to retrieve the same reading string will generate error 230 data corrupt or stale or cause a the GPIB to time out In order to again use DATA FRESh a new fresh reading must be triggered FETCh READ FETCh is similar to DATA LATest in that it can be used to return the last reading However it can also be used to return more than one reading When returning more than one reading the readings are automatically stored in the buffer In order to return multiple reading strings continuous initiation must be disabled INIT CONT OFF so that the sample count SAMPle COUN which specifies the number of measurements to be performed can be set gt 1 After INITiate is sent to trigger the measurements FET
421. ned units displayed REMOTE INTERFACE GPIB IEEE 488 2 and RS 232C SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments ACCESSORIES SUPPLIED Model 1751 Safety Test Leads Product Information CD ROM Software CD ROM with IVI VISA drivers for VB VC C H LabVIEW TestPoint and LabWindows CVI and free runtime startup softare ACCESSORIES AVAILABLE 77xx Modules Extended Warranty ExceLINX 1A Excel add in datalogger software TestPoint Software Development Package SOFTWARE Windows 98 NT 2000 ME and XP compatible Specifications subject to change without notice HW 9 25 03 Revision F Page 4 of 4 7700 20 Channel Differential Multiplexer w Automatic CJC GENERAL 20 CHANNELS 20 channels of 2 pole relay input All channels config urable to 4 pole 2 CHANNELS 2 channels of current only input RELAY TYPE Latching electromechanical ACTUATION TIME lt 3ms CAPABILITIES CHANNELS 1 20 Multiplex one of 20 2 pole or one of 10 4 pole signals into DMM CHANNELS 21 22 Multiplex one of 2 2 pole current signals into DMM INPUTS MAXIMUM SIGNAL LEVEL Channels 1 20 300V DC or 300V rms 42 5V peak for AC waveforms 1A switched 60W 125VA maximum Channels 21 22 60V DC or 30V rms 3A switched 60W 125VA maxi mum CONTACT LIFE typ gt 10 operations at max signal level gt 10 operations cold switching CONTACT RESISTANCE lt 1Q at end of contact life CONTACT POTENTIAL l
422. nel configuration ee eseeeesereeeeseeeeeeseeeeees 7 20 SAVING SCM siseeissusedsiaternsihoesdssscevancsng eera a AET a Raa 7 21 Auto SCAM eaire eia eE a 7 21 SCAM OPCLAtlON svsasicsesssscsvancdocsesdesazessvasveaisnsstaassaetsedpaacnsenoceeoecnsbes 7 22 BASIC SCAM wit estonia teecsenccedendiads sigue isnieee seas E E E a 7 22 Manual external trigger scan oo ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeaees 7 23 Monitor scan analog trigger oo ee eee eeeeeeeseeeneeeeeenees 7 24 Remote programming SCaNMiNg eee eeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 26 Trigger model siirtotien eioi 7 26 Channel S tup sos c 5cc csiecestansedisedoseedenaisaaceccnseenaeesnendeeaseaiiada 7 27 BUER ouine aar A AA NEE 7 27 Scanning commands 00 eee eeseeseeeeeseeeseeseeeaeeseeeaeeseeens 7 27 Scanning programming example cee eeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeee 7 32 Scanning examples c s ccescecesathessssessenssnsieaestecdsdooaueteessanenoersets 7 33 External trigger scan oo ei eeeeeeeseeeseseeeeseseeeeaeeseeeaeeseeeaees 7 33 MONOT SCAM sseteascesceeceesdasueeacesussatonsetneedenseepaeevaeseunacbeadese 7 36 Triggering Trigger model siariad lv chase cacevhe ER EE 8 2 e E E N Gaetivieneteeteiess 8 3 Control source and event detection eseseeseseesessesresesrreesee 8 3 Delay auto or manual sseseesesessessesesrrssrsesresesreseeseeresreseses 8 4 DGVICE ACTION es ieissisceseseiseesecdessccessscssessevunecsdescvcavesisotsevecieosesn 8 5 Output PoE nesie rea ei EE EEE REN
423. ng see Trigger commands in Table 7 1 Section 8 Explains the triggering process Section 13 Covers Signal Oriented Measurement Commands i e FETCh READ Section 15 See Table 15 9 Trigger command summary Appendix D Shows how trigger and read commands control data flow within the instrument NOTE Each exercise indicates the commands used to configure triggering Trigger configuration Once triggering is configured the commands to trigger and or return readings can be repeated as often as desired unless noted otherwise 1 36 Getting Started Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Exercise 4 Trigger and return a single reading Exercise 5 Trigger and return multiple readings Trigger controlled measurements The instrument is typically used in a non continuous trigger mode In this mode commands are used to trigger one or more readings After the specified number of readings are completed the measurement process stops Exercise 4 in Figure 1 8 provides a command sequence to trigger and return one reading Exercise 5 in Figure 1 9 provides a command sequence to trigger and return multiple readings Exercise 6 Return a single reading continuous triggering Readings can be returned while the instrument is in the continuous measurement trigger mode Each time a read command is sent the latest reading is returned Exercise 6 in Figure 1 10 provides a command sequence to r
424. ng Started Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Rear panel summary The rear panel of Model 2700 is shown in Figure 1 2 As shown a slot cover is installed on slot 2 WARNING Slot covers must be installed on unused slots to prevent personal contact with high voltage circuits Figure 1 2 Model 2700 rear panel 1 2 3 4 WARN NG NO INTERNAL OPEF TOR SERVICABLE PARTS SERVICE BY QUALIFIED ERSONNEL ONLY KEITHLEY e 0 cme e DIGITAL 1 0 TRIG LINK RS232 MADE IN IEEE 488 AN U S A KEITHLEY SLOT COVER CAUTION FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE HAZARD REPLACE FUSE WITH SAME TYPE AND RATING 1 DIGITAL I O Male DB 9 connector for digital input trigger link in and digital outputs 2 TRIG LINK Eight pin micro DIN connector for sending and receiving trigger pulses among connected instruments Use a trigger link cable or adapter such as Models 8501 1 8501 2 8502 and 8503 3 RS 232 Female DB 9 connector for RS 232 operation Use a straight through not null modem DB 9 shielded cable 4 IEEE 488 Connector for IEEE 488 GPIB operation Use a shielded cable such as Models 7007 1 and 7007 2 5 Power module Contains the AC line receptacle power line fuse and line voltage setting The instrument can be configured for line voltages of 100V 120V 220V 240VAC at line frequencies of 50 or 60Hz 6 Slot 1 and Slot 2 Two slots to accommodate Keithley Model 77xx series switching module
425. ng Value Reading Value Reading Value Reading Value Reading Value Reading Value Reading Value Reading Value Standard Deviation Value Average Value Peak to Peak Value XX Minimum Value XX Maximum Value Ga gt gt Recalling buffer data real time clock timestamp RANGE RANGE RDG RDG RDG RDG RDG RDG RDG RDG RDG RDG STD Average Peak to Peak Min Max DAA LS FZ SL 2 LL BOSOOOOSSSS Absolute Timestamp Absolute Timestamp Absolute Timestamp Absolute Timestamp Absolute Timestamp Absolute Timestamp Absolute Timestamp Absolute Timestamp Absolute Timestamp Absolute Timestamp No Timestamp No Timestamp No Timestamp Absolute Timestamp Absolute Timestamp 10 Reading Value Time 9 Reading Value Time 8 Reading Value Time 7 Reading Value Time 6 Reading Value Time 5 Reading Value Time 4 Reading Value Time 3 Reading Value Time 2 Reading Value Time 1 Reading Value Time Standard Deviation Value No Time Average Value No Time Peak to Peak Value No Time XX Minimum Value Time XX Maximum Value Time Ga gt Buffer 6 7 Delta Timestamp Delta Timestamp Delta Timestamp Delta Timestamp Delta Timestamp Delta Timestamp Delta Timestamp Delta Timestamp Delta Timestamp Delta Timestamp Delta Timestamp Delta Timestamp Date Date Date Date Date Date Date Date Date Date No Date No Date No Date Date Date 6 8 Buffer Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Buffer sta
426. ng is inside all four limits Table 9 1 OUTPUT menu Menu item Setting Description DOUTPUT ON or OFF Enable disable digital outputs PULSE YES or NO Enable disable digital pulse output LSENSE HIGH or LOW Select logic sense BEEP NEVER INSIDE or OUTSIDE Set beeper for limits see Limits for details MASTR LATCH Y or N Enable disable master limit latch Perform the following steps to enable and configure digital outputs l 2 Press SHIFT and then OUTPUT If the digital output is already on DOUTPUT ON proceed to step 3 Otherwise press gt to move the cursor to the right press A or Y key to display ON and press ENTER Use the W key to display the master limit latch MASTR LATCH setting N no or Y yes If you want to retain the present master limit setting proceed to step 5 Otherwise press p gt to move the cursor to the right press A or W key to display Y or N and press ENTER Use the Y key to display the present logic sense LSENSE setting HIGH or LOW If you want to retain the present logic sense setting proceed to step 7 Otherwise press gt to move the cursor to the right press A or W key to display HIGH or LOW and press ENTER Use the w key to display the present PULSE mode setting NO or YES To retain the present pulse mode setting press ENTER Otherwise press p gt to move the cursor to the right press A or W key to display NO or
427. ngs Calculate mean CALC2 FORM MEAN Select mean calculation CALC2 STAT ON Enable mean calculation CALC2 IMM Perform calculation and request result 6 16 Buffer Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual scanning Scanning fundamentals Explains channel assignments slot channel programming format the difference between sequential and non sequential scans and the basic scan process Block diagrams known as trigger models are provided to help explain the STEP and SCAN operations Scan configuration Provides the step by step procedures to configure a simple scan or an advanced scan Covers other scan options including delay monitor auto configuration saving setups and auto scan Scan operation Provides the step by step procedures to perform a basic scan a manual external trigger scan and a monitor scan Remote programming scanning Provides the commands used for scan operation and includes a simple scanning programming example Also summarizes various aspects of remote scan operation Scanning examples Provides a couple of typical scan operation examples front panel and remote programming 7 2 Scanning Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Scanning fundamentals The Model 2700 can scan the channels of up to five installed Keithley switching modules Each scan channel can have its own unique setup Aspects of operation that can be uniquely set for each chann
428. ngs 3 Trigger Configuration Trigger and Return Readings TRAC DATA Return Stored Readings 1 In order to trigger and return multiple readings the buffer must first be cleared of readings that were stored by the TRACe command or front panel operation see Section 6 for details on buffer operation 2 INIT triggers the measurements and FETCh returns the readings Again sending FETCh without first sending INIT will return old readings 3 READ performs an INIT to trigger the measurements and then FETCh to return the reading s 4 Triggered readings are automatically stored in the buffer Statistics for buffer readings are also stored in the buffer CALC2 commands are used to calculate and return buffer statistics see Section 6 for details 1 38 Getting Started Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Figure 1 10 Exercise 6 Return a single reading continuous triggering Place 2700 in continuous Trigger Configuration SAMP COUN 1 INIT CONT ON FETCh DATA Return Readings OR OR trigger state l CALC DATA DATA FRESh Return result of MATH Return Basic Reading calculation 2 1 If a MATH function mX B percent or 1 X is enabled the result of the calculation will be returned If there is no MATH function enabled FETCh and CALC DATA will return the basic reading MATH functions are covered in Section 5 2 None of these read commands trigg
429. ngs Press RECALL gt use edit keys to display readings Press EXIT to CALC1 DATA exit recall mode 7 Open all channels Press OPEN gt display OPEN ALL gt Press OPEN ROUT OPEN ALL 1 Factory and RST defaults opens all channels select the DCV function and sets TRIG COUN to 1 The trigger count specifies the number of scans to be performed 2 ROUT SCAN LSEL INT enables the scan and INIT trigger the start of the scan Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Getting Started 1 35 Trigger and return readings remote programming There are several commands used to trigger and return readings The proper commands and sequence to use depend on the trigger state continuous or non continuous and what you are trying to accomplish Presented here are three fundamental command sequences that can be used to trigger and return readings These three command sequences exercises will accommodate most basic measurement scenarios Simply use the command sequence exercise that satisfies your needs e Exercise 4 Trigger and return a single reading e Exercise 5 Trigger and return multiple readings e Exercise 6 Return a single reading continuous triggering Details on the commands to trigger and return readings are provided in other sections of this manual For details refer to the following sections Section 3 See Trigger and retrieve readings in Table 3 7 Section 7 For scanni
430. nomial Temperature Equations F 5 50 C to 250 C 250 C to 1 200 C 1 064 C to 1 664 5 C 1 664 5 C to 1 768 1 C 226pV to 1 923pV to 11 361pV to 19 739pV to 1 923pV 13 228pV 19 739pV 21 103pV co 0 0 1 334 584 505 x10 8 199 599 416x10 3 406 177 836 x 104 c 1 889 1380x101 1 472644573x 10 1 553 962042x 10 7 023 729 171 c3 9 383 5290 10 1 844 024 844x 105 8 342 197 663 x 10 5 582 903 813 x 10 cz 1 3068619x107 4 031 129726 10 4 279 433 549 x 10 19 1 952 394 635 x 10 c4 2 270 358 0 x 10 6 249 428 360 x 10 1 191 577910 x 10 14 2 560 740 231 x 10 cs 3 5145659x 10 6 468 412 046 x 10 1 492 290091 x 10 19 cg 3 895 3900 x 10 16 4 458 750 426 x 107 c7 2 823 9471x101 1 994710 149 x 105 cg 1 260 728 1 x 10 5 313 401 790 x 10 30 co 3 135 3611x1076 6 481 976 217 x 10 cjo 3 318 776 9 x 103 Error 0 02 C to 0 02 C 0 005 C to 0 005 C 0 001 C to 0 0005 C 0 002 C to 0 001 C tog Co cE cE c3E aoe cE where tog is the calculated temperature in C E is the measured voltage in microvolts Table F 7 Type S inverse function polynomial 50 C to 250 C 235pV to 1 874pV 250 C to 1 200 C 1 874pV to 11 950pV 1 064 C to 1 664 5 C 1 664 5 C to 1 768 1 C 10 332pV to 17 536pV 17 536pV to 18 693 V Co Cy C9 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
431. nts from 2us to 333s can be made on the ACV ranges TEMP There is no range selection for temperature measurements Temperature measurements are performed on a single fixed range Depending on which type of sensor is being used the maximum temperature readings range from 200 C to 1820 C Appendix A Specifications lists the reading range for each sensor type Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Range Digits Rate Bandwidth and Filter 4 3 Manual ranging To change range press the RANGE A or W key The instrument changes one range per key press The selected range is displayed for one second Note that the manual range keys have no effect on temperature TEMP If the instrument displays the OVERFLOW message on a particular range select a higher range until an on range reading is displayed Use the lowest range possible without causing an overflow to assure best accuracy and resolution Auto ranging To enable auto range press the AUTO key The AUTO annunciator turns on when auto ranging is selected While auto ranging is enabled the instrument automatically selects the best range to measure the applied signal Auto ranging should not be used when optimum speed is required Note that the AUTO key has no effect on temperature TEMP Up ranging occurs at 120 of range The Model 2700 will down range when the reading is lt 10 of nominal range To disable auto ranging press AUTO This will leave t
432. o be set for the channel s by including the lt rang gt parameter If the resolution parameter lt res gt is included it will be ignored The present measurement function and the trigger model settings are not affected when the CONFigure command is sent with the lt clist gt parameter lt clist gt not included When the lt clist gt parameter is not included the CONFigure command configures the instrument for subsequent mea surements on the specified function Range and resolution can also be set for the specified function This command places the instrument in a one shot measurement mode You can then use the READ command to trigger a measurement and acquire a reading see READ When this command is sent without the lt clist gt parameter the Model 2700 will be configured as follows The function specified by this command is selected If specified range and or resolution are also set All controls related to the selected function are defaulted to the RST values e Continuous initiation is disabled INITiate CONTinuous OFF The control source of the Trigger Model is set to Immediate The count values of the Trigger Model are set to one The delay of the Trigger Model is set to zero The Model 2700 is placed in the idle state All math calculations are disabled Buffer operation is disabled A storage operation presently in process will be aborted e Autozero is enabled Progr
433. odule Get1 Reading None Demonstrates retrieving one reading from the instrument Limits Page 9 14 Demonstrates limits and digital outputs Linear Page 5 15 Ex 1 Demonstrates an mX b linear calculation MAFilter Page 4 22 Ex 1 Demonstrates moving filter use Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Table H 1 continued Visual Basic and CVI C examples KE2700 Instrument Driver Examples H 7 Name Manual Reference Brief Description MultiRange Page 4 5 Ex 1 amp 2 Demonstrates various range and function settings Ohmm Page 3 55 Ex 2 Demonstrates measuring offset compensated ohms in one shot trigger mode Percent Page 5 15 Ex 2 Demonstrates percent calculation PollSQR Page 11 9 Prog Ex Demonstrates serial poll operation and use of SRQs Prmr Page 11 20 Prog Ex Demonstrates reading the measurement condition and event registers RAFilter Page 4 22 Ex 2 Demonstrates use of repeating filter RateBandwidth Page 4 13 Ex 1 amp 2 Demonstrates rate and bandwidth settings Ratiol Page 5 20 Ex 1 Demonstrates ratio calculation Ratio2 Page 5 20 Ex 2 Demonstrates ratio and channel average functions ReadError Page 11 23 Prog Ex Demonstrates reading the error queue Queue Relative1 Page 5 7 Ex 1 Demonstrates acquiring and using a relative reference reading Relative2 Page 5 7 Ex 2 Demonstrates setting a relative referen
434. of math function v IMMediate Recalculate raw input data in buffer v IMMediate Perform calculation and read result Jv DATA Read math result of CALC 2 y 15 4 SCPI Reference Tables Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Table 15 1 continued CALCulate command summary Default Command Description parameter Ref SCPI CALCulate3 Subsystem to control CALC 3 limit test Sec 9 y MLIMit Path for master limit command LATChed lt b gt Enable or disable master limit latch OFF OUTPut Path for limit output commands STATe lt b gt Enable or disable limit outputs OFF STATe Query state of limit outputs PULSe Path to control limit output pulsing STATe lt b gt Enable or disable limit output pulsing OFF STATe Query state of limit output pulsing TIME lt NRf gt Set output pulse time in sec 0 001 to 0 002 99999 999 TIME Query output pulse time LSENse lt name gt Set logic sense of all limit lines AHIGh or AHIGh ALOW LSENse Query logic sense of limit lines LIMit1 Path to control LIMIT 1 test y UPPer Path to configure upper limit v DATA lt n gt Set upper limit 4294967295 to 1 Jv lt clist gt 4294967295 DATA lt clist gt Query upper limit Jv LOWer Path to configure lower limit v DATA lt n gt Set lower limit 4294967295 to 1 y lt clist gt 4294967295 DATA lt clist gt Query lower limit y STATe lt b gt E
435. of the IEEE 488 standards define an instrument s ability to support various interface functions and should not be confused with programming commands found elsewhere in this manual The interface function codes for the Model 2700 are listed in Table G 6 Table G 6 Model 2700 interface function codes Code Interface function SH1 Source Handshake capability AH1 Acceptor Handshake capability T5 Talker basic talker talk only serial poll unaddressed to talk on LAG L4 Listener basic listener unaddressed to listen on TAG SR1 Service Request capability RLI Remote Local capability PPO No Parallel Poll capability DC1 Device Clear capability DT1 Device Trigger capability CO No Controller capability El Open collector bus drivers TEO No Extended Talker capability LEO No Extended Listener capability The codes define Model 2700 capabilities as follows SH Source Handshake Function SH1 defines the ability of the instrument to initiate the transfer of message data over the data bus AH Acceptor Handshake Function AH1 defines the ability of the instrument to guarantee proper reception of message data transmitted over the data bus T Talker Function The ability of the instrument to send data over the bus to other devices is provided by the T function Instrument talker capabilities T5 exist only after the instrument has been addressed to talk L Listener Function The abilit
436. ogram message can be sent to the Model 2700 10 18 Remote Operations Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual RS 232 interface operation Sending and receiving data The RS 232 interface transfers data using eight data bits one stop bit and no parity Make sure the controller you connect to the multimeter also uses these settings You can break data transmissions by sending a C decimal 3 or X decimal 18 character string to the instrument This clears any pending operation and discards any pending output You can break an RS 232 transmission of buffer readings by pressing LOCAL and then EXIT The next command to send buffer data i e TRACe DATA will start at the beginning rather than where the transmission was halted Baud rate The baud rate is the rate at which the Model 2700 multimeter and the programming terminal communicate Choose one these available rates e 19 2k e 9600 4800 e 2400 e 1200 e 600 e 300 The factory selected baud rate is 4800 When you choose a baud rate make sure that the programming terminal that you are connecting to the Model 2700 can support the baud rate you selected Both the multimeter and the other device must be configured for the same baud rate Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Remote Operations 10 19 Signal handshaking flow control Signal handshaking between the controller and the instrument allows the two devices to communicate to each o
437. om the front panel are global That is the setting on one function also applies to the other functions For example if you set DCV for 3 digits all the other functions will also be set to 3 digits Using remote programming each function can have its own unique setup For example DCV can be set to 3 digits ACI can be set to 42 digits and DCI can be set to 5 digits Global settings from the front panel that can be set separately using remote programming include digits rate and filter configuration except on off which can be set separately NOTE Do not confuse function setups with scan channel setups For scan channels separate settings for digits rate and filter configuration can be set from either the front panel or remote programming See Section 7 for details on scan channel setup DCV input divider Using remote programming you can enable the DCV input divider for the 100mV 1V and 10V ranges When enabled the input resistance for these DCV ranges are reduced to 10MQ See Section 3 for details on the DCV input divider Multiple channel operation For normal system channel operation when one measurement channel is closed the previous measurement channel opens With the use of the ROUTe MULTiple commands you gain independent control of all switching module channels including the relays that connect the input signal to the DMM See Section 2 for details 10 4 Remote Operations Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User
438. on sequential scanning is only intended to be performed using remote programming Unexpected results may occur if a non sequential scan is run from the front panel There must be at least two channels in the scan list Creating a scan list that has only one channel will generate error 221 settings conflict Effects of function changes on the scan list NOTE To avoid unexpected problems with scans as explained after this note it is recommended that the scan list ROUT SCAN be created AFTER scan channel functions are selected SENS FUNC Changing from a 2 wire function to a 4 wire function will change the scan list This is demonstrated as follows The following commands show the proper sequence to configure a simple 20 channel DCV scan using a Model 7700 installed in slot 1 SENS FUNC VOLT 101 120 Set channels for DCV ROUT SCAN 101 120 Specify scan list When the scan is changed to a 4 wire function the scan list will change For example assume the above scan is changed to the Q4 function as follows SENS FUNC FRES 101 110 Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Scanning 7 31 For the 4 wire resistance function channels 101through 110 will be paired to channels 111 through 120 ROUT SCAN returns the following scan list 101 110 Now assume the scan is returned to DCV function as follows SENS FUNC VOLT 101 120 The above command sets channels 101 through 120 for DCV However it
439. on side ohms measurements using the 7701 module are provided in the manual packing list supplied with the module Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Basic DMM Operation 3 33 Temperature measurements The Model 2700 can measure temperature using thermocouples thermistors and 4 wire RTDs When deciding which temperature sensor to use keep in mind that the thermocouple is the most versatile the thermistor is the most sensitive and the 4 wire RTD is the most stable Thermocouples For thermocouples temperature measurement range depends on which type of thermocouple is being used Thermocouples that are supported include types J K N T E R S and B Type Range Resolution J 200 C to 760 C 0 001 C K 200 C to 1372 C 0 001 C N 200 C to 1300 C 0 001 C T 200 C to 400 C 0 001 C E 200 C to 1000 C 0 001 C R 0 C to 1768 C 0 1 C S 0 C to 1786 C 0 1 C B 350 C to 1820 C 0 1 C When two wires made up of dissimilar metals are joined together a voltage is generated The generated voltage is a function of temperature As temperature changes the voltage changes The thermocouple voltage equates to a temperature reading This is the basic operation principle of the thermocouple NOTE The equation to calculate thermocouple temperature is provided in Appendix F When you connect a thermocouple directly to the input of the Model 2700 at least one of those connections will b
440. onfiguration is summarized by the block diagram shown in Figure D 4 Refer to this block diagram for the following discussion Figure D 4 Data flow for remote operation TRAC CLE INIT CONT OFF SENSe TRIG COUN 1 Measurement Filter INIT Sample Rel and Ratio Buffer or Ch Avg CALC1 Math mX B Percent or 1 X CALC3 Limit Tests TRACe Data Store CALC2 Min Max Sdev Mean Pk Pk SENS 1 DATA LAT SENS 1 DATA FRESh CALC3 LIM1 FAIL CALC3 LIM2 FAIL CALC2 IMM CALC2 IMM FETCh CALC2 DATA READ MEAS TRACe DATA 2 CALC 1 DATA LAT 2 CALC 1 DATA FRESh D 8 Signal Processing Sequence and Data Flow Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual NOTE For the following discussion a data array is defined as the group of data elements that are included with each measured reading Each data array includes the reading as well as the channel reading number units timestamp and limits result see FORMat ELEMents lt item list gt page 14 6 for details For example assume the selected data elements to be returned by a read command include the reading units designator and reading number Now assume a IVDC input and the READ command is sent to trigger two readings and return the two data arrays The two returned data arrays would look like this 1 00000000E 00VDC 00000RDNG 1 00000000E 00VDC 00001RDNG Data Array 1 Data Array 2 SENSe and sample buffer
441. ons use the Q2 function to test continuity Connections NOTE When using the front panel inputs the INPUTS switch must be in the F out position For switching modules it must be in the R in position Front panel input When using the front panel input terminals connect the test leads to the INPUT HI and LO terminals as shown in Figure 3 19A Model 7700 switching module Connections for the Model 7700 switching module are shown in Figure 3 19B Since this is a 2 wire ohms measurement channels 1 through 20 can be used Figure 3 19 Continuity connections Model 2700 Input HI Resistance Under Test Resistance Under Test Note Source current flows from input high to input low B Model 7700 connections 3 48 Basic DMM Operation Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Continuity testing procedure NOTE Make sure the INPUTS switch is in the correct position To use front panel 4 inputs it must be in the F out position For switching modules it must be in the R in position Apply the resistance to be tested and if using a switching module close the appropriate channel Press SHIFT and then CONT to display the present threshold LEVEL Use lt gt A and to key in the desired level 1 to 1000Q and press ENTER If the measured circuit is below the set threshold level the instrument will beep and display the resistance readings If the measured circui
442. onversions Filter count into a memory stack These A D conversions must occur consecutively within a selected reading window Filter Window The readings in the stack are then averaged to yield a single filtered reading The stack can be filled in two ways Filter Type moving or repeating Details on digital filter characteristics are provided as follows 4 14 Range Digits Rate Bandwidth and Filter Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Filter type There are two digital filter types moving and repeating The moving average filter uses a first in first out stack where the newest reading conversion replaces the oldest An average of the stacked reading conversions yields a filtered reading After the specified number of reading conversions Filter count fill the stack the moving filter gives a new reading for every new conversion This process is depicted in Figure 4 2A The repeating filter takes a specified number of conversions averages them and yields a filtered reading It then flushes its stack and starts over This character is useful when scan ning readings for other channels are not averaged with the present channel The stack is then cleared and the process starts over see Figure 4 2B NOTE The moving filter cannot be used when scanning If a scan channel is set up to use the moving filter the filter will not turn on Scanning is covered in Section 7 Filter count The filter count specifies
443. operations explained in this section a switching module or pseudocard must be installed in the mainframe A switching module can be installed by the user however external connections to the switching module are only to be performed by qualified service personnel NOTE For inexperienced users it is recommended that DUT and external circuitry not be connected to switching modules This will allow you to exercise close open operations without the dangers associated with live test circuits WARNING To prevent electric shock that could result in injury or death NEVER handle a switching module that has power applied to it e Before installing or removing a switching module make sure the Model 2700 is turned off and disconnected from line power e If the switching module is already connected to DUT make sure power is removed from all external circuitry Module installation WARNING Slot covers must be installed on unused slots to prevent personal contact with high voltage circuits Perform the following steps to install a switching module into the Model 2700 mainframe 1 Turn the Model 2700 off and disconnect the power line cord and any other cable connected to the rear panel Position the Model 2700 so you are facing the rear panel Remove the slot cover plate from the desired mainframe slot Retain the plate and screws for future use With the top cover of the switching module facing up slide the module into an empty s
444. or CME Set bit indicates that a command error has occurred JTEEE 488 2 syntax error Instrument received a message that does not follow the defined syntax of the IEEE 488 2 standard Semantic error Instrument received a command that was misspelled or received an optional IEEE 488 2 command that was not implemented The instrument received a Group Execute Trigger GET inside a program message Bit B6 User Request URQ Set bit indicates that the LOCAL key on the Model 2700 front panel was pressed Bit B7 Power On PON Set bit indicates that the Model 2700 has been turned off and turned back on since the last time this register has been read 11 14 Status Structure Figure 11 5 Operation event status To Operation Summary Bit OSB of Status Byte Register Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Operation event register The bits of the Operation Event Register Figure 11 5 are described as follows Bits BO through B3 Not used Bit B4 Measuring Meas Set bit indicates that the instrument is performing a measurement Bit B5 Waiting for Trigger Trig Set bit indicates that the Model 2700 is in the trigger layer waiting for a trigger event to occur Bits B6 and B7 Not used Bits B8 Filter Settled Filt Set bit indicates that the filter has settled or the filter is disabled Bit B9 Not used Bit B10 Idle State Idle Set bit indicate
445. or each function Once a rel value is established for a measurement function the value is the same for all ranges For example if 50V is set as a rel value on the 100V range the rel is also SOV on the 1000V 10V 1V and 100mV ranges Therefore when you perform a zero correction by enabling REL the displayed offset becomes the reference value Subtracting the offset from the actual input zeroes the display as follows Actual Input Reference Displayed Reading A tel value can be as large as the highest range Selecting a range that cannot accommodate the rel value does not cause an overflow condition but it also does not increase the maximum allowable input for that range For example on the 10V range the Model 2700 still overflows for a 12V input NOTE The various instrument operations including Relative are performed on the input signal in a sequential manner See Signal processing sequence page D 2 for details It includes flowcharts showing where in the processing sequence that the Rel operation is performed Basic operation NOTE _ Ifusing switching module inputs make sure the front panel INPUTS switch is set to the REAR position in If using the front panel inputs the switch must be in the FRONT position out 1 Select the desired measurement function and an appropriate range setting 2 Apply the signal to be relayed to a switching channel input or to the front panel inputs NOTE For the Model 7700 swi
446. osed channel assumes the scan list setup With this feature you can inspect the channel setups of the scan or manually scan channels When a scan channel is disabled not in scan list it cannot be closed with auto channel configuration enabled As with normal operation when you use the lt q gt or CLOSE to close a channel or channel pair any other closed channels are first opened Perform the following steps to enable or disable auto channel configuration l 2 4 Press SHIFT and then SETUP Use the A or W key to display the auto configuration CH AUTOCFG setting N no or Y yes Press the p gt key to place the cursor on the present setting N or Y and press the A or key to change the setting Press ENTER to return to the normal measurement state NOTES Auto channel configuration cannot be enabled if there is a non scan channel presently closed For example assume the scan list consists of channels 105 through 110 and channel 101 a non scan channel is presently closed When you attempt to enable auto channel configuration from the front panel the message NOT IN SCAN is briefly displayed For remote operation error 221 settings conflict occurs With auto channel configuration enabled the qand p keys will not properly step through a non sequential scan list Therefore auto channel configuration should not be used for a non sequential scan list For information on non sequential scans see
447. owing command sequence configures channels 101 through 115 of the Model 7700 to use the repeat filter when they are scanned FUNC VOLT Select DCV function VOLT AVER TCON REP Select the repeating filter VOLT AVER COUN 20 101 115 Set to filter 20 readings VOLT AVER ON 101 115 Enable filter 5 Relative Math Ratio Channel Average and dB e Relative Explains how to null an offset or establish a baseline value Includes the commands for remote programming Math Covers the three basic math operations mX b percent and reciprocal 1 X Includes the commands for remote programming Ratio and channel average Explains how to use these calculations to display the ratio or average of two switching channels e dB Explains how to use remote programming to configure the instrument to perform DCV dB and ACV dB measurements WARNING When using these functions the display may indicate a non hazardous voltage but hazardous voltage may be present on the input connectors 5 2 Rel Math Ratio Channel Average dB Mode 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Relative The rel relative function can be used to null offsets or subtract a baseline reading from present and future readings When rel is enabled the instrument uses the present reading as a relative value Subsequent readings will be the difference between the actual input value and the rel value You can define a rel value f
448. p in mind that a simulated reference junction i e ice bath can instead be used for these thermocouple temperature measurements Figure 3 14 Thermocouple connections Model 2700 Copper wires Thermocouple Copper wire to thermocouple wire connection one of two Ice Bath A Simulated reference junction front panel inputs Model 7700 Switching Module Copper wires Thermocouple Copper wire to thermocouple wire connection one of two Ice Bath B Simulated reference junction Model 7700 Model 7700 Switching Module Model 7700 Switching Thermocouple Thermocouple D Channel average calculation internal reference junction Model 7700 3 38 Basic DMM Operation Table 3 2 Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Color codes thermocouple wires T C type Positive Negative T C type Positive Negative J U S White Red E U S Purple Red British Yellow Blue British Brown Blue DIN Red Blue DIN Red Black Japanese Red White Japanese Red White French Yellow Black French Yellow Blue K U S Yellow Red R U S Black Red British Brown Blue British White Blue DIN Red Green DIN Red White Japanese Red White Japanese Red White French Yellow Purple French Yellow Green NUS Orange Red S U S Black Red British British White Blue DIN DIN Red White Japanese Japanese Red White French Fre
449. pe PT100 D100 F100 PT100 lt clist gt PT3916 PT385 or USER TYPE lt clist gt Query FRTD type RZERo lt NRf gt Specify constant for USER type 0 to 100 lt clist gt 10000 RZERo lt clist gt Query rzero ALPHa lt NRf gt Specify constant for USER type 0 to 0 00385 lt clist gt 0 01 ALPHa lt clist gt Query alpha BETA lt NRf gt lt clist gt Specify constant for USER type 0 to 0 111 1 00 BETA lt clist gt Query beta DELTa lt NRf gt Specify constant for USER type 0 to 1 507 lt clist gt DELTa lt clist gt 5 00 Query delta 15 18 SCPI Reference Tables Table 15 5 continued SENSe command summary Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Default Command Description parameter Ref SCPI SENSe 1 FREQuency Path to configure frequency Sec 3 APERture lt p gt lt clist gt Sets gate time for frequency 1 0 Sec 4 measurements in seconds 0 01 to 1 0 APERture lt clist gt Query frequency gate time DIGits lt p gt lt clist gt Specify measurement resolution 4 to 7 7 Sec 4 DIGits lt clist gt Query resolution REFerence lt n gt lt clist gt Specify reference 0 to 1 5e7 0 Sec 5 STATe lt b gt lt clist gt Enable or disable reference OFF STATe lt clist gt Query state of reference ACQuire lt clist gt Use input signal as reference REFerence lt clist gt Query re
450. pedance limited sources NEVER connect switching cards directly to AC mains When connecting sources to switching cards install protective devices to limit fault current and voltage to the card Before operating an instrument make sure the line cord is connected to a properly grounded power receptacle Inspect the connecting cables test leads and jumpers for possible wear cracks or breaks before each use When installing equipment where access to the main power cord is restricted such as rack mounting a separate main input power disconnect device must be provided in close proximity to the equipment and within easy reach of the operator 5 03 For maximum safety do not touch the product test cables or any other instruments while power is applied to the circuit under test ALWAYS remove power from the entire test system and discharge any capacitors before connecting or disconnecting cables or jumpers installing or removing switching cards or making internal changes such as installing or removing jumpers Do not touch any object that could provide a current path to the common side of the circuit under test or power line earth ground Always make measurements with dry hands while standing on a dry insulated surface capable of withstanding the voltage being measured The instrument and accessories must be used in accordance with its specifications and operating instructions or the safety of the equipment may be impaired Do not exceed
451. plete Description After the OPC command is sent the Operation Complete bit bit BO of the Standard Event Status Register will set immediately after the last pending command is completed If the corresponding bit Bit BO in the Standard Event Enable Register and Bit 5 Event Summary Bit of the Service Request Enable Register is set the RQS MSS Request for Service Master Summary Status bit in the Status Byte Register will set When used with the immediate initiation command INITiate the OPC bit in the Standard Event Status Register will not set until the Model 2700 goes back into the idle state The INIT command operation is not considered finished until the Model 2700 goes back into the idle state See the description for WAI for more information on command execution Programing example The first group of commands program send the OPC command after the INITiate command and verifies that the OPC bit in the Standard Event Status Register does not set while the instrument continues to make measurements not in idle The second group of commands return the Model 2700 to the idle state and verifies that the OPC bit did set SYST PRES Returns 2700 to default setup INIT CONT OFF Disables continuous initiation ABORt Aborts operation Places 2700 in idle INIT IMM Initiate one trigger cycle OPC Sends the OPC command ESR Reads the Standard Event Status Register After addressing the Model 2700 to talk th
452. possible mechanical damage stack no more than three connectors on any one unit NOTE To minimize interference caused by electromagnetic radiation use only shielded IEEE 488 cables Available shielded cables from Keithley are Models 7007 1 and 7007 2 Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Remote Operations 10 7 To connect the Model 2700 to the IEEE 488 bus follow these steps 1 Line up the cable connector with the connector located on the rear panel The connector is designed so it will fit only one way Figure 10 3 shows the location of the IEEE 488 connector Tighten the screws securely making sure not to overtighten them 3 Connect any additional connectors from other instruments as required for your application 4 Make sure the other end of the cable is properly connected to the controller Most controllers are equipped with an IEEE 488 style connector but a few may require a different type of connecting cable See your controller s instruction manual for information about properly connecting to the IEEE 488 bus NOTE You can only have 15 devices connected to an IEEE 488 bus including the con troller The maximum cable length is either 20 meters or two meters multiplied by the number of devices whichever is less Not observing these limits may cause erratic bus operation Figure 10 3 IEEE 488 connector location Model 2700 WARNING no INTERNAL OPERATOR SERVICABLE PARTS SERVICE BY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL ONLY
453. pper connections as indicated in the table Table E 1 Material thermoelectric coefficients Material Thermoelectric potential Copper Copper 0 2uV C Copper Silver 0 3n V C Copper Gold 0 3nV C Copper Cadmium Tin 0 3pV C Copper Lead Tin 1 3 V C Copper Kovar 40u V C Copper Silicon 400u V C Copper Copper Oxide 1000yV C Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Measurement Considerations E 3 Thermoelectric generation Figure E 1 shows a representation of how thermal EMFs are generated The test leads are made of the A material while the source under test is the B material The temperatures between the junctions are shown as T and T To determine the thermal EMF generated the following relationship may be used Er Qag T T2 where Ep Generated thermal EMF Qag Thermoelectric coefficient of material A with respect to material B uV C T Temperature of B junction C or K T Temperature of A junction C or K In the unlikely event that the two junction temperatures are identical no thermal EMFs will be generated More often the two junction temperatures will differ and considerable thermal EMFs will be generated A typical test setup will probably have several copper to copper junctions As pointed out earlier each junction can have a thermoelectric coefficient as high as 0 2uV C Since the two materials will frequently have a several degree temperature differential it
454. program message Sending a response message After sending a query command the response message is placed in the Output Queue When the Model 2700 is then addressed to talk the response message is sent from the Output Queue to the computer Multiple response messages If you send more than one query command in the same program message see Multiple command messages page 10 15 the multiple response messages for all the queries are sent to the computer when the Model 2700 is addressed to talk The responses are sent in the order the query commands were sent and are separated by semicolons Items within the same query are separated by commas The following example shows the response message for a program message that contains four single item query commands 0 1 1 0 Response message terminator RMT Each response is terminated with an LF line feed and EOI end or identify The follow ing example shows how a multiple response message is terminated 0 1 1 0 lt RMT gt Message exchange protocol Two rules summarize the message exchange protocol Rule 1 You must always tell the Model 2700 what to send to the computer The following two steps must always be performed to send information from the instrument to the computer 1 Send the appropriate query command s in a program message 2 Address the Model 2700 to talk Rule 2 The complete response message must be received by the computer before another pr
455. propriate bits BO B2 B3 B4 B5 and B7 of the Status Byte Register These summary bits do not latch and their states 0 or 1 are solely dependent on the summary messages 0 or 1 For example if the Standard Event Register is read its register will clear As a result its summary message will reset to 0 which in turn will reset the ESB bit in the Status Byte Register The bits of the Status Byte Register are described as follows Bit BO Measurement Summary Bit MSB Set summary bit indicates that an enabled measurement event has occurred Bit B1 Not used Bit B2 Error Available EAV Set summary bit indicates that an error or status message is present in the Error Queue Bit B3 Questionable Summary Bit QSB Set summary bit indicates that an enabled questionable event has occurred Bit B4 Message Available MAV Set summary bit indicates that a response message is present in the Output Queue Bit BS Event Summary Bit ESB Set summary bit indicates that an enabled standard event has occurred Bit B6 Request Service RQS Master Summary Status MSS Set bit indicates that an enabled summary bit of the Status Byte Register is set Bit B7 Operation Summary OSB Set summary bit indicates that an enabled operation event has occurred Depending on how it is used Bit B6 of the Status Byte Register is either the Request for Service RQS bit or the Master Summary Status MSS bit When using the
456. quence performs the ratio calculation using primary channel 102 of the Model 7700 After READ is sent the Model 2700 must be addressed to talk to return the result of the calculation NOTE The following example can be run from the KE2700 Instrument Driver using the example named Ratiol in Table H 1 of Appendix H RST One shot measure mode FUNC VOLT Select DCV function ROUT CLOS 102 Close channel 102 RAT ON Enable the ratio calculation READ Read the result of the calculation Example 2 The following command sequence configures channels 103 and 105 for the ratio and channel average calculations When channel 103 is scanned the ratio calcula tion is based on DCV measurements of channels 103 and 113 When channel 105 is scanned the channel average calculation is based on TEMP measurements of channels 105 and 115 NOTE The following example can be run from the KE2700 Instrument Driver using the example named Ratio2 in Table H 1 of Appendix H FUNC VOLT 103 t Set 103 for DCV RAT ON 103 Set 103 for ratio on FUNC TEMP 105 Set 105 for TEMP CAV ON 105 Set 105 for channel average on Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Rel Math Ratio Channel Average dB 5 21 dB Expressing DC or AC voltage in dB makes it possible to compress a large range of mea surements into a much smaller scope The relationship between dB and voltage is defined by the followin
457. r channel pair will close NOTE While in the normal measurement state you can use the qand p keys to close channels In general each key press will open the presently closed channel and then close the next higher or lower channel 6 Observe the displayed reading 7 To measure other switching channels repeat steps 5 and 6 8 When finished press OPEN if there is a channel closed 3 44 Basic DMM Operation Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Frequency and period measurements The Model 2700 can make frequency measurements from 3Hz to 500kHz on voltage ranges of 100mV 1V 10V 100V and 750V Period 1 frequency measurements can be taken from 2us to 333ms on the same voltage ranges as the frequency Input impedance 1MQ I lt 100pF AC coupled The instrument uses the volts input to measure frequency The AC voltage range can be changed with the RANGE A and keys The signal voltage must be greater than 10 of the full scale range CAUTION The voltage limit is subject to the 8 x 10 VHz product Trigger level Frequency and period use a zero crossing trigger meaning that a count is taken when the frequency crosses the zero level The Model 2700 uses a reciprocal counting technique to measure frequency and period This method generates constant measurement resolution for any input frequency The multimeter s AC voltage measurement section performs input signal conditioning Gate time The gate time is th
458. r Switch System User s Manual Remote Operations 10 21 Table 10 2 RS 232 connector pinout Pin number Description 1 No connection 2 TXD transmit data 3 RXD receive data 4 No connection 5 GND signal ground 6 Not used 7 RTS ready to send 8 CTS clear to send 9 No connection ICTS and RTS are not used Table 10 3 provides pinout identification for the 9 pin DB 9 or 25 pin DB 25 serial port connector on the computer PC Table 10 3 PC serial port pinout DB 9 pin DB 25 pin Signal number number DCD data carrier detect 1 8 RXD receive data 2 3 TXD transmit data 3 2 DTR data terminal ready 4 20 GND signal ground 5 7 DSR data set ready 6 6 RTS request to send 7 4 CTS clear to send 8 5 RI ring indicator 9 22 Error messages See Appendix C for RS 232 error messages 800 through 808 10 22 Remote Operations Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual 11 Status Structure Overview Provides an operational overview of the status structure for the Model 2700 Clearing registers and queues Covers the actions that clear reset registers and queues Programming and reading registers Explains how to program enable registers and read any register in the status structure Status byte and service request SRQ Explains how to program the Status Byte to generate service requests SRQs Shows how to use the serial poll sequence to detect SRQs
459. r in Voltage measurements DCV and ACV page 3 7 Connections NOTE When using the front panel inputs the INPUTS switch must be in the F out position For switching modules it must be in the R in position WARNING To prevent electric shock never make or break connections while power is present in the test circuit Front panel inputs When using the front panel input terminals connect the test leads to the AMPS and INPUT LO terminals as shown in Figure 3 6 Figure 3 6 DCI and ACI connections using front panel inputs Model 2700 SENSE 7 Q4WIRE NE ao Hi Current Source LO INPUTS ECA M as Caution Maximum Input 3A DC or RMS 3 18 Basic DMM Operation Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Model 7700 switching module Connections for the Model 7700 switching module are shown in Figure 3 7 Note that only channels 21 and 22 can be used for current measurements Figure 3 7 DCI and ACI connections using Model 7700 switching module Current pan Tak Source ens Module Caution Maximum input 60VDC or 30V RMS 3A switched 60W 125VA maximum Amps measurement procedure NOTE Make sure the INPUTS switch is in the correct position To use front panel inputs it has to be in the F out position For switching modules it has to be in the R in position If a switching channel is presently closed displayed press OPEN to open it Select the amps measurement functio
460. r the last channel in the scan list is measured the Model 2700 outputs a trigger pulse If programmed to again scan the channels in the scan list the Model 2700 will wait at the control source for another trigger event After all the scan list channels are again measured the Model 2700 will output another trigger pulse After all programmed scans are completed the instrument returns to the idle state with the first channel in the scan list closed The individual components of the trigger models are explained as follows Idle When a scan is enabled STEP or SCAN annunciator on operation goes into the idle state and immediately drops down to the control source Note that after the last channel in the scan is measured operation returns to the idle state where measurements are halted and the first channel in the list is closed Control sources For front panel operation there are three control sources to manage the scan Immediate Timer and External Trigger Operation is held up at the selected control source until the appropriate trigger event is detected STEP operation When the trigger event is detected a channel is measured The scan pointer then loops back to the control source and waits for the next trigger event to occur SCAN operation When the trigger event is detected all the channels in the scan list are scanned The scan pointer then returns to the control source and waits for the next trigger event to be detect
461. ram 2 35 Screw terminal channel designations B 6 Simplified schematic 2 36 B 3 Switching module 2 34 3 7 Ratio and channel average calculations 3 10 Thermocouple connections B 8 Typical connections B 8 Voltage connections DC or AC B 10 Wire dressing B 7 Wiring procedure B 6 Monitor channel 7 18 Monitor scan example 7 37 Multiple channels Control commands 2 20 Controlling 2 17 Operation 2 16 Anomalies 2 22 mX b math function 5 9 Configuration 5 9 Rel 5 10 Setting units 5 14 Noise Johnson noise equation E 5 Lowest settings 4 8 Source resistance E 5 vs speed characteristics 4 8 NPLC setting 4 9 Offset compensated ohms 3 24 3 25 3 26 3 27 3 28 3 32 Enabling disabling 3 24 Performing measurements 3 25 OPEN key 2 11 2 19 Open thermocouple detector 3 41 OPEN ALL 2 11 2 19 OPEN MULTI 2 19 Operation event status 11 14 Options 1 3 Output trigger 7 10 8 6 Paired channels see 4 wire functions Percent math function 5 10 Configuration 5 10 Reference 5 14 Performance considerations 3 4 Plug in switching modules 1 3 1 7 Power module 1 14 1 15 Power switch 1 11 Power up 1 15 Sequence 1 17 Primary address Setting 10 4 Program message terminator PMT 10 16 Program messages 10 15 Programming syntax 10 11 Pseudocards 1 9 2 5 10 2 Questionable event status 11 17 Queues 11 2 11 22 Clearing 11 4 Error queue 11 22 Output queue 11 22 Quick start 1 1 Exercises 1 26 Rack mount kits 1 6 Radio f
462. ram message For example RATio lt b gt The lt b gt indicates a Boolean type parameter is required Therefore to enable channel ratio you must send the command with the ON or 1 parameter as follows RATio ON RATIO 1 Query commands This type of command requests queries the presently programmed status It is identified by the question mark at the end of the fundamental form of the command Most commands have a query form TRIGger TIMer Queries the timer interval Most commands that require a numeric parameter lt n gt can also use the DEFault MINimum and MAXimum parameters for the query form These query forms are used to determine the RST default value and the upper and lower limits for the fundamental command Examples are TRIGger TIMer DEFault Queries the RST default value TRIGger TIMer MINimum Queries the lowest allowable value TRIGger TIMer MAXimum Queries the largest allowable value Case sensitivity Common commands and SCPI commands are not case sensitive You can use upper or lower case and any case combination Examples RST rst DATA data SYSTem PRESet _ system preset NOTE Using all upper case will result in slightly faster command response times 10 14 Remote Operations Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Long form and short form versions An SCPI command word can be sent in its long form or short form version The command subsystem tables in Section 15 provid
463. ramming example The following command sequence displays the text message TESTING DISP TEXT DATA TESTING Define text message DISP TEXT STAT ON Enable text message mode 1 20 Getting Started Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Defaults and user setups Model 2700 can be restored to one of two default setup configurations FACTory or RST or four user saved SAVO SAV1 SAV2 or SAV3 As shipped from the factory Model 2700 powers up to the factory FACT default settings NOTE Closed channels can be saved in a user setup SAVO SAVI SAV2 or SAV3 When the setup is restored those channels and only those channels will be closed FACT and RST defaults opens all channels The factory default setup provides continuous triggering while the RST default setup places the Model 2700 in the one shot trigger mode With one shot triggering a measurement is performed whenever the TRIG key is pressed or an initiate command is sent over the remote interface The factory and RST default settings are listed in Table 1 4 Setting differences Set Diff between the two default setups are indicated by checkmarks v For remote programming the SYSTem PRESet and RST commands are used to reset the instrument The RST command returns the instrument to the RST defaults and for the most part the SYSTem PRESet command returns the instrument to the factory default conditions The exceptions are explained as follows
464. rang gt lt res gt lt clist gt Measure Q2 MEASure FRESistance lt rang gt lt res gt lt clist gt Measure 94 MEASure FREQuency lt rang gt lt res gt lt clist gt Measure FREQ MEASure PERiod lt rang gt lt res gt lt clist gt Measure PERIOD MEASure TEMPerature lt clist gt Measure TEMP MEASure CONTinuity lt clist gt Measure CONT Parameters lt rang gt Range parameter for the specified function For example for DCYV range parameter value 10 selects the 10V range See the NOTES that follow Table 13 1 for additional information lt res gt 0 1 i e 100 0 V 3 digits 0 01 i e 10 00 V 3 digits 0 001 i e 1 000 V 3 digits 0 0001 i e 1 0000 V 41 digits 0 00001 i e 1 00000 V 5 digits 0 000001 i e 1 000000 V 6 digits The resolution of the lt res gt parameter value and the selected range sets the number of display digits As shown above with the 100V range selected and lt res gt 0 1 a 100V reading will be displayed as 100 0 V 3 digits The display will default to 3 2 digits when using parameter values that attempt to set the display below 3 digits For example a 10V reading using lt res gt 0 1 for the 10V range is displayed as 10 00 V not 10 0 V A command using parameter values that attempt to set the display above 7 2 digits is ignored and generates error 221 settings conflict error See the NOTES that follow Table 13 1
465. ration to close channels 201 and 225 you will connect the input at channel 201 to the DMM for measurement If you then use system channel operation to close channel 101 channel 125 will also close to connect the input at channel 101 to the DMM You now have two input channels 101 and 201 connected to DMM Input at the same time inviting all sorts of problems The above problem can be avoided by opening channels 201 and or 225 before closing channel 101 and 125 as demonstrated by the following sequence 1 Multiple channel operation Close channels 201 and 225 for connection to DMM 2 Multiple channel operation Open channels 201 and or 225 to disconnect from DMM 3 System channel operation Close system channel 101 to connect to DMM 2 18 Close Open Switching Module Channels Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual CLOSE key MULTI menu option The MULTI menu option for the CLOSE key can be used to close any individual channel in the mainframe Figure 2 6 Perform the following steps to close a channel NOTE Channels closed by the MULTI option of the CLOSE key are not displayed Use the VIEW option of the CARD menu to display closed channels see CARD menu page 2 29 1 Press the CLOSE key and then use the A or W key to display the CLOSE MULTT message 2 Press ENTER to display the prompt to close a channel CLOSE MLT XXX 3 Using lt P gt A and Y key in the three digit channel
466. rd IEC 60664 Most measurement control and data I O signals are Measurement Category I and must not be directly connected to mains voltage or to voltage sources with high transient over voltages Measurement Category II connections require protection for high transient over voltages often associated with local AC mains connections Assume all measurement control and data I O connections are for connection to Category I sources unless otherwise marked or described in the Manual Exercise extreme caution when a shock hazard is present Lethal voltage may be present on cable connector jacks or test fixtures The American National Standards Institute ANSI states that a shock hazard exists when voltage levels greater than 30V RMS 42 4V peak or 60VDC are present A good safety practice is to expect that hazardous voltage is present in any unknown circuit before measuring Operators of this product must be protected from electric shock at all times The responsible body must ensure that operators are prevented access and or insulated from every connection point In some cases connections must be exposed to potential human contact Product operators in these circumstances must be trained to protect themselves from the risk of electric shock If the circuit is capable of operating at or above 1000 volts no conductive part of the circuit may be exposed Do not connect switching cards directly to unlimited power circuits They are intended to be used with im
467. re lt n gt lt clist gt Set rate for DCI in secs lt n gt x to 1 Note 4 CURRent AC NPLCycles lt p gt lt clist gt Set rate for ACI in PLCs lt n gt 0 01 to x25 5 0 CURRent AC APERture lt p gt lt clist gt Set rate for ACI in secs lt n gt x to 1 Note 4 RESistance NPLCycles lt p gt lt clist gt Set rate for Q2 in PLCs lt n gt 0 01 to x2 5 0 RESistance APERture lt n gt lt clist gt Set rate for Q2 in secs lt n gt x to 17 Note 4 FRESistance NPLCycles lt p gt lt clist gt Set rate for Q4 in PLCs lt n gt 0 01 to x 5 0 FRESistance APERture lt n gt lt clist gt Set rate for Q4 in secs lt n gt x to 17 Note 4 TEMPerature NPLCycles lt n gt lt clist gt Set rate for TEMP in PLCs lt n gt 0 01 to x 15 0 TEMPerature APERture lt n gt lt clist gt Set rate for TEMP in secs lt n gt x to 1 Note 4 Bandwidth commands SENSe 1 Optional root command VOLTage AC DETector BANDwidth Set AC bandwidth for ACV in Hertz lt NRf gt 30 lt NRf gt lt clist gt 3 to 3e5 CURRent AC DETector BANDwidth Set AC bandwidth for ACI in Hertz 30 lt NRf gt lt clist gt lt NRf gt 3 to 3e5 Channel list parameter lt clist gt SCH where S Mainframe slot number 1 or 2 CH Switching module channel number must be 2 digits Examples 101 Slot 1 Channel 1 101 203 Slot 1 Channel 1 and Slot 2
468. re 32 reading strings Buffer elements include reading only e Triggering Immediate control source H 10 KE2700 Instrument Driver Examples Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Table H 1 continued Visual Basic and CVI C examples Name Manual Reference Brief Description Simple6 None Use Case 6 Scan 160 channels using 7703 module see NOTE e Type K thermocouple TC temperature measurements e Reference junction Simulated e Measurement speed rate 0 01 plc e Filter Disabled no filtering e Buffer Store 160 reading strings Buffer elements include reading only Triggering Bus control source NOTE When using a module that has a built in cold junction use the Internal reference junction Keep in mind that the buffer will have to be modified to accommodate the number of scanned channels Modules that have cold junction include 7700 and 7706 modules 20 available TC channels 7708 module 40 available TC channels Simple7 None Use Case 7 Ten 40 channel scans using 7702 module e Channel uses an external reference junction e Measurement speed rate 1 plc e Filter Repeat 25 readings e Channels 2 through 40 are connected to type K thermocouples e Measurement speed rate 1 ple e Filter Disabled no filtering Buffer Store 400 reading strings Buffer elements include reading only e Trigge
469. re are two types of filters moving and repeating A filter stack is used to temporarily store the specified number of readings to be averaged In general for the moving filter each measurement process adds a reading to the stack oldest reading discarded and then averages the stack to yield a filtered reading For the repeating filter each measurement process fills the stack with new readings all previous readings discarded and then averages the stack to yield a filtered reading NOTE For details on filter operation see Filter page 4 13 Output trigger pulse VMC An output trigger pulse from the Model 2700 can be used to trigger an external instrument to perform an operation In general a trigger pulse is output at this point in flow chart for each processed reading An exception is the SCAN function for scanning For the SCAN function an output trigger is not output until after the specified number of channels as set by the sample counter are scanned NOTE For details on scan operation see Trigger models page 7 4 Rel Next in the signal processing sequence is the Rel operation Rel is used to null offsets or subtract a baseline rel value from the reading With Rel enabled the Rel ed reading is calculated as shown in Figure D 2 NOTE For details on Rel operation see Relative page 5 2 Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Signal Processing Sequence and Data Flow D 5 Math Next i
470. re measurement range is 200 C to 630 C 0 01 C resolution RTD types that are supported include D100 F100 PT385 and PT3916 A USER type is available to modify RTD parameters such as the resistance at 0 C The USER type can be enabled from the front panel but the settings can only be changed using remote programming The RTD has a metal construction typically platinum The resistance of the RTD changes with change s in temperature The Model 2700 measures the resistance and calculates the temperature reading When using default RTD parameters the resistance of the RTD will be 100Q at 0 C Of all the temperature transducers the RTD exhibits the most stability and linearity The Model 2700 performs the 4 wire measurement using offset compensated ohms This provides the most accurate way to measure the low resistance of the RTD NOTE The equations used by the Model 2700 to calculate the temperature vs resistance readings listed in the RTD reference tables are provided in Appendix F Connections NOTE When using the front panel inputs the INPUTS switch must be in the F out position For switching modules it must be in the R in position Thermocouple connections Connections for thermocouples are shown in Figure 3 14 Thermocouples are color coded to identify the positive and negative leads Table 3 2 Note that the negative lead for U S type T Cs is red For front panel inputs you need to use a
471. readable form for the operator Most programming languages easily convert ASCII mantissa and exponent to other formats However some speed is compromised to accommodate the conversion Figure 14 1 shows an example ASCII string that includes all the data elements See FORMat ELEMents lt item list gt page 14 6 for information on the data elements Figure 14 1 also shows the byte order of the data string Data elements not specified by the ELEMents command are simply not included in the string Figure 14 1 ASCII data format Channel Units Number 0 C 1 23456789E 03VDC 11 664SECS 236RDNG 000 OOOOLIMITS Reading Timestamp Reading Limits Number Code Units VDC DC Volts HZ Frequency VAC AC Volts SECS Period ADC DC Current C Temperature in C AAC AC Current F Temperature in F OHM 2 Wire Resistance or Continuity K Temperature in K OHM4W 4 Wire Resistance An overflow reading is displayed as 9 9E37 with no limits 14 4 FORMat and Misc SYSTem Commands Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual IEEE 754 binary formats Binary data from the instrument can be returned using the single precision format or the double precision format The data can be returned in the normal byte order or the swapped reversed byte order See FORMat BORDer lt name gt for details on byte order A returned data string from the instrument is made of one or more data elements Typical selected data ele
472. reading when the selected number of samples is within the selected tolerance Sets upper and lower limits for readings Enables disables limits Configures and enables filter for selected function Selects and enable disables monitor channel Disables channel for a scan must be in scan channel setup mode Identifies switching modules installed in mainframe Set up switching modules that require configuration View closed channels and channel settings for switching modules that require configuration 1 12 Getting Started Bottom Row Unshifted OPEN CLOSE STEP SCAN DIGITS RATE EXIT ENTER Shifted SAVE SETUP CONFIG HALT TEST LSYNC GPIB RS 232 3 Range keys Aandy AUTO Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Opens closed channel Closes specified channel Steps through channels sends a trigger after each channel Scans through channels sends a trigger after last channel Sets display resolution for all functions Sets measurement speed fast medium or slow for all functions Cancels selection moves back to measurement display Accepts selection moves to next choice or back to measurement display Saves up to four instrument setups for future recall and selects power on setup Restores a default setup factory or RST or a saved setup Enables disables buffer auto clear auto scan and auto channel configuration Sets timestamp date and time Displays serial number of Model 2700 Select
473. remains paired to channel 102 However if you select channel 101 and press DCV channel 102 will change to DCV and not be paired to channel 112 anymore Therefore all 20 channels will assume the DCV setup 5 Setting changes When you press a key to change a setting i e range rel digits etc only the selected scan channel is affected Model 7700 example If you make a range change for channel 103 the range settings for other channels are not affected 7 16 Scanning Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Advanced scan setup procedure Step 1 Select the advanced scan configuration menu 1 Press SHIFT and then CONFIG to access the scan setup menu 2 Press the A or W key to display INT ADVANCED and press ENTER Step 2 Edit scan channels 1 Use the lt or gt key to select channel 101 SETUP V 101 factory default NOTE The CLOSE key can instead be used to select a scan channel to be edited Press CLOSE use the A or keys to display the channel and then press ENTER 2 You can disable the channel or use it in the scan Perform step a or step b a If you do not want to use the channel press SHIFT and then CH OFF to disable the channel Available channels that follow will also disable Note however that channels for slot 2 are not affected b If you want the channel in the scan you can either use the presently selected function or select a valid measurement function When you press a function key i e
474. rence from such noise sources as line frequency and RF fields can seriously corrupt measurements rendering experimental data virtually useless In order to minimize noise a closed metal shield surrounding the source may be necessary as shown in the example of Figure E 4 This shield should be connected to input LO in most cases although better noise performance may result with the shield connected to chassis ground in some situations Figure E 4 Shielding example 2700 Noise Shield Safety Shield Connect noise shield to LO Connect safety shield to a known safety earth ground using 18 AWG wire or higher WARNING Safety shield required when floating noise shield gt 30V rms above chassis ground Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Measurement Considerations E 9 Meter loading Loading of the voltage source by the Model 2700 becomes a consideration for high source resistance values As the source resistance increases the error caused by meter loading increases Figure E 5 shows the method used to determine the percent error due to meter loading The voltage source Vg has a source resistance Rg while the input resistance of the Model 2700 is Ry and the voltage measured by the nanovoltmeter is Vy Figure E 5 Meter loading Rs Vs Vm Source Measured Voltage Voltage The voltage actually measured by the meter is attenuated by the voltage divider action of Rg and Ry and it ca
475. requency interference E 6 Range 4 2 Auto ranging 4 3 4 5 Commands 4 4 Keys 1 12 Manual ranging 4 3 4 5 Measurement 4 2 Programming examples 4 5 Remote programming 4 4 Scanning 4 3 Range Digits Rate Bandwidth and Filter 4 1 Rate 4 8 Aperture 4 12 Bandwidth 4 12 Bandwidth conflict error 4 12 Commands 4 10 Programming examples 4 13 Remote programming 4 10 Scanning 4 10 Settings 4 9 RATE key 4 8 Ratio 5 16 Basic operation 5 17 Channel pairing 5 16 Commands 5 19 DCV 5 17 Delay 5 19 Enabling disabling 5 19 Programming examples 5 20 Remote programming 5 19 Scanning 5 18 Ratio and channel average delay 5 19 Reading count 7 9 Readings Maximum 4 2 Recall while storing 6 12 Recalling 6 6 Storing 6 6 Rear panel Summary 1 14 Reciprocal 1 X math function 5 11 Configuration 5 11 Reference junctions 3 34 External 3 35 Internal 3 34 Simulated 3 34 Registers Bit descriptions 11 12 Clearing 11 4 Condition 11 18 Event 11 18 Event enable 11 19 Measurement event 11 15 Operation event 11 14 Programming enable registers 11 5 Questionable event 11 17 Reading 11 6 Service request enable 11 8 Standard event 11 12 Status byte and SRQ see Status byte and service request SRQ Status byte register 11 7 Status register sets 11 2 11 12 Relative 5 2 Basic operation 5 2 commands 5 4 Pressing REL using rel commands 5 6 Programming examples 5 7 Remote programming 5 4 Scanning 5 3 Setting rel values 5 6 Relative Mat
476. res enabled If a feature is not enabled the reading simply falls through to the next enabled feature or to the display Figure D 2 Signal processing using instrument features Input Signal Signal Conditioning A D Conversion Process OComp reading AV Al gt Output trigger pulse VMC Rel Rel ed reading Reading Rel value Y mX b Math mX b Percent or Reciprocal Percent X Reference 100 Reference Reciprocal 1 X Limits Display Reading D 4 Signal Processing Sequence and Data Flow Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual OComp offset compensated ohms The Model 2700 performs a normal ohms measurement by sourcing a known current I measuring the voltage V and then calculating the resistance R V D Offset compensated ohms cancels the effects of thermal EMFs which can adversely affect low resistance measurements With OCOMP enabled the Model 2700 performs one normal resistance measurement and then loops back to perform a second resistance measurement with the internal current source set to its lowest level The offset compensated ohms reading is then calculated as shown in Figure D 2 NOTE For details on OCOMP measurements see Offset compensated ohms page 3 24 Filter The filter is used to stabilize noisy readings With the filter enabled the specified number of readings are averaged to yield a single filtered reading The
477. ress Group These listen commands are derived from an instrument s primary address and are used to address devices to listen The actual command byte is obtained by ORing the primary address with 20 TAG Talk Address Group The talk commands are derived from the primary address by ORing the address with 40 Talk commands are used to address devices to talk SCG Secondary Command Group Commands in this group provide additional addressing capabilities Many devices including the Model 2700 do not use these commands Unaddress commands The two unaddress commands are used by the controller to remove any talkers or listeners from the bus ATN is true when these commands are asserted UNL Unlisten Listeners are placed in the listener idle state by the UNL command UNT Untalk Any previously commanded talkers will be placed in the talker idle state by the UNT command G 10 IEEE 488 Bus Overview Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Common commands Common commands are commands that are common to all devices on the bus These commands are designated and defined by the IEEE 488 2 standard Generally these commands are sent as one or more ASCII characters that tell the device to perform a common operation such as reset The IEEE 488 bus treats these commands as data in that ATN is false when the commands are transmitted SCPI commands SCPI commands are commands that are particular to each devic
478. ressing the RECALL key The readings are positioned at the left side of the display while the buffer location number reading number and timestamps are positioned at the right side Perform the following steps to view stored readings and buffer statistics 1 Press RECALL The BUFFER annunciator indicates that stored readings are being displayed The double arrow annunciator indicates that more data can be viewed with the lt gt A and w keys 2 As shown in Figure 6 1 and Figure 6 2 use the lt gt A and W keys to navigate through the reading numbers reading values statistics and timestamps For any of the buffer statistics standard deviation average peak to peak minimum and maximum the STAT annunciator is on NOTE The longer you hold in the A or key the faster you will scroll through the buffer After a while scrolling speed will increase by incrementing or decrementing the buffer reading number by 100 and then finally by 500 When you get close to the desired reading number release the A or W key Again press and hold in the A or key to scroll one reading at a time Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Figure 6 1 Recalling buffer data relative timestamp RANGE RANGE Figure 6 2 RDG RDG RDG RDG RDG RDG RDG RDG RDG RDG STD Average Peak to Peak Min Max OAAZA A 2 A ZL TZ 26006660666 ae j SNWARUDNDAOS Reading Value Reading Value Readi
479. ring Bus control source Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Table H 1 continued Visual Basic and CVI C examples KE2700 Instrument Driver Examples H 11 Name Manual Reference Brief Description Simple8 None Use Case 8 7706 module in slot 1 and 7702 module in slot 2 e 7706 module e Output analog output values to analog output channels e Output digital output values to digital output channels e 7702 module e Scan 120 DCV channels e Measurement speed rate 1 plc Filter Disabled no filtering e Buffer Store 320 reading strings Buffer elements include reading only e Triggering Bus control source trigger delay 0 125 seconds SOPC Page 12 4 Demonstrates operation complete query OPC SrSetup Page 12 6 Demonstrates saving and recalling user setup TCalibration 7706 Demonstrates 7706 temperature calibration TCTemperature None Demonstrates temperature measurement Totalizer 7706 Demonstrates reading the 7706 totalizer TrigReadings Page 8 19 Demonstrates instrument triggering VoltdB1 Page 5 23 Ex 1 Demonstrates DCV dB measurement with 1V OdB level VoltdB2 Page 5 23 Ex 2 Demonstrates ACV dB measurement with 10V OdB level H 12 KE2700 Instrument Driver Examples Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual LabVIEW examples Table H 2 lists the LabVIEW examples and Use Cases that are provided with the KE2700 Instrumen
480. ror queue 11 23 Rel programming examples 5 7 Scanning 7 33 Scanning programming example 7 32 Serial poll programming example 11 10 Set MSS B6 when error occurs 11 9 Sytem channel remote programming example 2 13 Triggering programming example 8 19 External triggering 8 8 Example 8 10 With BNC connections 8 13 Features Model 2700 1 6 Filter 4 13 RST disables filter 4 18 RST disables filter state to off 4 21 Characteristics 4 13 Commands 4 20 Control and configuration 4 18 Count 4 14 Example 4 16 Filter channel 4 19 Moving and repeating 4 15 4 17 Programming examples 4 22 Remote programming 4 20 Scanning 4 18 4 19 Type 4 14 Window 4 16 FILTER key 4 18 FORMat commands 14 2 FORMat BORDer lt name gt 14 7 FORMat ELEMents lt item list gt 14 6 FORMat DATA lt type gt L lt length gt 14 2 Summary 15 6 FREQ and PERIOD connections for front panel inputs 3 45 Frequency and period measurements 3 44 Connections 3 45 Front panel input 3 45 Model 7700 switching module 3 45 Gate time 3 44 Procedure 3 46 Trigger level 3 44 Front panel Buffer 6 2 Inputs 1 13 1 27 Summary 1 10 Trigger model 8 2 Fuse Ratings 1 17 Replacing 1 16 Gate time 3 44 General bus commands 10 8 DCL device clear 10 9 GET group execute trigger 10 9 GTL go to local 10 9 IFC interface clear 10 8 LLO local lockout 10 9 REN remote enable 10 8 SDC selective device clear 10 9 SPE SPD serial polling 10 9 General informat
481. rrent is generated by a 0 7pA source in parallel with a 1OMQ reference resistor 3 26 Basic DMM Operation Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Constant current source method For the 100Q to IMQ ranges the Model 2700 uses the constant current method to measure resistance The Model 2700 sources a constant current Isour to the DUT and measures the voltage Vmeas Resistance Rpuyr is then calculated and displayed using the known current and measured voltage Rpyt Vuras Isour The constant current method is shown in Figure 3 10 The test current sourced to the DUT depends on the selected measurement range For example for the 100Q range the test current is ImA Since the voltmeter of the Model 2700 has very high input impedance gt 10GQ virtually all the test current 1mA flows through the DUT For DUT lt 1kQ 4 wire ohms measurements should be used as shown in Figure 3 10B The voltage is measured at the DUT This eliminates IR drop in the test leads which could be significant when measuring low ohm DUT Figure 3 10 Constant current method to measure ohms 1009 to 1MQ ranges A 2 wire ohms Q2 measurements 100Q through 1MQ ranges DUT ioe V MEAS SOUR i Input Hi DUT Rout SOUR V MEAS i Input Lo Sense Lo Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Ratiometric method Basic DMM Operation 3 27 For the 1OMQ and 100MQ ranges the ratiometric method is
482. rs that combine high electrical insulating properties with high thermal conductivity may be used Some examples of these materials include hard anodized aluminum sapphire and diamond Nulling residual thermal offsets Even if all reasonable precautions are taken some residual thermal offsets may still be present These offsets can be minimized by using the Model 2700 Relative feature to null them out To do so place the instrument on the 3mV range and short the end of the connecting cable nearest the measured source first disconnect the cable from the source to avoid shorting out the source After allowing the reading to settle press the front panel REL button to null the offset Select the appropriate range and make your measurement as usual Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Measurement Considerations E 5 Source resistance noise Noise present in the source resistance is often the limiting factor in the ultimate resolution and accuracy of Model 2700 measurements The following paragraphs discuss the generation of Johnson noise as well as ways to minimize such noise Johnson noise equation The amount of noise present in a given resistance is defined by the Johnson noise equation as follows Epos V4kTRF where Epys rms value of the noise voltage k Boltzmann s constant 1 38 x 10 73J K T Temperature K R Source resistance ohms F Noise bandwidth Hz At a room temperature of 293K 20 C t
483. rument features D 3 Signal processing using Ratio or Ch Avg oo eee eee D 6 Data flow remote Operation ceeeeseeceeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeneeeteeenees D 7 SENSe and sample buffer eee eeeeeeeseseeceneeeeeeeeseeeenees D 8 SENS 1 DATA LATest ooo eeeeeseeeeeeeeneeseeeeeneeaeees D 9 SENS 1 DATA FRESh 0 0 eeeeeeeecseeeeceeeneeeeeeeaeeaeees D 9 FETCH sinnini eee eee D 10 READ reaut hs ees beotua Pes exeet eA EARE D 10 MEAS URC ess tecccves cess cedeedaseeciiceasstage ida ea D 10 CALC 1 DATA LATest oo eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeaees D 10 CALC 1 DATA FRESH 0 ec eeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeserreneeeeeeres D 10 CALCI LIM LFA 5 Sciessyeeszeveterectels ia aas D 11 CALCI LIM2 FAIL ninasimon eii D 11 TRACEDATAY sieer e oaser aR r r aa aE ETETEA D 11 CALC2IMM neiii ahaha ee Siac D 12 CALC2IMM sipiris hs sees pta teed o EAE RARA D 12 CALC2DATA T visesccpenncuie enaisi eoii eei iia D 12 Continuous measurement mode sseessseseeeesesrrseerrsrereees D 12 Scanning senpasia i E ESEE EEEE Eia D 13 Measurement Considerations Measurement considerations esessesesseesesesreetesrerrsrerrsrerrsresreresee E 2 Thermoelectric potentials sesesseeseseeseeseseersrerrsessrerrsreresre E 2 Thermoelectric generation sesseseseeseerseersreresrssrerrsreresrs E 3 Minimizing thermal EMFS sssesssseeseseeseesesrerrsreresrsrreresreresre E 4 SOULCE resistance NOISE oo eee eee eseeseeeeeseeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeenees E 5 Ma
484. rval the less scanning throughput is reduced However more relay counts may be lost in the event of a power failure NOTE Ifthe Model 2700 is turned off before the updated count is written to EEPROM the relay counts will be lost It is good practice to add the ROUT CLOS COUN lt clist gt command at the end of a program to manually update the count To set the count update interval send this command ROUTe CLOSe COUNt INTerval lt NRf gt where lt NRf gt 10 to 1440 minutes For example to set the interval to 30 minutes send this command ROUT CLOS COUN INT 30 2 34 Close Open Switching Module Channels Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Model 7700 switching module NOTE Connection and wiring procedures for the Model 7700 are to be performed by qualified service personnel This information is provided in Appendix B Model 7700 Connection Guide Switching module capabilities Channels 1 through 20 The Model 7700 can multiplex one of 20 2 pole signals or one of 10 4 pole signals into the input of the Model 2700 Channels 21 and 22 The Model 7700 can multiplex one of two 2 pole current signals into the input of the Model 2700 CAUTION To prevent damage to the Model 7700 switching module do not exceed these maximum signal levels Channels 1 20 300VDC or 300V RMS 425V peak for AC waveforms 1A switched 60W 125VA Channels 21 22 60VDC or 30V RMS 3A switched 60W 125VA NOTE System c
485. s e Inconsistent readings between ranges e Sudden shifts in reading To minimize pick up keep the voltage source and the Model 2700 away from strong AC magnetic sources The voltage induced due to magnetic flux is proportional to the area of the loop formed by the input leads Therefore minimize the loop area of the input leads and connect each signal at only one point Thermal EMFs Thermal EMFs thermoelectric potentials are generated by temperature differences between the junctions of dissimilar metals These can be large compared to the signal that the Model 2700 can measure Thermal EMFs can cause the following conditions Instability or zero offset is much higher than expected The reading is sensitive to and responds to temperature changes This effect can be demonstrated by touching the circuit by placing a heat source near the circuit or by a regular pattern of instability corresponding to changes in sunlight or the activation of heating and air conditioning systems To minimize the drift caused by thermal EMFs use copper leads to connect the circuit to the Model 2700 For front panel inputs a banana plug generates a few microvolts A clean copper conductor such as 10 bus wire is ideal for this application For switching modules use 20 AWG copper wire to make connections The leads to the Model 2700 may be shielded or unshielded as necessary Refer to Shielding page E 8 3 16 Basic DMM Operation Model
486. s 124 and 125 and the 2 pole 4 pole channel 123 Figure 2 2 shows the backplane isolation channels and the 2 pole 4 pole channel for the Model 7700 Perform the following steps to open all channels 1 Press the OPEN key to display OPEN ALL 2 Press OPEN a second time or press ENTER to open all channels NOTE Opening the system channel disables Ratio or Channel Average Ratio and Channel Average operation are covered in Section 5 Figure 2 5 System channel operation opening all channels in mainframe Press OPEN key Display ALL option and press OPEN again OPEN ALL 2 12 Close Open Switching Module Channels Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Remote programming system channel control commands The commands to close and open the system channel are listed in Table 2 1 When a system channel reading is returned the system channel number will be included in the data string if the CHANnel data element is selected The FORMat ELEMents command is used to specify the data elements to be included in the data string see FORMat commands in Section 14 Table 2 1 System channel control commands Commands Description Ref ROUTe CLOSe lt clist gt Specify one measurement channel to close a ROUTe CLOSe STATe lt clist gt Query closed channels in specified list b 1 closed ROUTe CLOSe Returns a lt clist gt of closed measurement c channels ROUTe OPEN ALL Open all channels and d
487. s An isolated channel includes 2 4 pole and backplane relays STARt Request the first isolated channel 0 no isolated channels END Request the last isolated channel 0 no isolated channels AOUTput Path to query analog output channels STARt Request highest numbered analog output channel 0 analog output not supported END Request lowest numbered analog output channel 0 analog output not supported DOUTput Path to query digital output channels STARt Request lowest numbered digital output channel 0 digital output not supported END Request highest numbered digital output channel 0 digital output not supported TCHannel Query the totalizer channel DINPut Path to query digital input channels STARt Request lowest numbered digital input port O digital input not supported END Request highest numbered digital output channel 0 digital input not supported SNOpen Query whether card is single no open type i e 7711 1 yes 0 no Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual SCPI Reference Tables 15 23 Table 15 7 continued SYSTem command summary Default Command Description parameter Ref SCPI SYSTem CARDX BANKs For single no open card query number of banks If not single no open type error 221 settings conflict results SWOpen Query whether card is single with open type i e 7711 1 yes 0 no B
488. s Power up and CLS Clears all bits of the registers STATus PRESet No effect Enable Registers Power up and STATus PRESet Clears all bits of the registers CLS No effect 1 2 3 Error Queue Power up and CLS Clears the Error Queue STATus PRESet No effect Enable Disable Error Queue Messages Power up Clears list of messages CLS and STATus PRESet No effect Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual SCPI Reference Tables 15 21 Table 15 7 SYSTem command summary Default Command Description parameter Ref SCPI SYSTem PRESet Return to SYST PRES defaults Sec 14 Vo POSetup lt name gt Select power on setup RST PRESet SAVO Sec 1 SAV1 SAV2 or SAV3 POSetup Query power on setup FRS Witch Query INPUTS switch O rear 1 front Seel BEEPer Path to control beeper Sec 14 STATe lt b gt Enable or disable beeper ON v STATe Query state of beeper v KCLick lt b gt Turn the keyclick on off ON Sec 1 KCLick Query the keyclick status KEY lt NRf gt Simulate key press 1 to 31 see Figure 14 3 Sec 14 v KEY Query the last pressed key v AZERo Path to set up autozero Sec 3 STATe lt b gt Enable or disable autozero ON STATe Query autozero LSYNc Path to control line synchronization Sec 3 STATe lt b gt Enable or disable line sync OFF STATe Query state of line sync LFRequency Query power line frequency Sec 1 FRESistanc
489. s The Model 2700 is shipped from the factory with slot covers installed Please note additional slot covers can be requested from Keithley Instruments WARNING Slot covers must be installed on unused slots to prevent personal contact with high voltage circuits Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Getting Started 1 15 Power up Line power connection Follow the procedure below to connect the Model 2700 to line power and turn on the instrument 1 Check to see that the line voltage indicated in the window of the fuse holder assembly Figure 1 3 is correct for the operating voltage in your area If not refer to Setting line voltage and replacing fuse page 1 16 CAUTION Operating the instrument on an incorrect line voltage may cause damage to the instrument possibly voiding the warranty 2 Before plugging in the power cord make sure that the front panel power switch is in the off O position Figure 1 3 Power module Model 2700 a WARNING NO INTERNAL OPERATOR SERVICABLE PARTS SERVICE BY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL ONLY cmo come Ce C DIGITAL 1 0 A LINK RS232 MADE IN IEEE 488 KEITHLEY SLOT COVER Selector h CAUTION FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE HAZARD REPLACE FUSE WITH SAME TYPE AND Loo RATING Spring Window Fuse Holder Assembly 1 16 Getting Started Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual 3 Connect the female end of the supplied power cord to th
490. s 15 13 Table 15 5 continued SENSe command summary Default Command Description parameter Ref SCPI SENSe 1 CURRent AC Path to configure AC current Sec 3 v APERture lt n gt lt clist gt Set integration rate in seconds 60Hz Note 2 Sec 4 1 67e 4 to 1 50Hz 2e 4 to 1 APERture lt clist gt Query aperture integration rate NPLCycles lt n gt lt clist gt Set integration rate in line cycles 60Hz 5 0 Sec4 Vv 0 01 to 60 50Hz 0 01 to 50 NPLCycles lt clist gt Query line cycle integration rate v RANGe Path to set measurement range Sec4 vV UPPer lt n gt lt clist gt Select range 0 to 3 1 3 y UPPer lt clist gt Query range y AUTO lt b gt lt clist gt Enable or disable auto range ON Jv AUTO lt clist gt Query state of auto range Jv DIGits lt p gt lt clist gt Specify measurement resolution 4 to 7 6 Sec 4 DIGits lt clist gt Query resolution REFerence lt n gt lt clist gt Specify reference 3 1 to 3 1 0 Sec 5 Jv STATe lt b gt lt clist gt Enable or disable reference OFF Jv STATe lt clist gt Query state of reference Jv ACQuire lt clist gt Use input signal as reference REFerence lt clist gt Query reference value y AVERage Path to configure and control filter Sec 4 TCONtrol lt name gt Select filter type MOVing or REPeat Note 3 TCONtrol Query filter type WINDow lt NRf gt Set filter window in
491. s 15 7 Table 15 4 ROUTe command summary Default Command Description parameter Ref SCPI ROUTe MONitor lt clist gt Specify one channel to be monitored Sec 7 STATe lt b gt Enable or disable channel monitoring OFF STATe Query state of channel monitoring DATA Returns the most recent monitor reading POINts lt NRf gt For a monitor scan specify number of channels Note 1 to scan 2 to 55000 POINts For a monitor scan query number of channels to scan MONitor Query the channel to be monitored CLOSe lt clist gt Close the one specified channel all others will Sec 2 open STATe lt clist gt Query closed channels in specified list 1 closed ACONfigure lt b gt Enable or disable auto configure Note 2 ACONfigure Query state of auto configure COUNt lt clist gt Query closure count for specified channels Sec 2 INTerval lt NRf gt Set count update interval in minutes 10 to 1440 Note 3 INTerval Query relay count update interval CLOSe Returns a lt clist gt of closed channels OPEN ALL Open all channels Sec 2 15 8 Table 15 4 continued SCPI Reference Tables ROUTe command summary Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Default Command Description parameter Ref SCPI ROUTe MULTiple Path to control multiple channels Sec 2 OPEN lt clist gt Open channel s specified in list Unlisted channels not affected CLOS
492. s Manual GPIB setup The following provides information about GPIB standards selecting the GPIB setting the primary address and bus connections GPIB standards The GPIB is the IEEE 488 instrumentation data bus with hardware and programming standards originally adopted by the IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers in 1975 The Model 2700 conforms to these standards e TEEE 488 1 1987 TEEE 488 2 1992 The above standards define a syntax for sending data to and from instruments how an instrument interprets this data what registers should exist to record the state of the instru ment and a group of common commands The Model 2700 also conforms to this standard e SCPI 1996 0 Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments This standard defines a command language protocol It goes one step farther than TEEE 488 2 1992 and defines a standard set of commands to control every programmable aspect of an instrument Selecting GPIB and setting primary address The Model 2700 is shipped from the factory with the GPIB selected and the primary address set to 16 You can set the address to a value from 0 to 30 but do not assign the same address to another device or to a controller that is on the same GPIB bus controller addresses are usually 0 or 21 Perform the following steps to select the GPIB and set the primary address 1 Press the SHIFT key and then the GPIB key The GPIB ON or GPIB OFF message will be display
493. s Manual Basic DMM Operation 3 35 External reference junction For switching modules that do not have built in sensors to measure temperature each module can use a thermistor or 4 wire RTD to acquire the reference temperature Connect a thermistor to channel 1 or connect a 4 wire RTD to channel 1 and its paired channel Position the temperature transducer near the terminals for the channel s being used to measure temperature Be sure to electrically insulate the transducer leads to keep them from making contact with other conductors When you close channel 1 to measure the cold junction temperature that temperature reading will be used to calculate the temperature when you close a thermocouple channel Open thermocouple detection Long lengths of thermocouple wire can have a large amount of capacitance that is seen at the input of the DMM If an intermittent open occurs in the thermocouple circuit the capacitance could cause an erroneous on scale reading The Model 2700 has an open thermocouple detection circuit When enabled a 10uA pulse of current is applied to the thermocouple before the start of each temperature measurement If gt 12kQ is detected open thermocouple the OVRFLW message will be displayed If lt 12kQ is detected the current is turned off and a normal thermocouple temperature measurement is performed NOTE Channel average cannot be used with thermocouple temperature measurements if open thermocouple detection is ena
494. s Pe Resistance QO Under Test oe Note Source current flows from the SS l INPUT HI to INPUT LO terminals B Q4 Connections 3 22 Basic DMM Operation Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Model 7700 switching module Connections for the switching module are shown in Figure 3 9 As shown in Figure 3 9A each of the 20 channels can be used to perform Q2 measurements For Q4 measurements a channel pair is used for each 4 wire measurement as shown in Figure 3 9B For Q4 connections channels 1 through 10 which are used as the INPUT terminals are paired to channels 11 through 20 which are used as the SENSE terminals Channel is paired to channel 11 channel 2 is paired to channel 12 and so on Figure 3 9 Q2 and Q4 connections for Model 7700 switching module Shielded Optional Shield Resistance Switching Under Test al Model 7700 ol m Switching Module Ol m Resistance Under Test Optional Shield Note Source current flows from input high H to input low L B Q4 Connections Shielding To achieve a stable reading it helps to shield resistances greater than 100kQ As shown in Figure 3 8 and Figure 3 9 place the resistance in a shielded enclosure and connect the shield to the input low terminal of the instrument electrically Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Basic DMM Operation 3 23 Cable leakage For high resistance measurements in a
495. s and configures a simple scan or an advanced scan Disables step scan Selects the calibration menu display test or the key press test Enables disables line cycle synchronization When enabled noise induced by the power line is reduced at the expense of speed Enables disables GPIB and selects address Enables disables RS 232 interface selects baud rate flow control and terminator Dual function Selects the next higher lower measurement range for the selected function When in a menu these keys make selections or change values Enables disables autorange for the selected function 4 Display annunciators asterisk more Speaker AW AC AUTO BUFFER CHAN DELTA ERR FAST FILT HIGH HOLD LSTN LOW Readings being stored in buffer Indicates additional selections are available Beeper on for continuity or limits testing Digital input output or analog output active set to non default value 4 wire resistance or 4 wire RTD temperature reading displayed AC function selected ACV dB or ACI Auto range enabled Recalling readings stored in buffer Setup or a reading for a switching channel displayed Channel average enabled Questionable reading or invalid cal step Fast reading rate selected Filter enabled for selected function Reading has reached or exceeded the enabled high limit 2700 in hold mode Instrument addressed to listen over GPIB Reading has reached or exceeded the enabled
496. s measured by the Model 2700 With Vmeas Isour Rrer known the Model 2700 calculates the resistance of the DUT and displays the result NOTE Eq 2 in Figure 3 11 assumes that Rpgr is exactly L1OMQ In reality the Model 2700 measures the resistance of Rggp and uses that value in the equation The Model 2700 routinely does a self calibration During this process the precision 0 7uA current is sourced through R ggp with an open input This reference voltage Vggp is measured and Rprpr is then calculated Rrer Vrer 0 7 As shown in Figure 3 11B the Q4 function can also be used to measure ohms for the 10MQ and 100MQ ranges There are actually 3 wire ohm measurements Sense Hi is not used Figure 3 11B shows the Sense Hi terminal connected to the DUT but it does not need to be It can be left open The measurement method is similar to the ratiometric method for Q2 but it performs an extra voltage measurement V1 pap to compensate for IR drop in the input test leads As stated in the specifications Appendix A to achieve rated accuracy the Input Hi and Input Lo test leads must have 10 matching of resistance To meet that criteria simply use similar type test leads that are the same length Keep in mind that Vmgas includes the voltage drops of the input test leads Input Hi and Input Lo Therefore the actual voltage drop across the DUT is Vmgas minus the two voltage drops in the test leads Since matched input leads are us
497. s measurement function by pressing 24 and enable offset compensated ohms by pressing SHIFT and then OCOMP OCOMP annunciator turns on Use the RANGE up and down keys to select the 100 1kQ or 10kQ range or press AUTO to enable auto range If using auto range offset compensated ohms measurements will not be performed if the instrument goes to the 100k or higher range Perform steps 4 through 8 of the Standard resistance measurements page 3 23 procedure NOTE The OCOMP annunciator will flash when the instrument is on an invalid range 100kQ through 100MQ ranges for offset compensated ohms Normal ohms measurements will instead be performed For buffer recall there is no way to distinguish between a normal ohms reading and an offset compensated ohms reading The OCOMP annunciator off on or flashing has no significance for recalled resistance readings that are displayed Buffer operation is covered in Section 6 With offset compensated ohms enabled it will be remembered by the Q4 function after you change measurement functions i e DCV When Q4 is again selected offset compensated ohms will be enabled Measurement methods The Model 2700 uses two methods to measure resistance Constant current source method 100 through 1MQ ranges Sources a constant current to the DUT Voltage is measured by the Model 2700 and resistance is then calculated R V I Ratiometric method LOM and 100MQ ranges Test cu
498. s optional and does not have to be included in the program message Query commands Most command words have a query form A query command is identified by the question mark that follows the command word A query command requests queries the programmed status of that command When a query command is sent and Model 2700 is addressed to talk the response message is sent to the computer NOTE For complete details see Programming syntax page 10 11 Quick start exercises This section topic summarizes the following basic instrument operations and provides simple exercises to perform them e Basic DMM measurements front panel inputs e Closing and opening channels system channel operation e Simple scanning Trigger and return readings remote programming WARNING For the exercises it is not necessary to connect an input signal or DUT to the instrument front panel inputs or switching module inputs However if you decide to use an input signal it is recommended that you keep it at a nonhazardous level lt 42V while learning to use the instrument NOTE When using the front panel input terminals the INPUT switch must be in the F out position The INPUT switch is located on the right side of the front panel near the input terminals When using a switching module the switch must be in the R in position Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Getting Started 1 27 Basic DMM mea
499. s that are within 1 of the nominal value Bin 2 is for resistors that exceed 1 tolerance but are within 5 Bin 3 is for resistors that exceed 5 tolerance The digital outputs of the Model 2700 can be used to further automate the test system by controlling a compatible component handler to perform the binning operations Limits Limit testing is used to test resistor tolerances Figure 9 6 shows a basic setup using 4 wire offset compensated ohms to test 100Q resistors Figure 9 6 Setup to test 100Q resistors Model 2700 Sense N B Model 7700 9 16 Limits and Digital I O Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Limit 1 will be used to test for the 1 tolerance and Limit 2 will be used to test for the 5 tolerance The resistance values for the 1 and 5 tolerances are calculated as follows Rig 100Q x 1 Rs 100Q x 5 100Q x 0 01 100Q x 0 05 10 50 The high and low limits are then calculated as follows HI Limit 1 100Q Ryo HI Limit 2 100Q Rsg 100Q 1Q 1000 5Q 101Q 105Q LO Limit 1 100Q Ryq LO Limit 2 100Q Rs 100Q 10 1002 50 990 950 The limits are illustrated in Figure 9 7 Figure 9 7 Limits to sort 100Q resistors 1 5 and gt 5 Beep Beep Beep No Beep Low Pitch Normal Pitch Low Pitch No Beep lt Low gt __ In he HIGH gt a E T 95Q 99Q 1009 1019 105Q LO2 LOI HI1 HI2 _ Limit 1 1 Limit
500. s the Model 2700 is in the idle state Bits B11 through B15 Not used Operation Condition Register Operation Event Register Operation Idle Filt Trig Meas Sh B15 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 5722 Register Idle Idle state Logical AND Filt Filter Settled or Disabled oe Logical OR Trig Triggering Meas Measuring Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Status Structure 11 15 Measurement event register The used bits of the Measurement Event Register Figure 11 6 are described as follows Bit BO Reading Overflow ROF Set bit indicates that the reading exceeds the measurement range of the instrument Bit B1 Low Limit 1 Event LL1 Set bit indicates that a reading has reached or exceeded Low Limit 1 Bit B2 High Limit 1 Event HL1 Set bit indicates that a reading has reached or exceeded High Limit 1 Bit B3 Low Limit 2 Event LL2 Set bit indicates that a reading has reached or exceeded Low Limit 2 Bit B4 High Limit 2 Fail HL2 Set bit indicates that a reading has reached or exceeded High Limit 2 Bit B5 Reading Available RAV Set bit indicates that a reading was taken and processed NOTE A programming example to read the RAV bit is provided in Example 2 Read RAV bit of measurement event register on page 11 20 Bit B6 Buffer Notify BN Set bit is a notification that the user specified
501. sed by the controller to remove all devices on the bus from the serial poll mode and is generally the last command in the serial polling sequence Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual IEEE 488 Bus Overview G 9 Addressed multiline commands Addressed commands are multiline commands that must be preceded by the device listen address before that instrument will respond to the command in question Note that only the addressed device will respond to these commands Both the commands and the address preceding it are sent with ATN true SDC Selective Device Clear The SDC command performs essentially the same function as the DCL command except that only the addressed device responds Generally instruments return to their power up default conditions when responding to the SDC command GTL Go To Local The GTL command is used to remove instruments from the remote mode With some instruments GTL also unlocks front panel controls if they were previously locked out with the LLO command GET Group Execute Trigger The GET command is used to trigger devices to perform a specific action that depends on device configuration for example take a reading Although GET is an addressed command many devices respond to GET without addressing Address commands Addressed commands include two primary command groups and a secondary address group ATN is true when these commands are asserted The commands include LAG Listen Add
502. seire eane EA a 9 11 Table 9 2 Limits and digital I O commands esceeeeeeseeeseeeneeeneeeees 9 12 10 Remote Operations Table 10 1 General bus commands cee eeeeseeseeeeeseeeseeeeeeseeseeeatens 10 8 Table 10 2 PG serial port pinouts s csceiisecsecidsere Mesdscecetsevsavedetay ibeeeseeseds 10 21 Table 10 3 RS 232 connector PINOUL eeeceeseeeseeeteeeteeeeaeeeteeeeeeeeees 10 21 11 Status Structure Table 11 1 Common and SCPI commands to reset registers and cleat QUEUES 5 cs tec decesececxeveasssosenesaseaszensscatiesddeaeteees ineeseeceane 11 4 Table 11 2 Status byte and service request enable register commands 11 9 Table 11 3 Condition register CoOmMANAS eee eseeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeaeeees 11 18 Table 11 4 Event register commands ec eeseeseceeteceseeeeeeeteeeseeeaeees 11 18 Table 11 5 Event enable registers commands 1 0 00 ee eeeeeeseeseeeeeeseeeee 11 19 Table 11 6 Error queue commands 0 0 0 le ee eeteeseeeeeeeeeseeseeeseeeeeaeees 11 23 12 Common Commands Table 12 1 TEEE 488 2 common commands and queries 12 2 13 SCPI Signal Oriented Measurement Commands Table 13 1 Signal oriented measurement command summary 13 2 14 FORMat and Miscellaneous SYSTem Commands Table 14 1 SCPI commands data format ccccessssssessccscscscecesceeeeees 14 2 15 Table 15 1 Table 15 2 Table 15 3 Table 15 4 Table 15 5 Table 15 6 Table 15 7 Table 15 8 Table 15 9 Table 15 10
503. serial poll sequence of the Model 2700 to obtain the status byte a k a serial poll byte B6 is the RQS bit See Serial polling and SRQ page 11 8 for details on using the serial poll sequence When using the STB command Table 1 2 to read the status byte B6 is the MSS bit 11 8 Status Structure Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Service request enable register The generation of a service request is controlled by the Service Request Enable Register This register is programmed by you and is used to enable or disable the setting of bit B6 RQS MSS by the Status Summary Message bits BO B2 B3 B4 B5 and B7 of the Status Byte Register As shown in Figure 11 3 the summary bits are logically ANDed amp with the corresponding enable bits of the Service Request Enable Register When a set 1 summary bit is ANDed with an enabled 1 bit of the enable register the logic 1 output is applied to the input of the OR gate and therefore sets the MSS RQS bit in the Status Byte Register The individual bits of the Service Request Enable Register can be set or cleared by using the SRE common command To read the Service Request Enable Register use the SRE query command The Service Request Enable Register clears when power is cycled or a parameter value of 0 is sent with the SRE command SRE 0 The commands to pro gram and read the SRQ Enable Register are listed in Table 11 2 Serial polling and SRQ
504. sesssesseeseeresrerrsreresrrsesresrrersreee B 8 Q2 Wire and thermistor connections s s s B 8 Q4 Wire and RTD connections sssssseeseseseseerereeesrserereeseesees B 9 Current connections AC or DC esessssssssssssssssrssrersressssesssee B 9 Voltage connections DC or AC oo eeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees B 10 Signal Processing Sequence and Data Flow Basic signal processing ceceeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeseeaeenes D 2 Signal processing using instrument features eee D 3 Signal processing using Ratio or Channel Average D 6 Data flow for remote Operation 20 eeeeeeseeseeeeeereeeeeeeeees D 7 Measurement Considerations Thermal EMF generation 0 cece eee eseeeeseeeeeeeceeeeeeeseeaeeees E 3 Power line ground lOOps eeeeeeceeseeeeeeseeeeeeseceeeeseenseeseenes E 7 Eliminating ground lOOpS 20 0 0 eeeeseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeesseeseeees E 7 Shielding example sisisi a naa E 8 Meter loading oo eee eesessceesseeeseecsceeseeeeaeeeseeesaeeeeeseteeeneeesaes E 9 IEEE 488 Bus Overview TEEE 488 bus configuration cece eeceeseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeaeeees G 3 TEEE 488 handshake sequence ees eeeeseeseeseeeeereeeeeeeeenes G 6 Command COGES sisseseade a iii G 11 List of Tables 1 Getting Started Table 1 1 Model 77xx series switching MOdUuIeS cee eeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeee 1 8 Table 1 2 FUSE r tin Sentono escerai eea a cus EE eE 1 17 Table 1 3 Display commands ee eeeeseeeeseceeeeseeseeeseeeeeeseseeeeneee
505. sets integration time to 5 PLC SLOW provides better noise performance at the expense of speed For the AC functions ACV ACV dB and ACI the RATE key sets integration time and bandwidth As listed in Table 4 4 FAST sets NPLC to 1 while the MEDium and SLOW NPLC settings are ignored see Bandwidth page 4 10 for details Table 4 4 Rate and bandwidth settings Rate and bandwidth Function Fast Medium Slow DCV DCI NPLC 0 1 NPLC 1 NPLC 5 ACV ACI NPLC 1 BW 300 NPLC X BW 30 NPLC X BW 3 Q2 Q4 NPLC 0 1 NPLC 1 NPLC 5 FREQ PERIOD APER 0 01s APER 0 1s APER 1s Continuity NPLC 0 01 N A N A Notes NPLC number of power line cycles BW lower limit of bandwidth in Hz APER aperture in seconds N A not available X setting ignored From the front panel setting the rate for one function affects all the other functions For example if you set DCV for medium speed the other functions will also set to medium speed For remote programming each function can have its own unique rate setting 0 01 to 50 or 60 PLC NOTE Rate cannot be set for continuity It is fixed at 0 01 PLC Setting measurement speed The RATE key is used to set measurement speed from the front panel Simply press RATE until the desired speed annunciator FAST MED or SLOW turns on NOTE The Model 2700 uses internal references to calculate an accurate and stable reading When the NPLC setting is changed each reference
506. sly closed channel if there is one will open and the specified channel will close NOTE While in the normal measurement state you can use the qand p keys to close channels In general each key press will open the presently closed channel and then close the next higher or lower channel 6 Observe the displayed reading If the OVERFLOW message is displayed select a higher range until a normal reading is displayed Use the lowest possible range for the best resolution To measure other switching channels repeat steps 5 and 6 When finished press OPEN if there is a channel closed Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Basic DMM Operation 3 47 Continuity testing The instrument can test continuity using the 2 wire 1kQ range After selecting continuity you will be prompted to enter the threshold resistance level 1 to 1000Q When the measured circuit is below the set threshold level the instrument will beep and display the resistance readings When the measured circuit is above the threshold level the instrument will not beep and either display the resistance reading or the message OPEN If the reading is below 1100Q it will be displayed If the reading is 1100 or above OPEN will instead be displayed NOTE The reading rate for continuity is fixed at FAST 0 01 PLC Limits and digital outputs cannot be used when testing continuity with the continuity CONT function If you need to use these operati
507. st processed data array stored in the sample buffer If for example 10 data arrays are stored in the sample buffer only the last 10 data array is returned DATA does not affect data in the sample buffer Therefore subsequent executions of DATA acquires the same data array In order to return a new reading you must first trigger a new reading s and then use DATA When using DATA to retrieve data it is good practice to include reading numbers in the data arrays Reading numbers that do not change will indicate that the same data array is being returned NOTE The FORMat ELEMents command see Section 14 is used to include the reading number RNUM element in each data array SENS 1 DATA FRESh This command is similar to DATA LATest in that is also returns the last processed data array stored in the buffer However it can only be used once to retrieve the same data array That is the data array reading must be fresh Sending this command again to read the same stale data array will not work It will generate an error 230 data corrupt or stale or cause the GPIB to time out In order for DATA FRESh to respond you must first trigger a new fresh reading Using this command to retrieve data ensures that only new fresh readings are returned no readings are repeated However as previously noted problems may occur if a new reading is not ready available when this command is executed D 10 Signal Processin
508. stem User s Manual CONFigure lt function gt lt rang gt lt res gt lt clist gt COMFigure VOLTage DC lt rang gt lt res gt lt clist gt Configure DCV COMFigure VOLTage AC_ lt rang gt lt res gt lt clist gt Configure ACV COMFigure CURRent DC lt rang gt lt res gt lt clist gt Configure DCI CONFigure CURRent AC lt rang gt lt res gt lt clist gt Configure ACI COMFigure RESistance lt rang gt lt res gt lt clist gt Configure Q2 COMFigure FRESistance lt rang gt lt res gt lt clist gt Configure 94 COMFigure FREQuency lt rang gt lt res gt lt clist gt Configure FREQ COMFigure PERiod lt rang gt lt res gt lt clist gt Configure PERIOD COMFigure TEMPerature lt clist gt Configure TEMP CONFigure CONTinuity lt clist gt Configure CONT Parameters lt rang gt lt res gt lt clist gt Range parameter for the specified function For example for DCV range parameter value 10 selects the 10V range See the NOTES that follow Table 13 1 for additional information 0 1 i e 100 0 V 3 digits 0 01 i e 10 00 V 3 digits 0 001 i e 1 000 V 3 digits 0 0001 i e 1 0000 V 41 digits 0 00001 i e 1 00000 V 5 digits 0 000001 i e 1 000000 V 6 digits The resolution of the lt res gt parameter value and the selected range sets the number of display digits As shown above with the 100V range selecte
509. surements front panel inputs NOTE See Section 3 for details on basic DMM operation The Model 2700 is shipped from the factory to power up to factory defaults The instrument powers up to a setup that continuously measures DC volts Some of the default settings for the DCV function include auto range enabled 62 digit resolution filter enabled and slow reading rate These settings provide a good starting point and in many cases do not need to be changed Starting point default settings are also provided for the other measurement functions Therefore to perform basic measurements simply select the desired function and tweak the setup range rate filter digits etc as required For remote programming the instrument is typically used in a non continuous measurement mode In this mode the user via remote command programming specifies the number of measurements to perform RST defaults place the instrument in a non continuous measurement mode Most of the other settings for factory and RST defaults are the same For remote programming the following command is used to select function NOTE Items in brackets are optional and do not need to be included Upper case characters are required Lower case characters are optional and need not be included SENSe 1 FUNCtion lt func gt Select measurement function lt func gt VOLTage DC DCV VOLTage AC ACV CURRent DC DCI CURRent AC ACI RES
510. t Programming example read error queue NOTE The following example can be run from the KE2700 Instrument Driver using the example named ReadErrorQueue in Table H 1 of Appendix H The following command reads the error queue STAT QUE 11 24 Status Structure Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual 12 Common Commands 12 2 Common Commands Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Common commands summarized in Table 12 1 are device commands that are common to all devices on the bus These commands are designated and defined by the IEEE 488 2 standard Table 12 1 IEEE 488 2 common commands and queries Mnemonic Name Description Ref CLS Clear status Clears all event registers and error queue Sec 11 ESE lt NRf gt Event enable command Program the standard event enable register Sec 11 ESE Event enable query Read the standard event enable register seo l1 ESR Event status register query Read the standard event enable register and Sec 11 clear it IDN Identification query Returns the manufacturer model number serial A number and firmware revision levels of the unit OPC Operation complete command Set the operation complete bit in the standard B event register after all pending commands have been executed OPC Operation complete query Places an ASCII 1 into the output queue when C all pending selected device operations have been completed OPT Option query
511. t 500nV typical per contact 1yV max lt 500nvV typical per contact pair 1uV max OFFSET CURRENT lt 100pA CONNECTOR TYPE Screw terminal 20 AWG wire size ISOLATION BETWEEN ANY TWO TERMINALS gt 10 Q lt 100pE ISOLATION BETWEEN ANY TERMINAL AND EARTH gt 10 Q lt 200pE CROSS TALK 500 Load w InternalDMM w o Internal DMM 10MHz lt 40dB lt 40dB 25MHz ne lt 25dB Channels 24 and 25 are open Refer to ROUTe MULTiple command in 27xx User s manual Not valid INSERTION LOSS 50 Source 509 Load w InternalDMM w o Internal DMM lt 0 1dB 1MHz 1MHz lt 3db 2MHz 50MHz Channels 24 and 25 are open Refer to ROUTe MULTiple command in 27xx User s manual COMMON MODE VOLTAGE 300V or 300V rms 42 5V peak for AC wave forms between any terminal and chassis T C COLD JUNCTION 1 0 C 18 28 C Mainframe Temp 1 5 C 0 18 C amp 28 50 C Mainframe Temp ENVIRONMENTAL OPERATING ENVIRONMENT Specified for 0 C to 50 C Specified to 80 R H at 35 C STORAGE ENVIRONMENT 25 C to 65 C WEIGHT 0 45kg 1 Ib HI o Card Input LO HI Card Sense Channels 2 9 Channel 25 see Note Backplane isolation HI oe ae Channel 10 of 0 ovo Channel 23 2 Pole Open 4 Pole Closed Cold junction Ref x3 see Note Channel 24 see Note Backplane isolation of o HI Channel 11 o oto of o oo o HI Sense
512. t lt NRf gt lt clist gt Set reference value for percent lt NRf gt 1 4294967295 to 4294967295 CALCulate 1 KMATh PERCent ACQuire Use input signal as reference value CALCulate 1 STATe lt b gt lt clist gt Enable or disable calculation lt b gt ON_ Note 2 or OFF CALCulate 1 DATA LATest Return last result of calculation CALCulate 1 DATA FRESh Return last fresh result of calculation Channel list parameter lt clist gt SCH where S Mainframe slot number 1 or 2 CH Switching module channel number must be 2 digits Examples 101 Slot 1 Channel 1 101 203 Slot 1 Channel 1 and Slot 2 Channel 3 101 110 Slot 1 Channels 1 through 10 1 The lt clist gt parameter is used to configure one or more channels for a scan 2 RST default is ON SYSTem PRESet is OFF 5 14 Rel Math Ratio Channel Average dB Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Setting mX b units The lt char gt parameter for CALCulate K MATh MUNits must be one character enclosed in single or double quotes It can be any letter of the alphabet the degrees symbol or the ohms symbol Q The ohms symbol Q and the degrees symbol are not ASCII characters and therefore must be substituted with the and V characters as follows CALCulate KMAth MUNits Use ohms symbol Q as units designator CALCulate KMAth MUNits V Use degrees symbol as units
513. t Driver LabVIEW examples are provided in the file Examples llb Use cases are provided in the file Use Cases llb By default these are installed in the Program Files National Instruments LabView X instr lib KE2700 directory In addition to the examples numerous supporting VIs are included in the library file Table H 2 LabVIEW examples Manual Name Reference Brief Description Read multi point None Demonstrates configuring and reading multiple data points from from channels switching module channels Read multi point None Demonstrates configuring and reading multiple data points from from front panel the front panel input Read single point None Demonstrates configuring and reading a single data point from from switching switching module channels module channel Read single point None Demonstrates configuring and reading a single data point from the from front panel front panel input Advance 1 None Use Case 1 40 channel scan using 7708 module 30 channels DCV 10V range e 10 channels type T thermocouple temperature e Measurement speed rate 1 plc Filter Disabled no filtering Buffer Store 160 reading strings Buffer elements include reading channel and real time clock Triggering Timer scan 40 channels every one minute Data retrieval SRQ when buffer 4 2 34 and full Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual KE2700 Instrument Driver
514. t NRf gt lt clist gt TEMPerature FRTD ALPHa lt NRf gt lt clist gt TEMPerature FRTD BETA lt NRf gt lt clist gt TEMPerature FRTD DELTa lt NRf gt lt clist gt These commands are used to set the parameters for the USER RTD type Note that the RZERo command sets the Q at 0 C parameter When any of these commands are sent the USER RTD type is automatically selected f FREQuency THReshold VOLTage RANGe lt p gt lt clist gt PERiod THReshold VOLTage RANGe lt n gt lt clist gt These commands are used to specify the expected input level The instrument will then automatically select the most sensitive current or voltage threshold range g FREQuency APERture lt n gt lt clist gt PERiod APERture lt n gt lt clist gt The rate annunciators indicate the following aperture settings SLOW 1 sec MED 0 1 sec FAST 0 01 sec For all other aperture times the rate annunciators are turned off h UNIT TEMPerature lt name gt To set temperature measurement units to C use the C or CEL parameter For F use the F or FAR parameter For Kelvin use the K parameter i Trigger and retrieve readings NOTE Detailed information on the processes to trigger and retrieve readings is provided in Section amp Section 13 and Appendix D INITiate CONTinuous lt b gt INITiate With continuous initiation disabled INITiate CONTinuous OFF you can use the INITiate command to trigger o
515. t clist gt Set of digits for DCV lt n gt 4 to 7 7 VOLTage AC DIGits lt n gt lt clist gt Set of digits for ACV lt n gt 4 to 7 6 CURRent DC DIGits lt n gt lt clist gt Set of digits for DC1 lt n gt 4 to 7 7 CURRent AC DIGits lt p gt lt clist gt Set of digits for ACI lt n gt 4 to 7 6 RESistance DIGits lt n gt lt clist gt Set of digits for Q2 lt n gt 4 to 7 7 FRESistance DIGits lt n gt lt clist gt Set of digits for Q4 lt n gt 4 to 7 7 TEMPerature DIGits lt n gt lt clist gt Set of digits for TEMP lt n gt 4 to 7 6 FREQuency DIGits lt n gt lt clist gt Set of digits for FREQ lt n gt 4 to 7 7 PERiod DIGits lt n gt lt clist gt Set of digits for PERIOD lt n gt 4 to 7 7 Channel list parameter lt clist gt SCH where S Mainframe slot number 1 or 2 CH Switching module channel number must be 2 digits Examples 101 Slot 1 Channel 1 101 203 Slot 1 Channel 1 and Slot 2 Channel 3 101 110 Slot 1 Channels 1 through 10 The lt clist gt parameter is used to configure one or more channels for a scan Each channel in the lt clist gt must be set to the function specified by the digits command If not a conflict error 221 will occur For example VOLTage AC DIGits 4 5 101 is only valid if scan channel 101 is set for the ACV function Model 2700 Multimeter Switch Sys
516. t clist gt Specify reference 757 5 to 757 5 0 Sec 5 Jv STATe lt b gt lt clist gt Enable or disable reference OFF Jv STATe lt clist gt Query state of reference Jv ACQuire lt clist gt Use input signal as reference REFerence lt clist gt Query reference value y AVERage Path to configure and control filter Sec 4 TCONtrol lt name gt Select filter type MOVing or REPeat Note 3 TCONtrol Query filter type WINDow lt NRf gt Set filter window in of range 0 1 0 to 10 WINDow Query filter window COUNt lt n gt lt clist gt Specify filter count 1 to 100 10 COUNt lt clist gt Query filter count STATe lt b gt lt clist gt Enable or disable filter Note 4 STATe lt clist gt Query state of digital filter DETector Path to set bandwidth Sec 4 BANDwidth lt NRf gt Set AC detector bandwidth in Hertz 30 lt clist gt 3 to 3e5 BANDwidth lt clist gt Query bandwidth 15 12 SCPI Reference Tables Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Table 15 5 continued SENSe command summary Default Command Description parameter Ref SCPI SENSe 1 CURRent DC Path to configure DC current Sec 3 Jv APERture lt n gt lt clist gt Set integration rate in seconds 60Hz Note 2 Sec 4 1 67e 4 to 1 50Hz 2e 4 to 1 APERture lt clist gt Query aperture integration rate NPLCycles lt n gt lt clist gt
517. t gt Specify filter count 1 to 100 10 COUNt lt clist gt Query filter count STATe lt b gt lt clist gt Enable or disable filter Note 4 STATe lt clist gt Query state of digital filter TRANsducer lt name gt Select temperature transducer TCouple TCouple Sec 3 Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual SCPI Reference Tables 15 17 Table 15 5 continued SENSe command summary Default Command Description parameter Ref SCPI SENSe 1 TEMPerature TCouple Path to configure thermocouple gt Sec 3 TYPE lt type gt lt clist gt Select T C type J K T E R S B N K TYPE lt clist gt Query T C type ODETect lt b gt Enable or disable T C open detector OFF ODETect Query state of T C open detector RJUNction Path to configure reference junction gt m RSELect lt name gt Select reference junction SIMulated Note 7 lt clist gt INTernal or EXTernal RSELect lt clist gt Query reference junction SIMulated lt n gt Set simulated reference temperature 23 lt clist gt 0 to 65 C 32 to 149 F or 273 to 338 K SIMulated lt clist gt Query simulated reference temperature THERmistor Path to configure thermistor Sec 3 TYPE lt NRf gt Set thermistor type in ohms 1950 to 5000 lt clist gt 10050 TYPE lt clist gt Query thermistor type FRTD Path to configure 4 wire RTD Sec 3 TYPE lt name gt Select FRTD ty
518. t is above the threshold level the instrument will not beep and either display the resistance reading or the message OPEN If the reading is below 1100Q it will be displayed If the reading is 1100Q or above OPEN will instead be displayed To disable continuity testing select a different function i e press DCV NOTE The beeper can be disabled using the SYSTem BEEPer STATe OFF command However the beeper will automatically enable the next time the continuity testing function is selected Limits and digital outputs cannot be used when testing continuity with the continuity CONT function If you need to use these operations use the Q2 function to test continuity Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Remote programming for basic measurements Basic measurement commands Basic DMM Operation NOTE When measurements are performed the readings are fed to other enabled processing operations Appendix D explains Data flow remote operation and the commands used to return the various processed readings Commands to perform basic measurements are listed in Table 3 7 Table 3 7 Basic measurement commands 3 49 Commands Description Default Ref Select measurement function SENSe 1 Optional root command FUNCtion lt name gt lt clist gt Select measurement function VOLT a lt name gt VOLTage DC VOLTage AC CURRent DC CURRent AC RESistance
519. t to NONE and if the moving filter is selected the filter will not enable when the scan is run For the advanced scan filter state on or off and count can be set for each channel You cannot set unique filter count type and window settings from the advanced scan setup menu For remote programming the lt clist gt parameter is used to set filter count and state for each channel in the scan You cannot set unique filter type and window settings NOTE Details on configuring a scan using filtering in a scan are provided in Section 7 4 20 Range Digits Rate Bandwidth and Filter Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Remote programming filter Filter commands The filter commands are listed in Table 4 6 Additional information on these commands follow the table NOTE Query commands are not included in Table 4 6 All commands for the SENSe subsystem are provided in Table 15 5 Table 4 6 Filter commands Commands 4 Description Default DCV filter commands SENSe 1 Optional root command VOLTage DC AVERage TCONtrol lt name gt Select filter type lt name gt MOVing or Note 2 REPeat VOLTage DC AVERage WINDow lt NRf gt Set filter window in lt NRf gt 0 to 10 0 1 VOLTage DC AVERage COUNt lt p gt clist Specify filter count lt n gt 1 to 100 10 VOLTage DC AVERage STATe lt b gt clist Enable or disable the filter Note 3 ACV filter commands SENSe 1 Optional root
520. tails on using the buffer is provided in Section 6 While measuring and storing readings the status byte is continuously read to detect when the BHF bit sets This example also shows how to use OPC operation complete to determine when the measure measure process is finished RST Put 2700 in one shot mode CLS Clears measurement event register STAT PRES Clears measurement event enable register STAT MEAS ENAB 256 Enables BHF bit B8 of the measurement event register ESE 1 Enables OPC bit BO of the standard event register TRAC POIN 500 Sets buffer size to 500 readings TRAC FEED SENS Sets to store raw readings TRIG COUN 500 Sets 2700 to perform 500 measurements TRAC FEED CONT NEXT Enables buffer INIT Starts measurement and storage process OPC Sets OPC bit BO of standard event register after the measure store process is finished While readings are being triggered and stored in the buffer the following command STB can be put into a program loop to continuously read the status byte STB Read status register By masking the status byte with binary 00000001 decimal 1 only BO will be read by STB The AND ed result of the mask and the STB response will be either 0 BHF clear or 1 BHF set In the above command sequence ESE 1 enables the OPC bit After OPC is sent the OPC bit will set when the measure store process is finished After the BHF bit sets you can
521. talker listener idle states The unit responds to the IFC command by canceling front panel TALK or LSTN lights if the instrument was previously placed in one of these states Note that this command does not affect the status of the instrument Settings data and event registers are not changed With auto output off enabled SOURce1 CLEar AUTO ON the output will remain on if operation is terminated before the output has a chance to automatically turn off To send the IFC command the controller need only set the IFC line true for a minimum of 100us Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Remote Operations 10 9 LLO local lockout Use the LLO command to prevent local operation of the instrument After the unit receives LLO all of its front panel controls except OUTPUT OFF are inoperative In this state pressing LOCAL will not restore control to the front panel The GTL command restores control to the front panel Cycling power will also cancel local lockout GTL go to local Use the GTL command to put a remote mode instrument into local mode The GTL command also restores front panel key operation DCL device clear Use the DCL command to clear the GPIB interface and return it to a known state Note that the DCL command is not an addressed command so all instruments equipped to implement DCL will do so simultaneously When the Model 2700 receives a DCL command it clears the Input Buffer and Output Queue cance
522. talled in the mainframe For details see Switching module installation and connections page 2 3 Front and rear panel familiarization Front panel summary The front panel of Model 2700 is shown in Figure 1 1 Figure 1 1 Model 2700 front panel KEITHLEY Integra Series Model 2700 Multimeter Data Acquisition System INPUTS ens FOX FRONT FA aR i O P r DELAY _HOLD LIMITS _ON OFF TYPE MONITOR CH OFF CARD xtrig TRIG STORE RECALL FILTER REL lt SAVE SETUP CONFIG HALT TEST_LSYNC GPIB_RS 232 LOPEN CLOSE STEP SCAN DIGITS RATE EXIT ENTER SA250V AMPS 2 3 5 NOTE Most keys provide a dual function or operation The nomenclature on a key indicates its unshifted function operation which is selected by pressing the key Nomenclature in blue above a key indicates its shifted function A shifted function is selected by pressing the SHIFT key and then the function operation key Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Getting Started 1 11 1 Special keys and power switch SHIFT LOCAL POWER Use to select a shifted function or operation Cancels GPIB remote mode Power switch In position turns 2700 on I out position turns it off O 2 Function and operation keys Top Row Unshifted DCV ACV DCI ACI Q2 Q4 FREQ TEMP Shifted MATH OUTPUT RATIO CH AVG CONT OCOMP PERIOD SENSOR Middle Row Unshifted EXTRIG TRI
523. talled from the front panel However once it is installed you can take the Model 2700 out of remote and use the front panel Pressing the LOCAL key takes the Model 2700 out of remote When the instrument is turned off the pseudocard will be lost uninstalled Use the following commands to install pseudocards SYSTem PCARd1 lt name gt Install pseudocard in slot 1 SYSTem PCARd2 lt name gt Install pseudocard in slot 2 lt name gt C7700 C7701 C7702 C7703 C7705 C7706 C7707 C7708 C7709 C7710 C7711 or C7712 Programming example The following command sets up the Model 2700 to operate as if a Model 7700 switching module is installed in slot 2 which must be empty You cannot assign a pseudocard to a slot that already has a switching module installed in it SYSTem PCAR2 C7700 Install pseudocard 7700 for slot 2 Channel assignments The Model 2700 has two slots for switching modules To control the appropriate switching module the slot number must be included with the switching module channel number when you specify a channel The channel assignment is formatted as follows SCH where S is the slot number CH is the channel number Examples 101 Slot 1 Channel 1 210 Slot 2 Channel 10 For remote operation the 3 digit channel assignment is included in the channel list parameter for the commands Format examples for the channel list parameter are provided in Table 2 1 and Table 2 2 2 6 Close Open Switc
524. tamp Relative timestamp With relative selected there are two timestamp types for each reading absolute and delta The absolute timestamp S references each stored reading to zero seconds Therefore the first reading in the buffer has an absolute timestamp of zero seconds The delta timestamp dS indicates the time in seconds between the displayed reading and the reading before it The resolution for each timestamp is 0 001 sec NOTE With auto clear disabled and the relative timestamp selected every stored reading is referenced to the first reading 0 even if the buffer is stopped and started again For example assume you stored 10 readings in the buffer and one hour later you store 10 more readings The timestamps for all 20 readings are referenced to the first reading Therefore the timestamp for the 11th reading 10 is one hour 3600 seconds When the Model 2700 is turned off the relative timestamp resets to 0 sec when the instrument is turned back on If you have readings stored in the buffer and auto clear is disabled when the unit is turned off subsequent stored readings will be appended to the old group of readings However the relative timestamps for the new readings will be referenced to 0 sec When recalling stored readings from the front panel both absolute and delta timestamps are provided For remote operation the absolute or delta timestamp is returned with each buffer reading The TRACe TSTamp FORMat command
525. tching module channels 21 and 22 are available for DCI and ACI Channels 1 through 20 are available for all other functions 3 Ifusing a switching module use the lt or gt key to select close the input channel If using the front panel inputs FRONT inputs selected it does not matter if a switching channel is closed Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Rel Math Ratio Channel Average dB 5 3 4 Press the REL key to set the rel value The display will zero and the REL annunciator will turn on 5 Apply the signal to be measured Pressing REL a second time disables rel You can input a rel value manually using the mX b function Set M for 1 and B for any value you want The mX b function is covered in this section see Math page 5 8 Scanning When a simple scan is configured the present rel setting will apply to all channels in the scan When an advanced scan is configured each channel can have its own unique rel setting Details to configure and run a scan are provided in Section 7 For an advanced scan the following general procedure shows how to configure a scan channel to use rel 1 While in the normal measurement state select the appropriate function and close the appropriate channel For example if scan channel 101 is going to be configured for DCV and use rel select DCV and close channel 101 2 Apply the DCV signal to be rel ed to the closed channel This could be an offset or a basel
526. ted in the signal processing sequence Figure D 3 Signal processing using Ratio or Channel Average Input Signals ChanAq _ oChanB Signal Conditioning A D Conversion Process gt Output Trigger Pulse VMC Rel Rel ed reading Reading Rel Value Ratio Chan A Chan B Ch Avg Chan A Chan B 2 Ratio or Channel Average Wier Y mX b Calculation a _X Reference i mX b Percent Reference 100 Percent Reciprocal 1 X Store fai Display Reading With a channel closed and Ratio or Ch Avg enabled the reading that is applied to the Ratio or Ch Avg block in the flow chart is used as the Chan A value for the calculation The paired channel then closes and that reading is used as the Chan B value for the calculation Ratio or Ch Avg is then calculated as shown in Figure D 3 As shown the result of Ratio or Ch Avg can then be used by an enabled Math operation NOTE For details on these calculations see Ratio and channel average page 5 16 Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Signal Processing Sequence and Data Flow D 7 Data flow remote operation Remote operation can be used with triggering configured to perform a specified number of measurements and then stop The various read commands SENS DATA FETCh READ MEAS CALC2 DATA TRACe DATA and CALC1 DATA return the data array s acquired during the measurement cycle Data flow for this triggering c
527. tem User s Manual Range Digits Rate Bandwidth and Filter 4 7 Setting digits Even though the parameters for the DIGits command are expressed as integers 4 to 7 you can specify resolution using a real number For example to select 31 2 digit resolution let lt n gt 3 5 Internally the instrument rounds the entered parameter value to the nearest integer As implied by the commands in Table 4 3 each mainframe input function can have its own unique digits setting Digits programming examples NOTE The following examples can be run from the KE2700 Instrument Driver using the example named Digits in Table H 1 of Appendix H Example 1 The following commands set digits for DCV and ACI VOLT DIG 5 5 Set DCV to 5 digits CURR AC DIG 4 Set ACI to 3 digits Example 2 The following command sequence configures channels 101 through 110 of the Model 7700 to select 4H digits when they are scanned FUNC RES 101 110 Select Q2 function RES DIG 4 5 101 110 Set scan channels to 4 digits 4 8 Range Digits Rate Bandwidth and Filter Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Rate and bandwidth Rate The RATE key sets the integration time measurement speed of the A D converter the period of time the input signal is measured also known as aperture The integration time affects the amount of reading noise as well as the ultimate reading rate of the instrument The integration time is sp
528. ter When a computer is used on the bus it serves as a supervisor of the communication exchange between all the devices and is known as the controller Supervision by the controller consists of determining which device will talk and which device will listen As a talker a device will output information and as a listener a device will receive information To simplify the task of keeping track of the devices a unique address number is assigned to each On the bus only one device can talk at a time and is addressed to talk by the controller The device that is talking is known as the active talker The devices that need to listen to the talker are addressed to listen by the controller Each listener is then referred to as an active listener Devices that do not need to listen are instructed to unlisten The reason for the unlisten instruction is to optimize the speed of bus information transfer since the task of listening takes up bus time Through the use of control lines a handshake sequence takes place in the transfer process of information from a talker to a listener This handshake sequence helps ensure the credibility of the information transfer The basic handshake sequence between an active controller talker and a listener is as follows 1 The listener indicates that it is ready to listen 2 The talker places the byte of data on the bus and indicates that the data is available to the listener 3 The listener aware that the data is
529. ter Switch System User s Manual Table H 2 continued LabVIEW examples Name Manual Reference Brief Description Simple5 None Use Case 5 32 channel scan using 7701 module e Common side 4 wire ohms measurements CSIDe mode e Dry circuit ohms option for Model 2750 e Install jumpers to connect Input Hi and Sense Hi directly to DUT common side bus e Install jumpers to connect channel 35 to Sense Lo and Input Lo e Buffer Store 32 reading strings Buffer elements include reading only e Triggering Immediate control source Simple6 None Use Case 6 Scan 160 channels using 7703 module see NOTE e Type K thermocouple TC temperature measurements e Reference junction Simulated e Measurement speed rate 0 01 plc Filter Disabled no filtering e Buffer Store 160 reading strings Buffer elements include reading only e Triggering Bus control source NOTE When using a module that has a built in cold junction use the Internal reference junction Keep in mind that the buffer will have to be modified to accommodate the number of scanned channels Modules that have cold junction include 7700 and 7706 modules 20 available TC channels 7708 module 40 available TC channels Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual KE2700 Instrument Driver Examples H 19 Table H 2 continued LabVIEW examples Manual Name Reference Br
530. ters sarisin enda e 11 18 Event enable registers seeseseesesseesesesrrsesresrrsrerrsreresrese 11 19 QUEUES anno E A EAE E 11 22 Output queue s sssssssesssssesssssessesstssstssesssssrssessttssesseesresess 11 22 Error QUEUS sas2eisivsese cede intei aaa teeta E 11 22 Common Commands 13 14 15 SCPI Signal Oriented Measurement Commands CONFigure lt function gt lt rang gt lt res gt lt clist gt 0 0 13 4 BET CD siene a ane er E a aaia 13 6 READ prenoeinen nane tan e R R R iR 13 7 MEASure lt function gt lt rang gt lt res gt lt clist gt 13 8 FORMat and Miscellaneous SYSTem Commands FORMat commands eee ee eeceeeeeseeeseeeeeeseeeeeeaeeseeeaeesaeeaeenesens 14 2 FORMat DATA lt type gt lt length gt oer 14 2 FORMat ELEMents lt item list oes eeeeeeeeeeeeees 14 6 FORMat BORDer lt name gt ieee eeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeeteeeenees 14 7 Miscellaneous SYSTem commands ou ce eseeeeeseeereeneeeeeees 14 8 SY STen PRES et einne a 14 8 SYSTem VERSION 6 0 s ccssstevsiescesds cates sashevavtedaieeetevineds 14 8 SYSTem KEY lt NR gt oaraid inisnieancaes 14 8 SYSTem BEEPer STATe lt b gt oo eeeceeessecesteeeseeees 14 9 SCPI Reference Tables Reference tables soiin a Sa eE atv ANE 15 2 Specifications Accuracy Calculations sirsssrsesricoessseiseseresiersesrtsosasesnesesseseursssere A 7 Calculating DC characteristics aACCuracy sssr A 7 Calculating AC characteristics ACCUL
531. the paired channel For the Model 7700 if the closed primary channel is 101 the paired channel is 111 Enable Ratio or Channel Average e Ratio Press SHIFT and then RATIO The RATIO annunciator will turn on to indicate that the displayed readings are the result of the ratio calculation e Channel Average Press SHIFT and then CHA AVG The DELTA annunciator will turn on to indicate that the displayed readings are the result of the channel average calculation To disable channel average again press SHIFT and then CH AVG When finished there are two ways to disable the calculation e Press the OPEN key The calculation will disable and the channel will open e Press SHIFT and then RATIO to disable ratio or press SHIFT and then CHA AVG to disable channel average The calculation will disable but the channel will remain closed The paired channel number is not displayed when it is measured Only the primary channel is displayed during the 2 channel scan for the calculation Enabling ratio disables channel average and conversely enabling channel average disables ratio If either of the channel readings over range OVRFLW the result of the calculation will also be OVRFLW When using limits with ratio or channel average the limit values will be compared to the result of the calculation and not to the individual channels With ratio or channel average enabled pressing a function key will display the EXIT RATIO
532. the present rate or bandwidth setting will apply to all channels in the scan When an advanced scan is configured each channel can have its own rate or bandwidth setting Details to configure and run a scan are provided in Section 7 For remote programming the lt clist gt parameter is used to configure channels for a scan Remote programming rate and bandwidth Rate and bandwidth commands The commands to set the integration rate and bandwidth are listed in Table 4 5 Additional information on these commands follows the table NOTE Query commands are not included in Table 4 5 All commands for the SENSe subsystem are provided in Table 15 5 Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Range Digits Rate Bandwidth and Filter 4 11 Table 4 5 Rate and bandwidth commands Commands 7 Description Default Integration rate commands SENSe 1 Optional root command VOLTage DC NPLCycles lt n gt lt clist gt Set rate for DCV in PLCs lt n gt 0 01 to x 5 0 VOLTage DC APERture lt p gt lt clist gt Set rate for DCV in secs lt n gt x to 1 Note 4 VOLTage AC NPLCycles lt n gt lt clist gt Set rate for ACV in PLCs lt n gt 0 01 to xx 5 0 VOLTage AC APERture lt n gt lt clist gt Set rate for ACV in secs lt n gt x to 1 gt Note 4 CURRent DC NPLCycles lt n gt lt clist gt Set rate for DCI in PLCs lt n gt 0 01 to x 5 0 CURRent DC APERtu
533. the status structure can be read by using the appropriate query com mand The following explains how to interpret the returned value response message The actual query commands are covered later in this section Table 11 2 through Table 11 5 The response message for a register query will be a decimal value This decimal value will have to be converted to its binary equivalent For example decimal 19 in binary is 10011 This binary value indicates that bits BO B1 and B4 are set 1 Status byte and service request SRQ Service request is controlled by two 8 bit registers the Status Byte Register and the Service Request Enable Register Figure 11 3 shows the structure of these registers Figure 11 3 Status byte and service request SRQ Status Summary Message lt Read by Serial Poll Service CTR Request ote Generation Serial Poll BO Register OSB ESB MAV QSB EAV MSB Service Request 2 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 Enable Register OSB Operation Summary Bit QSB Questionable Summary Bit MSS Master Summary Status EAV Error Available RQS Request for Service MSB Measurement Summary Bit ESB Event Summary Bit amp Logical AND Mav Message Available OR Logical OR Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Status Structure 11 7 Status byte register The summary messages from the status registers and queues are used to set or clear the ap
534. ther regarding being ready or not ready to receive data The Model 2700 does not support hardware handshaking flow control Software flow control is in the form of X__ON and X__ OFF characters and is enabled when XonXoFF is selected from the RS232 FLOW menu When the input queue of the Model 2700 becomes more than full the instrument issues an X_OFF command The control program should respond to this and stop sending characters until the Model 2700 issues the X_ON which it will do once its input buffer has dropped below half full The Model 2700 recognizes X_ON and X_OFF sent from the controller An X_OFF will cause the Model 2700 to stop outputting characters until it sees an X_ON Incoming commands are processed after the lt CR gt character is received from the controller NOTE For RS 232 operation OPC or OPC should be used with slow responding commands A list of the slowest responding commands and details on OPC and OPC are provided in Section 12 XonXoFF is the FACT and RST default flow control setting If NONE is the selected flow control then there will be no signal handshaking between the controller and the Model 2700 Data will be lost if transmitted before the receiving device is ready NOTE Even with XonXoFF selected the computer may lose data from the Model 2700 if the return string is very large approximately 30 000 or more characters and one of the higher baud rates is selected With no flow control NONE select
535. til the timer interval expires NOTE The Model 2700 can also be configured to run an advanced scan For an advanced scan each channel can have its own unique setup i e function range etc Advanced scanning is covered in Section 7 Figure 1 7 Simple scan operation Step 1 Configure simple scan Step 2 Run simple scan Press SHIFT CONFIG SHIFT STEP SCAN Press CONFIG STEP Press STEP or SCAN to start scan STEP SCAN Display SIMPLE option and press ENTER INT SIMPLE Specify minimum MIN CHAN XXX channel XXX and press ENTER Specify maximum channel YYY and press ENTER TIMER NO YES Display NO or YES and press ENTER YES MAX CHAN YYY Set timer interval in hr min sec format and press ENTER Specify reading count and press ENTER XXH xxM xx xxxS RDG CT xxxxxx e Timer interval specifies time between scans e Reading count o Specifies number of scans to be performed o Specifies number of readings to store in buffer e Timer interval specifies time between scanned channels e Reading count o Specifies number of channels to be scanned o Specifies number of readings to store in buffer Step 3 Disable scan mode Press SHIFT HALT SHIFT gt STEP SCAN Press HALT SCAN 1 34 Getting Started Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual For remote programming the following commands are used for simple scanning
536. tinue to repeat and refresh the display with each new calculated reading The ratio or channel average calculation can only be enabled if a valid switching channel is closed If no channel is closed when you attempt to enable one of these calculations the message CLOSE A CHAN message will be displayed to remind you to first close a valid channel A primary channel must be closed before you can enable ratio or channel average If a paired channel is instead closed message INVALID CHAN will be displayed to indicate the settings conflict NOTE The various instrument operations including Ratio or Channel Average are performed on the input signal in a sequential manner See Signal processing sequence page D 2 for details It includes a flowchart showing where in the processing sequence that Ratio or Ch Avg operation is performed Model 2700 Multimeter S witch System User s Manual Rel Math Ratio Channel Average dB 5 17 Basic operation NOTE l NOTE Make sure the INPUTS switch is set to the REAR position in Select and configure range filter rel etc a valid measurement function For ratio the only valid function is DCV For channel average the only valid functions are DCV and TEMP TCs only Use the lt or gt key to select close a primary channel 101 through 110 for the Model 7700 The CLOSE key can also be used Apply one signal to the selected primary channel and apply the other signal to
537. tion 4 to 7 7 Sec 4 DIGits lt clist gt Query resolution REFerence lt n gt lt clist gt Specify reference 0 to 120e6 0 Sec 5 Jv STATe lt b gt lt clist gt Enable or disable reference OFF y STATe lt clist gt Query state of reference y ACQuire lt clist gt Use input signal as reference REFerence lt clist gt Query reference value y AVERage Path to configure and control filter Sec 4 TCONtrol lt name gt Select filter type MOVing or REPeat Note 3 TCONtrol Query filter type WINDow lt NRf gt Set filter window in of range 0 1 0 to 10 WINDow Query filter window COUNt lt n gt lt clist gt Specify filter count 1 to 100 10 COUNt lt clist gt Query filter count STATe lt b gt lt clist gt Enable or disable filter Note 4 STATe lt clist gt Query state of digital filter Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual SCPI Reference Tables 15 15 Table 15 5 continued SENSe command summary Default Command Description parameter Ref SCPI SENSe 1 FRESistance Path to configure four wire resistance Sec3 Vv APERture lt n gt lt clist gt Set integration rate in seconds 60Hz Note 2 Sec 4 1 67e 4 to 1 50Hz 2e 4 to 1 APERture lt clist gt Query aperture integration rate NPLCycles lt n gt lt clist gt Set integration rate in line cycles 60Hz 5 0 Sec4 Vv 0 01 to 60 50Hz 0 01 to 50
538. tion Relay l Close channel 101 Channel i i 23 2 Pole 4 Pole H ie closed position Relay od rj E shown is it 1 i ioi 1 Channel 11 Lo Eei i Relay Channel 24 ty HI lt o HI 1 Channel 11 Loy Sense n LO eoLO ii 1 Backplane pi E Isolation i I I Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Close Open Switching Module Channels 2 9 Controlling the system channel When a measurement channel is closed a previous system channel and for a 4 wire function its paired channel is first opened The closed measurement channel becomes the system channel When a 4 wire function is selected the paired channel for the system channel also closes lt and p keys These front panel keys Figure 2 3 can be used to select the next or previous measurement channel as the system channel If there are no measurement channels available one of the following messages will be briefly displayed when one of these keys is pressed NO SCAN CARD This message indicates that there are no switching modules or pseudocards installed both slots are empty NO MEAS CARD This message indicates that none of the installed switching modules or pseudocards have measurement channels For example the Model 7705 switching module does not have any measurement channels Those channels cannot be internally connected to the DMM NOTE The qand keys can also be used to open all channels in the mainframe Simply incre
539. tion is not displayed Only the system channel number is displayed For example in Figure 1 5 channel number 106 will be displayed with the Model 7707 installed in slot 1 of the mainframe e Switching modules that have current measurement capability have separate channels reserved exclusively for the DCI and ACI functions For example the Model 7700 has channels 21 and 22 reserved for amps measurements With the DCI or ACI function selected only channels 21 and 22 can be closed These channels cannot be accessed on any other function Figure 1 6 shows the front panel keys used to close and open system channels Figure 1 6 Front panel keys to close and open system channels Close next measurement channel OPEN CLOSE Press CLOSE key OPEN ICLOSE Press OPEN key Display ALL Display SINGLE option option and press and press ENTER CLOSE SINGLE OPEN ALL Close previous OPEN again i e CLOSE CH XXX e Da d number an oe press ENTER A Sequencing through B Specifiying channel to close C Opening all channels channnels For remote programming the following three commands are used for basic system operation to open and close input channels ROUTe CLOSe lt clist gt Close specified system channel ROUTe CLOSe Query closed system channel ROUT OPEN ALL Open all channels 1 Only one channel can be specified in the lt clist gt For example to close input channel 3 for a module in slot 1 the following co
540. tistics Minimum and maximum This mode displays the minimum and maximum readings stored in the buffer The buffer location number and timestamp are also provided for these readings Peak to peak This mode displays the peak to peak reading peak to peak Maximum Minimum Average The average mode displays the mean average of all measured readings stored in the buffer The following equation is used to calculate mean 2 X i 1 yo i where y is the average X is a stored reading n is the number of stored readings Standard deviation This mode displays the standard deviation of buffered readings The following equation is used to calculate standard deviation SG i n 1 i 1 n 1 where y is the standard deviation X is a stored reading n is the number of stored readings NOTE Ifthe standard deviation calculation is being performed on a buffer that has more than 1000 readings the CALCULATING message will flash to indicate that the Model 2700 is busy While busy with the calculation front panel keys will not operate Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Buffer 6 9 Remote programming buffer NOTE When readings are stored in the buffer by the TRACe command or by front panel data store operation INIT and multi sample READ queries are locked out With readings in the buffer that were stored in that manner you cannot use the INIT or READ command if sample count is gt 1 error 2
541. to perform exercises to operate the instrument QS1 QS2 QS3 General information Covers general information that includes warranty information contact information safety symbols and terms inspection and available options and accessories Model 2700 features Summarizes the features of Model 2700 Plug in switching modules Summarizes the capabilities of the Keithley Model 77xx series switching modules Front and rear panel familiarization Summarizes the controls and connectors of the instrument Rack mounting Covers the options available for rack mounting the Model 2700 in a standard 19 inch rack Power up Covers line power connection line voltage setting fuse replacement power line frequency and the power up sequence Display Provides information about the display of the Model 2700 Defaults and user setups Lists the RST and factory default settings and covers the three setup configurations available to the user Remote programming information Explains how SCPI commands are presented in this manual Quick start exercises Provides abbreviated operating information and exercises front panel and remote programming to acquaint a user with operation basics 1 2 Getting Started Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual General information Warranty information Warranty information is located at the front of this manual Should your Model 2700 require warranty serv
542. to the normal measurement state Table 3 4 Thermistor temperature measurement configuration Step Menu structure Description 1 UNITS C F or K Select temperature measurement units C F or K 2 SENS THRMSTR Select the thermistor transducer 3 TYPE 2200Q 5000Q or 10kQ Select thermistor resistance 3 42 Basic DMM Operation Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual 4 wire RTD temperature measurement configuration The Alpha Beta Delta and Q at 0 C parameters for the five basic RTD types are provided in Table 3 5 Note that these parameters can be modified using remote programming Table 3 5 RTD parameters Type Standard Alpha Beta Delta Q at 0 C PT100 ITS 90 0 003850 0 10863 1 49990 1009 D100 ITS 90 0 003920 0 10630 1 49710 1009 F100 ITS 90 0 003900 0 11000 1 49589 1002 PT385 IPTS 68 0 003850 0 11100 1 50700 1009 PT3916 IPTS 68 0 003916 0 11600 1 50594 1009 The steps to configure 4 wire RTD measurements are provided in Table 3 6 After pressing SHIFT and then SENSOR the menu starts at step 1 to select measurement units Each time you press ENTER to make a selection the menu will automatically go to the next selection After pressing ENTER for the last step the instrument will return to the normal measurement state NOTE As shown in Table 3 6 you can select the USER sensor type but you cannot change the USER parameters from the front panel The parameters for the US
543. ts 1 0 g in secs lt n gt 0 01 to 1 0 CONT function SENSe 1 Optional root command CONTinuity THReshold lt NRf gt Set continuity threshold in ohms 10 lt NRf gt 1 to 1000 SYSTem BEEPer lt b gt Enable disable beeper lt b gt ON or OFF ON Set temperature measurement units UNIT TEMPerature lt name gt Set temperature units lt name gt C CEL h F FAR or K Trigger and retrieve readings i INITiate CONTinuous lt b gt Enable disable continuous initiation Note 4 INITiate SENSe 1 DATA LATest DATA FRESh FETCh READ lt b gt ON or OFF Trigger one or more measurements Optional root command Returns the last reading string Returns the last fresh reading string Return reading s Trigger and return reading s Channel list parameter lt clist gt SCH where S Mainframe slot number 1 or 2 CH Switching module channel number must be 2 digits Examples 101 Slot 1 Channel 1 101 203 Slot 1 Channel 1 and Slot 2 Channel 3 101 110 Slot 1 Channels 1 through 10 1 The lt clist gt parameter is used to configure one or more channels for a scan 2 When using multiple channel operation ROUT MULT command to connect a switching module channel to the DMM for thermocouple temperature measurements the S Mulated reference junction will be used if the INTernal or EXTernal reference junction is selected The ERR annunciator will turn on to
544. ts the pole mode or a channel that cannot be internally connected to the DMM e Trying to close an amps channel while on a non amps function The DCI or ACI function must be selected in order to close an amps channel e Trying to close a paired channel while on a 4 wire function For the Model 7700 channels 1 through 10 are paired to channels 11 through 20 for a 4 wire function If for example you try to close channel 12 while on the Q4 function the INVALID CHAN error will occur Trying to close a switching module channel that does not exist TOO SMALL or TOO LARGE These messages also indicate an invalid channel TOO SMALL indicates that the specified channel and any other lower numbered channel is invalid TOO LARGE indicates that the specified channel and any other higher numbered channel is invalid Figure 2 4 System channel operation specifying measurement channel to close OPEN CLOSE Press CLOSE key Display SINGLE option LOSE SINGLE and press ENTER Specify channel number XXX Ee and press ENTER Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Close Open Switching Module Channels 2 11 OPEN key ALL menu option The ALL menu option of the OPEN key opens all channels for all switching modules installed in the Model 2700 Figure 2 5 For example if a Model 7700 switching module is installed in slot 1 OPEN ALL will open all measurement channels 101 to 120 121 and 122 the backplane isolation channel
545. ual 7 8 Ratio and channel average 5 19 Ratio Chan Average 7 9 Setting 7 18 Timer Delay for STEP and SCAN 7 22 Device action 7 9 8 5 Digital I O 1 14 8 7 9 5 Digital input 9 5 Digital outputs 9 6 Commands 9 12 Logic sense 9 7 Master limit latch 9 7 Programming example 9 14 Pulse option 9 7 Remote programming 9 12 Scanning 9 12 Setting 9 10 Sink mode controlling external devices 9 8 Digits 4 5 Commands 4 6 Programming examples 4 7 Remote programming 4 6 Scanning 4 6 Setting 4 7 Display 1 18 Annunciators 1 12 Commands 1 18 DISPlay ENABle 1 19 DISPlay TEXT DATA 1 19 DISPlay TEXT STATe 1 19 Programming example 1 19 Remote programming 1 18 DMM measurements 1 27 Dual independent multiplexers 2 24 Dual multiplexer application 2 25 DUT test system 8 10 Error messages C 2 Examples Basic measurement programming examples 3 55 Buffer programming example 6 15 dB programming examples 5 23 Default and user setups programming example 1 25 Digits programming examples 4 7 Display programming example 1 19 External triggering 8 10 Filter 4 16 Filter programming examples 4 22 Hold 8 6 Limits and digital outputs programming example 9 14 Math programming examples 5 15 Multiple channel remote programming example 2 21 Program and read register set programming example 11 20 Range programming examples 4 5 Rate and bandwidth programming examples 4 13 Ratio and channel average programming examples 5 20 Read er
546. ues may cause a breakdown in insulation creating a shock hazard Use the following sequence when testing power circuits 1 De energize the circuit using the regular installed connect disconnect device for example by removing the device s power cord or by turning off the power switch 2 Attach the test leads to the circuit under test Use appropriate safety rated test leads for this application If over 42V use double insulated test leads or add an additional insulation barrier for the operator 3 Set the multimeter to the proper function and range Energize the circuit using the installed connect disconnect device and make measurements without disconnecting the multimeter 5 De energize the circuit using the installed connect disconnect device Disconnect the test leads from the circuit under test 3 4 Basic DMM Operation Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Performance considerations Warm up After the Model 2700 is turned on it must be allowed to warm up for at least two hours to allow the internal temperature to stabilize If the instrument has been exposed to extreme temperatures allow extra warm up time Autozero To help maintain stability and accuracy over time and changes in temperature the Model 2700 periodically measures internal voltages corresponding to offsets zero and amplifier gains For thermocouple temperature measurements using the internal reference junction i e Model 7700 switchin
547. uffer Store 40 DCV reading strings 20 Q4 reading strings Buffer elements include reading only e Limits DCV scan Limit 1 all channels 20mV Master Latch enabled e Triggering Bus control source Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual KE2700 Instrument Driver Examples H 9 Table H 1 continued Visual Basic and CVI C examples Name Manual Reference Brief Description Simple4 None Use Case 4 Two scans using 7708 module e 40 channel DCV scan 1V range Configuration saved in User Setup 1 e 20 channel Q4 scan Configuration saved in User Setup 2 e Models 2700 and 2701 100 range e Model 2750 10Q range dry circuit ohms enabled e Setup 1 or Setup 2 recalled to perform scan e Measurement speed rate 0 1 plc e DCV input divider Enabled LOMQ input impedance e Filter Disabled no filtering e Buffer Store 40 DCV reading strings 20 Q4 reading strings Buffer elements include reading only e Limits DCV scan Limit 1 all channels 20mV Master Latch enabled e Triggering Bus control source Simple5 None Use Case 5 32 channel scan using 7701 module e Common side 4 wire ohms measurements CSIDe mode e Dry circuit ohms option for Model 2750 e Install jumpers to connect Input Hi and Sense Hi directly to DUT common side bus e Install jumpers to connect channel 35 to Sense Lo and Input Lo e Buffer Sto
548. ultimeter Switch System User s Manual DMM measurement capabilities NOTE Accuracy specifications for all measurement functions and the Model 7700 switching module are provided in Appendix A The DMM of the Model 2700 can make the following measurements DCV DC voltage measurements from 0 1nV to 1000V ACV AC voltage measurements from 0 1pV to 750V DCI DC current measurements from 10nA to 3A ACI AC current measurements from 1pA to 3A Q2 2 wire resistance measurements from 100uQ to 120MQ Q4 4 wire resistance measurements from 100uQ to 120MQ FREQ Frequency measurements from 3Hz to 500kHz PERIOD Period measurements from 333ms to 2 us TEMP Temperature measurements from 200 C to 1820 C CONT Continuity testing using the 1kQ range CAUTION When using a switching module do not exceed the maximum signal levels of the module To prevent damage to the Model 7700 switching module do not exceed these maximum signal levels Channels 1 20 300VDC or 300V RMS 425V peak for AC waveforms 1A switched 60W 125VA Channels 21 22 60VDC or 30V RMS 3A switched 60W 125VA For the other switching modules the maximum signal levels are included with their specifications NOTE This section shows DUT connections to the front panel inputs of the Model 2700 and to the Model 7700 switching module Details on Model 7700 connections are provided in Appendix B Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System Us
549. unction operation selected channels are paired as follows CH1 and CH11 CH6 and CH16 CH2 and CH12 CH7 and CH17 CH3 and CH13 CH8 and CH18 CH4 and CH14 CH9 and CH19 CH5 and CH15 CH10 and CH20 Schematic diagram The simplified schematic diagram of the Model 7700 is shown in Figure 2 12 Channels 1 through 20 are used for all measurements except amps Channels 21 and 22 are used for amps only There are two backplane relays channels 24 and 25 to connect the input channel s to the backplane of the Model 2700 With a 2 wire function except amps selected channel 25 will close and with a 4 wire function selected both channels 24 and 25 will close There is a 2 pole 4 pole relay channel 23 between channels 1 10 and channels 11 20 When a 2 wire function i e DCV is selected channel 23 opens 2 pole position to allow any of the 20 channels to be connected to the input backplane When a 4 wire function is selected channel 23 closes 4 pole position to isolate channels 1 through 10 from channels 11 through 20 With a system channel 1 through 10 closed its paired channel 11 through 20 will also close to connect the sense channel to the sense backplane For the two current channels 21 and 22 signal HI and LO are routed directly to the backplane when the channel is closed As shown in Figure 2 12 there are also screw terminals labeled Input Sense and Amps The Input and Sense terminals are connected to th
550. unit There is a pseudocard for every Keithley Model 7700 series switching module A single SCPI command SYSTem PCARdX where X 1 or 2 is used to install a pseudocard in an empty switching module slot Details are provided in Section 2 A pseudocard cannot be installed from the front panel However once it is installed you can take the Model 2700 out of remote and use the front panel When the instrument is turned off the pseudocard will be lost uninstalled Autozero Autozero is part of the normal measurement process to assure stable accurate measure ments Autozero can be disabled to increase measurement speed However the readings will eventually become inaccurate over time and temperature changes Autozero can only be disabled using remote programming It cannot be disabled from the front panel Autozero is covered in Section 3 dB calculation Using remote programming you can select the dB calculation for DC or AC voltage The dB calculation makes it possible to compress a large range of measurements into a much smaller scope See Section 5 to select and configure the dB calculation You cannot select dB from the front panel However once it is selected you can take the Model 2700 out of remote and use the front panel When the instrument is reset to default conditions or turned off dB will be lost Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Remote Operations 10 3 Separate function setups A few settings fr
551. uration saved in User Setup 2 e Models 2700 and 2701 100Q range e Model 2750 10Q range dry circuit ohms enabled e Setup 1 or Setup 2 recalled to perform scan e Measurement speed rate 0 1 plc e DCV input divider Enabled LOMQ input impedance e Filter Disabled no filtering e Buffer Store 40 DCV reading strings 20 Q4 reading strings Buffer elements include reading only e Limits DCV scan Limit 1 all channels 20mV Master Latch enabled e Triggering Bus control source e Data retrieval SRQ if limit fails Advances None Use Case 5 32 channel scan using 7701 module e Common side 4 wire ohms measurements CSIDe mode e Dry circuit ohms option for Model 2750 e Install jumpers to connect Input Hi and Sense Hi directly to DUT common side bus e Install jumpers to connect channel 35 to Sense Lo and Input Lo e Buffer Store 32 reading strings Buffer elements include reading only e Triggering Immediate control source e Data retrieval SRQ when buffer full Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual KE2700 Instrument Driver Examples H 5 Table H 1 continued Visual Basic and CVI C examples Name Manual Reference Brief Description Advance6 None Use Case 6 Scan 160 channels using 7703 module see NOTE e Type K thermocouple TC temperature measurements e Reference junction Simulated e Measure
552. ure reading reaches 30 C it will start the scan For this 4 channel scan channel 101 measures temperature while channels 102 103 and 104 measure DCV This example uses the channel average feature to measure temperature With channel average enabled two temperature measurements will be taken one at channel 101 and another at its paired channel 111 The two measured readings are then averaged to yield a single reading It is this averaged temperature reading that will start the scan when it reaches 30 C Refer to Section 5 for details on channel average Two type K thermocouples are used to measure temperature Since the internal cold reference junction of the Model 7700 is being used the thermocouples can be connected directly to the screw terminals of the switching module Operation A simplified model of monitor scan operation is shown in Figure 7 5 while the procedure steps and programming commands are listed in Table 7 3 In Figure 7 5 notice that there are two modes of operation While in the monitor mode the Model 2700 continuously performs temperature measurements Keep in mind that channel average is being used Therefore each temperature reading is the average of two temperature measurements one on channel 101 and one on channel 111 As long as the average temperature reading remains below 30 C the instrument will remain in the monitor mode When the temperature reading reaches 30 C the Model 2700 switches over to t
553. urement Event werent are oe leo a To Measurement Summary Bit MSB of Status Byte Register Measurement Event Enable Register L ML Master Limit BTF Buffer Three quarter Full BOF Buffer Quarter Full HL Hardware Limit Event BOF Buffer Overflow BF Buffer Full BTF B13 BQF eral HL BTF BOF B12 BHF Buffer Half Full BAV Buffer Available BN Buffer Notify RAV Reading Available HL2 High Limit 2 Event LL2 Low Limt 2 Event B11 BOF B10 mo ts ETE ERE et BoE E B10 ML BTF BQF HL BOF BF BHF BAV BN RAV HL2 LL2 HL1 LL1 ROF B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO a afi a e ax ay aa Fas HL2 HL1 High Limit 1 Event LL1 Low Limit 1 Event ROF Reading Overflow amp Logical AND OR Logical OR Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Status Structure 11 17 Questionable event register The used bits of the Questionable Event Register Figure 1 7 are described as follows Bits BO through B3 Not used Bit B4 Temperature Summary Temp Set bit indicates that an invalid refer ence junction measurement has occurred for thermocouple temperature measurements Bits B5 B6 and B7 Not used Bit B8 Calibration Summary Cal Set bit indicates that an invalid calibrat
554. urement state you can use the qand p keys to close channels In general each key press will open the presently closed channel and then close the next higher or lower channel 6 Observe the displayed reading If the OVERFLOW message is displayed select a higher range until a normal reading is displayed or press AUTO for autoranging For manual ranging use the lowest possible range for the best resolution 7 To measure other switching channels repeat steps 5 and 6 8 When finished press OPEN if there is a channel closed 3 12 Basic DMM Operation Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual AC voltage measurements and crest factor The root mean square RMS value of any periodic voltage or current is equal to the value of the DC voltage or current which delivers the same power to a resistance as the periodic waveform does Crest factor is the ratio of the peak value to the RMS value of a particular waveform The crest factor of various waveforms is different since the peak to RMS ratios are variable For example the crest factor for a pulse waveform is related to the duty cycle as the duty cycle decreases the crest factor increases The RMS calculations and crest factor CF for various waveforms are shown in Figure 3 4 and Figure 3 5 The Model 2700 is an AC coupled RMS meter For an AC waveform with DC content the DC component is removed before the RMS is calculated This affects the crest factor in that the peak
555. used to return the latest data array When used after the scan is finished they will return the data array for the last stored reading D 14 Signal Processing Sequence and Data Flow Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Measurement Considerations E 2 Measurement Considerations Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Measurement considerations Low level voltage measurements made using the Model 2700 can be adversely affected by various types of noise or other unwanted signals that can make it very difficult to obtain accurate voltage readings Some of the phenomena that can cause unwanted noise include thermoelectric effects thermocouple action source resistance noise magnetic fields and radio frequency interference The following paragraphs discuss the most important of these effects and ways to minimize them NOTE For comprehensive information on low level measurements see the Low Level Measurements handbook which is available from Keithley Thermoelectric potentials Thermoelectric potentials thermal EMFs are small electric potentials generated by differences in temperature at the junction of dissimilar metals The following paragraphs discuss how such thermals are generated and ways to minimize their effects Thermoelectric coefficients As shown in Table E 1 the magnitude of thermal EMFs generated depends on the particular materials involved Best results are obtained with clean copper to co
556. used to measure resistance Test current for this method is generated by a 0 7pA current source Iggy in parallel with a 1OMQ reference resistance Rggp as shown in Figure 3 11 Figure 3 11 Ratiometric method to measure ohms 10MQ and 100MQ ranges A 2 wire ohms Q2 measurements 10MQ and 100MQ ranges B 4 wire ohms 94 measurements 1OMQ and 100MQ ranges Rout Input Lo Sense Lo Q2 Function Eq 1 Isour Irer Iput L Veeas Vmes Rrer Rout Eq 2 Vmeas RREF Rout Isour Rree Vmeas 2 Vmeas e 10MQ 0 7pA 10MQ Vmeas Example Asume Vmeas 3 4V 3 4V 10MQ 0 7pA 10M9 3 4V Rout 9 444MQ Q4 Function Vout Vmeas 2 Vean For Eq 1 Eq 2 and the Example Vout is used in place of Vmeas Basic circuit theory dictates that the sum of the branch currents Ipgp and Ipyr is equal to the source current Isour Since the voltmeter of the Model 2700 Vyas has very high input impedance gt 10GQ current through the voltmeter branch is insignificant and can be discounted Therefore as shown in Eq 1 Isour Iger Ipur 3 28 Basic DMM Operation Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Since I V R Eq 1 is modified using the V R equivalents in place of Ipgp and Ipyr Therefore Isour Vmeas Reger Vmeas Rpur Eq 1 is then rearranged to solve for Rpyr and is shown in Eq 2 of Figure 3 11 Keep in mind that V megas i
557. uto delay period cannot be adjusted by the user The auto delays are listed in Table 8 1 With one of the other control sources selected the auto delay is 0 000s for all functions and ranges Scanning When scanning the nominal delay will be long enough to allow each switch ing module channel relay to settle before making the measurement When scanning the auto delay times in Table 8 1 are valid for all control sources Table 8 1 Auto delay settings Function Range and delay DCV 100mV 1V 10V 100V 1000V lms lms lms Sms Sms ACV 100mV 1V 10V 100V 750V 400ms 400ms 400ms 400ms 400ms FREQ and 100mV 1V 10V 100V 750V PERIOD Ims Ims Ims Ims Ims DCI 20mA 100mA 1A 3A 2ms 2ms 2ms 2ms ACI 1A 3A 400ms 400ms Q2 Q4 100Q 1kQ 10kQ 100kQ IMQ 10MQ 100MQ 3ms 3ms 13ms 25ms 100ms 150ms 250ms Continuity 1kQ 3ms TEMP The auto delay for thermocouples is Ims For thermistors and 4 wire RTDs the auto delay period is the same as the delay for the resistance range that is used for the measurement The delay function is accessed by pressing SHIFT and then DELAY The present delay setting AUTO or MANual is displayed Press the A or W key to display the desired setting and press ENTER Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Triggering 8 5 If MANual is chosen also enter the duration of the delay in the hour minute second format using the lt gt A and Y keys The maximum is 99H 99M 99 999
558. wer module 2 Remove the fuse and replace it with the type listed in Table 1 2 CAUTION For continued protection against fire or instrument damage only replace fuse with the type and rating listed If the instrument repeatedly blows fuses locate and correct the cause of the trouble before replacing the fuse 3 If configuring the instrument for a different line voltage remove the line voltage selector from the assembly and rotate it to the proper position When the selector is installed into the fuse holder assembly the correct line voltage appears sideways in the window Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Getting Started 1 17 4 Install the fuse holder assembly into the power module by pushing it in until it locks in place Table 1 2 Fuse ratings Line voltage Fuse rating Keithley P N 100 120V 0 25A slow blow 5x20mm FU 96 4 220 240V 0 125A slow blow 5x20mm FU 91 Power up sequence On power up the Model 2700 performs self tests on its EPROM and RAM and momentarily lights all segments and annunciators If a failure is detected the instrument momentarily displays an error message and the ERR annunciator turns on Error messages are listed in Appendix C NOTE Ifa problem develops while the instrument is under warranty return it to Keithley Instruments Inc for repair If the instrument passes the self tests the firmware revision levels are displayed An example of this display is R
559. will be copied to that channel in the scan list When a scan is started the first channel in the scan list will be briefly displayed While the scan is in progress the display will only show the reading s for the monitor channel After the last channel is scanned the scan will disable with the monitor channel closed Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Scanning 7 19 Monitor can be used with limit testing to trigger the start of a scan When the monitor detects that a set reading limit has been reached the scan is triggered to start The detailed procedure to perform a monitor scan is provided in Scan operation Monitor scan page 7 36 NOTE An overflow reading OVRFLW message displayed is interpreted by the Model 2700 as a positive reading even if the input signal is negative This could inadvertently trigger a monitor scan see Scan operation Monitor scan page 7 36 The monitor channel must be a channel that is in the scan list If the monitor channel is removed from the scan list the lowest channel in the scan list will become the monitor channel To set monitor the instrument can be in the normal measurement state or enabled while in the advanced scan menu There are two methods to select a monitor channel method 1 selects it while a channel is closed and method 2 selects it with no channels closed NOTE The monitor channel must be a channel that is in the scan list Method 1
560. xamples can be run from the KE2700 Instrument Driver using the example named RateBandwidth in Table H 1 of Appendix H Example 1 The following command sequence sets ACV rate to 5 PLC In order to set rate for an AC function bandwidth must first be set to 300 VOLT AC DET BAND 300 Set ACV bandwidth to 300 VOLT AC NPLC 5 t Set ACV rate to 5 PLC NOTE VOLT AC DET BAND must be set to 300 before the VOLT AC NPLC command can be sent Example 2 The following command sequence configures channels 101 and 103 of the Model 7700 to set integration rate to 6 PLC when they are scanned FUNC VOLT 101 103 Select DCV function VOLT NPLC 6 101 103 Set rate to 6 PLC The digital filter is used to stabilize noisy measurements The displayed stored or trans mitted reading is a windowed average of a number of reading conversions from 1 to 100 The filter setup is remembered and can be unique for each measurement function DCV ACV DCI ACI Q2 Q4 and TEMP When you select a function the instrument will return to the last filter setup for that function NOTE The various instrument operations including Filter are performed on the input signal in a sequential manner See Signal processing sequence page D 2 for details It includes flowcharts showing where in the processing sequence that filtering is performed Filter characteristics In general the digital filter places a specified number of A D c
561. y for the instrument to receive device dependent data over the bus from other devices is provided by the L function Listener capabilities L4 of the instrument exist only after it has been addressed to listen SR Service Request Function SR1 defines the ability of the instrument to request service from the controller RL Remote Local Function RL1 defines the ability of the instrument to be placed in the remote or local modes Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual IEEE 488 Bus Overview G 15 PP Parallel Poll Function The instrument does not have parallel polling capabilities PPO DC Device Clear Function DC1 defines the ability of the instrument to be cleared initialized DT Device Trigger Function DTI defines the ability of the Model 2700 to have readings triggered C Controller Function The instrument does not have controller capabilities CO TE Extended Talker Function The instrument does not have extended talker capabilities TEO LE Extended Listener Function The instrument does not have extended listener capabilities LEO E Bus Driver Type The instrument has open collector bus drivers E1 G 16 IEEE 488 Bus Overview Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual H KE2700 Instrument Driver Examples H 2 KE2700 Instrument Driver Examples Model 2700 Multimeter Switch System User s Manual Introduction An IVI style Instrument Driver is
562. y page November 1999 Revision A Document Number 2700 900 01 ccccessesssssesseessesecsseeseesecseeeseeseeenees Revision B Document Number 2700 900 01 cccssescesseessessessesseeseceeeeseeneeeseeaeenee Revision C Document Number 2700 900 01 ccccescsssssesseesseseeeseeseesseseseseeseeenees Revision D Document Number 2700 900 01 ecescsssscesseseeseeeeseeseeeceeseeeeecseeaeeeeeeaeenes Revision E Document Number 2700 900 01 oo eeseseeeseeseeceseeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeaeenee Revision F Document Number 2700 900 01 cecsesessesseteeceseeseeeceeeeeeeeesteeaeenees Revision G Document Number 2700 900 01 eesssseesseseeseeeeseeeeeeceeseeeeeeeaeeaeeneaees All Keithley product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of Keithley Instruments Inc Other brand names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders February 2000 November 2000 November 2001 November 2002 KEUS Safety Precautions The following safety precautions should be observed before using this product and any associated instrumentation Although some instruments and accessories would normally be used with non hazardous voltages there are situations where hazardous conditions may be present This product is intended for use by qualified personnel who recognize shock hazards and are familiar with the safety precautions required to avoid possible injury Read and follow all installation operation and maintena
563. ystem User s Manual Close Open Switching Module Channels 2 29 CARD menu The CARD menu identifies the switching modules installed in the mainframe and is used for the following operations e Configure digital inputs and outputs and analog outputs for switching modules that have one or more of those capabilities i e Models 7706 and 7707 e View the analog input channels that are presently closed Also read digital input and output ports and analog output values for switching modules that have one or more of those capabilities Menu navigation keys Once in the menu structure the manual range keys A and Y and the cursor keys lt and p gt are used to display menu items and options and set parameter values With the desired item option or setting displayed press the ENTER key to select it You can cancel a pending selection and exit the menu structure by pressing the EXIT key Press the SHIFT key and then the CARD key to display the CARD menu The Card menu tree is shown in Figure 2 11 The items and options of the menu are explained as follows NOTE Identifying installed modules If you simply want to identify installed modules or pseudocards select CONFIG or VIEW and use the A or key to check each slot When finished press EXIT CARD CONFIG This menu item is used to configure switching modules The channels of the Model 7700 switching module and other similar type modules do not need to be configured

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

  Owner`s Manual  CyberPower PDU15M8FNET power distribution unit PDU  Afastador Labial em “C”  Lesson 74: Electronics (14-21 minutes) (電子機器)  VCC-XZ600 - Psn  Princess Grill Compact  Ideal Pet RWWXL Installation Guide  Frühjahrsprogramm 2013 - Deutsches Institut für Erwachsenenbildung  Samsung HW-E551 User Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file